Ford 2013 Fusion Hybrid Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2013-Ford-Fusion-Hybrid-Owners-Manual-815488 ford-2013-ford-fusion-hybrid-owners-manual-815488 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 470 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

fordowner.com ford.ca

2013 FUSION HYBRID | FUSION ENERGI Owner’s Manual

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of

continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time

without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a

retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.

Errors and omissions excepted.

Part Number: 20130205211923

Introduction

About This Manual...........................................7

Symbols Glossary.............................................7

Data Recording..................................................9

California Proposition 65..............................11

Perchlorate.........................................................11

Ford Credit..........................................................11

Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................11

Special Notices................................................12

Mobile Communications

Equipment.....................................................12

Export Unique Options..................................12

Child Safety

General Information.......................................13

Child Seat Positioning...................................14

Booster Seats...................................................16

Installing Child Seats.....................................18

Child Safety Locks..........................................23

Safety Belts

Principle of Operation...................................25

Fastening the Safety Belts..........................26

Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................28

Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime.............................................................29

Safety Belt Minder.........................................29

Child Restraint and Safety Belt

Maintenance.................................................31

Personal Safety System™

Personal Safety System™..........................32

Supplementary Restraints

System

Principle of Operation...................................33

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................34

Knee Airbag......................................................35

Front Passenger Sensing System............36

Side Airbags.....................................................38

Side Curtain Airbags.....................................39

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......40

Airbag Disposal................................................41

Keys and Remote Controls

General Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................42

Remote Control..............................................42

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control............................................................47

MyKey™

Principle of Operation..................................48

Creating a MyKey...........................................49

Clearing All MyKeys.......................................49

Checking MyKey System Status..............50

Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems.........................................................50

MyKey Troubleshooting...............................50

Locks

Locking and Unlocking.................................52

Keyless Entry....................................................55

Interior Luggage Compartment

Release..........................................................58

Security

Passive Anti-Theft System........................59

Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................61

Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................62

Audio Control...................................................62

Voice Control...................................................63

Cruise Control..................................................63

Information Display Control.......................63

Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers........................................65

Table of Contents

Autowipers.......................................................65

Windshield Washers.....................................66

Lighting

Lighting Control..............................................67

Autolamps........................................................67

Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................68

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................68

Daytime Running Lamps............................68

Automatic High Beam Control.................69

Front Fog Lamps............................................70

Direction Indicators.......................................70

Interior Lamps.................................................70

Windows and Mirrors

Power Windows..............................................72

Global Opening and Closing......................73

Exterior Mirrors.................................................73

Interior Mirror....................................................74

Sun Visors..........................................................75

Moonroof...........................................................75

Instrument Cluster

Gauges................................................................77

Warning Lamps and Indicators................80

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83

Information Displays

General Information.....................................84

Information Messages.................................96

Climate Control

Automatic Climate Control......................109

Automatic Climate Control.......................110

Automatic Climate Control........................112

Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate..........................................................114

Heated Windows and Mirrors...................115

Cabin Air Filter.................................................115

Remote Start..................................................116

Seats

Sitting in the Correct Position...................117

Head Restraints..............................................117

Manual Seats..................................................119

Power Seats....................................................119

Memory Function.........................................120

Rear Seats........................................................122

Heated Seats..................................................123

Ventilated Seats............................................123

Rear Seat Armrest........................................124

Universal Garage Door

Opener

Universal Garage Door Opener................125

Auxiliary Power Points

Auxiliary Power Points................................129

Storage Compartments

Center Console...............................................131

Overhead Console.........................................131

Starting and Stopping the

Engine

General Information....................................132

Ignition Switch...............................................132

Keyless Starting.............................................132

Starting a Gasoline Engine........................133

Engine Block Heater....................................136

Unique Driving Character-

istics

Hybrid Electric Vehicle................................138

Fuel and Refueling

Safety Precautions......................................144

Fuel Quality....................................................145

Refueling..........................................................145

Table of Contents

Running Out of Fuel....................................149

Fuel Consumption........................................152

Emission Control System..........................153

High Voltage Battery

General Information....................................156

Charging the High Voltage Battery.........157

High Voltage Battery Cut-Off

Switch..........................................................160

Transmission

Automatic Transmission............................162

Hill Start Assist..............................................164

Brakes

General Information....................................166

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................167

Electric Parking Brake.................................167

Traction Control

Principle of Operation.................................170

Using Traction Control................................170

Stability Control

Principle of Operation..................................171

Using Stability Control.................................171

Parking Aids

Parking Aid.......................................................172

Active Park Assist.........................................174

Rear View Camera........................................177

Cruise Control

Principle of Operation..................................181

Using Cruise Control.....................................181

Using Adaptive Cruise Control................182

Driving Aids

Driver Alert......................................................188

Lane Keeping System.................................189

Blind Spot Monitor.......................................192

Steering............................................................196

Collision Warning System..........................197

Load Carrying

Load Limit......................................................200

Towing

Towing a Trailer............................................207

Transporting the Vehicle...........................207

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......207

Driving Hints

Breaking-In....................................................209

Economical Driving.....................................209

Driving Through Water..............................209

Floor Mats.......................................................210

Customer Assistance

Getting the Services You Need................212

In California (U.S. Only)..............................213

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only).......................214

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only)........................214

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada.........................................................215

Ordering Additional Owner's

Literature.....................................................216

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Only)..............................................................216

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada

Only)..............................................................217

Roadside Emergencies

Roadside Assistance...................................218

Hazard Warning Flashers..........................219

Fuel Shutoff....................................................219

Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................219

Collision, Damage or Fire Event..............222

Table of Contents

Fuses

Changing a Fuse...........................................224

Fuse Specification Chart..........................224

Maintenance

General Information...................................234

Opening and Closing the Hood..............234

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L Hybrid.....235

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Hybrid............237

Engine Oil Check...........................................237

Engine Coolant Check...............................238

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check...........................................................242

Brake Fluid Check........................................242

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................242

Fuel Filter........................................................242

Washer Fluid Check....................................243

Changing the 12V Battery.........................243

Checking the Wiper Blades.....................244

Changing the Wiper Blades.....................245

Changing the Engine Air Filter................245

Adjusting the Headlamps........................246

Removing a Headlamp..............................247

Changing a Bulb..........................................248

Bulb Specification Chart............................251

Vehicle Care

General Information...................................253

Cleaning Products.......................................253

Cleaning the Exterior..................................253

Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............254

Waxing.............................................................254

Cleaning the Engine....................................255

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades..........................................................255

Cleaning the Interior...................................255

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens.......................256

Cleaning Leather Seats..............................257

Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................257

Vehicle Storage............................................258

Wheels and Tires

Temporary Mobility Kit..............................260

Tire Care..........................................................266

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........280

Using Snow Chains.....................................284

Technical Specifications...........................285

Capacities and Specific-

ations

Engine Specifications................................286

Motorcraft Parts...........................................287

Vehicle Identification Number...............288

Vehicle Certification Label.......................288

Transmission Code Designation............289

Technical Specifications..........................290

Accessories

Accessories....................................................292

Ford Extended Service Plan

(ESP)

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP).......294

Audio System

General Information...................................297

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC/Satellite

Radio............................................................298

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium

AM/FM/CD................................................300

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony

AM/FM/CD................................................302

Satellite Radio..............................................305

Auxiliary Input Jack.....................................308

USB Port.........................................................309

Media Hub.....................................................309

Table of Contents

SYNC™

General Information....................................310

Using Voice Recognition.............................312

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............314

SYNC™ Applications and Services.......327

Using SYNC™ With Your Media

Player...........................................................334

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................342

MyFord Touch™

General Information...................................348

Settings...........................................................358

Entertainment..............................................368

Phone...............................................................385

Electric Vehicle Information.....................391

Information....................................................402

Climate..............................................................411

Navigation.......................................................414

Appendices

End User License Agreement..................423

Scheduled Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance..........................438

Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We

recommend that you take some time to

get to know your vehicle by reading this

manual. The more that you know about it,

the greater the safety and pleasure you

will get from driving it.

WARNING

Always drive with due care and

attention when using and operating

the controls and features on your

vehicle.

Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout

the range, sometimes even before they are

generally available. It may describe options

not fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this

manual may be used for different models,

so may appear different to your vehicle.

However, the essential information in the

illustrations is always correct.

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

in line with all applicable laws and

regulations.

Note: Pass on this manual when selling

your vehicle. It is an integral part of the

vehicle.

This manual may qualify the location of a

component as left-hand side or right-hand

side. The side is determined when facing

forward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand sideA

Left-hand sideB

Protecting the Environment

You must play your part in protecting the

environment. Correct vehicle usage and

the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning

and lubrication materials are significant

steps toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

These are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Introduction

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleum

based

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten safety belt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

E91392

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartment

release

Jack

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Introduction

Panic alarm

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

Service engine soon

Side airbag

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

E162384

Air conditioning system

DATA RECORDING

Service Data Recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are

capable of collecting and storing

diagnostic information about your vehicle.

This potentially includes information about

the performance or status of various

systems and modules in the vehicle, such

as engine, throttle, steering or brake

systems. In order to properly diagnose and

service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,

Ford of Canada, and service and repair

facilities may access or share among them

vehicle diagnostic information received

through a direct connection to your vehicle

when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.

Additionally, when your vehicle is in for

service or repair, Ford Motor Company,

Ford of Canada, and service and repair

facilities may access or share among them

data for vehicle improvement purposes.

For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose

to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,

you consent that certain diagnostic

information may also be accessed

electronically by Ford Motor Company and

Ford authorized service facilities, and that

the diagnostic information may be used

for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 310).

Event Data Recording

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder. The main purpose of an

event data recorder is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an airbag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle;

this data will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The event data recorder is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics

and safety systems for a short period

of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The event data recorder in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

•Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

the brake pedal; and

Introduction

•How fast the vehicle was travelling;

and

•Where the driver was positioning

the steering wheel.

This data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

Note: Event data recorder data is

recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data

is recorded by the event data recorder

under normal driving conditions and no

personal data or information (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) is

recorded (see limitations regarding 911

Assist and Traffic, directions and

Information privacy below). However,

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the event data recorder data

with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an event data

recorder, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the event

data recorder is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other

parties, such as law enforcement, that

have such special equipment, can read

the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the event data recorder.

Ford Motor Company and Ford of

Canada do not access event data

recorder information without obtaining

consent, unless pursuant to court order

or where required by law enforcement,

other government authorities or other

third parties acting with lawful

authority. Other parties may seek to

access the information independently

of Ford Motor Company and Ford of

Canada.

Note: Including to the extent that any

law pertaining to Event Data Recorders

applies to SYNC or its features, please

note the following: Once 911 Assist (if

equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist

may, through any paired and connected

cell phone, disclose to emergency

services that the vehicle has been in a

crash involving the deployment of an

airbag or, in certain vehicles, the

activation of the fuel pump shut-off.

Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist

may also be capable of being used to

electronically or verbally provide to 911

operators the vehicle location (such as

latitude and longitude), and/or other

details about the vehicle or crash or

personal information about the

occupants to assist 911 operators to

provide the most appropriate emergency

services. If you do not want to disclose

this information, do not activate the 911

Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 310).

Additionally, when you connect to

Traffic, Directions and Information (if

equipped, U.S. only), the service uses

GPS technology and advanced vehicle

sensors to collect the vehicle’s current

location, travel direction, and speed

(“vehicle travel information”), only to

help provide you with the directions,

traffic reports, or business searches

that you request. If you do not want

Ford or its vendors to receive this

information, do not activate the

service. Ford Motor Company and the

vendors it uses to provide you with this

information do not store your vehicle

travel information. For more

information, see Traffic, Directions and

Information, Terms and Conditions.

See SYNC™ (page 310).

Introduction

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Some constituents of engine

exhaust, certain vehicle components,

certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

PERCHLORATE

Certain components in your vehicle such

as airbag modules, safety belt

pretensioners and remote control batteries

may contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. For more information

visit:

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate

FORD CREDIT

(U.S. Only)

Ford Credit offers a full range of financing

and lease plans to help you acquire your

vehicle. If you have financed or leased your

vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for

your business.

For your convenience we offer a number

of ways to contact us, as well as help

manage your account.

Phone: 1-800-727-7000

For more information regarding Ford Credit,

as well as access Account Manager, please

go to www.fordcredit.com.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

RECOMMENDATION

Your vehicle has been built to the highest

standards using quality parts. We

recommend that you demand the use of

genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts

whenever your vehicle requires scheduled

maintenance or repair. You can clearly

identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts

by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or

Motorcraft branding on the parts or their

packaging.

Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs

One of the best ways for you to make sure

that your vehicle provides years of service

is to have it maintained in line with our

recommendations using parts that

conform to the specifications detailed in

this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and

Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these

specifications.

Collision Repairs

We hope that you never experience a

collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine

Ford replacement collision parts meet our

stringent requirements for fit, finish,

structural integrity, corrosion protection

and dent resistance. During vehicle

development we validate these parts

deliver the intended level of protection as

a whole system. A great way to know for

sure you are getting this level of protection

is to use genuine Ford replacement

collision parts.

Introduction

Warranty on Replacement Parts

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement

parts are the only replacement parts that

benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage

caused to your vehicle as a result of the

failure of non-Ford parts may not be

covered by the Ford Warranty. For

additional information, refer to the terms

and conditions of the Ford Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICES

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

For a detailed description of what is

covered and what is not covered by your

vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,

refer to the Warranty Manual that is

provided to you along with your Owner’s

Manual.

Special Instructions

For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted

with sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNINGS

Failure to follow the specific

warnings and instructions could

result in personal injury. See

Supplementary Restraints System

(page 33).

Front seat mounted rear-facing child

or infant seats should NEVER be

placed in front of an active

passenger airbag.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

EQUIPMENT

Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the

conduct of business and personal affairs.

However, you must not compromise your

own or others’ safety when using such

equipment. Mobile communications can

enhance personal safety and security when

appropriately used, particularly in

emergency situations. Safety must be

paramount when using mobile

communications equipment to avoid

negating these benefits. Mobile

communication equipment includes, but

is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,

portable email devices, text messaging

devices and portable two-way radios.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any hand-held device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

For your particular global region, your

vehicle may be equipped with features and

options that are different from the features

and options that are described in this

Owner’s Manual. A market unique

supplement may be supplied that

complements this book. By referring to the

market unique supplement, if provided,

you can properly identify those features,

recommendations and specifications that

are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and

Canadian Markets. Features or equipment

listed as standard may be different on units

built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s

Manual for all other required

information and warnings.

Introduction

GENERAL INFORMATION

See the following sections for directions

on how to properly use safety restraints

for children.

WARNINGS

Always make sure your child is

secured properly in a device that is

appropriate for their height, age and

weight. Child safety restraints must be

bought separately from your vehicle.

Failure to follow these instructions and

guidelines may result in an increased risk

of serious injury or death to your child.

All children are shaped differently.

The recommendations for safety

restraints are based on probable

child height, age and weight thresholds

from National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and other safety

organizations, or are the minimum

WARNINGS

requirements of law. Ford recommends

checking with a NHTSA Certified Child

Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and

consult your pediatrician to make sure your

child seat is appropriate for your child, and

is compatible with and properly installed

in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting

station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll

free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to

www.nhtsa.gov. In Canada, check with

your local St. John Ambulance office for

referral to a CPST or for further

information, contact your provincial

ministry of transportation, locate your local

St. John Ambulance office by searching for

St. John Ambulance on the internet, or

Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371

(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly

restrain children in safety seats made

especially for their height, age, and weight

may result in an increased risk of serious

injury or death to your child.

Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended restraint

type

Child size, height, weight, or ageChild

Use a child safety seat

(sometimes called an

infant carrier, convertible

seat, or toddler seat).

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less

(generally age four or younger).

Infants or

toddlers

Use a belt-positioning

booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer

properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-

ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.

(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four

and less than age 12, and between 40 lb

(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to

100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your

child restraint manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle safety belt

having the lap belt snug

and low across the hips,

shoulder belt centered

across the shoulder and

chest, and seat back

upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longer

properly fit in a belt-positioning booster

seat (generally children who are at least

4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80

lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-

mended by child restraint manufacturer).

Larger children

• You are required by law to properly use

safety seats for infants and toddlers in

the United States and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require that

small children use approved booster

seats until they reach age eight, a

height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)

tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).

Check your local and state or provincial

laws for specific requirements about

the safety of children in your vehicle.

• When possible, always properly

restrain children 12 years of age and

under in a rear seating position of your

vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating positions

than in a front seating position. See

Front Passenger Sensing System

(page 36).

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGS

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Never place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the vehicle seat

upon which the child seat is installed all

the way back. When possible, all children

age 12 and under should be properly

restrained in a rear seating position. If all

children cannot be seated and restrained

properly in a rear seating position, properly

restrain the largest child in the front seat.

Child Safety

WARNINGS

Always carefully follow the

instructions and warnings provided

by the manufacturer of any child

restraint to determine if the restraint device

is appropriate for your child's size, height,

weight, or age. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer's instructions and warnings

provided for installation and use in

conjunction with the instructions and

warnings provided by your vehicle

manufacturer. A safety seat that is

improperly installed or utilized, is

inappropriate for your child's height, age,

or weight or does not properly fit the child

may increase the risk of serious injury or

death.

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap while your vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a crash,

which may result in serious injury or death.

WARNINGS

Never use pillows, books, or towels

to boost a child. They can slide

around and increase the likelihood

of injury or death in a crash.

Always restrain an unoccupied child

seat or booster seat. These objects

may become projectiles in a crash or

sudden stop, which may increase the risk

of serious injury.

Never place, or allow a child to place,

the shoulder belt under a child's arm

or behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper part

of the body and may increase the risk of

injury or death in a crash.

To avoid risk of injury, do not leave

children or pets unattended in your

vehicle.

Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombined

child and

seat

weight

Restraint

Type Safety belt

only

Safety belt

and LATCH

(lower

anchors

and top

tether

anchor)

Safety belt

and top

tether

anchor

LATCH

(lower

anchors

only)

LATCH

(lower

anchors

and top

tether

anchor)

XXUp to 65 lb

(29 kg)

Rear facing

child seat

XOver 65 lb

(29 kg)

Rear facing

child seat

XXXUp to 65 lb

(29 kg)

Forward

facing

child seat

XXOver 65 lb

(29 kg)

Forward

facing

child seat

Child Safety

Note: The child seat must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is

installed. It may be necessary to lift or

remove the head restraint. See Seats (page

117).

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

Never place, or allow a child to place,

the shoulder belt under a child's arm

or behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper part

of the body and may increase the risk of

injury or death in a crash.

Use a belt-positioning booster seat for

children who have outgrown or no longer

properly fit in a child safety seat (generally

children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches

(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four

(4) and less than age twelve (12), and

between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and

80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to

100 pounds (45 kilograms) if

recommended by your child restraint

manufacturer). Many state and provincial

laws require that children use approved

booster seats until they reach age eight, a

height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,

or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).

Booster seats should be used until you can

answer YES to ALL of these questions

when seated without a booster seat:

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way back

against their vehicle seat back with

knees bent comfortably at the edge of

the seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the

shoulder and chest?

• Can the child stay seated like this for

the whole trip?

Always use booster seats in conjunction

with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seats

Child Safety

If your backless booster seat has a

removable shield, remove the shield. If a

vehicle seating position has a low seat

back or no head restraint, a backless

booster seat may place your child's head

(as measured at the tops of the ears)

above the top of the seat. In this case,

move the backless booster to another

seating position with a higher seat back or

head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,

or consider using a high back booster seat.

E70710

• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot

find a seating position that adequately

supports your child's head, a high back

booster seat would be a better choice.

Children and booster seats vary in size and

shape. Choose a booster that keeps the

lap belt low and snug across the hips,

never up across the stomach, and lets you

adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest

and rest snugly near the center of the

shoulder. The following drawings compare

the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt

uncomfortably close to the neck and a

shoulder belt that could slip off the

shoulder. The drawings also show how the

lap belt should be low and snug across the

child's hips.

E142596

Child Safety

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat upon which it is being used, placing a

rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet

liner under the booster seat may improve

this condition. Do not introduce any item

thicker than this under the booster seat.

Check with the booster seat

manufacturer's instructions.

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS

Child Seats

E142594

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called

an infant carrier, convertible seat, or

toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or

children weighing 40 pounds (18

kilograms) or less (generally age four or

younger).

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts

WARNINGS

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Never place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Children 12 and under

should be properly restrained in the

rear seat whenever possible.

Depending on where you secure a

child restraint, and depending on the

child restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckle

assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,

rendering those features potentially

unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants

should only use seating positions where

they are able to be properly restrained.

When installing a child safety seat with

combination lap and shoulder belts:

• Use the correct safety belt buckle for

that seating position.

• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel it

latch. Make sure the tongue is securely

fastened in the buckle.

Child Safety

• Keep the buckle release button

pointing up and away from the safety

seat, with the tongue between the child

seat and the release button, to prevent

accidental unbuckling.

• Place the vehicle seat upon which the

child seat will be installed in the upright

position.

• Put the safety belt in the automatic

locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle

does not require the use of a locking

clip.

Perform the following steps when

installing the child seat with combination

lap and shoulder belts:

Note: Although the child seat illustrated is

a forward facing child seat, the steps are

the same for installing a rear facing child

seat.

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder

belt.

E142529

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

then grasp the shoulder belt and lap

belt together.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue

through the child seat according to the

child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

E142531

Child Safety

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the

direction the tongue is coming from)

for that seating position until you hear

a snap and feel the latch engage. Make

sure the tongue is latched securely by

pulling on it.

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the shoulder

portion of the belt and pull downward

until all of the belt is pulled out.

Note: The automatic locking mode is

available on the front passenger and rear

seats. This vehicle does not require the use

of a locking clip.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt will click as it retracts

to indicate it is in the automatic locking

mode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor

to make sure the retractor is in the

automatic locking mode (you should

not be able to pull more belt out). If the

retractor is not locked, unbuckle the

belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142533

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.

Force the seat down with extra weight,

for example, by pressing down or

kneeling on the child restraint while

pulling up on the shoulder belt in order

to force slack from the belt. This is

necessary to remove the remaining

slack that will exist once the extra

weight of the child is added to the child

restraint. It also helps to achieve the

proper snugness of the child seat to

your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean

toward the buckle will additionally help

to remove remaining slack from the

belt.

9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat

is equipped).

E142534

Child Safety

10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and

back to make sure the seat is securely

held in place. To check this, grab the

seat at the belt path and attempt to

move it side to side and forward and

back. There should be no more than

1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement

for proper installation.

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA

Certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to make certain the child

restraint is properly installed. In Canada,

check with your local St. John Ambulance

office for referral to a Certified Passenger

Seat Technician.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren (LATCH)

WARNINGS

Never attach two child safety seats

to the same anchor. In a crash, one

anchor may not be strong enough to

hold two child safety seat attachments

and may break, causing serious injury or

death.

Depending on where you secure a

child restraint, and depending on the

child restraint design, you may block

access to certain safety belt buckle

assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,

rendering those features potentially

unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants

should only use seating positions where

they are able to be properly restrained.

The LATCH system is composed of three

vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors

located where seat back and seat cushion

meet (called the seat bight) and one top

tether anchor located behind that seating

position.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have

two rigid or webbing mounted

attachments that connect to the two lower

anchors at the LATCH equipped seating

positions in your vehicle. This type of

attachment method eliminates the need

to use safety belts to attach the child seat,

however the safety belt can still be used

to attach the child seat. For forward-facing

child seats, the top tether strap must also

be attached to the proper top tether

anchor, if a top tether strap has been

provided with your child seat.

E142535

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for

child seat installation at the seating

positions marked with the child seat

symbol.

E144054

Child Safety

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear

section of the rear seat between the

cushion and seat back below the symbols

as shown. Follow the child seat

manufacturer's instructions to properly

install a child seat with LATCH

attachments. Follow the instructions on

attaching child safety seats with tether

straps.

Attach LATCH lower attachments of the

child seat only to the anchors shown.

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the

Outboard Seating Positions (Center

Seating Use)

Note: The standardized spacing for LATCH

lower anchors is 11 inches (28 centimeters)

center to center. Do not use LATCH lower

anchors for the center seating position

unless the child seat manufacturer's

instructions permit and specify using

anchors spaced at least as far apart as

those in this vehicle.

The lower anchors at the center of the

second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches

(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with

rigid LATCH attachments cannot be

installed at the center seating position.

LATCH compatible child seats (with

attachments on belt webbing) can only be

used at this seating position provided that

the child seat manufacturer's instructions

permit use with the anchor spacing stated.

Do not attach a child seat to any lower

anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached

to that anchor.

Each time you use the safety seat, check

that the seat is properly attached to the

lower anchors and tether anchor, if

applicable. Tug the child seat from side to

side and forward and back where it is

secured to your vehicle. The seat should

move less than one inch when you do this

for a proper installation.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,

the risk of a child being injured in a crash

greatly increases.

Combining Safety Belt and LATCH

Lower Anchors for Attaching Child

Safety Seats

When used in combination, either the

safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors

may be attached first, provided a proper

installation is achieved. Attach the tether

strap afterward, if included with the child

seat.

Using Tether Straps

Many forward-facing child safety

seats include a tether strap

which extends from the back of

the child safety seat and hooks to an

anchoring point called the top tether

anchor. Tether straps are available as an

accessory for many older safety seats.

Contact the manufacturer of your child

seat for information about ordering a

tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether

strap if the tether strap on your safety seat

does not reach the appropriate top tether

anchor in your vehicle.

Once the child safety seat has been

installed using either the safety belt, the

lower anchors of the LATCH system, or

both, you can attach the top tether strap.

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle

are in the following positions (shown from

top view):

Child Safety

E142537

Perform the following steps to install a

child safety seat with tether anchors:

Note: If you install a child seat with rigid

LATCH attachments, do not tighten the

tether strap enough to lift the child seat off

your vehicle seat cushion when the child is

seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug

without lifting the front of the child seat.

Keeping the child seat just touching your

vehicle seat gives the best protection in a

severe crash.

1. Route the child safety seat tether strap

over the back of the seat. For outboard

seating positions, route the tether strap

under the head restraint and between

the head restraint posts. For the center

seating positions, route the tether strap

over the top of the head restraint. If

needed, the head restraints can also

be removed.

E144274

2. Locate the correct anchor for the

selected seating position, then open

the tether anchor cover.

E144275

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as

shown.

4. Tighten the child safety seat tether

strap according to the manufacturer's

instructions. If your child restraint

system is equipped with a tether strap,

and the child restraint manufacturer

recommends its use, Ford also

recommends its use.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

When these locks are set, the rear doors

cannot be opened from the inside.

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the

rear edge of each rear door and must be

set separately for each door.

Child Safety

Left-Hand Side

Turn counterclockwise to lock and

clockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand Side

Turn clockwise to lock and

counterclockwise to unlock.

Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Always drive and ride with your seat

back upright and the lap belt snug

and low across the hips.

To reduce the risk of injury, make

sure children sit where they can be

properly restrained.

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a crash.

All occupants of the vehicle,

including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraint

system is provided. Failure to properly wear

your safety belt could seriously increase

the risk of injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a

vehicle. In a crash, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride

in any area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and safety belts. Be

sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a safety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a safety

belt.

Each seating position in your vehicle

has a specific safety belt assembly

which is made up of one buckle and

one tongue that are designed to be used

as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the

outside shoulder only. Never wear the

shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never

swing the safety belt around your neck over

the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single

belt for more than one person.

WARNINGS

When possible, all children 12 years

old and under should be properly

restrained in a rear seating position.

Failure to follow this could seriously

increase the risk of injury or death.

Safety belts and seats can become

hot in a vehicle that has been closed

up in sunny weather; they could burn

a small child. Check seat covers and

buckles before you place a child anywhere

near them.

Front and rear seat occupants,

including pregnant women, should

wear safety belts for optimum

protection in an accident.

All seating positions in this vehicle have

lap and shoulder safety belts. All

occupants of the vehicle should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when

an airbag supplemental restraint system

is provided.

The safety belt system consists of:

• lap and shoulder safety belts.

• shoulder safety belt with automatic

locking mode, (except driver safety

belt).

• height adjuster at the front outboard

seating positions.

• safety belt pretensioner at the front

outboard seating positions.

• belt tension sensor at the front

outboard passenger seating position.

• Safety belt warning light and chime.

Safety Belts

• Crash sensors and monitoring system

with readiness indicator.

The safety belt pretensioners at the front

seating positions are designed to tighten

the safety belts when activated. In frontal

and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt

pretensioners may be activated alone or,

if the crash is of sufficient severity, together

with the front airbags. The pretensioners

may also activate when a side curtain

airbag is deployed.

FASTENING THE SAFETY

BELTS

The front outboard and rear safety

restraints in the vehicle are combination

lap and shoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the

direction the tongue is coming from)

until you hear a snap and feel it latch.

Make sure the tongue is securely

fastened in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release button

and remove the tongue from the

buckle.

Restraint of Pregnant Women

WARNING

Always ride and drive with your

seatback upright and the safety belt

properly fastened. The lap portion of

the safety belt should fit snug and be

positioned low across the hips. The

shoulder portion of the safety belt should

be positioned across the chest. Pregnant

women should also follow this practice.

See the following figure.

E142590

Safety Belts

Pregnant women should always wear their

safety belt. The lap belt portion of a

combination lap and shoulder belt should

be positioned low across the hips below

the belly and worn as tight as comfort will

allow. The shoulder belt should be

positioned to cross the middle of the

shoulder and the center of the chest.

Safety Belt Locking Modes

WARNINGS

After any vehicle collision, the safety

belt system at all passenger seating

positions must be checked by an

authorized dealer to verify that the

automatic locking retractor feature for

child seats is still functioning properly. In

addition, all safety belts should be checked

for proper function.

BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY

MUST BE REPLACED if the safety

belt assembly automatic locking

retractor feature or any other safety belt

function is not operating properly when

checked by an authorized dealer. Failure

to replace the belt and retractor assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

All safety restraints in the vehicle are

combination lap and shoulder belts. The

driver safety belt has the first type of

locking mode, and the front outboard

passenger and rear seat safety belts have

both types of locking modes described as

follows:

Vehicle Sensitive Mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which

allows free shoulder belt length

adjustment to your movements and

locking in response to vehicle movement.

For example, if the driver brakes suddenly

or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle

receives an impact of approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety

belts will lock to help reduce forward

movement of the driver and passengers.

In addition, the retractor is designed to lock

if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If

this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and

pull webbing out again in a slow and

controlled manner.

Automatic Locking Mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt is

automatically pre-locked. The belt will still

retract to remove any slack in the shoulder

belt. The automatic locking mode is not

available on the driver safety belt.

When to Use the Automatic Locking

Mode

This mode should be used any time a child

safety seat, except a booster, is installed

in passenger front or rear seating positions.

Children 12 years old and under should be

properly restrained in a rear seating

position whenever possible. See Child

Safety (page 13).

Safety Belts

How to Use the Automatic Locking

Mode

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap and

shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull

downward until the entire belt is pulled

out.

Allow the belt to retract. As the belt

retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This

indicates the safety belt is now in the

automatic locking mode.

How to Disengage the Automatic

Locking Mode

Disconnect the combination lap and

shoulder belt and allow it to retract

completely to disengage the automatic

locking mode and activate the vehicle

sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Safety Belt Extension Assembly

WARNING

Do not use extensions to change the

fit of the shoulder belt across the

torso.

If the safety belt is too short when fully

extended, a safety belt extension assembly

can be obtained from an authorized dealer.

Use only extensions manufactured by the

same supplier as the safety belt.

Manufacturer identification is located at

the end of the webbing on the label. Also,

use the safety belt extension only if the

safety belt is too short for you when fully

extended.

SAFETY BELT HEIGHT

ADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Position the safety belt height

adjuster so that the belt rests across

the middle of your shoulder. Failure

to adjust the safety belt properly could

reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt

and increase the risk of injury in a crash.

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so

the belt rests across the middle of your

shoulder.

E145664

To adjust the shoulder belt height:

1. Pull the button and slide the height

adjuster up or down.

2. Release the button and pull down on

the height adjuster to make sure it is

locked in place.

Safety Belts

SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP

AND INDICATOR CHIME

This lamp illuminates and an

audible warning will sound if the

driver's safety belt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition is

turned on.

Conditions of operation

Then...If...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-

2 minutes and the warning chime sounds

4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is not buckled

before the ignition switch is turned to the

on position...

The safety belt warning light and warning

chime turn off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled while the

indicator light is illuminated and the

warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and indicator

chime remain off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled before

the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-

tion...

SAFETY BELT MINDER

Belt-Minder®

This feature supplements the safety belt

warning function by providing additional

reminders by intermittently sounding a

chime and illuminating the safety belt

warning light when the driver's or front

passenger's seat is occupied and the

safety belt is unbuckled.

The system uses information from the

front passenger sensing system to

determine if a front seat passenger is

present and therefore potentially in need

of a warning. To avoid activating the

Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in

the front passenger seat, warnings will only

be given to front seat occupants as

determined by the front passenger sensing

system.

If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired

(warnings for about five minutes) for one

occupant (driver or front passenger), the

other occupant can still activate the

Belt-Minder feature.

Safety Belts

Then...If...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.The driver's and front passenger's safety

belts are buckled before the ignition switch

is turned to the on position or less than 1-2

minutes have elapsed since the ignition

switch has been turned to on...

The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the

safety belt warning light illuminates and

the warning chime sounds for six seconds

every 25 seconds, repeating for about five

minutes or until the safety belts are

buckled.

The driver's or front passenger's safety belt

is not buckled when the vehicle has reached

at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes

have elapsed since the ignition switch has

been turned to on...

The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the

safety belt warning light illuminates and

the warning chime sounds for six seconds

every 25 seconds, repeating for about five

minutes or until the safety belts are

buckled.

The driver's or front passenger's safety belt

becomes unbuckled for about one minute

while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph

(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes have

elapsed since the ignition switch has been

turned to on...

Deactivating and Activating the

Belt-Minder Feature

WARNING

While the system allows you to

deactivate it, this system is designed

to improve your chances of being

safely belted and surviving an accident.

We recommend you leave the system

activated for yourself and others who may

use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury,

do not deactivate or activate the system

while driving the vehicle.

Note: The driver and front passenger

warning are deactivated and activated

independently. When deactivating or

activating one seating position, do not

buckle the other position as this will

terminate the process.

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before

proceeding with the programming

procedure.

The system can be deactivated or

activated by performing the following

procedure:

Before following the procedure, make sure

that:

• the parking brake is set

• the transmission selector lever is in

position P (automatic transmission)

or N (manual transmission)

• the ignition is off

• the driver and front passenger safety

belts are unbuckled.

1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the

engine.

2. Wait until the safety belt warning light

turns off (about one minute). After

Step 2, wait an additional five seconds

before proceeding with Step 3. Once

Step 3 is started, the procedure must

be completed within 30 seconds.

Safety Belts

3. For the seating position being disabled,

buckle then unbuckle the safety belt

three times at a moderate speed,

ending in the unbuckled state. After

Step 3, the safety belt warning light will

turn on.

4. While the safety belt warning light is

on, buckle and then unbuckle the

safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt

warning light will flash for confirmation.

• This will disable the feature for that

seating position if it is currently

enabled.

• This will enable the feature for that

seating position if it is currently

disabled.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND

SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE

Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child

safety seat systems periodically to make

sure they work properly and are not

damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child

seat safety belts to make sure there are no

nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.

All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including

retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle

assemblies, buckle support assemblies

(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt

height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder

belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child

safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and

attaching hardware, should be inspected

after a crash. Read the child restraint

manufacturer's instructions for additional

inspection and maintenance information

specific to the child restraint.

Ford Motor Company recommends that

all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles

involved in a crash be replaced. However,

if the crash was minor and an authorized

dealer finds that the belts do not show

damage and continue to operate properly,

they do not need to be replaced. Safety

belt assemblies not in use during a crash

should also be inspected and replaced if

either damage or improper operation is

noted.

Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle

Care (page 253).

Safety Belts

The Personal Safety System provides an

improved overall level of frontal crash

protection to front seat occupants and is

designed to help further reduce the risk of

airbag-related injuries. The system is able

to analyze different occupant conditions

and crash severity before activating the

appropriate safety devices to help better

protect a range of occupants in a variety

of frontal crash situations.

Your vehicle's Personal Safety System

consists of:

• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.

• Front outboard safety belts with

pretensioners, energy management

retractors (first row only), and safety

belt usage sensors.

• Driver’s seat position sensor.

• Front passenger sensing system.

• Passenger airbag off and on indicator

lamp.

• Front crash severity sensors.

• Restraints control module with impact

and safing sensors.

• Restraint system warning light and

backup tone.

• The electrical wiring for the airbags,

crash sensor(s), safety belt

pretensioners, front safety belt usage

sensors, driver seat position sensor,

front passenger sensing system, and

indicator lights.

How Does the Personal Safety

System Work?

The Personal Safety System can adapt the

deployment strategy of your vehicle’s

safety devices according to crash severity

and occupant conditions. A collection of

crash and occupant sensors provides

information to the restraints control

module. During a crash, the restraints

control module may activate the safety

belt pretensioners and may activate either

one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints based on crash

severity and occupant conditions.

Personal Safety System™

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Airbags do not inflate slowly or

gently, and the risk of injury from a

deploying airbag is the greatest close

to the trim covering the airbag module.

All occupants of your vehicle,

including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraint

system is provided. Failure to properly wear

your safety belt could seriously increase

the risk of injury or death.

Always transport children 12 years

old and under in the back seat and

always properly use appropriate

child restraints. Failure to follow this could

seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

Never place your arm over the airbag

module as a deploying airbag can

result in serious arm fractures or

other injuries.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Never place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or

modify the airbag supplemental

restraint systems or its fuses as you

could be seriously injured or killed. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Several airbag system components

get hot after inflation. To reduce the

risk of injury, do not touch them after

inflation.

If the airbag has deployed, the airbag

will not function again and must be

replaced immediately. If the airbag

is not replaced, the unrepaired area will

increase the risk of injury in a crash.

The airbags are a supplemental restraint

system and are designed to work with the

safety belts to help protect the driver and

right front passenger from certain upper

body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;

there is a risk of injury from a deploying

airbag.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a

cloud of harmless powdery residue if an

airbag deploys. This is normal.

The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly

upon activation. After airbag deployment,

it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery

residue or smell the burnt propellant. This

may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder

(to lubricate the bag) or sodium

compounds (for example, baking soda)

that result from the combustion process

that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of

sodium hydroxide may be present which

may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of

the residue is toxic.

While the system is designed to help

reduce serious injuries, contact with a

deploying airbag may also cause abrasions

or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also

a possibility as a result of the noise

associated with a deploying airbag.

Because airbags must inflate rapidly and

with considerable force, there is the risk of

death or serious injuries such as fractures,

facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,

particularly to occupants who are not

properly restrained or are otherwise out of

position at the time of airbag deployment.

Thus, it is extremely important that

occupants be properly restrained as far

away from the airbag module as possible

while maintaining vehicle control.

Routine maintenance of the airbags is not

required.

Supplementary Restraints System

SOS POST-CRASH ALERT

SYSTEM

The system flashes the turn signal lamps

and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the

event of a serious impact that deploys an

airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety

Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.

The horn and lamps will turn off when:

• the hazard control button is pressed

• the panic button (if equipped) is

pressed on the remote entry

transmitter, or

• your vehicle runs out of power.

Spin out Detection

If a spinout is detected, the vehicle comes

to a stop, and the hazard warning flashers

come on, the message Spinout Detected

Hazards Activated will appear on the

instrument cluster. The message may not

appear if your vehicle runs out of power.

Once the hazard warning flashers have

been activated, you can turn them off by:

• pressing the hazard warning flasher

button.

• pressing the remote control unlock

button.

• pressing the remote control panic

button.

• cycling the ignition on and off twice.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER

AIRBAGS

WARNINGS

Never place your arm or any objects

over an airbag module. Placing your

arm over a deploying airbag can

result in serious arm fractures or other

injuries. Objects placed on or over the

airbag inflation area may cause those

objects to be propelled by the airbag into

your face and torso causing serious injury.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Never place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags will

deploy during significant frontal and near

frontal crashes.

The driver and passenger front airbag

system consists of:

• driver and passenger airbag modules.

• front passenger sensing system.

· crash sensors and monitoring

system with readiness indicator.

See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 40).

Supplementary Restraints System

Proper Driver and Front Passenger

Seating Adjustment

WARNING

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance

of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)

between an occupant’s chest and the

driver airbag module.

To properly position yourself away from

the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedals

comfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or two

degrees) from the upright position.

After all occupants have adjusted their

seats and put on safety belts, it is very

important that they continue to sit

properly. A properly seated occupant sits

upright, leaning against the seat back, and

centered on the seat cushion, with their

feet comfortably extended on the floor.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance

of injury in a crash event. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns

sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the

chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

Children and Airbags

WARNING

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a

child seat. Never place a rear-facing

child seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seat

in the front seat, move the seat all the way

back.

E142846

Children must always be properly

restrained. Accident statistics suggest that

children are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seating positions than in the

front seating position. Failure to follow

these instructions may increase the risk of

injury in a crash.

KNEE AIRBAG

A driver’s and passenger’s knee airbag is

located under or within the instrument

panel. During a crash, the restraints control

module may activate the driver’s and

passenger’s knee airbag (individually or

both) based on crash severity and

respective occupant conditions. Under

certain crash and occupant conditions, the

driver’s and passenger’s knee airbag may

deploy (individually or both) but the

corresponding front airbag may not

activate. As with front and side airbags, it

is important to be properly seated and

restrained to reduce the risk of death or

serious injury.

Make sure the knee airbags are

operating properly. See Crash

Sensors and Airbag Indicator

(page 40).

Supplementary Restraints System

FRONT PASSENGER SENSING

SYSTEM

WARNINGS

Even with Advanced Restraints

Systems, children 12 and under

should be properly restrained in a

rear seating position. Failure to follow this

could seriously increase the risk of injury or

death.

Sitting improperly out of position or

with the seat back reclined too far

can take off weight from the seat

cushion and affect the decision of the front

passenger sensing system, resulting in

serious injury or death in a crash.

To reduce the risk of possible serious

injury: Do not stow objects in seat

back map pocket or hang objects off

seat back if a child is in the front passenger

seat. Do not place objects underneath the

front passenger seat or between the seat

and the center console. Check the

passenger airbag off or pass airbag off

indicator lamp for proper airbag status.

Failure to follow these instructions may

interfere with the front passenger seat

sensing system.

Any alteration or modification to the

front passenger seat may affect the

performance of the front passenger

sensing system.

This system works with sensors that are

part of the front passenger’s seat and

safety belt to detect the presence of a

properly-seated occupant and determine

if the front passenger’s frontal airbag

should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

E157152

The front passenger sensing system uses

a pass airbag off indicator which will

illuminate and stay lit to remind you that

the front passenger frontal airbag is

disabled. The indicator lamp is located at

the top center of the instrument panel.

Note: When the ignition is first tuned on,

the indicator lamp will illuminate for a short

period of time to confirm it is functional.

The front passenger sensing system is

designed to disable (will not inflate) the

front passenger's frontal airbag when a

rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing

child restraint, or a booster seat is

detected. Even with this technology,

parents are STRONGLY encouraged to

always properly restrain children in the rear

seat. The sensor also turns off the

passenger front airbag and seat-mounted

side airbag when the passenger seat is

empty.

• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) the

front passenger frontal airbag, the

indicator lamp will illuminate and stay

lit to remind you that the front

passenger frontal airbag is disabled.

• If the child restraint has been installed

and the indicator lamp is not lit, then

turn the vehicle off, remove the child

restraint from the vehicle and reinstall

the restraint following the child

restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Supplementary Restraints System

The front passenger sensing system is

designed to enable (may inflate) the front

passenger's frontal airbag anytime the

system senses that a person of adult size

is sitting properly in the front passenger

seat.

• When the front passenger sensing

system enables the front passenger

frontal airbag (may inflate), the

indicator lamp will be unlit and stay

unlit.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front

passenger’s seat, but the airbag off

indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the

person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If

this happens:

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person

to place the seat back in the full upright

position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,

centered on the seat cushion, with the

person’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the person

remain in this position for about two

minutes. This will allow the system to

detect that person and enable the

passenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the indicator lamp remains lit even

after this, the person should be advised

to ride in the rear seat.

Passenger airbagPassenger airbag OFF indic-

ator

Occupant

DisabledUnlitEmpty

DisabledLitChild

EnabledUnlitAdult

Note: When the passenger airbag off light

is illuminated, the passenger (seat

mounted) side airbag may be disabled to

avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.

After all occupants have adjusted their

seats and put on safety belts, it is very

important that they continue to sit

properly. A properly seated occupant sits

upright, leaning against the seat back, and

centered on the seat cushion, with their

feet comfortably extended on the floor.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance

of injury in a crash event. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns

sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the

chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

If you think that the status of the passenger

airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check

for the following:

• Objects lodged underneath the seat

• Objects between the seat cushion and

the center console

• Objects hanging off the seat back

• Objects stowed in the seat back map

pocket

• Objects placed on the occupant's lap

Supplementary Restraints System

• Cargo interference with the seat

• Other passengers pushing or pulling on

the seat

• Rear passenger feet and knees resting

or pushing on the seat

The conditions listed above may cause the

weight of a properly seated occupant to

be incorrectly interpreted by the front

passenger sensing system. The person in

the front passenger seat may appear

heavier or lighter due to the conditions

described in the list above.

Make sure the front passenger

sensing system is operating

properly. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 40).

If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the

following:

The driver and adult passengers should

check for objects lodged underneath the

front passenger seat, or cargo interfering

with the seat.

If there are lodged objects, or cargo is

interfering with the seat, take the following

steps to remove the obstruction:

• Pull the vehicle over.

• Turn the vehicle off.

• Driver and adult passengers should

check for any objects lodged

underneath the front passenger seat

or cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).

• Restart the vehicle.

• Wait at least two minutes and verify

that the airbag readiness light is no

longer illuminated.

• If the airbag readiness light remains

illuminated, this may or may not be a

problem due to the front passenger

sensing system.

Do not attempt to repair or service the

system. Take your vehicle immediately to

an authorized dealer.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced

front airbag system to accommodate a

person with disabilities, contact the Ford

Customer Relationship Center. See

Getting the Services You Need (page

212).

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNINGS

Do not place objects or mount

equipment on or near the airbag

cover, on the side of the seat backs

(of the front seats), or in front seat areas

that may come into contact with a

deploying airbag. Failure to follow these

instructions may increase the risk of

personal injury in the event of a crash.

Do not use accessory seat covers.

The use of accessory seat covers

may prevent the deployment of the

side airbags and increase the risk of injury

in an accident.

Do not lean your head on the door.

The side airbag could injure you as it

deploys from the side of the seat

back.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or

modify the airbag, its fuses or the

seat cover on a seat containing an

airbag as you could be seriously injured or

killed. Contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

If the side airbag has deployed, the

airbag will not function again. The

side airbag system (including the

seat) must be inspected and serviced by

an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not

replaced, the unrepaired area will increase

the risk of injury in a crash.

Supplementary Restraints System

The side airbags are located on the

outboard side of the seat backs of the front

seats. In certain lateral crashes, the airbag

on the side affected by the crash will be

inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate

between the door panel and occupant to

further enhance the protection provided

occupants in side impact crashes.

E152533

The system consists of the following:

• A label or embossed side panel

indicating that side airbags are fitted

to your vehicle

• Side airbags located inside the driver

and front passenger seat backs

• Front passenger sensing system

·Crash sensors and monitoring

system with readiness indicator.

See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 40).

Note: The passenger sensing system will

deactivate the passenger seat-mounted

side airbag if it detects an empty passenger

seat.

The design and development of the side

airbag system included recommended

testing procedures that were developed

by a group of automotive safety experts

known as the Side Airbag Technical

Working Group. These recommended

testing procedures help reduce the risk of

injuries related to the deployment of side

airbags.

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS

WARNINGS

Do not place objects or mount

equipment on or near the headliner

at the siderail that may come into

contact with a deploying side curtain

airbag. Failure to follow these instructions

may increase the risk of personal injury in

the event of a crash.

Do not lean your head on the door.

The side curtain airbag could injure

you as it deploys from the headliner.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or

modify the side curtain airbags, its

fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the

headliner on a vehicle containing side

curtain airbags. Contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

All occupants of the vehicle including

the driver should always wear their

safety belts even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system and side

curtain airbag is provided.

To reduce risk of injury, do not

obstruct or place objects in the

deployment path of the side curtain

airbag.

If the side curtain airbags have

deployed, the side curtain airbags

will not function again. The side

curtain airbags (including the A, B and C

pillar trim and headliner) must be

inspected and serviced by an authorized

dealer. If the side curtain airbag is not

replaced, the unrepaired area will increase

the risk of injury in a crash.

Supplementary Restraints System

The side curtain airbags will deploy during

significant side crashes. The side curtain

airbags are mounted to the roof side-rail

sheet metal, behind the headliner, above

each row of seats. The side curtain airbags

are designed to inflate between the side

window area and occupants to further

enhance protection provided in side impact

crashes.

The system consists of the following:

E75004

• Side curtain airbags located above the

trim panels over the front and rear side

windows identified by a label or

wording on the headliner or roof-pillar

trim.

• A flexible headliner which opens above

the side doors to allow side air curtain

deployment.

Crash sensors and monitoring

system with readiness indicator.

See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 40).

Children 12 years old and under should

always be properly restrained in the back

seats. The side curtain airbags will not

interfere with children restrained using a

properly installed child or booster seat

because it is designed to inflate downward

from the headliner above the doors along

the side window opening.

The design and development of the side

curtain airbags included recommended

testing procedures that were developed

by a group of automotive safety experts

known as the Side Airbag Technical

Working Group. These recommended

testing procedures help reduce the risk of

injuries related to the deployment of side

curtain airbags.

CRASH SENSORS AND

AIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNING

Modifying or adding equipment to

the front end of the vehicle (including

frame, bumper, front end body

structure and tow hooks) may affect the

performance of the airbag system,

increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify

the front end of the vehicle.

The vehicle has a collection of crash and

occupant sensors which provide

information to the restraints control

module which deploys (activates) the

front safety belt pretensioners, driver

airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s),

seat mounted side airbags, and the side

curtain airbags. Based on the type of crash

(frontal impact or side impact), the

restraints control module will deploy the

appropriate safety devices.

The restraints control module also

monitors the readiness of the above safety

devices plus the crash and occupant

sensors. The readiness of the safety

system is indicated by a warning indicator

light in the instrument cluster or by a

backup tone if the warning light is not

working. Routine maintenance of the

airbag is not required.

A difficulty with the system is indicated by

one or more of the following:

Supplementary Restraints System

The readiness light will not

illuminate immediately after the

ignition is turned on.

• The readiness light will either flash or

stay lit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The

tone pattern will repeat periodically

until the problem, the light or both are

repaired.

If any of these things happen, even

intermittently, have the supplemental

restraint system serviced at an authorized

dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the

system may not function properly in the

event of a crash.

The safety belt pretensioners and the front

airbag supplemental restraint system are

designed to activate when the vehicle

sustains longitudinal deceleration

sufficient to cause the restraints control

module to deploy a safety device.

The fact that the safety belt pretensioners

or front airbags did not activate for both

front seat occupants in a crash does not

mean that something is wrong with the

system. Rather, it means the restraints

control module determined the accident

conditions (crash severity, belt usage)

were not appropriate to activate these

safety devices.

• The design of the front airbags is to

activate only in frontal and near-frontal

crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or

rear impacts) unless the crash causes

sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

• The design of the safety belt

pretensioners is to activate in frontal

and near-frontal crashes, and may also

activate when a side curtain deploys.

• The knee airbag may deploy based on

crash severity and occupant conditions.

• The design of the side airbags and side

curtain airbags is to inflate in certain

side impact crashes. Side airbags and

side curtain airbags may activate in

other types of crashes if the vehicle

experiences sufficient sideways motion

or deformation.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL

Contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible. Airbags must be disposed of by

qualified personnel.

Supplementary Restraints System

GENERAL INFORMATION ON

RADIO FREQUENCIES

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) This device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressively approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

The term IC before the radio certification

number only signifies that Industry Canada

technical specifications were met.

The typical operating range for your

transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10

meters). Vehicles with the remote start

feature will have a greater range. One of

the following could cause a decrease in

operating range:

• weather conditions

• nearby radio towers

• structures around the vehicle

• other vehicles parked next to your

vehicle

The radio frequency used by your remote

control can also be used by other short

distance radio transmissions, for example

amateur radios, medical equipment,

wireless headphones, remote controls and

alarm systems. If the frequencies are

jammed, you will not be able to use your

remote control. You can lock and unlock

the doors with the key.

Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before

leaving it unattended.

Note: If you are in range, the remote control

will operate if you press any button

unintentionally.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)

The system uses a radio frequency signal

to communicate with your vehicle and

authorize your vehicle to unlock when one

of the following conditions are met:

• You touch the inside of the front

exterior door handle.

• You press the luggage compartment

button.

• You press a button on the transmitter.

If excessive radio frequency interference

is present in the area or if the transmitter

battery is low, you may need to

mechanically unlock your door. You can

use the mechanical key blade in your

intelligent access key to open the driver

door in this situation. See Remote

Control (page 42).

REMOTE CONTROL

Integrated Keyhead Transmitters

(If Equipped)

Use the key blade is used to start the

vehicle and unlock or lock the driver’s door

from outside the vehicle. The transmitter

portion functions as the remote control.

E151797

Press the button to release the key. Press

and hold the button to fold the key back

in when not in use.

Keys and Remote Controls

E151795

Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a

security tag that provides important vehicle

key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe

place for future reference.

Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

E144506

Your intelligent access keys operate the

power locks and the remote start system.

The key must be in your vehicle to activate

the push-button start system.

Removable Key Blade

The intelligent access key also contains a

removable mechanical key blade that you

can use to unlock the driver door.

E151796

Slide the release on the back of the remote

control and pivot the cover off to access

the key blade.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with

a security tag that provides important

vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in

a safe place for future reference.

Using the Key Blade

The key cylinder is hidden under a cap on

the driver door handle.

To remove the cap:

E151956

Keys and Remote Controls

1. Insert the key blade into the slot on the

bottom of the handle and press up.

2. While maintaining upward pressure,

move the cap rearward to release it.

Gently remove the key while doing so.

To install the cap:

E151957

1. Place the cap just forward of the key

cylinder.

2. While applying pressure to the cap,

move it forward until it is in place. You

may hear a snap as it engages.

Make sure the cap is properly installed by

trying to move it rearward.

Replacing the Battery

Note: Refer to local regulations when

disposing of transmitter batteries.

Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the

battery terminals or on the back surface of

the circuit board.

Note: Replacing the battery will not delete

the transmitter from the vehicle. The

transmitter should operate normally.

A message will appear in the information

display when the remote control battery

is low. See Information Messages (page

96).

Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

The remote control uses one coin-type

three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or

equivalent.

Press the button to release the key before

beginning the procedure.

E151798

1. Insert a screwdriver in the position

shown and gently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release the

battery cover.

E151799

3. Carefully remove the cover.

Keys and Remote Controls

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the

screwdriver.

4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to

release the battery.

E151801

5. Remove the battery.

6. Install a new battery with the + facing

up.

7. Replace the battery cover.

Intelligent Access Transmitter

The remote control uses two coin-type

three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or

equivalent.

E151796

1. Slide the release on the back of the

remote control and pivot the cover off.

E153890

2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to

separate the housing.

E153891

3. Remove the batteries.

4. Install new batteries with the + facing

each other.

Note: Make sure to replace the label

between the two batteries.

Keys and Remote Controls

5. Reinstall the housing and cover.

Car Finder

E138623

Press the button twice within

three seconds. The horn will

sound and the turn signals will

flash. It is recommended that this method

be used to locate your vehicle, rather than

using the panic alarm.

Sounding a Panic Alarm

Note: The panic alarm will only operate

when the ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to activate the

alarm. Press the button again or

turn the ignition on to deactivate.

Remote Start (If Equipped)

WARNING

To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use

remote start if your vehicle is parked

indoors or areas that are not well

ventilated.

Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle

is low on fuel.

E138625

The remote start button is on the

transmitter.

This feature allows you to start your

vehicle from outside the vehicle. The

transmitter has an extended operating

range.

Vehicles with automatic climate control

can be configured to operate when the

vehicle is remote started. See Climate

Control (page 109). A manual climate

control system will run at the setting it was

set to when the vehicle was last turned off.

Many states and provinces have

restrictions for the use of remote start.

Check your local and state or provincial

laws for specific requirements regarding

remote start systems.

The remote start system will not work if:

• the ignition is on

• the alarm system triggered

• you disable the feature

• the hood is open

• the transmission is not in P

• the vehicle battery voltage is too low

• the service engine soon light is on.

Remote Control Feedback

An LED on the remote control provides

status feedback of remote start or stop

commands.

StatusLED

Remote start or

extension

successful

Solid green

Remote stop

successful; engine

off

Solid red

Remote start or

stop failed

Blinking red

Waiting for status

update

Blinking green

Remote Starting the Vehicle

Note: Each button press must be done

within three seconds of each other. The

vehicle will not remote start if this sequence

is not followed and the horn will not sound.

Keys and Remote Controls

E138626

The tag with your transmitter details the

starting procedure.

To remote start your vehicle:

1. Press the lock button to lock all the

doors.

2. Press the remote start button twice.

The exterior lamps will flash twice.

The horn will sound if the system fails to

start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start

will run the blower fan at a slower speed

to reduce noise. It can be switched on or

off in the information display. See General

Information (page 84).

Note: If the vehicle has been remote started

and is equipped with an integrated keyhead

transmitter, you must turn the ignition on

before driving the vehicle. If equipped with

an intelligent access transmitter, you must

press the START/STOP button on the

instrument panel once while applying the

brake pedal before driving your vehicle.

The power windows will be inhibited during

the remote start and the radio will not turn

on automatically.

The parking lamps will remain on and the

engine will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,

depending on the setting.

Extending the Vehicle Run Time

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still

running to extend the run time for another

remote start duration. If you programmed

the duration to last 10 minutes, the second

10 minutes will begin after what is left of

the first activation time. For example, if the

vehicle had been running from the first

remote start for five minutes, the vehicle

will continue to run now for a total of 15

minutes.

Wait at least five seconds before remote

starting after a vehicle shutdown.

Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote

Starting

E138625

Press the button once. The

parking lamps will turn off.

You may have to be closer to the

vehicle than when starting due to ground

reflection and the added noise of the

running vehicle.

You can disable or enable the remote start

system through the information display.

See General Information (page 84).

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL

Replacement keys or remote controls can

be purchased from an authorized dealer.

Authorized dealers can program remote

controls for your vehicle. See Passive

Anti-Theft System (page 59).

To re-program the passive anti-theft

system see an authorized dealer.

Keys and Remote Controls

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

MyKey allows you to program keys with

restricted driving modes to promote good

driving habits. Program all but one of the

keys to activate the restricted modes.

Any keys that remain unprogrammed are

referred to as administrator keys or admin

keys. They can be used to:

• create a MyKey

• program optional MyKey settings

• clear all MyKey features.

Once you program a MyKey, you can

access the following information through

the information display to learn:

• The number of admin keys and MyKeys

programmed to your vehicle.

• The total distance your vehicle traveled

with a MyKey.

Note: Switch the ignition on to use the

system.

Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the

same settings. You cannot program them

individually.

Note: In vehicles equipped with the

intelligent access key (push-button start):

When both a MyKey and an admin fob are

present, your vehicle will recognize the

admin fob to start the engine.

Standard Settings

The following settings cannot be changed:

• Belt-Minder. You cannot disable this

feature. With a MyKey, the five-minute

timer does not expire and the audio

system mutes.

• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning

activates earlier, giving MyKey users

more time to refuel.

• Driver assist features, if equipped, are

forced on: Rear parking aid, blind spot

information system (BLIS) with cross

traffic alert, lane keeping system and

collision warning system.

• Satellite radio adult content

restrictions activate.

Optional Settings

You can configure MyKey settings while

programming a MyKey or change them

while using an admin key.

• Vehicle speed limit: You can set various

vehicle speed limits of 65, 70, 75 and

80 mph (105, 113, 121 and 130 km/h) so

that drivers receive visual warnings and

an audible tone when they reach the

selected top speed.

• Vehicle speed minders: You can set

various vehicle speed minders of 45,

55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) so

that drivers receive visual warnings and

an audible tone when they exceed the

preselected vehicle speed limit.

• Audio system maximum volume limit:

You can limit the audio system's

maximum output to 45% and disable

the speed-sensitive compensated

volume feature. The audio system

displays a message when drivers

attempt to exceed the volume limit.

• Always on setting: Certain driving aids

cannot be disabled or turned off when

drivers use a MyKey, such as

AdvanceTrac, 911 Assist or the Do not

disturb feature (if your vehicle is

equipped with these features).

Vehicles with Keyless Entry

If a MyKey and an admin key are present

within the vehicle at the same time, your

vehicle will recognize the admin key only.

MyKey™

CREATING A MYKEY

Use the information display to create a

MyKey:

1. Insert the key you want to program into

the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with

a push-button start, put the intelligent

access key in the backup slot. See

Starting and Stopping the Engine (page

132).

E147165

2. Switch the ignition on.

3. From the main menu within the

information display, press OK or the >

button to navigate through the various

screens. Select Settings, then MyKey.

4. Press OK to select Create.

5. When prompted, hold the OK button

until you see a message informing you to

label this key as a MyKey. The key will be

restricted at the next start.

MyKey is successfully created. Make sure

you label it so you can distinguish it from

the admin keys.

Programming/Changing Optional

Settings

Note: You can clear or change your MyKey

settings at any time during the same key

cycle as you created them with either the

MyKey or an admin key. Once you have

switched the engine off, however, you will

need an admin key to change or clear your

MyKey settings.

Using the information display, access your

optional MyKey settings.

1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key or fob.

2. Access the main menu and select

Settings, then MyKey.

3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an

optional feature.

4. Press OK or > to scroll through

settings.

5. Press OK or > to make a selection.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS

You can clear all MyKeys within the same

key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you

switch your ignition off, however, you will

need to use an admin key to clear your

MyKeys.

Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you

remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys

to their original admin key status at once.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,

use the information display to do the

following:

1. Access the main menu and select

Settings, then MyKey.

2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK

button.

3. Hold the OK button until ALL

MYKEYS CLEARED displays.

MyKey™

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM

STATUS

The information display shows the

programmed keys' status:

•MYKEY DISTANCE: Tracks distance

when drivers use restricted keys. The

only way to delete the accumulated

distance is by using an admin key to

reset this to zero. If the MyKey distance

does not accumulate as expected,

then:

• The intended user is not using the

programmed key.

• An admin key user recently reset

the distance.

•NUMBER OF MYKEY(S): Indicates

the number of restricted keys

programmed to the vehicle. Use this

feature to detect how many restricted

keys you have for your vehicle, or when

a MyKey has recently been deleted.

•NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY(S):

Indicates how many admin keys are

programmed to the vehicle. Use this

feature to determine how many

unrestricted keys you have for your

vehicle, or if an additional MyKey has

been programmed.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE

START SYSTEMS

MyKey is not compatible with non

Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start

systems. If you choose to install a remote

start system, see an authorized dealer for

a Ford-approved remote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential CausesCondition

· The key in the ignition does not have admin

privileges.

I cannot program a key.

· The key in the ignition is the only admin

key (there always has to be at least one

admin key).

· The intelligent access key is not in the

backup slot (vehicles with push-button

start).

· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is

disabled or in unlimited mode.

· The key in the ignition does not have admin

privileges.

I cannot program the optional settings.

· No keys are programmed to the vehicle.

See Creating a MyKey (page 49).

· The key in the ignition does not have admin

privileges.

I cannot clear the restricted keys.

MyKey™

Potential CausesCondition

· No restricted keys are programmed to the

vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 49).

· Purchase a new key from your authorized

dealer.

I lost the only admin key.

· Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-

Theft System (page 59).

I lost a key.

· An admin fob is present at engine start-

up.

No restricted key functions with intelligent

access key (push-button start).

· No MyKey keys are programmed to the

vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 49).

· The intended user is not using the

programmed MyKey.

MyKey miles do not accumulate.

· An admin key holder reset the key system.

MyKey™

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

You can use the power door lock control

or the remote control to lock and unlock

the vehicle.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock control is on the driver

and front passenger door panels.

E138628

UnlockA

LockB

Door Lock Indicator

An LED on each door window trim will light

when you lock the door. It will remain lit for

up to 10 minutes after you switch off the

ignition.

Switch Inhibitor

When you electronically lock your vehicle,

the power door lock switch will no longer

operate after 20 seconds. You must unlock

your vehicle with the remote control or

keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on,

to restore function to these switches. You

can switch this feature on or off in the

information display. See General

Information (page 84).

Rear Door Unlocking and Opening

Pull the interior door release handle twice

to unlock and open the rear door. The first

pull unlocks the door and the second pull

will unlatch the door.

Remote Control

You can use the remote control at any

time. The luggage compartment release

button will only work when the vehicle

speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage

Unlock)

E138629

Press the button to unlock the

driver door.

Press the button again within

three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn

signals will flash.

Press and hold both the lock and unlock

buttons on the remote control for three

seconds to change between driver door or

all doors unlock mode. The turn signals will

flash twice to indicate a change to the

unlocking mode. Driver door unlock mode

will only unlock the driver door when the

unlock button is pressed once. All door

unlock mode will unlock all doors with one

press of the unlock button. The unlocking

mode applies to the remote control,

keyless entry keypad and intelligent

access. You can also change the mode in

the information display. See General

Information (page 84).

Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock all the

doors. The turn signals will

illuminate.

Press the button again within three

seconds to confirm that all the doors are

closed. The doors will lock again, the horn

will sound and the turn signals will

illuminate if all the doors and the luggage

compartment are closed.

Locks

Mislock

If any door or the luggage compartment is

open, or if the hood is open on vehicles

with an anti-theft alarm or remote start,

the horn will sound twice and the lamps

will not flash. You can enable or disable

this feature in the information display. See

General Information (page 84).

Opening the Luggage Compartment

E138630

Press twice within three seconds

to open the luggage

compartment.

Make sure to close and latch the luggage

compartment before driving your vehicle.

An unlatched luggage compartment may

cause objects to fall out or block your view.

Activating Intelligent Access (If

Equipped)

You must have the intelligent access key

within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle.

At a Door

Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and

open the door. Make sure not to touch the

lock sensor on top of the handle.

E157085

Touch the top of the door handle to lock

your vehicle.

At the Luggage Compartment

E144402

Press the exterior release button hidden

above the license plate.

Smart Unlocks For Integrated

Keyhead Transmitter

This feature helps to prevent you from

locking yourself out of your vehicle if your

key is still in the ignition.

When you open one of the front doors and

lock the vehicle with the power door lock

control, all the doors will lock then unlock

and the horn will sound twice if your key is

still in the ignition.

You can still lock your vehicle with the key

in the ignition. To do this, use the keyless

entry keypad with the driver door closed,

or press the lock button on the transmitter

even if the doors are not closed.

If both front doors are closed, you can lock

your vehicle by any method, regardless of

whether the key is in the ignition or not.

Smart Unlocks For Intelligent

Access Keys (If Equipped)

This feature helps to prevent you from

unintentionally locking your intelligent

access key inside your vehicle’s passenger

compartment or rear cargo area.

Locks

When you electronically lock your vehicle

(with any door open, vehicle in park and

ignition off), the vehicle will search for an

intelligent access key in the passenger

compartment after you close the last door.

If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors

will immediately unlock and the horn will

sound twice, indicating that a key is inside.

You can override the smart unlock feature

and intentionally lock the intelligent access

key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your

vehicle after you have closed all the doors

by:

• using the keyless entry keypad

• pressing the lock button on another

intelligent access key

• touching the locking area on the handle

with another intelligent access key in

your hand.

When you open one of the front doors and

lock your vehicle using the power door lock

control, all doors will lock then unlock if:

• the ignition is on, or

• the ignition is off and your vehicle is not

in P.

Auto Relock

If you press the unlock button on the

remote control and do not open a door

within 45 seconds, your vehicle will lock

and the alarm will arm. You can enable or

disable this feature in the information

display. See General Information (page

84).

Autolock Feature

The autolock feature will lock all the doors

when:

• all doors are closed,

• the ignition is on,

• you shift into any gear putting your

vehicle in motion, and

• your vehicle attains a speed greater

than 12 mph (20 km/h).

The autolock feature repeats when:

• you open then close any door while the

ignition is on and your vehicle speed is

9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and

• your vehicle then attains a speed

greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Autounlock Feature

The autounlock feature will unlock all the

doors when:

• the ignition is on, all the doors are

closed, and your vehicle has been in

motion at a speed greater than 12 mph

(20 km/h);

• your vehicle comes to a stop and you

switch the ignition off or to accessory;

and

• you open the driver door within 10

minutes of the switching the ignition

off or to accessory.

Note: The doors will not autounlock if you

electronically lock your vehicle after you

switch the ignition off and before you open

the driver door.

Enabling or Disabling

Note: You can enable or disable the

autolock and autounlock features

independently of each other.

You can enable or disable these features

in the information display or your

authorized dealer can do it for you. See

General Information (page 84).

Illuminated Entry

The interior lamps and select exterior

lamps will illuminate when you unlock the

doors with the remote entry system.

Locks

The illuminated entry system will turn off

the lights if:

• the ignition is on,

• you press the remote control lock

button, or

• after 25 seconds of illumination.

The lights will not turn off if:

• you turn them on with the lamp control,

• any door is open.

Illuminated Exit

The interior lamps and select exterior

lamps will illuminate when all doors are

closed, you switch the ignition off and you

remove the key from the ignition

(integrated keyhead transmitter only).

The lamps will turn off if all the doors

remain closed and:

• 25 seconds elapse

• you insert the key in the ignition

(integrated keyhead transmitter only)

• you press the START/STOP button

(intelligent access key only).

Battery Saver

If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome

lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver

will shut them off 10 minutes after you

switch the ignition off.

Accessory Mode Battery Saver for

Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)

If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition

state, it will shut off once it detects a

certain amount of battery drain or after 45

minutes.

Luggage Compartment

With the Remote Control

E138630

Press twice within three seconds

to unlatch the trunk.

From Outside Your Vehicle

E144402

Press the release button above the license

plate to unlatch the trunk. Your vehicle

must be unlocked or have an intelligent

access transmitter within 3 feet (1 meter)

of the trunk.

KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY

KEYPAD

The keypad is located near the driver

window. It is invisible until touched and

then it lights up so you can see and touch

the appropriate buttons.

Note: If you enter your entry code too fast

on the keypad, the unlock function may not

work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.

Locks

E138637

You can use the keypad to:

• lock or unlock the doors

• release the trunk

• recall memory seat and mirror

positions (if equipped)

• program and erase user codes

• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.

You can operate the keypad with the

factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is

located on the owner’s wallet card in the

glove box and is available from an

authorized dealer. You can also create up

to five of your own 5-digit personal entry

codes.

Programming a Personal Entry Code

To create your own personal entry code:

1. Enter the factory-set code.

2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five

seconds.

3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You

must enter each number within five

seconds of each other.

4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save

personal code 1.

The doors will lock then unlock to confirm

that programming was successful.

To program additional personal entry

codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:

• press 3·4 to save personal code 2

• press 5·6 to save personal code 3

• press 7·8 to save personal code 4

• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.

You may also program a personal entry

code through the MyFord Touch system

(if equipped). See Settings (page 358).

Tips:

• Do not set a code that uses five of the

same number.

• Do not use five numbers in sequential

order.

• The factory-set code will work even if

you have set your own personal code.

Recalling Memory Positions (If

Equipped)

The programmed entry codes will recall

driver memory positions as follows:

• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory

positions.

• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory

positions.

• Entry code 3 will recall driver 3 memory

positions.

Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not

recall memory positions.

Erasing a Personal Code

1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.

2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad

within five seconds.

3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.

You must do this within five seconds

of completing Step 2.

All personal codes are now erased and only

the factory-set 5–digit code will work.

Locks

Anti-Scan Feature

The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode

if you enter the wrong code seven times

(35 consecutive button presses). This

mode disables the keypad for one minute

and the keypad lamp will flash.

The anti-scan feature will turn off after:

• one minute of keypad inactivity

• pressing the unlock button on the

remote control

• switching the ignition on

• unlocking your vehicle using intelligent

access.

Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver Door

Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your

personal code. You must press each

number within five seconds of each other.

The interior lamps will illuminate.

Note: All doors will unlock if you enable the

all-door unlocking mode. See Locking and

Unlocking (page 52).

To Unlock All Doors

Enter the factory-set code or your personal

code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.

To Lock All Doors

Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same

time (with the driver door closed). You do

not need to enter the keypad code first.

To Release the Trunk

Enter the factory-set code or your personal

code, then press 5·6 within five seconds.

Displaying the Factory Set Code

With Integrated Keyhead Transmitters

Note: You will need to have two

programmed passive anti-theft keys for this

procedure.

To display the factory-set code in the

information display:

1. Insert a key into the ignition and switch

the ignition on for a few seconds.

2. Switch the ignition off and remove the

key.

3. Insert the second key into the ignition

and switch the ignition on.

The factory-set code will display for a few

seconds.

Note: The code may not display until after

any other warning messages first display.

With Intelligent Access Keys

Note: You will need to have two

programmed intelligent access keys for this

procedure.

To display the factory-set code in the

information display:

E147165

1. Place the first programmed key in the

backup slot inside the center console.

The key ring must be at the top with

the buttons facing toward the rear.

2. Press the START/STOP button once

and wait a few seconds.

3. Press the START/STOP button again

and remove the key.

4. Insert the second programmed key into

the backup slot, then press the

START/STOP button.

Locks

The factory-set code will appear in the

information display for a few seconds.

Note: The code may not display until after

any other warning messages first display.

INTERIOR LUGGAGE

COMPARTMENT RELEASE

WARNINGS

Keep vehicle doors and luggage

compartment locked and keep keys

and remote transmitters out of a

child’s reach. Unsupervised children could

lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury.

Children should be taught not to play in

vehicles.

Do not leave children, unreliable

adults, or animals unattended in the

vehicle. On hot days, the

temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior

can rise very quickly. Exposure of people

or animals to these high temperatures for

even a short time can cause death or

serious heat-related injuries, including brain

damage. Small children are particularly at

risk.

Your vehicle is equipped with a release

handle that provides a means of escape

for children and adults if they become

locked inside the luggage compartment.

Adults should familiarize themselves with

the operation and location of the release

handle.

E144403

The handle is located inside the luggage

compartment either on the luggage

compartment door (lid) or near the tail

lamps. It is composed of a material that

will glow for hours in darkness following

brief exposure to ambient light.

Pull the handle and push up on the luggage

compartment door (lid) to open from

within the luggage compartment.

Locks

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT

SYSTEM

Note: The system is not compatible with

non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and a loss of security

protection.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices

or a second coded key on the same key

chain may cause vehicle starting problems

if they are too close to the key when starting

the engine. Prevent these objects from

touching the coded key while starting the

engine. Switch the ignition off, move all

objects on the key chain away from the

coded key and restart the engine if a

problem occurs.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key

in the vehicle. Always take your keys and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®

The system is an engine immobilization

system. It is designed to help prevent the

engine from starting unless you use a

coded key programmed to your vehicle.

Using the wrong key may prevent the

engine from starting. A message may

appear in the information display.

If you are unable to start the engine with a

correctly coded key, a malfunction has

happened and a message may appear in

the information display.

Automatic Arming

The vehicle arms immediately after

switching the ignition off.

Automatic Disarming

Switching the ignition on with a coded key

disarms the vehicle.

Replacement Keys

Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with

two integrated keyhead transmitters or two

intelligent access keys.

The integrated keyhead transmitter

functions as a programmed ignition key

that operates all the locks and starts the

vehicle, as well as a remote control.

The intelligent access key functions as a

programmed key that operates the driver

door lock and activates the intelligent

access with push button start system, as

well as a remote control.

If your programmed transmitters or

standard SecuriLock coded keys

(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are

lost or stolen and you do not have an extra

coded key, you will need to have your

vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The

key codes need to be erased from your

vehicle and new coded keys will need to

be programmed.

Store an extra programmed key away from

the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent

any inconveniences. See your authorized

dealer to purchase additional spare or

replacement keys.

Programming a Spare Integrated

Keyhead Transmitter

Note: You can program a maximum of eight

coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be

integrated keyhead transmitters.

You can program your own integrated

keyhead transmitter or standard

SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This

procedure will program both the engine

immobilizer keycode and the remote entry

portion of the remote control to your

vehicle.

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters

or standard SecuriLock keys.

Security

You must have two previously

programmed coded keys and the new

unprogrammed key readily accessible. See

an authorized dealer to have the spare key

programmed if two previously

programmed coded keys are not available.

Read and understand the entire procedure

before you begin.

1. Insert the first previously programmed

coded key into the ignition.

2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least three

seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

3. Switch the ignition off and remove the

first coded key from the ignition.

4. After three seconds but within 10

seconds of switching the ignition off,

insert the second previously coded key

into the ignition.

5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least three

seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

6. Switch the ignition off and remove the

second previously programmed coded

key from the ignition.

7. After three seconds but within 10

seconds of switching the ignition off

and removing the previously

programmed coded key, insert the new

unprogrammed key into the ignition.

8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least six seconds.

9. Remove the newly programmed coded

key from the ignition.

If the key has been successfully

programmed it will start the engine and

operate the remote entry system (if the

new key is an integrated keyhead

transmitter).

If it was not programmed successfully,

wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through

8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Programming a Spare Intelligent

Access Key

Note: You can program a maximum for four

intelligent access keys to your vehicle.

You must have two previously

programmed intelligent access keys inside

your vehicle and the new unprogrammed

intelligent access keys readily accessible.

See an authorized dealer to have the spare

key programmed if two previously

programmed keys are not available.

Make sure that the vehicle is off before

beginning this procedure. Make sure that

you close all the doors before beginning

and that they remain closed throughout

the procedure. Perform all steps within 30

seconds of starting the sequence. Stop

and wait for at least one minute before

starting again if you perform any steps out

of sequence.

Read and understand the entire procedure

before you begin.

E147165

1. Place a programmed intelligent access

key in the backup slot in the center

console. The key ring must be at the

top with the buttons facing toward the

rear.

2. Wait 5 seconds, then press the

START/STOP button.

3. Remove the intelligent access key.

Security

4. Within 10 seconds, place a second

programmed intelligent access key in

the backup slot and press the

START/STOP button.

5. Wait 5 seconds, then press the

START/STOP button again.

6. Remove the intelligent access key.

7. Wait 5 seconds, then place the

unprogrammed intelligent access key

in the backup slot and press the

START/STOP button.

Programming is now complete. Verify the

remote control functions operate and the

vehicle starts with the new intelligent

access key.

If programming was not successful, wait

10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.

If you are still unsuccessful, take your

vehicle to your authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM

The system will warn you of an

unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will

be triggered if any door, the luggage

compartment or the hood is opened

without using the key, remote control or

keyless entry keypad.

The direction indicators will flash and the

horn will sound if unauthorized entry is

attempted while the alarm is armed.

Take all remote controls to an authorized

dealer if there is any potential alarm

problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is

not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock

the vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by any of the following

actions:

• Unlock the doors or luggage

compartment with the remote control

or keyless entry keypad.

• Switch the ignition on or start the

vehicle.

• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock

the vehicle, then switch the ignition on

within 12 seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on the

remote control will stop the horn and signal

indicators, but will not disarm the system.

Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel

when your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct

Position (page 117).

E157083

1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

E157084

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

You can operate the following functions

with the control:

E144503

Volume upA

Volume downB

MuteC

MediaD

Seek down or previousE

Seek up or nextF

MEDIA

Press repeatedly to scroll through available

audio sources.

Seek, Next or Previous

Press the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset

• play the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band

• seek through a track.

Steering Wheel

VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

E144504

End a callA

Answer a callB

Voice recognitionC

See SYNC™ (page 310). See MyFord

Touch™ (page 348).

CRUISE CONTROL

Type 1

E144500

Type 2

E144501

See Cruise Control (page 181).

INFORMATION DISPLAY

CONTROL

E144636

See Information Displays (page 84).

Steering Wheel

Cluster Display Control Features

E144811

If equipped with:

MyFord system: This control functions

the same as the center control on the

faceplate. See (page 297).

MyFord Touch: Use this control to adjust

the right side of the cluster display.

Navigate through the screen and press OK

to select. See MyFord Touch™ (page

348).

Steering Wheel

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

switching on the windshield wipers.

Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are

switched off before entering a car wash.

Note: Clean the windshield and wiper

blades if they begin to leave streaks or

smears. If that doesn't resolve the issue,

install new wiper blades.

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry

windshield. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper

motor to burn out. Always use the

windshield washers before wiping a dry

windshield.

E144495

Single wipeA

Intermittent wipeB

Normal wipeC

High speed wipeD

Intermittent Wipe

E144496

Shortest wipe intervalA

Intermittent wipeB

Longest wipe intervalC

Use the rotary control to adjust the

intermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers

When your vehicle speed increases, the

interval between wipes will decrease.

AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

switching on the windshield wipers.

Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are

switched off before entering a car wash.

Note: Clean the windshield and wiper

blades if they begin to leave streaks or

smears. If that does not resolve the issue,

install new wiper blades.

Note: If you switch autolamps on in

conjunction with autowipers, your low beam

headlamps will illuminate automatically

when the rain sensor activates the

windshield wipers continuously.

Wipers and Washers

Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with

ice, snow or salty road mist can cause

inconsistent and unexpected wiping or

smearing.

In these conditions, you can do the

following to help keep your windshield

clear:

• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers.

• Change the wiper speed to normal or

high speed wipe as necessary.

• Switch the autowipers off.

E144497

Highest sensitivityA

OnB

Lowest sensitivityC

The wipers will function when moisture is

detected on the windshield. The rain

sensor will continue to monitor the amount

of moisture on the windshield and adjust

the speed of the wipers automatically. This

feature can be switched on or off in the

information display. See General

Information (page 84).

Use the rotary control to adjust the

sensitivity of the rain sensor. With low

sensitivity, the wipers will operate when

the sensor detects a large amount of

moisture on the windshield. With high

sensitivity, the wipers will operate when

the sensor detects a small amount of

moisture on the windshield.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.

Sensor performance will be affected if the

area around the interior mirror is dirty. The

rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers

may operate if dirt, mist or flies hit the

windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Note: Do not operate the washers when

the washer reservoir is empty. This may

cause the washer pump to overheat.

E144498

To operate the washers and spray the

windshield, pull the lever toward you.

A wipe will occur a few seconds after

washing to clear any remaining washer

fluid. This feature can be switched on or

off in the information display. See General

Information (page 84).

Wipers and Washers

LIGHTING CONTROL

E142449

OffA

Parking lamps, instrument panel

lamps, license plate lamps and

tail lamps

HeadlampsC

High Beams

E162679

Push the lever forward to switch the high

beams on.

Push the lever forward again or pull the

lever toward you to switch the high beams

off.

Headlamp Flasher

E162680

Pull the lever toward you slightly and

release it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: It may be necessary to switch your

headlamps on manually in severe weather

conditions.

E142451

The headlamps will switch on and off

automatically in low light situations or

during inclement weather.

The headlamps will remain on for a period

of time after you switch the ignition off.

You can adjust the time delay using the

information display controls. See

Information Displays (page 84).

Lighting

Note: If you switch autolamps on in

conjunction with autowipers, low beam

headlamps will illuminate automatically

when the rain sensor activates the

windshield wipers continuously.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

DIMMER

Note: If you disconnect the battery or it

becomes discharged, the illuminated

components will switch to the maximum

setting.

Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps

E132712

Press repeatedly or press and hold until

the desired level is reached.

Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps

A B

E142452

Press repeatedly or press and

hold to dim.

Press repeatedly or press and

hold to brighten.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

After you switch the ignition off, you can

switch the headlamps on by pulling the

direction indicator lever toward you. You

will hear a short tone. The headlamps will

switch off automatically after three

minutes with any door open or 30 seconds

after the last door has been closed. You

can cancel this feature by pulling the

direction indicator toward you again or

switching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

Always remember to switch your

headlamps on in low light situations

or during inclement weather. The

system does not activate the tail lamps

and may not provide adequate lighting

during these conditions. Failure to activate

your headlamps under these conditions

may result in a collision.

Lighting

The system switches the low beam

headlamps on at a reduced intensity in

daylight conditions.

To switch the system on, switch the

ignition on, and switch the lighting control

to the off, autolamp or parking lamp

position.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

The system will automatically turn on your

high beams if it is dark enough and no other

traffic is present. When it detects an

approaching vehicle’s headlights, a

preceding vehicle’s tail lamps or street

lighting, the system will turn off the high

beams before they distract other drivers.

The low beams remain on.

Note: If it appears that automatic control

of the high beams is not functioning

properly, check the windshield in front of

the camera for blockage. A clear view of the

road is required for proper system operation.

Any windshield damage in the area of the

camera field-of-view should be repaired.

Note: If a blockage is detected (e.g. bird

dropping, bug splatter, snow, or ice) and no

changes are observed, the system will go

into low beam mode until the blockage is

cleared. A message may also appear in the

instrument cluster display noting the front

camera is blocked.

Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water

spots will not affect the automatic high

beam system’s performance. However, in

cold or inclement weather conditions, the

automatic high beam system's availability

may be decreased, especially at startup. If

you want to change the beam state

independently of the system, you may turn

the high beams ON or OFF using the

multifunction switch lever. Automatic

control will resume when conditions are

correct.

Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height

(e.g. using much larger tires) may degrade

feature performance.

A camera sensor is centrally mounted

behind the windshield of the vehicle, and

monitors conditions continuously to decide

when to switch the high beams off and on.

Once the system is active, the high beams

will switch on if:

• The ambient light level is low enough

that high beams are needed.

• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.

• The vehicle speed is greater than

25 mph (40 km/h).

The high beams will switch off if:

• An approaching vehicle's headlights or

a preceding vehicle's tail lamps are

detected.

• Vehicle speed falls below 16 mph

(25 km/h).

• The ambient light level is high enough

that high beams are not required.

• Severe rain, snow, or fog is detected.

• The camera is blocked.

Activating the System

Switch on the system using the information

display and autolamps. See Information

Displays (page 84). See Autolamps

(page 67).

E142451

Lighting

Turn the lighting control to the autolamps

position.

Manually Overriding the System

E130140

When the automatic control has activated

the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk

will provide a temporary override to low

beam.

To permanently deactivate the system,

use the information display menu or turn

the lighting control switch from autolamps

to headlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

The fog lamps are turned on when the

lighting control is in the low beam position.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E145595

Push the lever up or down to use the

direction indicators.

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the

direction indicators flash three times to

indicate a lane change.

INTERIOR LAMPS

The lamps will switch on when one of the

following conditions have been met:

• You open any door.

• You press a remote control button.

• You touch switch A on the front interior

lamp.

Front Interior Lamp

Note: The front interior lamp switches are

on the overhead console. The exact location

of each switch on the overhead console

depends upon which roof, sunroof, and

window shade features are equipped on the

vehicle.

Note: Touch switch C to switch the door

function off when you open any door. The

indicator lamp will illuminate amber when

the door function is off. When the door

function is off and you open a door, the

courtesy and door lamps will stay off. Touch

switch C again to switch the door function

back on. The indicator lamp will illuminate

blue when the door function is on. When the

door function is on and you open a door, the

courtesy and door lamps will switch on.

Lighting

A B C

E146410

All lamps on switchA

All lamps off switchB

Door function switchC

You can switch individual map lamps on

independently by touching a map lens.

Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)

E142455

You can switch individual dome lamps on

independently by pressing switch A.

Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGS

Do not leave children unattended in

your vehicle and do not let them play

with the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.

When closing the power windows,

you should verify they are free of

obstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity

of the window openings.

Note: During low battery conditions and

engine re-cranking, window operation may

be delayed or stop until after the engine

starts.

E146043

Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when

just one of the windows are open. Lower the

opposite window slightly to reduce this

noise.

Press the switch to open the window.

Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch Down

Press the switch fully and release it. Press

again or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up

Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or

lift it again to stop the window.

Bounce-Back

The window will stop automatically while

closing. It will reverse some distance if

there is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING

When you override the bounce-back

feature the window will not reverse

if it detects an obstacle. Take care

when closing the windows to avoid

personal injury.

Pull up the window switch and hold within

two seconds of the window reaching the

bounce-back position. The window will

travel up with no bounce-back protection.

The window will stop if you release the

switch before the window is fully closed.

Window Lock

E144072

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear

window controls. It will illuminate when

you lock the rear window controls.

Accessory Delay

You can use the window switches for

several minutes after you switch the

ignition off or until you open either front

door.

Windows and Mirrors

GLOBAL OPENING AND

CLOSING

You can use the remote control to operate

the windows with the ignition off.

Note: You can enable or disable this feature

in the information display or see an

authorized dealer. See General

Information (page 84).

Note: To operate this feature, accessory

delay must not be active.

Opening the Windows

You can only open the windows for a short

time after you unlock your vehicle with the

remote control. After you unlock your

vehicle, press and hold the remote control

unlock button to open the windows and

vent the moonroof. Release the button

once movement starts. Press the lock or

unlock button to stop movement.

Closing the Windows

WARNING

When closing the windows and

moonroof, you should verify they are

free of obstructions and make sure

that children and pets are not in the

proximity of the window openings.

To close the windows and moonroof, press

and hold the remote control lock button.

Release the button once movement starts.

Press the lock or unlock button to stop

movement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power Exterior Mirrors

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirrors when your

vehicle is moving.

E144073

Left-hand mirrorA

Adjustment controlB

Right-hand mirrorC

To adjust a mirror:

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.

The control will illuminate.

2. Adjust the position of the mirror.

3. Press the mirror switch again.

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door window

glass. Make sure that you fully engage the

mirror in its support when returning it to its

original position.

Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page

115).

Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror

positions through the memory function.

See Memory Function (page 120).

Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)

The driver’s exterior mirror will

automatically dim when the interior

auto-dimming mirror is activated.

Windows and Mirrors

Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

The outer portion of the appropriate mirror

housing will blink when the turn signal is

activated.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If

Equipped)

WARNING

Objects in the blind spot mirror are

closer than they appear.

Blind spot mirrors have an integrated

convex mirror built into the upper outboard

corner of the exterior mirrors. They are

designed to increase your visibility along

the side of your vehicle.

Check the main mirror first before a lane

change, then check the blind spot mirror.

If no vehicles are present in the blind spot

mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane

is at a safe distance, signal that you intend

to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder

to verify traffic is clear and carefully

change lanes.

E138665

The image of the approaching vehicle is

small and near the inboard edge of the

main mirror when it is at a distance. The

image becomes larger and begins to move

outboard across the main mirror as the

vehicle approaches (A). The image will

transition from the main mirror and begin

to appear in the blind spot mirror as the

vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will

transition to your peripheral field of view

as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 192).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirror when your

vehicle is moving.

Windows and Mirrors

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other

petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning

products.

You can adjust the interior mirror to your

preference. Some mirrors also have a

second pivot point. This lets you move the

mirror head up or down and from side to

side.

Pull the tab below the mirror toward you

to reduce glare at night.

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front

and back of the mirror. Mirror performance

may be affected. A rear center passenger or

raised rear center head restraint may also

block light from reaching the sensor.

The mirror will dim automatically to reduce

glare when bright lights are detected from

behind your vehicle. It will automatically

return to normal reflection when you select

reverse gear to make sure you have a clear

view when backing up.

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the side

window and extend it rearward for extra

shade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Do not let children play with the

moonroof or leave them unattended

in the vehicle. They may seriously

hurt themselves.

When closing the moonroof, you

should verify that it is free of

obstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximity

of the roof opening.

The sliding shade can be manually opened

or closed when the moonroof is closed.

Pull the shade toward the front of the

vehicle to close it.

The moonroof controls are located on the

overhead console and have a one-touch

open and close feature. To stop it during

one-touch operation, touch the control a

second time.

Windows and Mirrors

E144499

OpenA

VentB

CloseC

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will

stop short of the fully opened position.

Note: This position helps to reduce wind

noise or rumbling which may happen with

the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again

to fully open the moonroof.

Touch (C) to close the moonroof.

Bounce-Back

The moonroof will stop automatically and

reverse some distance if an obstacle is

detected while closing.

Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of

a bounce-back event to override this

function.

Venting the Moonroof

Touch (B) to vent the moonroof. Touch

Windows and Mirrors

GAUGES

E151261

Left Information DisplayA

SpeedometerB

Right Information Display See General Information (page 348).C

Left Information Display

Odometer

Located in the bottom of the information

display Registers the accumulated

distance your vehicle has traveled.

Trip Computer

See General Information (page 84).

Vehicle Settings and Personalization

See General Information (page 84).

Common Displays

Note: Battery gauge information can be

individually selected on or off through

Battery Display in the Options sub-menu.

From any main display a right arrow press

on the steering wheel controls will take you

to the Options sub-menu.

Instrument Cluster

Note: For Energi vehicles there are two

versions of the battery gauge. When the

vehicle is in Hybrid Mode the information is

shown with a simple battery graphic. When

in Plug-in Power Mode an enhanced battery

graphic is provided and available electric

range is added to the display.

Battery Gauge:

The high voltage battery gauge appears

on the right side of the information display

screen. This provides Charge Fill (State of

Charge), Charge Assist and Regen Display.

• Charge Fill (Hybrid Mode) - The fill

level, or State of Charge indicates the

amount of energy stored in the high

voltage battery as a percent of total

energy capacity. The level will increase

or decrease as the battery charges and

discharges during normal operation,

but the hybrid system will attempt to

control the level to approximately the

middle of the gauge under most driving

conditions.

• Charge Fill (Energi Plug-in Power

Mode) - The fill level indicates the

amount of energy stored in the high

voltage battery which is available for

Plug-in Power Mode. A full fill

represents the total amount of energy

you can get from an external charge

(plugging your vehicle in). When the fill

reaches empty your vehicle will

automatically enter Hybrid Mode.

• Electric Range (Energi Plug-in Power

Mode) - The electric range estimate is

based on the amount of battery energy

currently available in the high voltage

battery and your typical energy usage

while driving. This includes your drive

habits as well as your use of

accessories such as Climate Control.

The battery energy refers to the energy

gained from charging the battery while

plugged in.

• Charge Assist - The up and down

arrows provide information about the

energy going into and out of the high

voltage battery. The up arrow above

the battery indicates battery charging

such as from regenerative braking. The

down arrow below the battery

indicates battery discharging to provide

power for propulsion or vehicle

accessories.

Note: The Charge Fill is always shown for

Plug-in Power Mode, even if Charge Fill is

not selected under Battery Display in the

Options sub-menu.

• Regen Display - A circular arrow

symbol appears in the center of the

Battery Gauge when energy is being

recaptured through the regenerative

braking system.

Fuel Gauge:

The fuel gauge will indicate approximately

how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The

fuel gauge may vary slightly when your

vehicle is moving or on a gradient. The

arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol

indicates on which side of the vehicle the

fuel filler door is located.

Instrument Cluster

Brake Coach Display:

The Brake Coach appears after the vehicle

has come to a stop. It coaches you to brake

in a manner which maximizes the amount

of energy returned through the

regenerative braking system. The percent

displayed is an indication of the

regenerative braking efficiency with 100%

representing the maximum amount of

energy recovery.

Trip Summary and Lifetime Summary:

These will be displayed upon shutting off

the vehicle. Trip Summary will appear first,

then Lifetime Summary will be displayed.

You can toggle between these displays

using the up and down arrow keys on the

left hand steering wheel controls.

Trip Summary data is from the last power

cycle, while Lifetime Summary data is

cumulative from the last Lifetime

Summary reset done through the Settings

menu in the message center.

Trip Summary:

• Distance - The total distance traveled,

distance traveled on battery power

only (EV distance) and Regen distance

are displayed. Regen distance is the

estimated range gained from energy

recaptured through regenerative

braking.

• Energy Use - The average fuel economy

and total fuel used are displayed. In

addition for Energi, the total electrical

energy used while in Plug-in Power

Mode is displayed in kilowatt hours

(kWh). Trip Summary average fuel

economy will be shown in blue if better

than your lifetime average fuel

economy

• Brake Score - The average percentage

of braking energy recaptured and

returned to the high voltage battery

through regenerative braking. The

brake score will be shown in blue if

greater than (better than) the lifetime

brake score.

Lifetime Summary:

• Distance - The distance traveled on

battery power only (EV distance) and

Regen distance are displayed. Regen

distance is the estimated range gained

from energy recaptured through

regenerative braking.

• Energy Use - Average fuel economy.

• Brake Score - The average percentage

of braking energy recaptured and

returned to the high voltage battery

through regenerative braking.

Instrument Cluster

WARNING LAMPS AND

INDICATORS

The following warning lamps and

indicators will alert you to a vehicle

condition that may become serious. Some

lamps will illuminate when you start your

vehicle to make sure they work. If any

lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,

refer to the respective system warning

lamp for further information.

Note: Some warning indicators appear in

the information display and function the

same as a warning lamp but do not display

when you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E144524

The speed control system

indicator light changes color to

indicate what mode the system

is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 182).

On (white light): Illuminates when the

adaptive cruise control system is turned

on. Turns off when the speed control

system is turned off.

Engaged (green light): Illuminates when

the adaptive cruise control system is

engaged. Turns off when the speed control

system is disengaged.

Anti-Lock Braking System

If it illuminates when you are

driving, this indicates a

malfunction. You will continue

to have the normal braking system

(without ABS) unless the brake system

warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the

system checked by your authorized dealer.

Battery

If it illuminates while driving, it

indicates a malfunction. Switch

off all unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checked

by your authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

E151262

It will illuminate when you switch

this feature off or in conjunction

with a message. See Blind Spot

Monitor (page 192). See Information

Messages (page 96).

Brake System

E144522

It will illuminate when you

engage the parking brake with

the ignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, check

that the parking brake is not engaged. If

the parking brake is not engaged, this

indicates low brake fluid level or a brake

system malfunction. Have the system

checked immediately by your authorized

dealer.

WARNING

Driving your vehicle with the warning

lamp on is dangerous. A significant

decrease in braking performance

may occur. It will take you longer to stop

your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by

your authorized dealer immediately. Driving

extended distances with the parking brake

engaged can cause brake failure and the

risk of personal injury.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

It will illuminate when you switch

this feature on.

Instrument Cluster

Direction Indicator

Illuminates when the left or right

turn signal or the hazard warning

flasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check for

a burned out bulb. See Engine Oil

Dipstick (page 237).

Door Ajar

Displays when the ignition is on

and any door is not completely

closed.

Electric Park Brake

E146190

It will illuminate or flash when

the electric parking brake has a

malfunction.

Engine/Motor Coolant

Temperature

It will illuminate when the engine

or motor cooling system is

overheating. Stop the vehicle in

a safe place and contact your authorized

dealer.

Engine Oil

If it illuminates with the engine

running or when you are driving,

this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so and switch the engine off. Check the

engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 237).

Note: Do not resume your journey if it

illuminates despite the level being correct.

Have the system checked by your authorized

dealer immediately.

EV Now

E144814

It will illuminate when you select

this feature on. See Hybrid

Electric Vehicle (page 138).

EV Later

E151263

It will illuminate when you select

this feature on. See Hybrid

Electric Vehicle (page 138).

Fasten Safety Belt

It will illuminate and a chime will

sound to remind you to fasten

your safety belt. See Safety

Belt Minder (page 29).

Front Airbag

If it fails to illuminate when you

start your vehicle, continues to

flash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have the system checked

by your authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

It will illuminate when you switch

the front fog lamps on.

Grade Assist (If Equipped)

E144523

It will illuminate when the grade

assist function has been turned

on.

Heads Up Display (If Equipped)

E156133

A red beam of lights will

illuminate on the windshield in

certain instances when using

adaptive cruise control and/or the collision

warning system. It will also illuminate

momentarily when you start your vehicle

to make sure the display works.

Instrument Cluster

High Beam

It will illuminate when you switch

the high beam headlamps on. It

will flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Hood Ajar

E159324

Displays when the ignition is on

and the hood is not completely

closed.

Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)

E144813

Illuminates when the lane

keeping system is activated.

Low Fuel Level

It will illuminate when the fuel

level is low or the fuel tank is

nearly empty. Refuel as soon as

possible.

Low Tire Pressure Warning

It will illuminate when your tire

pressure is low. If the lamp

remains on with the engine

running or when driving, check

your tire pressure as soon as possible.

It will also illuminate momentarily when

you switch the ignition on to confirm the

lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate

when you switch the ignition on, or begins

to flash at any time, have the system

checked by your authorized dealer.

Parking Lamps

It will illuminate when you switch

the parking lamps on.

Powertrain Fault

Illuminates when a powertrain

fault has been detected. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Ready to Drive

E144692

It will illuminate once the vehicle

has been switched on and is

ready to drive. A corresponding

message may display stating ready to

drive.

Service Engine Soon

If the service engine soon

indicator light stays illuminated

after the engine is started, it

indicates that the On Board Diagnostics

system (OBD) has detected a malfunction

of the vehicle emissions control system.

Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in

the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more

information about having your vehicle

serviced. See Emission Control System

(page 153).

If the light is blinking, engine misfire is

occurring which could damage your

catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate

fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and

deceleration) and have your vehicle

serviced immediately.

Note: Under engine misfire conditions,

excessive exhaust temperatures could

damage the catalytic converter or other

vehicle components.

The service engine soon indicator light

illuminates when the ignition is first turned

on prior to engine start to check the bulb

and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready

for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.

Instrument Cluster

Normally, the service engine soon light will

stay on until the engine is cranked, then

turn itself off if no malfunctions are

present. However, if after 15 seconds the

service engine soon light blinks eight times,

it means that the vehicle is not ready for

I/M testing. See Emission Control

System (page 153).

Stability Control

E138639

It will flash when the system is

active. If it remains illuminated

or does not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates a

malfunction. During a malfunction the

system will switch off. Have the system

checked by your authorized dealer

immediately. See Using Stability Control

(page 171).

Stability Control Off

It will illuminate when you switch

the system off. It will go out

when you switch the system

back on or when you switch the ignition

off. See Using Stability Control (page

171).

Stop Safely

E144693

Indicates electrical component

fault/failure that will cause the

vehicle to shutdown or enter into

a limited operating mode. A message may

also display.

Trunk Ajar

E159323

Displays when the ignition is on

and the trunk is not completely

closed.

Vehicle Plugged in (If Equipped)

E144694

It will illuminate when the vehicle

is plugged in. A corresponding

message may display after

attempting to start the vehicle.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS

Key in Ignition Warning Chime

Sounds when you open the driver's door

and you have left the key in the ignition

with it in the off or accessory position.

Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

Chirps the horn twice when you exit the

vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,

indicating the vehicle is still on.

Headlamps On Warning Chime

Sounds when you remove the key from the

ignition and open the driver's door and you

have left the headlamps or parking lamps

on.

Parking Brake On Warning Chime

Sounds when you have left the parking

brake on and drive your vehicle. If the

warning chime remains on after you have

released the parking brake, have the

system checked by your authorized dealer

immediately.

Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device or feature that may take your focus

off the road. Your primary responsibility is

the safe operation of the vehicle. We

recommend against the use of any

handheld device while driving and that you

comply with all applicable laws.

Various systems on your vehicle can be

controlled using the information display

controls on the steering wheel.

Corresponding information is displayed in

the information display.

Information Display Controls

E156010

• Press the up and down arrow buttons

to scroll through and highlight the

options within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter a

sub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit a

menu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button at

any time to return to the main menu

display (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose and

confirm settings or messages.

Main menu

From the main menu bar on the left side

of the information display, you can choose

from the following categories:

E144639

Display Mode

E138660

Trip 1 & 2

E144640

Fuel Economy

E144642

Information

E100023

Settings

Scroll up or down to highlight one of the

categories, and then press the right arrow

key or OK to enter into that category. Press

the left arrow key as needed to exit back

to the main menu.

Display Mode

E144639

Use the up or down arrow

buttons to choose between the

following display options.

Note: The cluster will remember the menu

level 2 state when the individual key state

is changed from the RUN to the OFF

position.

Information Displays

Display Mode

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

——Instantaneous FuelVehicle Range: HEV -

Range total PHEV -

Range for EV, Fuel and

Tota l

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery Display

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

——Instantaneous FuelInform: Avg Fuel

Economy + Battery

Gauge + Fuel Gauge Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery Display

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

——Instantaneous FuelEnlighten: Power + Avg

Fuel Economy +

Battery Gauge + Fuel

Gauge

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery Display

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

——Instantaneous FuelEngage: Split Power +

Avg Fuel Economy +

Battery Gauge + Fuel

Gauge

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery Display

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

Information Displays

Display Mode

——Instantaneous FuelEmpower: Power (with

engine on/off

threshold) + Avg Fuel

Economy + Battery

Gauge + Fuel Gauge

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery Display

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

Average SpeedVehicle RangeChange MyViewMyView

Vehicle RangeAvg Fuel

Avg FuelPower

Inst. FuelSplit Power

Display Mode (cont'd)

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

Coolant TempPower + ThresholdChange MyView

(cont'd)

MyView (cont'd)

Accessory PowerTach rpm x 1000

Trip 1Accessory Power

Trip 2Trip 1

Fuel HistoryTrip 2

CoachFuel History

BlankCoach

—Blank

Information Displays

Display Mode (cont'd)

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery DisplayMyView (cont'd)

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery DisplayEnergi only

EV: Auto (consump-

tion gauge, accessory

power gauge)

Charge Assist

Charge Level

EV: Now (consump-

tion gauge with

budget cup, accessory

power gauge, over-

ride)

Information Displays

Display Mode (cont'd)

HelpEV: Later (consump-

tion gauge, accessory

power gauge, EV miles

reserved)

——Help

Information Displays

•Vehicle Range — Indicates the estimated distance the vehicle will travel with the

energy currently available. For Hybrid, the vehicle range estimate is based on the fuel

remaining in the gasoline tank. For Energi, the total estimated distance equals the

distance available in Hybrid Mode fueled by gasoline, plus the EV distance available

in Plug-in Power Mode. Changes in driving pattern may cause the values to vary.

• Instantaneous Fuel — This gauge is available on all Display mode screens and

shows the instantaneous fuel economy.

•Inform — Inform shows the fuel level, battery display and lifetime average fuel

economy, with options available for the Battery Display and an Instantaneous Fuel

Economy gauge. When the vehicle is operating on battery power only, EV is displayed.

•Enlighten — Enlighten displays power demand in addition to the typical information

and options from Inform. The Instantaneous Fuel Economy gauge will be displayed

by default. When the vehicle is operating on battery power only, EV is displayed and

the gauge fill is shown in blue. When both the engine and the electric motor are

providing power the gauge fill is white.

•Engage — Engage replaces the power demand gauge from Enlighten with separate

gauges for engine power and electric motor power. The engine power gauge fill is

white and the high voltage battery power gauge fill is blue. When the vehicle is

operating on battery power only, EV is displayed.

•Empower — Empower adds an engine on/off threshold to the power demand gauge

from Enlighten. The threshold is shown as a blue double outline. The gauge is designed

to show you how close you are to the gasoline engine on/off threshold and how much

power you are requesting by how much you press on the accelerator pedal.

When power demand is below the threshold the vehicle is operating on battery power

only, EV is displayed and the gauge fill is shown in blue.

When power demand exceeds the threshold both the engine and the high voltage battery

provide power and the gauge fill is white.

When power demand surpasses the amber indicator, this level of demand and associated

fuel economy are shown in amber.

MyView — You can choose what to display in this view. Selecting Change MyView in the

Options menu allows you to scroll through two columns of content choices.

• Avg Fuel — Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.

• Power — When the transmission is in a drive gear only, this gauge shows you vehicle

power.

• Split Power— This gauge indicates the power being supplied by the vehicle’s two

power sources: the high voltage battery and the gasoline engine. When the hybrid

system is operating in electric vehicle mode (without the gasoline engine), EV is

displayed.

• Power + Threshold — When the transmission is in a drive gear only, this gauge shows

you vehicle power demand and gasoline engine on/off threshold. It is designed to

show you how close you are to the gasoline engine on/off threshold and how much

power you are requesting by how much you press on the accelerator pedal.

Information Displays

• Tach rpm x 1000 — When the gasoline engine is running, the tachometer gauge

displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). When the vehicle is

operating on battery power only, EV is displayed and the tachometer is greyed out.

• Accessory Power— This gauge indicates electrical power demands from your vehicle’s

accessory systems. Accessories such as air conditioning, headlights, and radio use

power but do not contribute to propelling the vehicle. The higher the level indication

on this gauge, the more accessory power is being used. You can see the level of this

gauge change by turning accessories on and off.

• Battery Display — The high voltage battery display options include Regen Active,

Charge Assist and Charge Level.

• Regen Active — A circular arrow symbol appears over the center of the battery when

energy is being recaptured through the regenerative braking system.

• Charge Assist — An arrow above the battery indicates the battery is being charged;

an arrow below the battery indicates that battery power is being used for propulsion

or to power the vehicle accessories.

• Charge Level — This indicates the State of Charge of the battery. Additionally, for

Energi vehicles the option only applies for the Hybrid Mode battery display (simple

battery graphic). The Plug-in Power Mode battery will always show the charge level

with associated remaining EV range.

• Inst. Fuel — Shows instantaneous fuel usage.

• Coolant Temp – Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating

temperature, the level indicator will be white and will be in the normal range (between

“H” and “C”). If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, the level

indicator will change to red to indicate that the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle

as soon as safely possible, turn off the vehicle and let the engine cool.

The thermometer indicator next to the gauge will illuminate in blue or white to indicate

the following:

• Blue thermometer - This indicates that the hybrid system is not warm enough to allow

EV operation. The gasoline engine will run continuously when the indicator is blue.

During silent key start mode, the thermometer indicator will be blue, but the gasoline

engine will not run. This is the result of the vehicle computer allowing the engine to

be cooler during the silent key start period. This is normal operation and does not

indicate a problem with your vehicle. After the first engine start the indicator will turn

white when the gasoline engine is warm enough to turn off.

• White thermometer - This indicates that the hybrid system is warm enough to allow

EV operation. If the vehicle operates on battery power long enough, it is possible that

the gasoline engine may need to run to keep the system warm. In this case, the

thermometer indicator will revert back to blue.

Trip 1 & 2

E138660

Use the arrow buttons to choose

between the following.

Note: Pressing OK stops/starts the timer.

Holding OK resets the odometer and timer.

Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

—Elapsed trip timeStandardTrip 1 or Trip 2

—Trip distance

—EV distance

—Average fuel

economy

Enhanced

—Estimated amount

of fuel consumed

—Estimated amount

of electricity

consumed (Energi

only)

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery Display-

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

• Elapsed trip time — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the

vehicle is restarted.

• Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance.

• EV distance — shows the distance traveled while in electric only mode.

• Estimated amount of fuel consumed — shows the amount of fuel used for a given

trip.

• Estimated amount of electricity consumed — shows the amount of plug-in electricity

used for a given trip.

Fuel Economy

E144640

Use the arrow buttons to choose

the desired energy display.

Information Displays

Fuel Economy

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

—1, 2, 6 min. IntervalsInterval TimeFuel History: Instant-

aneous Fuel

Economy + Fuel

Economy History +

Avg Fuel Economy

Yes / NoRegen ActiveBattery DisplayCoach

Charge Assist

Charge Level

Help

——Help

• Fuel History: This view from left to right starts with the instantaneous fuel economy

gauge and adds historical fuel economy data. The data is represented as an average

for time intervals of either 1, 2 or 6 minutes, with the left most interval being the most

recent. Total time for the 5 intervals is shown at the bottom of the view. Interval time

can be selected in the options sub menu. For Energi vehicles a blue outline indicates

Plug-in Power was used at least half of that interval. Intervals shown in grey color are

from the previous drive.

• Coach: This view provides a comparison of your recent Acceleration, Braking and

Cruising behavior to what is recommended for most efficient use of energy under

present conditions. The horizontal bars fill from left to right with best behavior (and

Blue color) shown as at least half full. When the bars are less than half full, the color

is Amber, suggesting that a change in behavior is needed to achieve better energy

efficiency.

Note that fuel economy is not always a measure of appropriate driving behavior. For

example, when driving uphill and maintaining an appropriate speed, your instant fuel

economy may not be good (losing leaves) but the Coach may show a blue bar for

Acceleration or Cruising.

Info

E144642

In this mode, you can view

different vehicle system

information and perform a

system check.

Information Displays

Information

Displays a number of different system tutorials. Use

the up or down arrows to scroll through the tutorials.

Then press OK to view.

TutorialWarnings

Displays the associated driver alert graphic.Driver Alert

MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)MyKey

MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a

programmed MyKey)

Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)

All active warnings will display first if applicable. The

system check menu may appear different based upon

equipment options and current vehicle status. Use the

up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.

System

Check

Settings

E100023

In this mode, you can configure

different driver setting choices.

Note: Some items are optional and may

not appear.

Settings

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

—On / OffTraction ControlDriver Assist

—On (default on key cycle)

/ Off

Blindspot

High / Normal / LowSensitivityCollision Warn

On / OffDistance Alert

On (default on key

cycle) / Off

Warn

—Adaptive / NormalCruise Control

—On (default on key cycle)

/ Off

Cross Traffic

Information Displays

Settings (cont’d)

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

—On / OffECO CruiseDriver Assist

(cont’d) —On / OffDriver Alert

Alert / Aid / Alert +

Aid

ModeLane keeping Sys

High / Normal / LowIntensity

—On / OffEV + Mode

—On (default on key

cycle) / Off

Front Park Aid

—On (default on key

cycle) / Off

Rear Park Aid

—On (default on key

cycle) / Off

Auto Engine OffVehicle

—On / OffEasy Entry / Exit

On / OffAuto HighbeamLighting

Select time intervalAutolamp Delay

On / OffAutolockLocks

On / OffAutounlock

On / OffMislock

All doors / Driver

door

Remote Unlocking

Set to XXX %Oil Life Reset

Settings (cont’d)

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

Heater: – A/C Auto / Last

Settings

Climate ControlRemote StartVehicle (cont’d)

Front Defrost: Auto / Off

Rear Defrost: Auto / Off

Information Displays

Settings (cont’d)

Driver Seat: Auto / Off

Passenger Seat: Auto /

Off

5 / 10 / 15 minutesDuration

On / OffQuiet Start

Enable / DisableSystem

Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.

Settings (cont’d)

Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2

—On / OffSwitch InhibitVehicle (cont’d)

—Select number of yearsTire Mobility Kit

On / OffRemote OpenWindows

On / OffRemote Close

On / OffCourtesy WipeWipers

On / OffRain Sensing

—Hold OK to Create

MyKey

Create MyKeyMyKey

—Always On / User

Selectable

911 Assist

—Always On / User

Selectable

Traction Control

—Choose desired speed or

off

Max Speed

—Choose desired speed or

off

Speed Minder

—On / OffVolume Limiter

—On / OffDo Not Disturb

—Hold OK to Clear All

MyKeys

Clear MyKeys

Information Displays

Settings (cont’d)

—Select the desired

language

LanguageDisplay

Select the desired

units of measure

DistanceUnits

Fuel only / Fuel +

Electric

Fuel Economy

Fahrenheit (°F) /

Celsius (°C)

Temperature

—On / OffBrake Coach

Display

—Lifetime Fuel Economy,

Regen Miles, Brake

Score, Hold OK to

RESET

Liftetime

Summary

• Brake Coach Display: This appears after the vehicle has come to a stop. It coaches

you to brake in a manner which maximizes the amount of energy returned through

the regenerative braking system. The percent displayed is an indication of the

regenerative braking efficiency with 100% representing the maximum amount of

regenerative braking energy recovery.

INFORMATION MESSAGES

Note: Depending on the vehicle options

equipped with your vehicle, not all of the

messages will display or be available.

Certain messages may be abbreviated or

shortened depending upon which cluster

type you have.

E144636

Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the

information display. Other messages will

be removed automatically after a short

time.

Certain messages need to be confirmed

before you can access the menus.

Information Displays

Active Park

ActionMessage

Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Active Park Fault

Adaptive Cruise Control

ActionMessage

Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC

from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

182).

Adaptive Cruise

Malfunction

Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise

cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise

Control (page 182).

Adaptive Cruise Not

Available

Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar

visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of

radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See

Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 182).

Adaptive Cruise Not

Available Sensor

Blocked See Manual

Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.Cruise Control Auto-

matic Braking Turned

Off

Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC

from engaging.

Front Sensor Not Aligned

Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls

to the driver.

Adaptive Cruise - Driver

Resume Control

Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the

adaptive cruise.

Adaptive Cruise Speed

Too Low to Activate

AdvanceTrac™

ActionMessage

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

blocked sensor.

Service AdvanceTrac

Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or

enabled by the driver.

AdvanceTrac Off On

Information Displays

Airbag

ActionMessage

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

blocked sensor.

Occupant Sensor

BLOCKED Remove

Objects Near Passenger

Seat

Alarm

ActionMessage

Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-

ized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 61).

Vehicle Alarm to Stop

Alarm, Start Vehicle

Automatic Engine Shutdown

ActionMessage

Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX

Seconds

Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel

economy.

Engine Shut Off for Fuel

Economy

Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off. You can

press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut

down.

Engine Shuts Off in XX

Seconds Press Ok to

Override

Information Displays

Battery and Charging System (12 volt)

ActionMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off

the ignition. Contact your authorized dealer.

Electrical System Over-

voltage Stop Safely

Displays to warn of a low battery condition. Turn off all

unneeded electrical accessories. Contact your authorized

dealer.

Battery low See manual

Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the

warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Check Charging System

Displayed when the battery management system detects an

extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will

be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of

the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system

voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled

features will operate again as normal

Low Battery Features

Temporarily Turned Off

Displayed when the battery management system determines

that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition

off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message

will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery

state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary elec-

trical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

Turn Power Off to Save

Battery

Battery and Charging System (High Voltage)

ActionMessage

Displays when confirmation is needed that the vehicle is

unplugged before a start is allowed. You must make sure the

vehicle is unplugged and respond to the message prompt

before starting your vehicle.

Is Vehicle Plugged-In?

Displays when the stop safety hazard warning lamp is illumin-

ated. This indicates an electrical component fault/failure that

will cause the vehicle to shut down or enter into limited

operating mode.

Stop Safely Now

Displays when the vehicle is ready to drive.Ready to Drive

Displays when the vehicle detects it is still plugged in and the

power is activated.

Unplug Prior to Starting

Vehicle

Information Displays

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

ActionMessage

Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot System Fault

Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact your

authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind Spot

Monitor (page 192).

Blindspot Not Available

Sensor Blocked See

Manual

Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot

Monitor (page 192).

Cross Traffic Vehicle

Coming From X

Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. See Blind

Spot Monitor (page 192).

Cross Traffic Not Avail-

able Sensor Blocked See

Manual

Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Cross Traffic System

Fault

Collision Warning System

ActionMessage

Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli-

sion warning system. The system will be disabled. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning

Malfunction

Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked

because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/

mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the

sensor to resolve. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

Collision Warning Not

Available Sensor

Blocked See Manual

Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli-

sion warning system. The system will be disabled. Contact

your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not

Available

100

Information Displays

Doors and Locks

ActionMessage

Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and

the vehicle is moving.

X Door Ajar

Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.

Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely

closed.

Trunk ajar

Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited

Security Mode

Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child

locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Child Lock Malfunction

Service Required

Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been

reset.

Factory Keypad Code

XXXXX

Driver Alert

ActionMessage

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest

Now

Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest

Suggested

Fuel

ActionMessage

Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low

Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Displays when EV functionality is disabled and the engine is

running to maintain fuel freshness. See Fuel Quality (page

145).

Fuel Freshness

101

Information Displays

Hill Start Assist

ActionMessage

Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your

authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 164).

Hill Start Assist Not

Available

Keys and Intelligent Access

ActionMessage

Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the

vehicle.

Press Brake to START

Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See

Keyless Starting (page 132).

No Key Detected

Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off

the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not detected inside

the vehicle.

Restart Now or Key is

Needed

Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active

This message is displayed when there is a problem with your

vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for

service.

Starting System Fault

Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while

starting the vehicle.

Press Brake and Clutch

to Start

Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting

the vehicle.

Press Clutch to Start

Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent

access key is programmed to the system.

Key Program Successful

Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent

access key has failed to be programmed.

Key Program Failure

Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum

number of keys have been programmed.

Max Number of Keys

Learned

Displayed during spare key programming when not enough

keys have been programmed.

Not Enough Keys

Learned

Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as

soon as possible.

Key Battery Low Replace

Soon

Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key

using two existing MyKeys.

Could Not Program

Integrated Key

102

Information Displays

Lane Keeping System

ActionMessage

The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Lane Keeping Sys.

Malfunction Service

Required

The system has detected a condition that has caused the

system to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Tempor-

arily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-

shield to be cleaned to operate properly.

Front Camera Low Visib-

ility Clean Screen

The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Front Camera Malfunc-

tion Service Required

Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their

hands on the steering wheel.

Keep Hands on Steering

Wheel

Maintenance

ActionMessage

Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.

Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to

come on with your engine running, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

LOW Engine Oil Pressure

Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.

See Engine Oil Check (page 237).

Change Engine Oil Soon

Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil

Check (page 237).

Oil Change Required

Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system

should be inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check

(page 242).

Brake Fluid Level LOW

Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.

Check Brake System

Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively

high.

Engine Coolant Overtem-

perature

Displays when the motor coolant temperature is excessively

high.

Motor Coolant Overtem-

perature

Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help

reduce high coolant temperatures.

Power Reduced to

Lower Engine Temp

103

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Displayed when the kit needs service. See your authorized

dealer.

Service Tire Mobility Kit

Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport or

Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate

properly. See your authorized dealer.

Transport / Factory

Mode

Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a

powertrain malfunction.

See Manual

Displays when EV functionality is disabled and the engine is

running to maintain oil quality. See Engine Oil Check (page

237).

Oil Maintenance

MyKey

ActionMessage

Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be

programmed.

MyKey Not Created

Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive

Safely

Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and

the MyKey speed limit is on.

Speed Limited to XX

MPH/km/h

Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is

on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

Near Vehicle Top Speed

Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is

reached.

Vehicle at Top Speed of

MyKey Setting

Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive

Safely

Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute

Audio

Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activated.AdvanceTrac On -

MyKey Setting

104

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is

activated.

Traction Control On -

MyKey Setting

Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.MyKey Park Aid Cannot

Be Deactivated

Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings.Lane Keeping Alert On

MyKey Setting

Park Aid

ActionMessage

Displays when the system has detected a condition that

requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking

Aid (page 172).

Check Front Park Aid

Displays when the system has detected a condition that

requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking

Aid (page 172).

Check Rear Park Aid

Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off

Park Brake

ActionMessage

Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running

and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the

warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact

your authorized dealer.

Park Brake Engaged

The electric parking brake system has detected a condition

that requires service. See your authorized dealer.

Park Brake Malfunction

Service Now

Displays when the electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied

Apply Park Brake

Displays when the electric parking brake did not set.Park Brake Not Applied

Re-Apply

Displays when the electric parking brake is running a diagnostic

check.

Park Brake Maintenance

Mode

105

Information Displays

ActionMessage

Displays when the electric parking brake is set, but has not

been released.

Park Brake Use Switch

to Release

Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not be

released and the vehicle is moving.

Press Brake To Release

Park Brake

The electric park brake system has detected a condition that

requires service. See your authorized dealer.

Park Brake Limited

Function Service

Required

Displays when the electric parking brake was not released

causing it to overheat.

Park Brake System

Overheated

Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the vehicle

is started.

Release Park Brake

Displays when the electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied

Displays when the electric parking brake is released.Park Brake Released

Power Steering

ActionMessage

The power steering system has detected a condition that

requires service. See your authorized dealer.

Steering Fault Service

Now

The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a

safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.

Steering Loss Stop

Safely

The power steering system has detected a condition within

the power steering system or passive entry or passive start

system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault

Service Required

Remote Start

ActionMessage

Displays as a reminder to turn the key on to drive the vehicle

after a remote start.

To Drive: Turn Key to On

Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button

to drive the vehicle after a remote start.

To Drive: Press Brake

and Start Button

106

Information Displays

Starting System

ActionMessage

Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the

brake.

Press Brake + Start

Button

Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in

attempting to start the vehicle.

Cranking Time Exceeded

Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending

Please Wait

Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire

pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 280).

LOW Tire Pressure

Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is

malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come

on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 280).

Tire Pressure Monitor

Fault

Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or

your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the

system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 280). If the warning stays on or

continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Tire Pressure Sensor

Fault

Traction Control

ActionMessage

Displays when the traction control system has been switched

off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 170).

Traction Control Off/On

Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard are

activated.

Spinout Detected

Hazards Activated

107

Information Displays

Transmission

ActionMessage

See your authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-

tion Service Now

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a

safe place as soon as it’s possible.

Transmission Over-

heating Stop Safely

See your authorized dealer.Transmission Service

Required

Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot

Press Brake

Displays when the transmission has overheated and has

limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page

162).

Transmission Limited

Function See Manual

Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you

drive.

Transmission Warming

Up Please Wait

Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Shift to Park

Displays to request the operator to apply the brake as needed

by the transmission.

Press Brake Pedal

Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift

strategy.

Transmission Adjusted

Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt

Mode

Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unable

to select gears.

Transmission Indicate

Mode Lockup On

Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and

free to select gears.

Transmission Indicate

Mode Lockup Off

Displays when the transmission shift lever has selected an

invalid gear.

Invalid Gear Selected

108

Information Displays

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

E144492

Driver temperature control: Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature

for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side

temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and

recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the

passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool

the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering

your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes

except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

- Fan speed control: Press to decrease the volume of air circulated in your

vehicle.

Fan speed indicator: Illuminates to indicate fan speed. When the system is

controlling the fan automatically, all of the fan speed indicators turn off.

Airflow distribution control: Press these buttons to turn airflow from the

windshield, instrument panel and footwell vents. The system can distribute air

through any combination of these air vents. At least one of these buttons

remains on while the system is on. When the system is controlling air distribution

automatically, indicators for all of these buttons turn off.

+ Fan speed control: Press to increase the volume of air circulated in your

vehicle.

109

Climate Control

AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired

temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts

fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat

or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.

Passenger temperature control: Turn to increase or decrease the air

temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated

Windows and Mirrors (page 115).

MAX Defrost: Press to switch on. The system distributes outside air through

the windshield air vents, the air conditioning automatically turns on, and the

fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. When MAX defrost is on,

recirculated air cannot be selected (to prevent fogging). The heated rear window

is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected.

Power: Press the button to turn the system off and on. When the system is off,

outside air cannot enter the vehicle.

Heated seat (if equipped): Turn the driver or passenger heated seats on and

off. See Heated Seats (page 123).

MAX A/C: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.

When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the passenger compartment

recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used

with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX

A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning off and on. To improve air

conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open

for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling

performance and efficiency.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: You can switch temperature units

between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See

Settings (page 358).

110

Climate Control

E144493

Driver heated seat control: Turn the driver heated seat off and on. See

Heated Seats (page 123).

Driver temperature control: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air

temperature for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the

passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.

Power: Press to turn the system off and on. When the system is off, outside

air cannot enter the vehicle.

Fan speed control: Press on either side of the fan icon to increase or decrease

the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.

Passenger temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease the

air temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.

Passenger heated seat control: Turn the passenger heated seat off and on.

See Heated Seats (page 123).

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and

recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the

passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool

the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering

your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes

except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning off and on. To improve air

conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open

for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling

performance and efficiency.

111

Climate Control

MAX A/C: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.

When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the passenger compartment

recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used

with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX

A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired

temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts

fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat

or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.

Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated

Windows and Mirrors (page 115).

Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and de-mister

vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin

covering of ice.

MAX Defrost: Press to switch on. The system distributes outside air through

the windshield air vents, the air conditioning automatically turns on, and the

fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. When MAX defrost is on,

recirculated air cannot be selected (to prevent fogging). The heated rear window

is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: You can switch temperature units

between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See

Settings (page 358).

112

Climate Control

E144494

AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired

temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts

fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat

or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.

CLIMATE: Press to turn the climate control system on and off. When the system

is off, outside air cannot enter the vehicle.

MAX A/C: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air.

When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the passenger compartment

recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used

with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX

A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning off and on. To improve air

conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open

for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling

performance and efficiency.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and

recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the

passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool

the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering

your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes

except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.

Passenger temperature control: Allows the passenger to set their

temperature independent of the driver temperature. Press + or - to increase or

decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle when in dual

zone mode.

113

Climate Control

Fan speed control: Press the small fan icon or large fan icon to decrease or

increase the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.

Driver temperature control: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air

temperature inside the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side

temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.

MAX Defrost: Press to switch on. The system distributes outside air through

the windshield air vents, the air conditioning automatically turns on, and the

fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. When MAX defrost is on,

recirculated air cannot be selected (to prevent fogging). The heated rear window

is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected.

Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated

Windows and Mirrors (page 115).

Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and de-mister

vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin

covering of ice.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE

INTERIOR CLIMATE

General Hints

Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may

cause the windows to fog up.

Note: You may feel a small amount of air

from the footwell air vents regardless of the

air distribution setting.

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside

your vehicle, do not drive with the system

switched off or with recirculated air always

switched on.

Note: Do not place objects under the front

seats as this may interfere with the airflow

to the rear seats.

Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from

the air intake area at the base of the

windshield.

Automatic Climate Control

Note: Adjusting the settings when your

vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is

not necessary. The system automatically

adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your

selected temperature as quickly as possible.

For the system to function efficiently, the

instrument panel and side air vents should

be fully open.

Note: At low ambient temperatures with

AUTO selected, the system directs airflow

to the windshield and side window vents

and fan may run at a slow speed until the

engine warms up.

Heating the Interior Quickly

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting.

Recommended Settings for

Heating

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to a

comfortable setting.

114

Climate Control

Cooling the Interior Quickly

1. Press the MAX A/C button.

2. Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting.

Recommended Settings for

Cooling

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the temperature to a

comfortable setting.

Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather

1. Press the defrost button.

2. Adjust the temperature control to the

desired setting.

HEATED WINDOWS AND

MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)

Heated Rear Window

Note: You must switch the ignition on to

use this feature.

Press the button to clear the rear window

of thin ice and fog. Press the button again

within 10 minutes to switch it off. It

switches off automatically after 10

minutes, or when you switch the ignition

off.

Do not use razor blades or other sharp

objects to clean the inside of the rear

window or to remove decals from the

inside of the rear window. This may

cause damage to the heated grid lines.

Your warranty does not cover this

damage.

Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors

with a scraper or attempt to readjust the

mirror glass that has frozen in place. These

actions could cause damage to the glass

and mirrors.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other

petroleum-based cleaning products.

The heated mirrors remove ice, mist and

fog when you switch on the heated rear

window.

CABIN AIR FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air

filter. It is located behind the glove box.

The particulate filtration system reduces

the concentration of airborne particles

such as dust, spores and pollen in the air

supplied to the interior of your vehicle.

Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter

installed at all times. This prevents foreign

objects from entering the system. Running

the system without a filter in place could

result in degradation or damage to the

system.

The particulate filtration system gives you

and your passengers the following

benefits:

• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.

• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.

• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.

Replace the filter at regular intervals. See

Scheduled Maintenance (page 438).

For additional cabin air filter information,

or to replace the filter, see an authorized

dealer.

115

Climate Control

REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)

The climate control system adjusts the

cabin temperature during remote start.

You cannot adjust the system during

remote start operation. Turn the ignition

on to return the system to its previous

settings. You can now make adjustments.

You need to turn certain

vehicle-dependent features back on, such

as:

• heated seats

• heated mirrors

• heated rear window.

You can adjust the settings using the

information display controls. See

Information Displays (page 84).

Automatic Settings

You can set the climate control to operate

in AUTO mode through the information

display setting: Remote Start > Climate

Control > Heater-A/C > Auto. The climate

control system automatically sets the

interior temperature to 72°F (22°C).

In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F

(22°C).

In moderate weather, the system either

heats or cools (based on previous

settings). The rear defroster, heated

mirrors and heated seats do not

automatically turn on.

In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F

(22°C). The heated seats are set to high

(if available, and selected to AUTO in the

information display). The rear defroster

and heated mirrors automatically turn on.

Last Settings

You can set the climate control to operate

using the last climate control settings

through the information display setting:

Remote Start > Climate Control >

Heater–A/C > Last Settings. The climate

control system automatically uses the

settings last selected before you turned

off the engine.

Heated and Cooled Devices

The climate control system controls other

heated and cooled devices inside the

vehicle. You can switch these devices on

(if available, and selected to AUTO in the

information displays) during remote start.

Heated devices usually switch on during

cold weather, and cooled devices during

hot weather.

116

Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECT

POSITION

WARNINGS

Sitting improperly, out of position or

with the seat back reclined too far

can take weight off the seat cushion

and affect the decision of the passenger

sensing system, resulting in serious injury

or death in the event of a crash. Always sit

upright against your seat back, with your

feet on the floor.

Do not recline the seat back as this

can cause the occupant to slide

under the safety belt, resulting in

serious injury in the event of a crash.

Do not place objects higher than the

seat back to reduce the risk of

serious injury in the event of a crash

or during heavy braking.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,

head restraint, safety belt and air bags will

provide optimum protection in the event

of a crash.

We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:

• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.

• Do not recline the seat back more than

30 degrees.

• Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of your

head and as far forward as possible.

Make sure that you remain

comfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance between

yourself and the steering wheel. We

recommend a minimum of 10 inches

(25 centimeters) between your

breastbone and the air bag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your arms

slightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you can

press the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of the

safety belt over the center of your

shoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position is

comfortable and that you can maintain full

control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGS

Fully adjust the head restraint before

you sit in or operate your vehicle. This

will help minimize the risk of neck

injury in the event of a collision. Do not

adjust the head restraint when your vehicle

is moving.

The head restraint is a safety device.

Whenever possible it should be

installed and properly adjusted when

the seat is occupied.

117

Seats

WARNINGS

Install the head restraint properly to

help minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a collision.

Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright

driving position before adjusting the head

restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that

the top of it is level with the top of your head

and as far forward as possible. Make sure

that you remain comfortable. If you are

extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to

its highest position.

Front seat and rear seat outboard head

restraints

E138642

Rear center head restraint

E138645

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing head

restraint

Two steel stemsB

Guide sleeve adjust and unlock

button

Guide sleeve unlock and remove

button

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Raising the Head Restraint

Pull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button C.

2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint

1. Pull the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.

2. Press and hold buttons C and D.

3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head Restraint

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves

and push the head restraint down until in

locks.

Tilting Head Restraints

The front head restraints have a tilting

feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head

restraint, do the following:

118

Seats

E144727

1. Adjust the seat back to an upright

driving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward

your head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches the

forward-most tilt position, pivoting it

forward again will then release it to the

rearward, un-tilted position.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNINGS

Do not adjust the driver's seat or seat

back when your vehicle is moving.

Rock the seat backward and forward

after releasing the lever to make sure

that it is fully engaged.

WARNINGS

Reclining the seat back can cause an

occupant to slide under the seat's

safety belt, resulting in severe

personal injuries in the event of a crash.

The manual front seats consist of:

A B

E157060

a bar to move the seat backward

and forward

a lever to adjust the angle of the

seat back.

POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Do not adjust the driver's seat or

seatback when your vehicle is

moving.

Do not place cargo or any objects

behind the seatback before returning

it to the original position.

119

Seats

E144632

Power Lumbar (If Equipped)

E165608

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Before activating the seat memory,

make sure that the area immediately

surrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants are

clear of moving parts.

Do not use the memory function

when your vehicle is moving.

This feature will automatically recall the

position of the driver's seat and power

mirrors. The memory control is located on

the driver’s door.

120

Seats

E142554

Saving a Pre-Set Position

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to

your desired position.

3. Press and hold the desired pre-set

button until you hear a single chime.

Up to three pre-set memory positions may

be saved. A memory pre-set may be saved

at any time.

Recalling a Pre-Set Position

Press and release the pre-set button

associated with your desired driving

position. The seat and mirrors will move to

the position stored for that pre-set.

Note: A pre-set memory position can only

be recalled when the ignition is off, or when

the transmission selector lever is in position

P or N (and your vehicle is not moving) if

the ignition is on.

A pre-set memory position can also be

recalled by pressing the unlock button on

your remote control or intelligent access

key if it is linked to a pre-set position, or by

a driver door handle unlock with an

intelligent access key present.

Linking a Pre-Set Position to your

Remote Control or Intelligent

Access Key

Your vehicle can save the pre-set memory

positions for up to three remote controls

or intelligent access (IA) keys.

1. With the ignition on, move the memory

positions to the desired positions.

2. Press and hold the desired pre-set

button for about five seconds. A chime

will sound after about two seconds.

Continue holding until a second chime

is heard.

3. Within three seconds, press the lock

button on the remote control you are

linking. A single chime will sound.

To unlink a remote control, follow the

same procedure – except in step 3, press

the unlock button on the remote control.

Note: To stop seat movement during a

recall, press any driver seat adjustment

control, any of the memory buttons, or any

mirror control switch.

Seat movement will also stop if you move

your vehicle.

Note: If more than one linked remote

control or IA key is in range, the memory

function will move to the settings of the first

key stored.

Easy Entry and Exit Function

If you enable the easy entry and exit

feature, it automatically moves the driver

seat position rearward up to five

centimeters when the transmission

selector lever is in position P and the key

is removed or the keyless start ignition is

turned off.

The driver seat will return to the previous

position when the key is put in the ignition

or the keyless start ignition is activated.

121

Seats

You can turn off the easy entry and exit

feature by using the driver information

display.

REAR SEATS

Note: Your vehicle may have split seat

backs that must be folded individually.

To lower the seat back(s) from inside the

vehicle, do the following:

E144634

1. Pull the handle to release the seat

back.

2. Push the seat back forward.

E164098

3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage

clip. This will prevent the safety belt

from getting caught in the seat latch.

When raising the seat back(s), make sure

you hear the seat latch into place.

122

Seats

HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

People who are unable to feel pain

to their skin because of advanced

age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal

cord injury, medication, alcohol use,

exhaustion or other physical conditions,

must exercise care when using the heated

seat. The heated seat may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if

used for long periods of time. Do not place

anything on the seat that insulates against

heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This

may cause the heated seat to overheat.

Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles

or other pointed objects. This may damage

the heating element which may cause the

heated seat to overheat. An overheated

seat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.

• Operate the heated seat if water or any

other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow

the seat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless the

engine is running. Doing so can cause

the battery to lose charge.

E146941

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle

through the various heat settings and off.

Warmer settings are indicated by more

indicator lights.

VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

The ventilated seats will only function

when the engine is running.

To operate the ventilated seats:

E146309

Press the ventilated seat symbol to cycle

through the various cooling settings and

off. Cooler settings are indicated by more

indicator lights.

If the engine falls below 350 RPM while

the ventilated seats are on, the feature will

turn itself off and will need to be

reactivated.

Heated and ventilated seat air

filter replacement (if equipped)

The climate controlled seat system

includes air filters. You must replace them

periodically.

The filters are located under each front

seat. You can access them from the

second row foot-well area. Move the front

seats all the way forward and to the full

up positions to ease access.

123

Seats

E146319

To remove an air filter:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Push up on the outside rigid edge of

the filter and rotate counterclockwise

once the tabs are released, then

remove the filter.

E146321

To install a filter:

1. First, position the filter in its housing

making sure that the far forward end

is all the way up in the housing.

2. Push in on the center of the outside

edge of the filter and rotate clockwise

into the housing until it clips into

position.

REAR SEAT ARMREST

E144635

Fold the armrest down to use the armrest

and cupholder.

124

Seats

HomeLink Wireless Control

System (If Equipped)

WARNING

Do not use the system with any

garage door opener that does not

have the safety stop and reverse

feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety

Standards (this includes any garage door

opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).

A garage door opener which cannot detect

an object, signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features increases

the risk of serious injury or death.

Note: Make sure that the garage door and

security device are free from obstruction

when you are programming. Do not program

the system with the vehicle in the garage.

Note: Make sure you keep the original

remote control transmitter for use in other

vehicles as well as for future system

programming.

Note: We recommend that upon the sale

or lease termination of your vehicle, you

erase the programmed function buttons for

security reasons. See Erasing the function

button codes later in this section.

Note: You can program a maximum of

three devices. To change or replace any of

the three devices after it has been initially

programmed, you must first erase the

current settings. See Erasing the function

button codes later in this section.

E142657

The universal garage door opener replaces

the common hand-held garage door

opener with a three-button transmitter

that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.

The system includes two primary features,

a garage door opener and a platform for

remote activation of devices within the

home. As well as being programmed for

garage doors, the system transmitter can

be programmed to operate entry gate

operators, security systems, entry door

locks and home or office lighting.

Additional system information can be

found online at www.homelink.com or by

calling the toll-free help line on

1-800-355-3515.

In-vehicle programming

This process is to program your hand-held

transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink

button.

Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held

transmitter. This will ensure quicker training

and accurate transmission of the

radio-frequency signal.

E142658

1. With your vehicle parked outside of the

garage, turn your ignition to the on

position, but do not start your vehicle.

2. Hold your hand-held garage door

transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8

centimeters) away from the HomeLink

button you want to program.

125

Universal Garage Door Opener

3. Using both hands, simultaneously,

press and hold the desired HomeLink

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. DO NOT release either one until

the HomeLink indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. The rapid

flashing indicates successful training.

4. Press and hold the HomeLink button

you programmed for five seconds, then

release. You may need to do this twice

to activate the door. If your garage door

does not operate, watch the HomeLink

indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on, the

programming is complete. See

Programming your garage door motor

later in this section.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2

seconds and then turns to a constant light,

the HomeLink button is not programmed

yet. Do the following:

Press and hold the HomeLink button while

you press and release the hand-held

transmitter button every 2 seconds. The

HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly

and then rapidly once the HomeLink

function button recognizes and accepts

the hand-held transmitter’s radio

frequency signal.

After programming the HomeLink button,

begin programming your garage door

opener motor.

Note: You may need a ladder to reach the

unit and you may need to remove the cover

or lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

To program additional buttons, repeat

Steps 1 – 4.

For questions or comments, please contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or

1-800-355-3515.

Programming your garage door opener

motor

1. Press the learn button on the garage

door opener motor and then you have

30 seconds to complete the next two

steps.

2. Return to your vehicle.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button you

want to program for 2 seconds, then

release. Repeat this step. Depending

on your brand of garage door opener,

you may need to repeat this sequence

a third time.

Erasing the Function Button Codes

Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

126

Universal Garage Door Opener

E142660

1. Press and hold the outer two function

buttons simultaneously for

approximately 20 seconds until the

indicator lights above the buttons flash

rapidly.

2. When the indicator lights flash, release

the buttons. The codes for all buttons

are erased.

Reprogramming a Single Button

To program a device to a previously trained

button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired button. Do

NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

button, follow Step 1 in the

Programming section.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or

1-800-355-3515.

Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2

Garage Door Opener

Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter

must already be programmed to operate

with the garage door opener.

Note: To program HomeLink to the

transmitter you must first put the

transmitter into programming mode.

E142661

Red indicator lightA.

Green indicator lightB.

1. Press and hold one of the buttons on

the hand-held transmitter for 10

seconds. The indicator light will change

from green to red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirm

the change to programming mode. If

done properly the indicator light will

appear red.

3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches

(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the

visor you want to program.

4. Press and hold both the programmed

Genie button on the hand-held

transmitter and the button you want

to program. The indicator light on the

visor will flash rapidly when the

programming is successful.

Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit

for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not

program within 30 seconds the Genie

transmitter will need to be pressed again. If

the Genie transmitter indicator light displays

green and red, release the button until the

indicator light turns off before pressing the

button again.

Once HomeLink has been programmed

successfully, the Genie transmitter must

be changed out of program mode. To do

this:

127

Universal Garage Door Opener

1. Press and hold the previously

programmed Genie button on the

hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.

The indicator light will change from red

to red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirm

the change. If done correctly the

indicator light will turn green.

Programming HomeLink to the Genie

Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor

Note: You may need a ladder to access the

garage door opener motor.

E142662

1. Press and hold the program button on

the garage door opener motor until

both blue indicator lights turn on.

2. Release the program button. Only the

smaller round indicator light should be

on.

3. Press and release the program button.

The larger purple indicator light will

flash.

Note: The next two steps must be

completed in 30 seconds.

4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode

2 hand-held transmitter’s previously

programmed button. Both indicator

lights on the garage door opener motor

unit should now flash purple.

5. Press and hold the previously

programmed button on the visor for 2

seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times

until the garage door moves.

Programming is now complete.

Clearing a HomeLink Device

To erase programming from the three

HomeLink buttons press and hold the two

outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash. The indicator light will

begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which

time both buttons should be released.

Programming has now been erased, and

the indicator light should blink slowly to

indicate the device is in train mode when

any of the three HomeLink buttons are

pressed.

FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications to your device

not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance can void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

128

Universal Garage Door Opener

12 Volt DC Power Point

WARNING

Do not plug optional electrical

accessories into the cigar lighter

socket (if equipped). Improper use

of the lighter can cause damage not

covered by your warranty, and can result

in fire or serious injury.

Note: If used when the vehicle is not

running, the battery will discharge. There

may be insufficient power to restart your

vehicle.

Note: Do not insert objects other than an

accessory plug into the power point. This

will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.

Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or

accessory bracket from the plug.

Note: Do not use the power point over the

vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or

a fuse may blow.

Note: Do not use the power point for

operating a cigar lighter element.

Note: Improper use of the power point can

cause damage not covered by your

warranty.

Note: Always keep the power point caps

closed when not in use.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the

power point. To prevent the battery from

being discharged:

• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the vehicle is not

running.

• Do not leave devices plugged in

overnight or when the vehicle is parked

for extended periods.

Locations

Power points may be found:

• in the front of the center console

• inside the center console storage bin

• on the rear of the center console.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

WARNING

Do not keep electrical devices

plugged in the power point whenever

the device is not in use. Do not use

any extension cord with the 110 volt AC

power point, since it will defeat the safety

protection design. Doing so my cause the

power point to overload due to powering

multiple devices that can reach beyond

the 150 watt load limit and could result in

fire or serious injury.

Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the

power point.

E143941

The power point is used for powering

electrical devices that require up to 150

watts. It is located on the rear of the center

console.

When the indicator light, located on the

power point, is:

• on — power point is ready to supply

power.

• off — power point power supply is off;

ignition is not on.

• flashing — power point is in fault mode.

129

Auxiliary Power Points

The power point temporarily turns off

power if the 150 watt limit is exceeded. It

can also switch to a fault mode when it is

overloaded, overheated, or shorted. Unplug

your device and switch the ignition off then

on for overloading and shorting conditions.

Let the system cool off, then turn the

ignition off then on for an overheating

condition.

The power point is not designed for electric

devices such as:

• Cathode ray tube type televisions

• Motor loads, for example vacuum

cleaners, electric saws and other

electric power tools, or

compressor-driven refrigerators

• Measuring devices which process

precise data, for example medical

equipment or measuring equipment

• Other appliances requiring an

extremely stable power supply, for

example microcomputer-controlled

electric blankets or touch sensor lamps

130

Auxiliary Power Points

CENTER CONSOLE

Stow items in the cupholder carefully as

items may become loose during hard

braking, acceleration or collisions, including

hot drinks which may spill.

Available console features include:

E143942

CupholderA

Storage compartment with

auxiliary power point, auxiliary

input jack, USB port and media

hub

Auxiliary power pointC

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E75193

Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.

131

Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving

characteristics for approximately 5 miles

(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This

is because the engine management system

must realign itself with the engine. You can

disregard any unusual driving

characteristics during this period.

WARNINGS

Extended idling at high engine

speeds can produce very high

temperatures in the engine and

exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or

other damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle

on dry grass or other dry ground

cover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaust

system, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closed

garage or in other enclosed areas.

Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start the

engine.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside

your vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by your authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if

you smell exhaust fumes.

The powertrain control system meets all

Canadian interference-causing equipment

standard requirements regulating the

impulse electrical field or radio noise.

When you start the engine, avoid pressing

the accelerator pedal before and during

operation. Only use the accelerator pedal

when you have difficulty starting the

engine.

IGNITION SWITCH

E72128

0 (off) - The ignition is off.

Note: When you switch the ignition off and

leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in

the ignition. This could cause your vehicle

battery to lose charge.

I (accessory) - Allows the electrical

accessories, such as the radio, to operate

while the engine is not running.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this

position for too long. This could cause your

vehicle battery to lose charge.

II (on) - All electrical circuits are

operational and the warning lamps and

indicators illuminate.

III (start) - cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING

Note: The keyless starting system may not

function if the key is close to metal objects

or electronic devices such as cellular

phones.

Note: A valid key must be located inside

your vehicle to switch the ignition on and

start the engine.

132

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Ignition Modes

E144447

The keyless starting system has three

modes:

•Off: Turns the ignition off.

• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once

when the ignition is in the on mode,

or when the engine is running but

the vehicle is not moving.

•On: All electrical circuits are

operational and the warning lamps and

indicators illuminate.

• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once.

•Start: Starts the engine.

• Press the brake pedal, and then

press the button for any length of

time. An indicator light on the

button illuminates when then

ignition is on and when the engine

starts.

STARTING A GASOLINE

ENGINE

When the engine starts for the first time

on your drive, the idle speed increases, this

helps to warm up the engine. If the engine

idle speed does not slow down

automatically, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized dealer.

Note: You can crank the engine for a total

of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)

before the starting system temporarily

disables. The 60 seconds does not have to

be all at once. For example, if you crank the

engine three times for 20 seconds each

time, without the engine starting, you

reached the 60-second time limit. A

message appears in the information display

alerting you that you exceeded the cranking

time. You cannot attempt to start the engine

for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you

are limited to a 15-second engine cranking

time. You need to wait 60 minutes before

you can crank the engine for 60 seconds

again.

Before starting the vehicle, check the

following:

• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their safety belts.

• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.

• Make sure the parking brake is on.

• Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

• Turn the ignition key to position II. If

your vehicle is equipped with a keyless

ignition, see the following instructions.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

1. Fully press the brake pedal.

2. Turn the key to position III to start the

vehicle. Release the key when the

vehicle starts.

Note: The engine may continue cranking

for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.

Note: If you cannot start the engine on the

first try, wait for a short period and try again.

Vehicles with Keyless Start

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

1. Fully press the brake pedal.

133

Starting and Stopping the Engine

2. Press the button.

Note: The green ready indicator illuminates

letting you know that the vehicle is ready

for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a silent key start, the engine may not

start at the time of the vehicle start. See

Hybrid Electric Vehicle (page 138).

The system does not function if:

• The key frequencies are jammed.

• The key battery has no charge.

If you are unable to start the vehicle, do

the following:

E147165

1. Locate the key backup slot in center

console utility compartment.

2. With the buttons facing the rear of the

vehicle and the key ring up, place the

key into backup slot.

3. With the key in this position, press the

brake pedal, and then the button to

switch on the vehicle.

Fast Restart

The fast restart feature allows you to

restart the engine within 20 seconds of

switching it off, even if a valid key is not

present.

Within 20 seconds of switching the engine

off, press the brake pedal and press the

button. After 20 seconds have expired, you

can no longer restart the vehicle without

the key present inside your vehicle.

Once the vehicle has started, it remains

running until you press the button, even if

the system does not detect a valid key. If

you open and close a door while the vehicle

is running, the system searches for a valid

key. You cannot restart the engine if the

system does not detect a valid key within

20 seconds.

Automatic Shutdown

This feature automatically shuts down the

vehicle if it has been idling for an extended

period. The ignition also turns off in order

to save battery power. Before the vehicle

shuts down, a message appears in the

information display showing a timer

counting down from 30 seconds. If you do

not intervene within 30 seconds, the

vehicle shuts down. Another message

appears in the information display to

inform you that the vehicle has shut down

in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as

you normally do.

Automatic Shutdown Override

Note: You cannot permanently switch off

the automatic shutdown feature. When you

switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the

next ignition cycle.

You can stop the shutdown, or reset the

timer, at any point before the 30-second

countdown has expired by doing any of the

following:

134

Starting and Stopping the Engine

• You can reset the timer by interacting

with your vehicle (such as pressing the

brake pedal or accelerator pedal).

• You can temporarily switch off the

shutdown feature any time the ignition

is on (for the current ignition cycle

only). Use the information display to

do so. See Information Displays

(page 84).

• During the countdown before

shutdown, you are prompted to press

OK or RESET (depending on your type

of information display) to temporarily

switch the feature off (for the current

ignition cycle only).

Switching Off the Vehicle When It

Is Stationary

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

2. Turn the key to position 0.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.

2. Press the button once.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Note: This switches off the ignition, all

electrical circuits, warning lamps and

indicators.

Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,

the ignition and engine automatically shut

down.

Switching Off the Vehicle When It

Is Moving

WARNING

Switching off the engine when the

vehicle is still moving will result in a

loss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not lock, but higher effort

will be required. When the ignition is

switched off, some electrical circuits,

warning lamps and indicators may also be

off.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position N and use the brakes to

bring your vehicle to a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, move

the transmission selector lever to

position P and turn the key to position

3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start

1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position N and use the brakes to

bring your vehicle to a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, move

the transmission selector lever to

position P.

3. Press and hold the button for one

second, or press it three times within

two seconds.

4. Apply the parking brake.

135

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

WARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes inside

your vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by your authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if

you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon

monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.

Take precautions to avoid its dangerous

effects.

Important Ventilating Information

If you stop your vehicle and the leave the

engine idling for long periods, we

recommend that you do one of the

following:

• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5

centimeters)

• Set your climate control to outside air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Failure to follow engine block heater

instructions could result in property

damage or serious personal injury.

Do not use your heater with

ungrounded electrical systems or

two-pronged adapters. There is a risk

of electrical shock.

Note: The heater is most effective when

outdoor temperatures are below 0°F

(-18°C).

The heater acts as a starting aid by

warming the engine coolant. This allows

the climate control system to respond

quickly. The equipment includes a heater

element (installed in the engine block) and

a wire harness. You can connect the

system to a grounded 120-volt AC

electrical source.

We recommend that you do the following

for a safe and correct operation:

• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified by

Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or

Canadian Standards Association

(CSA). This extension cord must be

suitable for use outdoors, in cold

temperatures, and be clearly marked

Suitable for Use with Outdoor

Appliances. Do not use an indoor

extension cord outdoors. This could

result in an electric shock or become a

fire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord as

possible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.

• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cord

plug connections are free and clear of

water. This could cause an electric

shock or fire.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a

clean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord and

extension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in the

electrical hookup once the system has

been operating for approximately 30

minutes.

• Make sure the heater system is

checked for proper operation before

winter.

136

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Using the Engine Block Heater

The engine block heater plug is located in

a housing in the left fog lamp bezel. Open

the hinged, circular door and make sure

the receptacle terminals are clean and dry

prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if

necessary.

The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours

of energy per hour of use. The system does

not have a thermostat. It will achieve

maximum temperature after

approximately three hours of operation. If

you use the heater longer than three hours,

this will not improve system performance

and will use unnecessary electricity.

137

Starting and Stopping the Engine

HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE

Plug-in Power Mode and Hybrid

Mode (Fusion Energi Only)

You must plug in your Fusion Energi vehicle

regularly for optimal use of the high

voltage battery's extended range

capability. When you charge your vehicle,

you add electrical energy that is then used

to propel the vehicle in plug-in power

mode. Your estimated electric range in this

mode is shown in an enhanced battery

gauge on the instrument panel display.

Electric only operation is maximized in

plug-in power mode. System conditions

may require engine operation; however,

plug-in power will be used whenever

possible.

When your plug-in power has been

depleted, the powertrain system will

automatically switch to hybrid mode. Your

battery gauge will show an electric range

of zero before transitioning to a simple

battery graphic upon entering hybrid mode.

Hybrid mode uses both the gasoline engine

and electric motor to power your vehicle

and maximize fuel economy as with Fusion

Hybrid.

EV Modes (Fusion Energi Only)

E144814

Your vehicle contains selectable

EV modes through the EV button

on the center console.

These modes are available when the

vehicle can run under high voltage battery

power. With the vehicle in driving mode,

you can change EV modes with each press

of the EV button. The current mode

displays in the left hand instrument cluster

screen.

Auto EV

E155152

This mode provides an

automatic use of high voltage

battery power during the drive,

staying in electric mode when possible and

running the engine when needed. This

mode will be the only one available if the

plug-in power has been depleted.

EV Now

E144814

This mode provides an electric

only driving experience using

plug-in power. The left-hand

information display will change to an

Energy Use screen that supplies EV specific

tools and functions. The vehicle may

accelerate more slowly and the top speed

may be lower than in Auto mode. At any

time, the engine may be enabled by using

one of the following methods:

1. Press the OK button on the left 5–way

steering wheel control while viewing

the EV screen. The vehicle will enable

the engine as needed, and will

automatically return to EV Now after

eight seconds or when the engine is no

longer needed.

2. Press the accelerator pedal fully. A pop

up message stating Press OK to

Enable Engine will appear. Press OK

on the left steering wheel button to

activate as needed. The message will

disappear if the accelerator pedal is

released.

3. Press the EV button. This will change

the mode to EV Later and permit

engine operation.

The vehicle may automatically enter

Engine Enabled mode if system conditions

require it. A message Engine Enabled for

System Performance will display if this

occurs. This is normal function, and your

vehicle will return to EV Now when

possible.

138

Unique Driving Characteristics

The vehicle may enter Enable Engine mode

if the climate control is in a defrost mode

and the outside temperature is cold. A

message Engine Enabled Due to Defrost

will display if this occurs. If defrost is not

needed, select a different climate control

mode to permit EV Now.

There is a blue EV icon that is displayed in

the left-hand information display when EV

Now is enabled. If the vehicle is in the

Engine Enabled mode, the EV icon will be

yellow.

EV Now will automatically exit when the

Plug in power has been depleted.

EV Later

E151263

This mode saves most of the

high voltage battery plug in

power for future use (for

example, your initial drive is at high speeds

on open roads, but later your drive will be

at low speeds in an urban area where

plug-in power usage is most efficient).

Your vehicle will run the engine as needed

and keep most of the high voltage battery

plug in power for later use in Auto Mode or

EV Now mode.

There is a white EV Later icon that appears

on the left-hand information display when

EV Later is enabled.

The EV Later mode will automatically reset

to EV Auto mode when the vehicle is

powered off. You may press the EV button

twice during the next drive to return to EV

Later mode, if desired.

Hybrid Vehicle Operation (Fusion

Hybrid and Fusion Energi)

This hybrid vehicle combines electric and

gasoline propulsion to provide

breakthrough performance and improved

efficiency. Familiarizing yourself with these

unique characteristics will provide an

optimal driving experience from your new

vehicle.

Note: You may notice higher engine speeds

upon start-up. This temporary condition is

normal and necessary to heat up the cabin

and minimize emissions.

E144692

Starting: When you start your

vehicle, a green ready indicator

light will appear in the lower right

portion of the instrument cluster and a

ready to drive message will appear in the

middle of the left cluster screen, letting

you know that the vehicle is ready for

driving.

The engine may not start because this

vehicle is equipped with silent key start.

This fuel saving feature allows your vehicle

to be ready–to–drive without requiring the

gas engine to be running. This indicator will

remain on while the vehicle is on, whether

the engine is running or not to indicate the

vehicle is capable of movement (using its

electric motor, engine, or both). Typically,

the engine will not start unless the vehicle

is cold, a climate control change is

requested, or the accelerator is pressed.

Driving: The gas engine automatically

starts and stops to provide power when

needed and to save fuel when not needed.

While coasting at low speeds, coming to

a stop, or standing, the gas engine normally

shuts down and the vehicle operates in

electric-only mode. Conditions that may

cause the engine to start up or remain

running include:

• considerable vehicle acceleration

• vehicle speed above 60 mph (96

km/h) For Fusion Energi vehicles, you

can drive up to 85 mph [137 km/h] in

EV mode.

• ascending a hill

• charge level of high voltage battery is

low

139

Unique Driving Characteristics

• very high or low outside temperature

(to provide system cooling or heating)

For Fusion Energi vehicles, climate

control demands by passengers may

not directly cause the engine to run.

This only occurs when the high voltage

battery charge is low, or if the outside

temperature is cold enough to require

the engine to provide additional heat

for the cabin.

• engine not warm enough to provide

passenger requested cabin

temperature.

Stopping: The gas engine may shut off

to conserve fuel as you come to a stop.

Restarting the vehicle is not required.

Simply step on the accelerator when you

are ready to drive.

Transmission Operation: Due to the

technologically advanced,

electronically-controlled continuously

variable transaxle, you will not feel shift

changes like those of a non-hybrid vehicle.

Note: Since engine speed is controlled by

the transmission, it may seem elevated at

times. This is normal hybrid operation and

helps deliver fuel efficiency and

performance.

Neutral: It is not recommended to idle the

vehicle in position N for extended periods

of time because this will discharge your

high voltage battery and decrease fuel

economy. The engine will not start or stop,

and cannot provide power to the hybrid

system in position N.

Low Gear: Low gear (position L) is

designed to mimic the enhanced engine

braking available in non-hybrid vehicles.

Low gear will produce high engine speeds

to provide necessary engine braking. This

is normal and will not damage your vehicle.

In low gear, the gas engine will remain on

more often than in position D.

Reverse: In position R, vehicle speed is

limited to 22 mph (35 km/h).

Unique Hybrid Operating

Characteristics

Your vehicle behaves differently compared

to a non-hybrid. Here is a description of the

major differences:

Battery: Your hybrid is equipped with a

high voltage battery. A cool battery ensures

battery life and provides the best possible

performance. Your hybrid high voltage

battery may periodically re-condition itself

to ensure maximum efficiency. You may

notice slight changes in driveability during

this process, but it is an important part of

your hybrid's high voltage battery

optimization features.

The high voltage battery is cooled by cabin

air pulled into the high voltage battery

through vents in the rear package tray.

Avoid placing objects on the package tray

which could block air flow through the

vents.

Engine: The engine speed in your hybrid

is not directly tied to your vehicle speed.

Your vehicle's engine and transmission are

designed to deliver the power you need at

the most efficient engine speed. During

heavy accelerations, your hybrid may reach

high engine speeds (up to 6000 rpm).

In prolonged mountainous driving, you may

see the engine tachometer changing

without your input. This is intentional and

maintains the battery charge level. You

may also notice during extended downhill

driving that your engine continues to run

instead of shutting off.

During this engine braking, the engine stays

on, but it is not using any fuel. You may also

hear a slight whine or whistle when

operating your vehicle. This is the normal

operation of the electric generator in the

hybrid system.

140

Unique Driving Characteristics

During certain events (such as vehicle

servicing) your low voltage 12-volt battery

may become disconnected or disabled.

Once the battery is reconnected and after

driving the vehicle, the engine may

continue to operate for three to five

seconds after the key is turned to off. This

is a normal condition.

Braking: Your hybrid is equipped with

standard hydraulic braking and

regenerative braking. Regenerative braking

is performed by your transmission and it

captures brake energy and stores it in your

high voltage battery.

Driving to optimize fuel economy

Note: Having your engine running is not

always an indication of inefficiency. In some

cases, it is actually more efficient than

driving in electric mode.

Your fuel economy should improve

throughout your hybrid's break-in period.

As with any vehicle, fuel economy can be

significantly impacted by your driving

habits and accessory usage. For best

results, keep in mind these tips:

• Keep the tires properly inflated and

only use the recommended size.

• Aggressive driving increases the

amount of energy required to move

your vehicle. In general, better fuel

economy is achieved with mild to

moderate acceleration and

deceleration. Moderate braking is

particularly important since it allows

you to maximize the energy captured

by the regenerative braking system.

Additional Tips:

• Do not carry extra loads.

• Be mindful of adding external

accessories that may increase

aerodynamic drag.

• Observe posted speed limits.

• Perform all scheduled maintenance.

• There is no need to wait for your engine

to warm up. The vehicle is ready to

drive immediately after starting.

EV+ Mode

Your vehicle will recognize your frequent

destinations and allow for more EV driving

as you approach them. For example, when

nearing your home it should be easier to

stay in electric mode. The EV indicator will

display EV+ when this mode is active. You

should see this approximately 1/8 mile

(200 meters) from a frequent destination.

See Information Displays (page 84).

Note: Frequent destinations are learned by

your vehicle after two to four weeks of use.

These destinations can be cleared with a

Lifetime Summary reset through the

Settings menu.

Note: The EV+ feature can be turned on or

off through the Driver Assist section of the

Settings menu.

141

Unique Driving Characteristics

Frequently asked questions

AnswerQuestion

The high voltage battery is electrically isol-

ated from the rest of the vehicle when the

key is off. When the key is turned to on, high

voltage contactors inside the battery are

closed to make the electricity available to

the motor/generator and enable the vehicle

to drive. The clicks are the sound of these

contactors as they close and open during

start up and shut down.

What are the series of clicks from the cargo

area when I first turn the key in the ignition?

The vehicle's computer will determine if an

engine start is required at key-on. Silent key

start will start the engine if it is necessary

for cabin heating, windshield defrost, or if

the outside temperature is low. (For Fusion

Energi vehicles, the engine may not be

required to operate these functions.)

Why does the engine sometimes start at

key-on?

There are several reasons the engine stays

on for an extended amount of time when

it is first started. One common reason is to

ensure that the emissions components are

warm enough to minimize tailpipe emis-

sions. As the climate gets cooler, this

engine-on time is extended.

Why does it take a long time before the

engine shuts down?

The engine is required to turn on above this

speed to protect the transmission hard-

ware. (For Fusion Energi vehicles, you can

travel up to 85 mph [137 km/h] in EV mode.

Why does my engine never shut down

above 60 mph (96 km/h)

In order to ensure that the climate control

system can begin heating the cabin or

defrosting the windshield as soon as a

driver requests it, the engine coolant

temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot.

Keeping the engine on is required to main-

tain the correct coolant temperature.

Why does my engine stay on when it is

extremely cold outside?

142

Unique Driving Characteristics

AnswerQuestion

Your vehicle's engine and transmission are

designed to deliver the power you need at

the most efficient engine speed. This may

be higher than expected during heavy

accelerations, and may fluctuate during

steady state driving. These are character-

istics of the Atkinson engine cycle and the

transmission technology that help

maximize your hybrid's fuel economy.

Why does my engine rev up so high some-

times when I accelerate?

The fan noise comes from a fan located

outside the high voltage battery. This fan

turns on when the battery requires cooling

air. The fan speed, and associated noise

level, will change according to the amount

of cooling required to maintain good

performance. Maintaining the battery

temperature at optimal conditions also

prolongs the useful life of the battery and

helps to achieve better fuel economy.

What is the fan noise I hear from the rear

of my hybrid?

The engine oil should be changed every

10000 miles (16000 km) or once per year

under normal operating conditions.

What is the engine oil change service

interval?

Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15%

ethanol, 85% gasoline) fuel, but you may

notice slightly reduced fuel economy

because ethanol contains less energy per

gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid vehicle is

not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).

Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how

will it affect my fuel economy?

The high voltage battery system is designed

to last the life of the vehicle and requires

no maintenance.

How long will my high voltage battery last?

Does it need maintenance?

There are no provisions for charging the

high voltage battery from a power supply

external to the vehicle. (For Fusion Energi

vehicles, the vehicle can be plugged into a

110 volt outlet with charge cord provided.)

Can you charge the battery with a plug into

an A/C outlet?

Yes. Your hybrid vehicle can be flat towed

without modification. See Towing (page

207).

Can I tow the hybrid behind my motor home

with all four wheels down?

143

Unique Driving Characteristics

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The

pressure in an overfilled tank may

cause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.

The fuel system may be under

pressure. If you hear a hissing sound

near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel

capless fuel system), do not refuel until

the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray

out, which could cause serious personal

injury.

Automotive fuels can cause serious

injury or death if misused or

mishandled.

The flow of fuel through a fuel pump

nozzle can produce static electricity,

which can cause a fire if fuel is

pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

Fuel ethanol and gasoline may

contain benzene, which is a

cancer-causing agent.

When refueling always shut the

engine off and never allow sparks or

open flames near the filler neck.

Never smoke or use a cell phone while

refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely

hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid

inhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines when

handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling your

vehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle before

refueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as

gasoline is highly toxic and if

swallowed can cause death or

permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,

call a physician immediately, even if no

symptoms are immediately apparent.

The toxic effects of fuel may not be

visible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too

much fuel vapor of any kind can lead

to eye and respiratory tract irritation.

In severe cases, excessive or prolonged

breathing of fuel vapor can cause

serious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If

fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove

contact lenses (if worn), flush with

water for 15 minutes and seek medical

attention. Failure to seek proper

medical attention could lead to

permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed

through the skin. If fuel is splashed on

the skin, clothing or both, promptly

remove contaminated clothing and

wash skin thoroughly with soap and

water. Repeated or prolonged skin

contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes

skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking

“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram

for the treatment of alcoholism.

Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin

contact could cause an adverse

reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious

personal injury or sickness may result.

If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly

wash skin thoroughly with soap and

water. Consult a physician immediately

if you experience an adverse reaction.

144

Fuel and Refueling

FUEL QUALITY

Note: Use of any fuel other than those

recommended may cause powertrain

damage, a loss of vehicle performance and

repairs may not be covered under warranty.

Choosing the Right Fuel

Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED

fuel blended with a maximum of 15%

ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85),

diesel fuel, fuel-methanol, leaded fuel or

any other fuel because it could damage or

impair the emission control system.

Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel

or fuel additives with metallic compounds,

including manganese-based additives. The

use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.

Octane Recommendations

Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump

(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is

recommended. Some fuel stations offer

fuels posted as regular with an octane

rating below 87, particularly in high altitude

areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87

are not recommended.

Do not be concerned if your engine

sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it

knocks heavily while you are using fuel with

the recommended octane rating, see your

authorized dealer to prevent any engine

damage.

Fuel Freshness Mode (Energi

Vehicles Only)

This feature helps keeps the fuel system

functional and the fuel fresh.

If you operate your vehicle mainly in plug-in

power mode using electricity from plugging

in without refueling, the gasoline in your

tank eventually becomes old. Old fuel can

damage the engine and fuel system.

To prevent the fuel from becoming old,

your vehicle will automatically enter fuel

freshness mode. In fuel freshness mode

operates, your vehicle will operate in hybrid

mode causing the gasoline engine to run

in order to consume the fuel in the fuel

tank.

Note: If new fuel is not added during an 18

month period, fuel freshness mode will

consume fuel until about 1 gallon (3.8 liters)

is left in the tank.

During fuel freshness mode:

• The information display screen will

indicate that fuel freshness mode is

active.

• The vehicle will only run in hybrid mode.

EV Now will not be available.

• Most of the plug-in power will be

stored until fuel freshness mode is

completed.

Note: EV Now can resume if less than 1

gallon (3.8 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Note: In most cases, when the fuel level is

below 1/4 tank, refueling the vehicle will end

fuel freshness mode and EV Now will now

become available. Refueling after

consuming a full tank in fuel freshness mode

will end the mode.

Note: It is recommended to use a fuel

stabilizer if you consume less than a full

tank of fuel during an 18 month period.

REFUELING

WARNINGS

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel

fire can cause severe injuries.

Read and follow all the instructions

on the pump island.

Turn off your engine when you are

refueling.

145

Fuel and Refueling

WARNINGS

Do not smoke if you are near fuel or

refueling your vehicle.

Keep sparks, flames and smoking

materials away from fuel.

Stay outside your vehicle and do not

leave the fuel pump unattended

when refueling your vehicle. This is

against the law in some places.

Keep children away from the fuel

pump; never let children pump fuel.

Do not use personal electronic

devices while refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoid

electrostatic charge build-up when filling

an ungrounded fuel container:

• Place approved fuel container on the

ground.

• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in

the vehicle (including the cargo area).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling.

• Do not use a device that would hold

the fuel pump handle in the fill position.

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System

(Non-Energi Vehicles)

WARNING

The fuel system may be under

pressure. If you hear a hissing sound

near the fuel filler door, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out, which could cause serious

personal injury.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.

2. Open the fuel filler door.

E156032

3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully

into the fuel system, and leave the

nozzle fully inserted to open both doors

until you are done pumping. Hold the

handle higher during insertion for easier

access.

E154765

4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly

remove the fuel filler nozzle. Allow

approximately five to ten seconds after

pumping fuel before removing the fuel

filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel

to drain back into the fuel tank and not

spill onto the vehicle.

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if

overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the

tank to the point that the fuel is able to

bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled

fuel may run down the drain located below

and in front of the fuel filler door.

146

Fuel and Refueling

If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,

a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may

appear on the instrument cluster.

At the next opportunity, do the following:

1. Safely pull off the road.

2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.

3. Open the fuel filler door and remove

any visible debris from the fuel fill

opening.

4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the

fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle

several times to dislodge any debris

and allow the inlet to close properly.

If this action corrects the problem, the

message may not reset immediately. It

may take several driving cycles for the

message to turn off. A driving cycle

consists of an engine start-up (after four

or more hours with the engine off) followed

by city or highway driving. Continuing to

drive with the message on may cause the

service engine soon lamp to turn on as

well.

Easy Fuel™ Capless System

(Energi Vehicles Only)

WARNING

The fuel system may be under

pressure. If you hear a hissing sound

near the fuel filler door, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out, which could cause serious

personal injury.

Note: Your vehicle features a locking fuel

door and an auto-sealing feature that locks

the fuel tank refueling valve. Before you can

refuel your vehicle you must first press the

button located on the center console.

Pressing this button will unlock the fuel tank

refueling valve allowing the fuel filler door

to open so that the fuel filler nozzle can be

inserted into the fuel inlet. This could take

up to 15 seconds before the fuel filler door

pops open allowing the insertion of the fuel

filler nozzle.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.

2. Press the fuel button located on the

center console.

E146221

3. Wait up to 15 seconds before opening

the fuel filler door. During this time a

Please Wait to Refuel message will

appear in the information display

screen.

4. When the door is open a Ready to

Refuel message will appear in the

information display screen indicating

that the vehicle is ready to be filled. The

vehicle will remain ready to refuel for

approximately 20 minutes. If more than

20 minutes is required, the refueling

button will need to be pressed again.

(You may experience the fuel pump

shutting off if the refuel button is not

pressed again).

147

Fuel and Refueling

5. Open the fuel filler door.

E156032

6. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully

into the fuel system, and leave the

nozzle fully inserted to open both doors

until you are done pumping. Hold the

handle higher during insertion for easier

access.

E154765

7. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly

remove the fuel filler nozzle. Allow

approximately five to ten seconds after

pumping fuel before removing the fuel

filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel

to drain back into the fuel tank and not

spill onto the vehicle.

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if

overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the

tank to the point that the fuel is able to

bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled

fuel may run down the drain located below

and in front of the fuel filler door.

If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,

a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may

appear on the instrument cluster. At the

next opportunity, do the following:

1. Safely pull off the road.

2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.

3. Open the fuel filler door and remove

any visible debris from the fuel fill

opening.

4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the

fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle

several times to dislodge any debris

and allow the inlet to close properly.

If this action corrects the problem, the

message may not reset immediately. It

may take several driving cycles for the

message to turn off. A driving cycle

consists of an engine start-up (after four

or more hours with the engine off) followed

by city or highway driving. Continuing to

drive with the message on may cause the

service engine soon lamp to turn on as

well.

Using the manual override lever

WARNING

The fuel system may be under

pressure. Insert the fuel nozzle

slowly. If you hear a hissing sound

near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until

the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray

out, which could cause serious personal

injury.

Note: The vehicle must be in P (Park) when

using the manual override feature.

The manual override lever is located inside

of the trunk on the left rear side panel.

When using the fuel door manual override

to access the fuel fill inlet:

1. Turn the ignition on prior using a

manual override.

148

Fuel and Refueling

E156033

2. Pull the manual override mechanism

located in trunk.

3. Key off and complete refueling within

20 minutes. If more than 20 minutes is

required, close fuel door, and repeat

procedure.

This will enable you to refuel without any

issue.

Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if

overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the

tank to the point that the fuel is able to

bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled

fuel may run down the drain located below

and in front of the fuel filler door.

If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,

a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may

appear on the instrument cluster. At the

next opportunity, do the following:

1. Safely pull off the road.

2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the

ignition off.

3. Open the fuel filler door and remove

any visible debris from the fuel fill

opening.

4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the

fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle

several times to allow the inlet to close

properly. This will dislodge any debris

preventing the inlet from sealing.

If this action corrects the problem, the

message may not reset immediately. It

may take several driving cycles for the

message to turn off. A driving cycle

consists of an engine start-up (after four

or more hours with the engine off) followed

by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive

with the message on may cause the service

engine soon lamp to turn on as well.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

Avoid running out of fuel because this

situation may have an adverse effect on

vehicle components.

If you have run out of fuel:

• To start the vehicle with a keyless

ignition, just start the engine. Crank

time will be longer than usual.

• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of

fuel is enough to restart the vehicle. If

the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep

grade, more than 1 gallon (3.8 liters)

may be required.

• The service engine soon indicator may

come on.

Refilling With a Portable Fuel

Container (Except Energi

Vehicles)

WARNINGS

Do not insert the nozzle of portable

fuel containers or aftermarket

funnels into the capless fuel system.

This could damage the fuel system and its

seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the

ground instead of filling the tank, which

could result in serious personal injury.

Do not try to pry open or push open

the capless fuel system with foreign

objects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to you

or others.

149

Fuel and Refueling

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they

will not work with the capless fuel system

and can damage it. The included funnel has

been specially designed to work safely with

your vehicle.

When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a

portable fuel container, use the funnel

included with the vehicle.

E163066

The funnel is located in the rear of the

vehicle, inside the load compartment,

underneath the load floor carpet and is

accessible from the trunk.

1. Locate the portable funnel that comes

with your vehicle.

E157279

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the

capless fuel system.

E157280

3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the

portable fuel container.

4. When done, clean the funnel or

properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can

be purchased from your authorized

dealer if you choose to dispose of the

funnel.

150

Fuel and Refueling

Refilling With a Portable Fuel

Container (Energi Vehicles Only)

WARNINGS

Do not insert the nozzle of portable

fuel containers or aftermarket

funnels into the capless fuel system.

This could damage the fuel system and its

seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the

ground instead of filling the tank, which

could result in serious personal injury.

WARNINGS

Do not try to pry open or push open

the capless fuel system with foreign

objects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to you

or others.

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they

will not work with the capless fuel system

and can damage it. The included funnel has

been specially designed to work safely with

your vehicle.

When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a

portable fuel container, use the funnel

included with the vehicle.

E163067

The funnel is located in the rear of the

vehicle, inside the load compartment,

underneath the load floor carpet and is

accessible from the trunk (remove

120–volt convenience cord for access).

1. Locate the portable funnel that comes

with your vehicle.

E146221

151

Fuel and Refueling

2. Press the fuel button located on the

center console. Wait up to 15 seconds

for the fuel door to open. AReady to

Fuel message will appear in the

information display screen.

3. Locate the portable funnel that comes

with your vehicle.

E157279

4. Slowly insert the funnel into the

capless fuel system.

E157280

5. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the

portable fuel container.

6. Close the fuel door.

Note: If the fuel door is not closed and the

vehicle is driven, the check engine light in

the instrument cluster may come on.

7. When done, clean the funnel or

properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can

be purchased from your authorized

dealer if you choose to dispose of the

funnel.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

Note: The amount of usable fuel in the

empty reserve varies and should not be

relied upon to increase driving range. When

refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge

indicates empty, you might not be able to

refuel the full amount of the advertised

capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty

reserve still present in the tank.

Empty reserve is the amount of fuel

remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge

indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for

driving. The usable capacity of the fuel

tank is the amount of fuel that can be put

into the tank after the gauge indicates

empty. The advertised capacity is the total

fuel tank size – it is the combined usable

capacity plus the empty reserve.

Filling the Tank

For consistent results when filling the fuel

tank:

• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an

inaccurate reading results if the engine

is left running.

• Use the same fill rate

(low-medium-high) each time the tank

is filled.

• Allow no more than two automatic

click-offs when filling.

Results are most accurate when the filling

method is consistent.

Calculating Fuel Economy

Do not measure fuel economy during the

first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of

driving (this is your engine’s break-in

period); a more accurate measurement is

obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles

(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,

fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel

gauge readings are not accurate ways to

measure fuel economy.

152

Fuel and Refueling

1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.

2. Each time you fill the tank, record the

amount of fuel added.

3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,

fill the fuel tank and record the current

odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading

from the current odometer reading.

5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing

miles traveled by gallons used (For

Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then

divide by kilometers traveled).

Keep a record for at least one month and

record the type of driving (city or highway).

This provides an accurate estimate of the

vehicle’s fuel economy under current

driving conditions. Additionally, keeping

records during summer and winter show

how temperature impacts fuel economy.

In general, lower temperatures mean lower

fuel economy.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNINGS

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle

in dry grass or other dry ground cover.

The emission system heats up the

engine compartment and exhaust system,

which can start a fire.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of

harmful and potentially lethal fumes

into the passenger compartment. If

you smell exhaust fumes inside your

vehicle, have your dealer inspect your

vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you

smell exhaust fumes.

Your vehicle is equipped with various

emission control components and a

catalytic converter which will enable your

vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust

emission standards. To make sure that the

catalytic converter and other emission

control components continue to work

properly:

To make sure that the catalytic converter

and other emission control components

continue to work properly:

• Use only the specified fuel listed.

• Avoid running out of fuel.

• Do not turn off the ignition while your

vehicle is moving, especially at high

speeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduled

maintenance information performed

according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed

in scheduled maintenance information are

essential to the life and performance of

your vehicle and to its emissions system

If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or

Ford-authorized parts are used for

maintenance replacements or for service

of components affecting emission control,

such non-Ford parts should be equivalent

to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in

performance and durability.

Illumination of the service engine soon

indicator, charging system warning light or

the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,

strange odors, smoke or loss of engine

power could indicate that the emission

control system is not working properly.

An improperly operating or damaged

exhaust system may allow exhaust to

enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or

improperly operating exhaust system

inspected and repaired immediately.

153

Fuel and Refueling

Do not make any unauthorized changes to

your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle

owners and anyone who manufactures,

repairs, services, sells, leases, trades

vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles

are not permitted to intentionally remove

an emission control device or prevent it

from working. Information about your

vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle

Emission Control Information Decal

located on or near the engine. This decal

also lists engine displacement

Please consult your warranty information

for complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the engine’s emission control

system. This system is commonly known

as the on-board diagnostics system

(OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the

environment by ensuring that your vehicle

continues to meet government emission

standards. The OBD-II system also assists

your authorized dealer in properly servicing

your vehicle.

When the service engine soon

indicator illuminates, the OBD-II

system has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may

cause the service engine soon indicator to

illuminate. Examples are:

1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the

engine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in the

fuel—the engine may misfire or run

poorly.

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been

properly closed. See Refueling (page

145).

4. Driving through deep water—the

electrical system may be wet.

These temporary malfunctions can be

corrected by filling the fuel tank with good

quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill

inlet or letting the electrical system dry out.

After three driving cycles without these or

any other temporary malfunctions present,

the service engine soon indicator should

stay off the next time the engine is started.

A driving cycle consists of a cold engine

startup followed by mixed city/highway

driving. No additional vehicle service is

required.

If the service engine soon indicator remains

on, have your vehicle serviced at the first

available opportunity. Although some

malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may

not have symptoms that are apparent,

continued driving with the service engine

soon indicator on can result in increased

emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced

engine and transmission smoothness, and

lead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

Testing

Some state/provincial and local

governments may have

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs

to inspect the emission control equipment

on your vehicle. Failure to pass this

inspection could prevent you from getting

a vehicle registration.

If the service engine soon

indicator is on or the bulb does

not work, the vehicle may need

to be serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if

the service engine soon indicator is on or

not working properly (bulb is burned out),

or if the OBD-II system has determined

that some of the emission control systems

have not been properly checked. In this

case, the vehicle is considered not ready

for I/M testing.

154

Fuel and Refueling

If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has

just been serviced, or the battery has

recently run down or been replaced, the

OBD-II system may indicate that the

vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To

determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M

testing, turn the ignition key to the on

position for 15 seconds without cranking

the engine. If the service engine soon

indicator blinks eight times, it means that

the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if

the service engine soon indicator stays on

solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for

I/M testing.

The OBD-II system is designed to check

the emission control system during normal

driving. A complete check may take several

days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M

testing, the following driving cycle

consisting of mixed city and highway

driving may be performed:

15 minutes of steady driving on an

expressway/highway followed by 20

minutes of stop-and-go driving with at

least four 30-second idle periods.

Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight

hours with the ignition Off. Then, start the

vehicle and complete the above driving

cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its

normal operating temperature. Once

started, do not turn off the vehicle until the

above driving cycle is complete. If the

vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the

above driving cycle will have to be

repeated.

155

Fuel and Refueling

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

This battery pack shall only be

serviced by an authorized electric

vehicle technician. Improper handling

can result in personal injury or death.

Note: The high-voltage battery does not

require regular service maintenance.

Your vehicle consists of various

high-voltage components and wiring. All

of the high-voltage power flows through

specific wiring assemblies which are

labeled as such or are covered with a solid

orange convolute, or orange striped tape,

or both. Do not come in contact with these

components.

The high-voltage battery system is a

high-voltage, lithium-ion battery system.

The pack is located in the rear cargo area.

The high-voltage battery system uses an

air cooled system to regulate the

high-voltage battery temperature and help

maximize high-voltage battery life.

E162457

Note: The high-voltage battery is equipped

with air vents in the package tray that help

to regulate its temperature. It is important

to keep these openings free of obstructions.

Do not block the flow of cabin air to this

area.

HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICE

DISCONNECT

The high-voltage service disconnect shuts

off power from the high-voltage battery.

Note: There is a disconnect circuit in your

vehicle. Disconnecting the circuit will

automatically disable the high-voltage

battery.

To disable the battery and stop all

high-voltage electric activity in the vehicle

you can access high-voltage disconnect

circuit. To do this, you must unplug the

circuit from the circuit port connected to

the battery.

The high-voltage service disconnect is

located behind the rear fold down seats.

E159506

Service disconnect location for non-Energi

vehicles.

E162957

Service disconnect location for Energi

vehicles.

156

High Voltage Battery

Disabling the High-Voltage Battery

1. Fold down the rear seats.

2. Locate the access door and remove

the plastic cover.

E147234

3. Slide the handle on the service

disconnect outboard to the right. For

Energi vehicles slide the handle

outboard and to the left.

E146133

4. Pull the handle toward you and remove

the circuit from the vehicle to disable

the high-voltage battery.

Reactivating the High-Voltage Battery

Note: If you have manually disconnected

your high-voltage shut off circuit you will

need to reconnect the circuit before it can

be reactivated. The vehicle will detect if the

electrical system is safe and reactivate

automatically.

CHARGING THE HIGH

VOLTAGE BATTERY

CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE

BATTERY (ENERGI VEHICLES)

WARNINGS

Do not use the 120-volt convenience

cord with extension cord or adapter.

In Canada, do not use the 120-volt

convenience cord in commercial

garages.

This equipment has arcing or

sparking parts that should not be

exposed to flammable vapors. This

equipment should be located at least 18

inches (80 millimeters) above the floor.

Charging Equipment

E163425

Your vehicle comes equipped with a

standard 120-volt convenience cord. Lift

the load floor carpet in the rear of the

vehicle to access the 120–volt convenience

cord.

Note: The 120–volt convenience cord

allows you to charge the high-voltage

battery using a standard 120-volt household

outlet. Using the standard 120-volt

convenience cord takes up to 7 hours to

completely charge from an empty battery.

157

High Voltage Battery

E145429

Ford recommends upgrading to the

optional 240-volt charging station for

faster more efficient charging. Use of a

240-volt charging station will take

approximately 2½ hours to fully charge a

empty battery.

Note: Your electrical source must meet

certain requirements for the high-voltage

batteries to charge. The AC outlet must be

a three-prong 110-120 volt AC outlet that is

properly grounded, 15–20 amps (or greater),

and in good condition. The line also must

be dedicated, which means that no other

appliances should be connected to the

same circuit. If a dedicated circuit is not

used, the circuit breaker could trip or open.

If a dedicated circuit is not available, contact

a licensed professional electrician for proper

installation.

Make sure that the 120–volt convenience

cord is completely unwound before

charging. Always plug the cord into the AC

outlet before connecting the charging

coupler into the vehicle’s charge port

receptacle. The 120–volt convenience cord

inline control box has three indicator lights

that represent the charging status; power,

charge and fault.

Power (green light)— this indicator lights

up when the cord is plugged into the AC

wall outlet.

Charge (green light)— indicates status

of charging:

• No light means the cord is not

connected to the vehicle.

• Blinking light means that the charging

is in process.

• Solid light means that the vehicle is

connected but not charging.

Fault (red triangle light)— Lights up in

case of a detected failure. No charging is

possible:

• Blinking red triangle light – means that

the 120–volt convenience cord is trying

to reset the failure and could restart

the charging cycle.

• Solid red triangle light – means that

the fault is permanent. The cord needs

to be unplugged and re-plugged to

reset the fault. If the fault persists,

contact your authorized dealer.

Charge Port

The charge port is located between the

front left side door and front left wheel

well. There is an indentation located on

the charge port door. Press with your

thumb to press to open and close the door.

E144779

Note: Do not force the charge port door

open or closed. Forcing the door open or

closed will damage the charge port.

158

High Voltage Battery

The light ring located around the charge

port indicates the charge status of your

vehicle's high-voltage battery. The charge

port light ring is divided into four quadrants

which display state of charge in 25 percent

increments.

There is a cord acknowledgment feature

that will be activated when a charge cycle

is initiated. The four light quadrants will

each individually flash clockwise starting

with the top right light and ending with the

top left, two full times confirming a

charging coupler has been detected.

You can use your keyfob to view the

vehicles charge status at any time by

pressing the unlock button. The light ring

will light up the corresponding quadrant(s)

so that the current state of charge can be

determined. If the charge is below 25

percent the light ring will not illuminate.

Don’t forget to press the lock button on

your keyfob to re-lock the vehicle.

The light ring will also display the current

state of charge when opening the doors.

Charging

Note: The vehicle must be in P (Park) to

charge.

To charge your high-voltage battery:

1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and power

down the vehicle.

2. With your thumb, press the indentation

located on the charge port door and

the door will rotate open.

3. Plug the charging coupler into the

vehicles charge port receptacle and

make sure the button clicks confirming

that it is completely engaged.

E144780

4. Verify that the cord acknowledgment

feature activates. This indicates the

beginning of a normal charge cycle.

5. If using a 240–volt charging station,

follow the instructions on the charge

station to begin the charging process.

When charging, the light ring will display

how far along the charge is:

• When the top right quadrant is pulsing

the charge is between 0-25 percent.

• When the top right quadrant is solidly

lit and the bottom right quadrant is

pulsing the charge is between 25-50

percent.

• When both right side quadrants are

solidly lit and the bottom left quadrant

is pulsing the charge is between 50-75

percent.

• When three quadrants are solidly lit

and the top left quadrant is pulsing the

charge is between 75-100 percent.

• When the entire ring is solidly lit, the

charge is complete.

Note: The light ring will shut off one minute

after reaching a full charge.

Waiting to Charge

Note: See Charge Settings in the MyFord

Touch section. See MyFord Touch™ (page

348).

159

High Voltage Battery

When Value Charge has been selected

charging may not begin upon plugging in.

The vehicle may delay charging to take

advantage of off-peak electricity rates. The

vehicle will optimize the charge schedule

to be complete by the next GO Time.

When waiting to charge (not actively

charging), the light ring will indicate the

present state of charge of the high voltage

battery as follows:

• When the top right quadrant is shut off

the charge is between 0–25 percent.

• When the top right quadrant is solidly

lit and the bottom right quadrant is

shut off the charge is between 25–50

percent.

• When both right side quadrants are

solidly lit and the bottom left quadrant

is shut off the charge is between 50–75

percent.

• When three quadrants are solidly lit

and the top left quadrant is shut off the

charge is between 75–100 percent.

• When the entire ring is solidly lit, the

charge is 100 percent.

Note: When the vehicle is Waiting to

Charge the light ring will shut off one minute

after displaying the present state of charge.

When the vehicle automatically begins

charging the light ring will turn on and

display how far along the charge is per the

section above.

Note: If a vehicle charging system fault is

detected at any point in a charge cycle the

entire light ring will flash continuously for

one minute and then shut off. If this

happens unplug, and then re-plug the

charging coupler into the charge port

receptacle. If the problem persists contact

your authorized dealer.

The light ring illumination conditions can

be modified. See Charge Port Light Ring

Settings in the MyFord Touch section. See

MyFord Touch™ (page 348).

Disconnecting the Charging Coupler

Note: Do not pull the wall plug from the

wall while the vehicle is charging. Doing so

may damage the outlet and the cord.

1. Press the button on the charging

coupler.

2. While holding the button, remove the

charging coupler from the vehicle’s

charge port receptacle.

E144781

3. Close the charge port door by pressing

the indentation on the charge port

door. Continue pressing the indentation

while the door rotates counter

clockwise and closes.

HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY CUT-

OFF SWITCH

The high-voltage shut off operation shuts

off power from the high-voltage battery

after a collision, or if your vehicle receives

a substantial physical jolt.

To reactivate the vehicle after either event

perform the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Turn the ignition on.

3. If the vehicle is not powered after this

sequence, repeat steps 1 and 2.

For vehicles equipped with a push button

start system:

160

High Voltage Battery

1. Press the START/STOP button to

turn ignition off.

2. Press the brake pedal and press the

START/STOP button.

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal

and press the START/STOP button

(ignition off).

4. Press the START/STOP button again

to re-enable the vehicle.

Note: After completing this process the

vehicle will detect if the electrical system is

safe and reactivate. Once your vehicle

determines the electrical system safe you

can start your vehicle as you would normally

by pressing the brake in combination with

the START/STOP button.

Note: In the event the vehicle does not

reactivate after the second key cycle,

contact an authorized dealer.

161

High Voltage Battery

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGS

Always set the parking brake fully

and make sure the gearshift is

latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition

to the off position and remove the key

whenever you leave your vehicle.

Do not apply the brake pedal and

accelerator pedal simultaneously.

Applying both pedals simultaneously

for more than three seconds will limit

engine rpm, which may result in difficulty

maintaining speed in traffic and could lead

to serious injury.

Automatic Transmission

Putting your vehicle in gear:

1. Fully press down the brake pedal.

2. Press and hold the button on the front

of the gearshift lever.

3. Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear.

4. Release the button and your

transmission will remain in the selected

gear.

E144820

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and

prevents the front wheels from turning.

Come to a complete stop before putting

your vehicle into and out of P (Park)

R (Reverse)

With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the

vehicle will move backward. Always come

to a complete stop before shifting into and

out of R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the

vehicle is free to roll; hold the brake pedal

down while in this position.

D (Drive)

The normal driving position for the best

fuel economy.

D (Drive) with Grade Assist (If

Equipped)

Press the transmission control switch on

the side of the gearshift lever to activate

grade assist.

E146092

162

Transmission

Grade assist:

• Provides additional grade braking with

a combination of engine motoring and

high-voltage battery charging to help

maintain vehicle speed when

descending a grade.

• As the vehicle determines the amount

of engine motoring and high-voltage

battery charging, you may notice the

engine speed increasing and

decreasing to help maintain your

vehicle speed when descending a

grade.

• The grade assist lamp in the instrument

cluster is illuminated.

E144523

The grade assist lamp will

appear in the instrument cluster

when grade assist is turned on.

Press the transmission control switch

again to return to normal D (Drive).

L (Low)

• Provides maximum engine braking.

• The transmission may be shifted into

L (Low) at any vehicle speed.

Brake-Shift Interlock

WARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until you

verify that the brake lamps are

working.

When doing this procedure, you will

be taking the vehicle out of park

which means the vehicle can roll

freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle

movement, always fully set the parking

brake prior to doing this procedure. Use

wheel chocks if appropriate.

If the parking brake is fully released,

but the brake warning lamp remains

illuminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorized

dealer.

Note: See your authorized dealer as soon

as possible if this procedure is used.

Note: For some markets this feature will be

disabled.

Use the brake shift interlock lever to move

the gearshift lever from the park position

in the event of an electrical malfunction or

if your vehicle has a dead battery.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition off before performing this

procedure.

E155984

1. Remove the side panel on the right side

of the gearshift lever.

E155985

2. Locate the access hole.

163

Transmission

E155983

3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool)

into the access hole and press the lever

foreword while pulling the gearshift

lever out of the P (Park) position and

into the N (Neutral) position.

4. Remove the tool and reinstall the

panel.

5. Start the vehicle and release the

parking brake.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine

is not at normal operating temperature or

damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than

a minute or damage to the transmission and

tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,

it may be rocked out by shifting between

forward and reverse gears, stopping

between shifts in a steady pattern. Press

lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNINGS

The system does not replace the

parking brake. When you leave your

vehicle, always apply the parking

brake and put the vehicle in P (Park).

WARNINGS

You must remain in your vehicle once

you have activated the system.

During all times, you are responsible

for controlling your vehicle,

supervising the system and

intervening, if required.

If the engine is revved excessively, or

if a malfunction is detected, the

system will be deactivated.

The system makes it easier to pull away

when your vehicle is on a slope without the

need to use the parking brake.

When the system is active, your vehicle will

remain stationary on the slope for two to

three seconds after you release the brake

pedal. This allows you time to move your

foot from the brake to the accelerator

pedal. The brakes are released

automatically once the engine has

developed sufficient drive to prevent your

vehicle from rolling down the slope. This

is an advantage when pulling away on a

slope, (for example from a car park ramp,

traffic lights or when reversing uphill into

a parking space).

The system will activate automatically on

any slope which can result in significant

vehicle rollback.

Using Hill Start Assist

1. Press the brake pedal to bring your

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep

the brake pedal pressed.

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle

is on a slope, the system will be

activated automatically.

164

Transmission

3. When you remove your foot from the

brake pedal, your vehicle will remain

on the slope without rolling away for

approximately two or three seconds.

This hold time will automatically be

extended if you are in the process of

driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. The

brakes will be released automatically.

165

Transmission

GENERAL INFORMATION

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If

a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or

continuous squeal sound is present, the

brake linings may be worn-out and should

be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the

vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder

in the steering wheel while braking, the

vehicle should be inspected by an

authorized dealer.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the

wheels, even under normal driving

conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the

brakes wear and does not contribute to

brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy

Wheels (page 257).

E144522

See Warning Lamps and

Indicators (page 80).

Wet brakes result in reduced braking

efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a

few times when driving from a car wash or

standing water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over Accelerator

In the event the accelerator pedal

becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady

and firm pressure to the brake pedal to

slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.

If you experience this condition, apply the

brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe

stop. Turn the engine off, shift to position

P and apply the parking brake, and then

inspect the accelerator pedal for any

interferences. If none are found and the

condition persists, have your vehicle towed

to the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake Assist

Brake assist detects when you brake

heavily by measuring the rate at which you

press the brake pedal. It provides

maximum braking efficiency as long as you

press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce

stopping distances in critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering

control during emergency stops by keeping

the brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarily

illuminates when the ignition is

turned on. If the light does not

illuminate during start up, remains on or

flashes, the anti-lock braking system may

be disabled and may need to be serviced.

E144522

If the system is disabled, normal

braking is still effective. If the

brake warning lamp illuminates

with the parking brake released, have your

brake system serviced immediately.

Regenerative Braking System

This feature is used to simulate the engine

braking of an internal combustion engine

and assist the standard brake system while

recovering some of the energy of motion

and storing it in the battery to improve fuel

economy. The standard brake system is

designed to fully stop the car if

regenerative braking is not available.

During regenerative braking, the motor is

spun as a generator to create electrical

current. This recharges the battery and

slows the vehicle. In effect, once the

accelerator pedal is released, the motor

changes from an energy user to an energy

producer.

166

Brakes

When the accelerator pedal is released or

the brake pedal is applied, the brake

controller automatically detects the

amount of deceleration requested and

optimizes how much of the deceleration

will be produced by regenerative braking.

The remaining portion is generated by

standard friction braking. When the battery

is almost fully charged, the amount of

regenerative braking is limited to avoid

overcharging, and the requested

deceleration is produced by standard

friction braking alone.

Regenerative braking does not take the

place of the standard friction brakes; it only

assists them. Regenerative braking has

also been designed to interact with the

anti-lock brake system. Regenerative

braking is disabled when the anti-lock

brake system is activated or the battery is

fully charged.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH

ANTI-LOCK BRAKES

Note: When the system is operating, the

brake pedal will pulse and may travel

further. Maintain pressure on the brake

pedal. You may also hear a noise from the

system. This is normal.

The anti-lock braking system will not

eliminate the risks when:

• you drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you

• your vehicle is hydroplaning

• you take corners too fast

• the road surface is poor.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

The electric parking brake replaces the

conventional handbrake. The operating

switch is located in the center console.

WARNING

Always set the parking brake and

leave your vehicle with the

transmission selector lever in

position P.

Note: When you apply the electric parking

brake in certain conditions, for example, on

a steep hill, the electric parking brake may

reapply the brakes within three to ten

minutes.

Note: You may notice various noises when

you apply and release the electric parking

brake. This is normal and no cause for

concern.

Applying the electric parking brake

WARNING

If the brake system warning lamp

does not illuminate or flashes, there

could be a problem with your electric

parking brake. Have the system checked

by an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

Note: The brake system warning lamp will

illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is

turned off after the electric parking brake

has been applied, or the electric parking

brake has been applied after the ignition has

been turned off.

Note: The electric parking brake will not

automatically apply. You must apply the

electric parking brake using the electric

parking brake switch.

167

Brakes

E147230

Pull the switch up to apply the electric

parking brake.

The brake system warning lamp will

illuminate to confirm that the electric

parking brake has been applied. See

Information Displays (page 84).

Applying the electric parking brake

when the vehicle is moving

WARNINGS

Applying the electric parking brake

while moving will result in use of the

anti-lock braking system. Do not use

the electric parking brake system when the

vehicle is moving unless the normal brake

system is unable to stop the vehicle.

With the exception of emergency

conditions (for example, the brake

pedal does not work or is blocked),

do not apply the electric parking brake

while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or

poor road surfaces or weather conditions,

emergency braking can cause the vehicle

to skid out of control or off the road.

If you apply the electric parking brake when

your vehicle is moving, the brake system

warning lamp will illuminate and a warning

chime will sound. See Information

Displays (page 84).

If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph (6

km/h), the braking force is applied ias long

as the switch is applied. Releasing or

pressing the switch or pressing the

accelerator pedal will stop the braking

force.

Releasing the electric parking

brake

E147231

You can release the electric parking brake

either manually by pressing the switch or

automatically.

Manual release

WARNING

If the brake system warning light

remains illuminated or flashes after

you have released the parking brake,

there could be a problem with you braking

system. Have the system checked by an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

You can manually release the electric

parking brake by turning the ignition on,

pressing the brake pedal and then pressing

the electric parking brake switch.

When the electric parking brake is released,

the brake system warning lamp will turn

off.

168

Brakes

Automatic release - drive away release

Note: The driver's door must be closed and

the driver's safety belt must be fastened

before this feature will operate.

Note: If the electric parking brake warning

lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking

brake will not automatically release. You

must release the electric parking brake using

the electric parking brake switch.

Note: The engine must be running and the

accelerator pedal must be pressed before

the drive away release feature will operate.

Note: On hybrid vehicles, the vehicle must

be Ready-to-Drive as indicated by the green

Ready indicator light.

The brake system warning lamp will go off

to confirm that the electric parking brake

has been released.

Note: The electric parking brake drive away

release makes starting on a hill easier. This

feature will release the parking brake

automatically when the vehicle has

sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To

assure drive away release when starting

uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly.

Battery With No Charge

WARNING

You will not be able to apply or

release the electric parking brake if

the battery is low or has no charge.

If the battery is low or has no charge, use

jumper cables and a booster battery.

169

Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The traction control system helps avoid

drive wheel spin and loss of traction.

If your vehicle begins to slide, the system

applies the brakes to individual wheels

and, when needed, reduces engine power

at the same time. If the wheels spin when

accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,

the system reduces engine power in order

to increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

In certain situations (for example, stuck in

snow or mud), turning the traction control

off may be beneficial as this allows the

wheels to spin with full engine power. Turn

off the traction control system through the

information display. See General

Information (page 84).

System Indicator Lights and

Messages

WARNING

If a failure has been detected within

the AdvanceTrac system, the

stability control light will illuminate

steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac

system was not manually disabled through

the information display. If the stability

control light still illuminates steadily, have

the system serviced by an authorized

dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle

with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to

an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,

vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

E138639

The stability control light

temporarily illuminates on

engine start-up and flashes

when a driving condition activates the

stability system.

The stability control off light

temporarily illuminates on

engine start-up and stays on

when you turn the traction control system

off.

When you turn the traction control system

off or on, a message appears in the

information display showing system status.

170

Traction Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Vehicle modifications involving

braking system, aftermarket roof

racks, suspension, steering system,

tire construction and wheel and tire size

may change the handling characteristics

of the vehicle and may adversely affect

the performance of the AdvanceTrac

system. In addition, installing any stereo

loudspeakers may interfere with and

adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.

Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker

as far as possible from the front center

console, the tunnel, and the front seats in

order to minimize the risk of interfering with

the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the

effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system

could lead to an increased risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death.

Remember that even advanced

technology cannot defy the laws of

physics. It’s always possible to lose

control of a vehicle due to inappropriate

driver input for the conditions. Aggressive

driving on any road condition can cause

you to lose control of your vehicle

increasing the risk of personal injury or

property damage. Activation of the

AdvanceTrac system is an indication that

at least some of the tires have exceeded

their ability to grip the road; this could

reduce the operator’s ability to control the

vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal

injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac

system activates, SLOW DOWN.

The AdvanceTrac Control system helps

you keep control of your vehicle when on

a slippery surface. The electronic stability

control portion of the system helps avoid

skids and lateral slides. The traction

control system helps avoid drive wheel

spin and loss of traction. See Using

Traction Control (page 170).

E72903

Vehicle without AdvanceTrac

skidding off its intended route.

Vehicle with AdvanceTrac

maintaining control on a slippery

surface.

USING STABILITY CONTROL

AdvanceTrac®

The system automatically activates when

you start your engine. The AdvanceTrac

system cannot be completely turned off,

but the electronic stability control system

is disabled when the transmission selector

lever is in position R. You can turn off the

traction control portion of the system

independently. See Using Traction

Control (page 170).

171

Stability Control

PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

To help avoid personal injury, please

read and understand the limitations

of the system as contained in this

section. Sensing is only an aid for some

(generally large and fixed) objects when

moving in reverse on a flat surface at

parking speeds. Traffic control systems,

inclement weather, air brakes, and external

motors and fans may also affect the

function of the sensing system; this may

include reduced performance or a false

activation.

To help avoid personal injury, always

use caution when in R (Reverse) and

when using the sensing system.

This system is not designed to

prevent contact with small or moving

objects. The system is designed to

provide a warning to assist the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system may not

detect smaller objects, particularly those

close to the ground.

Certain add-on devices such as large

trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks

and any device that may block the

normal detection zone of the system, may

create false beeps.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the

bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors

are covered, the system’s accuracy can be

affected. Do not clean the sensors with

sharp objects.

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to

the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned

or bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of

obstacles or false alarms.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with

MyKey®, it is possible to prevent turning the

sensing system off. See MyKey™ (page

48).

The sensing system warns the driver of

obstacles within a certain range of the

bumper area. The system turns on

automatically whenever the ignition is

switched on.

When receiving a detection warning, the

radio volume is reduced to a

predetermined level. After the warning

goes away, the radio volume returns to the

previous level.

The system can be switched off through

the information display menu or from the

pop-up message that appears once the

transmission is shifted into R. See General

Information (page 84).

If a fault is present in the system, a warning

message appears in the information

display and does not allow the driver to

switch the faulted system on. See

Information Messages (page 96).

Rear Sensing System

The rear sensors are only active when the

transmission is in R. As the vehicle moves

closer to the obstacle, the rate of the

audible warning increases. When the

obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25

centimeters) away, the warning sounds

continuously. If a stationary or receding

object is detected farther than 10 inches

(25 centimeters) from the side of the

vehicle, the tone sounds for only three

seconds. Once the system detects an

object approaching, the warning sounds

again.

172

Parking Aids

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 feet (2

meters) from the rear bumper.

There is decreased coverage

area at the outer corners of the

bumper.

The system detects certain objects while

the transmission is in R:

• and moving toward a stationary object

at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less

• but not moving, and a moving object is

approaching the rear of the vehicle at

a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less

• and moving at a speed of less than 3

mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is

approaching the rear of the vehicle at

a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Front Sensing System

The front sensors are active when the

gearshift is in any position other than P

(Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed

is below 6 mph (10 km/h).

E130382

Coverage area of up to 27 inches

(70 centimeters) from the front

of the vehicle and about 6–14

inches (15–35 centimeters) to

the side of the front end of the

vehicle. Refer to the reverse

sensing section for details on

coverage area.

The system sounds an audible warning

when obstacles are near either bumper in

the following manner:

• Objects detected by the front sensors

are indicated by a high-pitched tone

from the front radio speakers.

• Objects detected by the rear sensors

are indicated by a lower pitched tone

from the rear radio speakers.

• The sensing system reports the

obstacle which is closest to the front

or rear of the vehicle. For example, if

an obstacle is 24 inches (60

centimeters) from the front of the

vehicle and, at the same time, an

obstacle is only 16 inches (40

centimeters) from the rear of the

vehicle, the lower pitched tone sounds.

• An alternating warning sounds from

the front and rear if there are objects

at both bumpers that are closer than

10 inches (25 centimeters).

173

Parking Aids

For specific information on the reverse

sensing portion of the system, refer to that

section.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

This system is designed to be a

supplementary park aid. It may not

work in all conditions and is not

intended to replace the driver’s attention

and judgment. The driver is responsible for

avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe

distance and speed, even when the system

is in use.

Note: The driver is always responsible for

controlling the vehicle, supervising the

system and intervening if required.

The system detects an available parallel

parking space and automatically steers

the vehicle into the space (hands-free)

while you control the accelerator, gearshift

and brakes. The system visually and

audibly instructs you to park the vehicle.

The system may not function correctly if

something passes between the front

bumper and the parking space (i.e. a

pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the

neighboring parked vehicle is high from the

ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck or flatbed

truck).

Note: The sensors may not detect objects

in heavy rain or other conditions that cause

disruptive reflections.

Note: The sensors may not detect objects

with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.

The system should not be used if:

• a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or trailer)

is attached to the front or rear of the

vehicle or at another location close to

the sensors.

• an overhanging object (i.e. surfboard)

is attached to the roof.

• the front bumper or side sensors are

damaged (i.e. in a collision) or

obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front

bumper cover).

• a mini-spare tire is in use.

Using Active Park Assist

E146186

Press the button located on the

center console near the gearshift

lever.

The touch screen displays a message and

a corresponding graphic to indicate it's

searching for a parking space. Use the turn

signal to indicate which side of the vehicle

you want the system to search on.

Note: If the turn signal is not on, the system

automatically searches on the vehicle's

passenger side.

E130107

174

Parking Aids

When a suitable space is found, the touch

screen displays a message and a chime

sounds. Slow down and stop at

approximately position (A), then follow

the instructions on the touch screen.

Note: You must observe that the selected

space remains clear of obstructions at all

times in the maneuver.

Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (e.g.

a bus or a truck), street furniture and other

items may not be detected by active park

assist. You must make sure the selected

space is suitable for parking.

Note: The vehicle should be driven as

parallel to other vehicles as possible while

passing a parking space.

Note: The system always offers the last

detected parking space (i.e. if the vehicle

detects multiple spaces while you are

driving, it offers the last one).

Note: If driven above approximately 20

mph (35 km/h), the touch screen shows a

message to alert you to reduce vehicle

speed.

Automatic Steering into Parking

Space

Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10

km/h), the system switches off and you

need to take full control of the vehicle.

Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before

completion, the system switches off. The

steering wheel position will not indicate the

actual position of the steering and you have

to full take control of the vehicle.

With your hands off the wheel (and

nothing obstructing its movement) and

the transmission in R (Reverse), the vehicle

steers itself as instructions to safely move

the vehicle back and forward in the space

are displayed in the touch screen. While

reversing, the touch screen displays a

message instructing you to check your

surroundings (for safety reasons) and to

back-up slowly, accompanied by a

corresponding graphic.

E130108

When you think the vehicle has enough

space in front and behind it, or you hear a

solid tone from the parking aid, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop.

When automatic steering is finished, the

touch screen displays a message indicating

that the active park assist process is done.

The driver is responsible for checking the

parking job and making any necessary

corrections.

175

Parking Aids

Deactivating the Park Assist

Feature

The system can be deactivated manually

by:

• pressing the active park assist button

• grabbing the steering wheel

• driving above approximately 20 mph

(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an

active park search

• driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during

automatic steering

• turning off the traction control system.

Certain vehicle conditions can also

deactivate the system, such as:

• Traction control has activated on a

slippery or loose surface.

• There is an anti-lock brake system

activation or failure.

• Something touches the steering wheel.

If a problem occurs with the system, a

warning message is displayed, followed

by a chime. Occasional system messages

may occur in normal operation. For

recurring or frequent system faults, contact

an authorized dealer to have your vehicle

serviced.

Troubleshooting the System

The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off

The system does not offer a particular space

Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors

There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking

space

The vehicle is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space

The vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles

The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a

parking space

176

Parking Aids

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling forward

when R [Reverse] is selected)

The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a

parking space

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle

properly

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly

The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when

you drive the same distance past the parking space

The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly, improper

size, or of different sizes)

A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities

A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed,

etc.)

The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed

The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated garage

into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)

REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

The rear view camera system is a

reverse aid supplement device that

still requires the driver to use it in

conjunction with the interior and exterior

mirrors for maximum coverage.

Objects that are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper, might not be seen on the

screen due to the limited coverage of the

camera system.

Back up as slow as possible since

higher speeds might limit your

reaction time to stop the vehicle.

WARNINGS

Use caution when using the rear

video camera and the trunk is ajar. If

the trunk is ajar, the camera will be

out of position and the video image may

be incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled)

have been removed when the trunk is ajar.

Use caution when turning camera

features on or off while in R

(Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is

not moving.

The rear view camera system provides a

video image of the area behind the vehicle.

The image will be displayed in either in the

rear view mirror or the display in the center

of the instrument panel.

177

Parking Aids

During operation, lines appear in the

display which represent your vehicle’s path

and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.

E142435

The camera is located on the trunk.

Using the Rear View Camera

System

The rear view camera system displays

what is behind your vehicle when you place

the transmission in R (Reverse).

The system uses three types of guides to

help you see what is behind your vehicle:

• Active guidelines: Show the intended

path of your vehicle when reversing.

• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path

your vehicle is moving in while reversing

in a straight line. This can be helpful

when backing into a parking space or

aligning your vehicle with another

object behind you.

• Centerline (If applicable): Helps align

the center of your vehicle with an

object (i.e. a trailer).

Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse)

and the luggage compartment is ajar, no

rear view camera features are displayed.

Note: If the image comes on while the

transmission is not in R (Reverse), have the

system inspected by your authorized dealer.

Note: When towing, the camera only sees

what is being towed behind your vehicle.

This might not provide adequate coverage

as it usually provides in normal operation

and some objects might not be seen. In

some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear

once the trailer tow connector is engaged.

Note: The camera may not operate

correctly under the following conditions:

• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both

reverse lamps are not operating.

• The camera's view is obstructed by

mud, water or debris. Clean the lens

with a soft, lint-free cloth and

non-abrasive cleaner.

• The rear of the vehicle is hit or

damaged, causing the camera to

become misaligned.

To access any of the rear view camera

system settings, make the following

selections in the touch screen when the

transmission is not in R (Reverse):

• Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera

After changing a system setting, the touch

screen shows a preview of the selected

features.

Guidelines and the Centerline

Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines

are only available when the transmission is

in R (Reverse).

Note: The centerline is only available if

Active or Fixed guidelines are on.

178

Parking Aids

A B C D

E142436

Active guidelinesA

CenterlineB

Fixed guideline: Green zoneC

Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD

Fixed guideline: Red zoneE

Rear bumperF

Active guidelines are only shown with fixed

guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn

the steering wheel to point the guidelines

toward an intended path. If the steering

wheel position is changed while reversing,

the vehicle might deviate from the original

intended path.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and

out depending on the steering wheel

position. The active guidelines are not

shown when the steering wheel position

is straight.

Always use caution while reversing.

Objects in the red zone are closest to your

vehicle and objects in the green zone are

farther away. Objects are getting closer to

your vehicle as they move from the green

zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the

side view mirrors and rear view mirror to

get better coverage on both sides and rear

of the vehicle.

Selectable settings for this feature are

ACTIVE + FIXED, FIXED and OFF.

Visual Park Aid Alert

Note: Visual park alert is only available

when the transmission is in R (Reverse).

Note: The reverse sensing system is not

effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)

and may not detect certain angular or

moving objects.

The system uses red, yellow and green

highlights which appear on top of the video

image when an object is detected by the

reverse sensing system. The alert highlights

the closest object detected. The reverse

sensing alert can be disabled and if visual

park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas

are still displayed.

Selectable settings for this feature are ON

and OFF.

Manual Zoom

WARNING

When manual zoom is on, the full

area behind the vehicle is not shown.

Be aware of your surroundings when

using the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available when

the transmission is in R (Reverse).

Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only

the centerline is shown.

179

Parking Aids

This allows you to get a closer view of an

object behind the vehicle. The zoomed

image keeps the bumper in the image to

provide a reference. The zoom is only

active while the transmission is in R

(Reverse). When the transmission is

shifted out of R (Reverse), the feature

automatically turns off and must be reset

when it is used again.

Selectable settings for this feature are OFF,

Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. Press the up and

down arrows to change the view. The

selection level appears between the

buttons (i.e. Level 1). The default setting

for the manual zoom is OFF.

Rear Camera Delay

The camera image will be displayed upon

shifting out of R (Reverse) until the vehicle

speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This will

occur when the rear camera delay feature

is on, or until the radio button is selected.

Selectable settings for this feature are ON

and OFF. The default setting for the rear

camera delay is OFF.

180

Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Cruise control lets you maintain a set

speed without keeping your foot on the

accelerator pedal.

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGS

Do not use cruise control in heavy

traffic, on winding roads or when the

road surface is slippery.

When you are going downhill, your

speed may increase above the set

speed. The system will not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear to assist the

system in maintaining the set speed.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if the

vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph

(16 km/h) below your set speed while

driving uphill.

E144500

The cruise controls are located on the

steering wheel.

Switching Cruise Control On

Press and release ON.

E71340

The indicator will appear in the

instrument cluster.

Setting a Speed

1. Accelerate to the desired speed.

2. Press and release SET+.

3. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

The indicator will change colors in the

instrument cluster.

Changing the Set Speed

Note: If you accelerate by pressing the

accelerator pedal, the set speed will not

change. When you release the accelerator

pedal, you will return to the speed that you

previously set.

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release

the control when you reach the desired

speed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The

set speed will change in approximately

1 mph (2 km/h) increments.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedal

until you reach the desired speed. Press

and release SET+.

Canceling the Set Speed

Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You

will not erase the set speed.

Resuming the Set Speed

Press and release RES.

Switching Cruise Control Off

Note: You will erase the set speed if you

switch the system off.

Press and release OFF or switch the

ignition off.

181

Cruise Control

ECO Cruise Control

This feature saves vehicle energy by

relaxing acceleration compared to

standard cruise control. For example, your

vehicle may temporarily lose speed when

going uphill. ECO will appear in the

information display when ECO cruise

control is activated. It can be switched on

or off in the information display. See

General Information (page 84).

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

Always pay close attention to

changing road conditions, especially

when using adaptive cruise control.

Adaptive cruise control cannot replace

attentive driving. Failing to follow any of

the warnings below or failing to pay

attention to the road may result in a

collision, serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control is not a

collision warning or avoidance

system.

Adaptive cruise control will not

detect stationary or slow moving

vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Adaptive cruise control will not

detect pedestrians or objects in the

roadway.

Adaptive cruise control will not

detect oncoming vehicles in the

same lane.

Do not use the adaptive cruise

control when entering or leaving a

highway, in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, slippery or unpaved.

Do not use in poor visibility,

specifically fog, rain, spray or snow.

Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,

drive safely and be in control of the vehicle

at all times.

The system adjusts your speed to maintain

a proper distance between you and the

vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You

can select from one of four gap settings.

E144501

The controls for using your cruise control

are located on the steering wheel.

Switching the System On

Press and release ON.

E144529

The information display will

show the grey indicator light.

E164805

The current gap setting and SET will also

display.

Setting a Speed

1. Accelerate to the desired speed.

2. Press and release SET+. The vehicle

speed will be stored in the memory.

182

Cruise Control

3. The information display will show a

green indicator light, current gap

setting and desired set speed.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

E164805

5. A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if

there is a vehicle detected in front of

you.

Note: When adaptive cruise control is

active, the set speed displayed in the

information display may vary slightly from

the speedometer.

Following a Vehicle

WARNINGS

When following a vehicle in front of

you, the vehicle will not decelerate

automatically to a stop, nor will the

vehicle always decelerate quickly enough

to avoid a collision without driver

intervention. Always apply the brakes when

necessary. Failing to do so may result in a

collision, serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control only warns

of vehicles detected by the radar

sensor. In some cases there may be

no warning or the warning may be delayed.

The driver should always apply the brakes

when necessary. Failing to do so may result

in a collision, serious injury or death.

Note: The brakes may emit a sound when

they are being modulated by the adaptive

cruise control system.

When a vehicle ahead of you enters the

same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in

the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts

to maintain a preset gap distance. The

distance setting is adjustable.

The lead vehicle graphic will illuminate.

The vehicle will maintain a constant

distance between the vehicle ahead until:

• the vehicle in front of you accelerates

to a speed above the set speed

• the vehicle in front of you moves out of

your lane or out of view

• the vehicle speed falls below 12 mph

(20 km/h)

• a new gap distance is set.

The vehicle will apply the brakes to slow

the vehicle to maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front. The maximum

braking which the system can apply is

limited. You can override the system by

applying the brakes.

If the system predicts that its maximum

braking level will not be sufficient, an

audible warning will sound while the

system continues to brake. This is

accompanied by a heads-up display; a red

warning bar illuminating on the windshield.

You should take immediate action.

Setting the Gap Distance

Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap

appropriate to the driving conditions.

183

Cruise Control

E144502

Gap decreaseA

Gap increaseB

You can decrease or increase the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle in

front of you by pressing the gap control.

E164805

The selected gap displays in the message

center as shown by the bars in the graphic.

Four gap distance settings are available.

Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings

Dynamic Beha-

vior

Distance GapTime Gap,

Seconds

Graphic Display,

Bars Indicated

Between

Vehicles

Set Speed

yd (m)mph ( km/h)

Sport31 yd (28 m)1162 mph

(100 km/h)

Normal43 yd (39 m)1.4262 mph

(100 km/h)

Normal55 yd (50 m)1.8362 mph

(100 km/h)

Comfort67 yd (61 m)2.2462 mph

(100 km/h)

Each time you start the vehicle, the system

will select the last chosen gap for the

current driver.

Disengaging the System

Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The

last set speed will display with a

strikethrough but will not erase.

Overriding the System

WARNING

Whenever the driver is overriding the

system by pressing the accelerator

pedal, the system will not

automatically apply the brakes to maintain

separation from any vehicle ahead.

You can override the set speed and gap

distance by pressing the accelerator pedal.

184

Cruise Control

E144529

When you override the system

the green indicator light

illuminates and the follow

vehicle does not show in the

information display.

The system will resume operation when

you release the accelerator pedal. The

vehicle speed will decrease to the set

speed, or a lower speed if following a

slower vehicle.

Changing the Set Speed

• Accelerate or brake to the desired

speed, then press and release SET+.

• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the

desired set speed shows on the

information display. The vehicle speed

will gradually change to the selected

speed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The

set speed will change in approximately

1 mph (2 km/h) increments.

The system may apply the brakes to slow

the vehicle to the new set speed. The set

speed will display continuously in the

information display while the system is

active.

Resuming the Set Speed

Note: Only use resume if you are aware of

the set speed and intend to return to it.

Press and release RES. The vehicle will

return to the previously set speed. The set

speed will display continuously in the

information display while the system is

active.

Low Speed Automatic

Cancellation

The system is not functional at vehicle

speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). An

audible alarm will sound and the

automatic braking releases if the vehicle

drops below this speed.

Hilly Condition Usage

Note: An audible alarm will sound and the

system will shut down if it is applying brakes

for an extended period of time. This allows

the brakes to cool down. The system will

function normally again when the brakes

have cooled down.

You should select a lower gear position

when the system is active in situations

such as prolonged downhill driving on

steep grades, for example in mountainous

areas. The system needs additional engine

braking in these situations to reduce the

load on the vehicle’s regular brake system

to prevent them from overheating.

Switching the System Off

Note: The set speed memory erases when

you switch off the system.

Press and release OFF or turn off the

ignition.

Detection Issues

The radar sensor has a limited field of

vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or

detect a vehicle later than expected in

some situations. The lead vehicle graphic

will not illuminate if the system does not

detect a vehicle in front of you.

185

Cruise Control

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

When driving on a different line

than the vehicle in front.

With vehicles that edge into your

lane. The system can only detect

these vehicles once they move

fully into your lane.

There may be issues with the

detection of vehicles in front

when driving into and coming out

of a bend or curve in the road.

In these cases, the system may brake late

or unexpectedly. The driver should stay

alert and intervene when necessary.

If something hits the front end of your

vehicle or damage occurs, the

radar-sensing zone may change. This could

cause missed or false vehicle detections.

See an authorized dealer to have the radar

checked for proper coverage and

operation.

System Not Available

Conditions which can cause the system to

deactivate or prevent the system from

activating when requested include:

• a blocked sensor

• high brake temperature

• a failure in the system or a related

system.

Blocked Sensor

WARNINGS

Do not use the system when towing

a trailer with brake controls.

Aftermarket trailer brakes will not

function properly when the system is

activated because the brakes are

electronically controlled. Failing to do so

may result in loss of vehicle control, which

could result in serious injury.

Do not use tires sizes other than

those recommended because this

can affect the normal operation of

the system. Failing to do so may result in

a loss of vehicle control, which could result

in serious injury.

E145632

186

Cruise Control

A message displays if something obstructs

the radar signals from the sensor. The

sensor is located behind a fascia cover

near the driver side of the lower grille. The

system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and

will not function when something obstructs

the radar signals. The following table lists

possible causes and actions for this

message displaying.

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

or remove the object causing the obstruc-

tion.

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty

or obstructed in some way.

Wait a short time. It may take several

minutes for the radar to detect that it is no

longer obstructed

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean

but the message remains in the display.

Do not use the system in these conditions

because it may not detect any vehicles

ahead.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the

radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions

because it may not detect any vehicles

ahead.

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface

of the road may interfere with the radar

signals.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise

control.

You are in a desert or remote area with no

other vehicles and no roadside objects.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is

possible to get a blockage warning and not

be blocked. This can happen, for example,

when driving in sparse rural or desert

environments. A false blocked condition

will either self clear or clear after a key

cycle.

Switching to Normal Cruise

Control

WARNING

Normal cruise control will not brake

due to slower vehicles. Always be

aware of which mode is selected and

apply the brakes when necessary.

You can manually change from adaptive

cruise control to normal cruise control

through the information display.

E71340

The cruise control indicator light

replaces the adaptive cruise

control indicator light if you

select normal cruise control. The gap

setting will not display, the system will not

automatically respond to lead vehicles and

automatic braking will activate. The

system defaults to adaptive cruise control

when you start the vehicle.

ECO Cruise Control

This feature saves vehicle energy by

relaxing acceleration compared to

standard cruise control. For example, your

vehicle may temporarily lose speed when

going uphill. ECO will appear in the

information display when you activate ECO

cruise control. It can be switched on or off

in the information display. See General

Information (page 84).

187

Cruise Control

DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNING

The driver alert system is designed

to aid you. It is not intended to

replace your attention and judgment.

You are still responsible to drive with due

care and attention.

Note: The system will store the on/off

setting in the information display menu

through ignition cycles.

Note: If enabled in the menu, the system

will be active at speeds above 40 mph (64

km/h).

Note: The system works as long as one lane

marking can be detected by the camera.

Note: If the camera is blocked or if the

windshield is damaged, the system may not

function.

Note: The system may not be available in

poor weather or other low visibility

conditions.

The system automatically monitors your

driving behavior using various inputs

including the front camera sensor.

If the system detects that your driving

alertness is reduced below a certain

threshold, the system will alert you using

a chime and a message in the cluster

display.

USING DRIVER ALERT

Switching the system on and off

By default, the system is enabled. You may

disable or re-enable the system by

selecting Setting then Driver Assist then

Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,

the system will monitor your alertness level

based upon your driving behavior in relation

to the lane markings, and other factors.

System Warnings

Note: Note: The system will not issue

warnings below approximately 40 mph (65

km/h).

The warning system is in two stages. At

first the system issues a temporary warning

that you need to take a rest. This message

will only appear for a short time. If the

system detects further reduction in driving

alertness, another warning may be issued

which will remain in the information display

for a longer time. Press OK on the steering

wheel control to clear the warning

System Display

When active the system will run

automatically in the background and only

issue a warning if required. You can view

the status at any time using the

information display. See General

Information (page 84).

The alertness level is shown by six steps

in a colored bar.

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

E131359

Alertness level is critical, indicating that a

rest should be taken as soon as safely

possible.

188

Driving Aids

The status bar will travel from left to right

as the calculated alertness level

decreases. As the rest icon is approached

the color turns from green to yellow and

then finally red when a rest break should

be taken.

• Green - No rest required.

• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.

• Red - Second warning.

Note: If you have recently received a

warning; you should consider resting, even

if the current assessment is with the typical

range.

Note: The alertness level will be shown in

grey if the camera sensor cannot track the

road lane markings or if the vehicle speed

drops below approximately 40 mph (65

km/h).

Resetting the System

You can reset the system by either:

• Switching the ignition off and on.

• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver’s door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

The system is designed to aid the

driver. It is not intended to replace

the driver’s attention and judgment.

The driver is still responsible to drive with

due care and attention.

Note: The system needs to be activated by

the driver at each key cycle.

Note: The system works above 40 mph (64

km/h).

Note: The system works as long as one lane

marking can be detected by the camera.

Note: If the camera is blocked or if the

windshield is damaged, the system may not

function.

Note: When Aid mode is on and the system

detects no driver steering activity for a short

continuous period of time, the system alerts

the driver to put their hands on the steering

wheel. The system may detect a light

grip/touch on the steering wheel as hands

off driving.

The system detects unintentional drifting

toward the outside of the lane and alerts

and/or aids the driver to stay in the lane

through the steering system and

instrument cluster display. The system

automatically detects and tracks the road

lane markings using a camera that is

mounted behind the interior rear view

mirror.

Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system defaults to off each time

the vehicle is started, unless a MyKey® is

detected. If a MyKey® is detected, the

system is defaulted to on and the Alert

mode is automatically selected.

Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the

button will not affect the on/off status of

the system. Only the Mode, Sensitivity and

Intensity settings can be changed when a

MyKey® is present.

To turn the system on, press the

button located on the left

steering wheel stalk. The button

must be pressed each time the vehicle is

started. The system can be turned off by

pressing the button again.

189

Driving Aids

System Settings

The system has three optional setting

menus available. To view or adjust them,

select Settings > Vehicle Settings > Driver

Assist > Lane Keeping Sys in the left-hand

instrument cluster display using the OK

button on the steering wheel. The

last-known selection for each of these

settings is stored by the system. You do

not need to readjust your settings each

time you turn on the system.

Mode: This setting allows the driver to

select which of the system features will be

enabled and turned on when the button is

pressed.

• Alert only – Provides a steering wheel

vibration when an unintended lane

departure is detected.

• Aid only – Provides a steering input

toward the lane center when an

unintended lane departure is detected.

• Both Alert + Aid

Intensity: This setting affects the intensity

of the steering wheel vibration used for the

alert and alert + aid modes. This setting

does not impact the aid mode.

•Low

• Medium

• High

System Display

E151660

When the system is turned on, an overhead

graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will

be displayed in the left-hand instrument

cluster display. If the aid mode is selected

when the system is turned on, a separate

white icon will also appear in the

instrument cluster.

When the system is turned off, the lane

marking graphics will not be displayed.

Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may

still be displayed if adaptive cruise control

is enabled.

While the system is on, the color of the

lane markings will change to indicate the

system status.

Gray: Indicates that the system is

temporarily unable to provide a warning

or intervention on the indicated side(s).

This may be because:

• the vehicle is under the activation

speed

• the turn indicator is active

• the vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver

• the road has no or poor lane markings

in the camera field-of-view

• the camera is obscured or unable to

detect the lane markings due to

environmental conditions (e.g.

significant sun angles or shadows,

snow, heavy rain, fog), traffic

conditions (e.g. following a large

vehicle that is blocking or shadowing

the lane), or vehicle conditions (e.g.

poor headlamp illumination).

See Troubleshooting for additional

information.

Green: Indicates that the system is

available or ready to provide a warning or

intervention, on the indicated side(s).

Yellow: Indicates that the system is

providing or has just provided a lane

keeping aid intervention.

190

Driving Aids

Red: Indicates that the system is providing

or has just provided a lane keeping alert

warning.

The system can be temporarily suppressed

at any time by the following:

• Quick braking

• Fast acceleration

• Using the turn signal indicator

• Evasive steering maneuver

Troubleshooting

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings

on the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens

Quick intentional lane change

Staying too close to the lane marking

Driving at high speeds in curves

Previous feature activation happened within the last one second

Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)

Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings

on the road?

Sudden offset in lane markings

ABS or AdvanceTrac activation

Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield

Too close to the vehicle in front of you

Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa

Standing water on the road

Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)

Lane width too narrow or too wide

Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement

When driving on tight roads or on uneven roads

191

Driving Aids

Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in

the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds

Large road crown

Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure

If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been

modified

BLIND SPOT MONITOR

Blind Spot Information System

(BLIS®) with Cross Traffic Alert (If

Equipped)

WARNING

To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the

BLIS as a replacement for using the

interior and exterior mirrors and

looking over your shoulder before changing

lanes. BLIS is not a replacement for careful

driving and only an assist.

E124788

BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that

may have entered the blind spot zone (A).

The detection area is on both sides of the

vehicle, extending rearward from the

exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet

(3 meters) beyond the bumper. The

system alerts you if certain vehicles enter

the blind spot zone while driving.

Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles

approaching from the sides when the

transmission is in R (Reverse).

Note: BLIS is not designed to prevent

contact with other vehicles or objects; or to

detect parked vehicles, people, animals or

infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees,

etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to

vehicles in the blind zones.

Note: When a vehicle passes quickly

through the blind zone, typically fewer than

two seconds, the system does not trigger.

Using the Systems

BLIS turns on when the engine is started

and the vehicle is driven forward above 5

mph (8 km/h); it remains on while the

transmission is in D (Drive) and N

(Neutral). If shifted out of D (Drive) or N

(Neutral), the system enters cross traffic

alert mode. Once shifted back into D

(Drive), BLIS turns back on when the

vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).

192

Driving Aids

Note: BLIS does not function in R (Reverse)

or P (Park) or provide any additional

warning when a turn signal is on.

Note: Cross traffic alert detects

approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet (14

meters) away though coverage decreases

when the sensors are blocked. Reversing

slowly helps increase the coverage area and

effectiveness.

Note: For manual transmission vehicles,

CTA will be active only if the transmission

is in Reverse. If the vehicle is rolling

backwards and the transmission is not in

Reverse then CTA will not be active.

WARNING

To help avoid personal injury, NEVER

use the cross traffic alert system as

a replacement for using the interior

and exterior mirrors and looking over your

shoulder before backing out of a parking

space. Cross traffic alert is not a

replacement for careful driving and only

an assist.

E142440

In this first example, the left sensor is only

partially obstructed; zone coverage is

nearly maximized.

193

Driving Aids

E142441

Zone coverage also decreases when

parking at shallow angles. Here, the left

sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage

on that side is severely limited.

System Lights and Messages

E142442

The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems

illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the

outside mirror on the side of the vehicle

the approaching vehicle is coming from.

Note: The alert indicator dims when

nighttime darkness is detected.

Cross traffic alert also sounds an audible

warning and a message appears in the

information display indicating a vehicle is

coming from the right or left. Cross traffic

alert works with the reverse sensing

system which sounds its own series of

tones. See Parking Aid (page 172).

System Sensors

WARNING

Just prior to the system recognizing

a blocked condition and alerting the

driver, the number of missed objects

will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER

use the BLIS as a replacement for using

the side and rear view mirrors and looking

over your shoulder before changing lanes.

BLIS is not a replacement for careful

driving and only an assist.

Note: It is possible to get a blockage

warning with no blockage present; this is

rare and known as a false blockage warning.

A false blocked condition either

self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.

194

Driving Aids

E142443

The system uses radar sensors which are

located behind the bumper fascia on each

side of your vehicle. Do not allow these

areas to become obstructed by mud, snow

or bumper stickers, as this can cause

degraded system performance.

If the system detects a degraded

performance condition, a message warning

of a blocked sensor or a message warning

of low visibility will appear in the

information display and the alert indicator

illuminates in the appropriate mirror(s).

The information display warning can be

cleared but the alert indicator remains

illuminated.

When the blockage is removed, the system

can be reset in two ways:

• when at least two objects are detected

while driving, or

• turn the ignition from on to off, then

back on.

If the blockage is still present after the key

cycle, the system senses again that it is

blocked after driving in traffic.

Reasons for messages being displayed

Clean the fascia area in

front of the radar or remove

the obstruction.

The radar

surface is

dirty or

obstructed

Drive normally in traffic for

a few minutes to allow the

radar to detect passing

vehicles so it can clear the

blocked state.

The radar

surface is

not dirty or

obstructed

No action required. The

system automatically

resets to an unblocked

state once the rainfall or

snowfall rate decreases or

stops. Do not use BLIS or

cross traffic alert in these

conditions.

Heavy rain-

fall/snow-

fall inter-

feres with

the radar

signals

System Limitations

The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems

do have their limitations; situations such

as severe weather conditions or debris

build-up on the sensor area may limit

vehicle detection.

The following are other situations that may

limit the BLIS:

• Certain maneuvering of vehicles

entering and exiting the blind zone.

• Vehicles passing through the blind zone

at very fast rates.

• When several vehicles forming a

convoy pass through the blind zone.

The following are other situations that may

limit the cross traffic alert system:

• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects

obstructing the sensors.

• Approaching vehicles passing at

speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).

195

Driving Aids

• Driving in reverse faster than 5 mph (8

km/h).

• Backing out of an angled parking spot.

False Alerts

Note: If a trailer is connected to the vehicle

the BLIS system may detect the trailer

causing a false alert. You may want to turn

the BLIS off manually.

There may be certain instances when

either the BLIS or cross traffic alert

systems illuminate the alert indicator with

no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is

known as a false alert. Some amount of

false alerts are normal; they are temporary

and self-correct.

System Errors

If either system senses a problem with the

left or right sensor, the BLIS telltale will

illuminate and a message will appear in

the information display.

All other system faults will only be

displayed by a message in the information

display.

Switching the Systems Off and On

One or both systems can be switched off

temporarily by using the information

display control. See General Information

(page 84). When the BLIS is switched off,

you will not receive alerts and a telltale

illuminates in the information display.

Note: The CTA system always switches on

whenever the ignition is switched on.

However, the BLIS system will remember

the last selected on or off setting.

One or both systems cannot be switched

off when MyKey is used. See Principle of

Operation (page 48).

One or both systems can also be switched

off permanently at your authorized dealer.

Once switched off, switching it back on

must also be done at your authorized

dealer.

STEERING

Electric Power Steering

WARNING

Obtain immediate service if a system

error is detected. You may not notice

any difference in the feel of your

steering, but a serious condition may exist.

Failure to do so may result in loss of

steering control.

Note: Your vehicle is equipped with an

electric power-assisted steering system.

There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.

The electric power steering system has

diagnostic checks that continuously

monitor the system to ensure proper

operation of the electronic system. When

an electronic error is detected, a message

will be displayed in the information display.

If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and turn off the engine. After at least

10 seconds, reset the system by restarting

the engine, and watch the information

display for a steering message. If a steering

message returns, or returns while driving,

take the vehicle to your dealer to have it

checked.

If your vehicle loses electrical power while

you are driving (or if the ignition is turned

off), you can steer the vehicle manually,

but it takes more effort. Extreme

continuous steering may increase the effort

it takes for you to steer. This occurs to

prevent internal overheating and

permanent damage to your steering

196

Driving Aids

system. If this should occur, you will neither

lose the ability to steer the vehicle

manually nor will it cause permanent

damage. Typical steering and driving

maneuvers will allow the system to cool

and steering assist will return to normal.

Steering Tips

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

• an improperly inflated tire

• uneven tire wear

• loose or worn suspension components

• loose or worn steering components

• improper vehicle alignment

A high crown in the road or high crosswinds

may also make the steering seem to

wander or pull.

Adaptive Learning

The EPS system adaptive learning helps

correct for road irregularities and improves

overall handling and steering feel. It

communicates with the vehicle's brake

system to help operate advanced stability

control and accident avoidance systems.

Additionally, whenever the battery is

disconnected or a new battery installed,

the vehicle must be driven a short distance

before the strategy is relearned and all

systems are reactivated.

COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION (If

Equipped)

WARNINGS

This system is designed to be a

supplementary driving aid. It is not

intended to replace the driver’s

attention, and judgment, or the need to

apply the brakes. This system does NOT

activate the brakes automatically. Failure

to press the brake pedal to activate the

brakes may result in a collision.

The collision warning system with

brake support cannot help prevent

all collisions. Do not rely on this

system to replace driver judgment and the

need to maintain distance and speed.

Note: The system does not detect, warn or

respond to potential collisions with vehicles

to the rear or sides of the vehicle.

Note: The collision warning system is active

at speeds above approximately 5 mph (8

km/h).

E156130

This system is designed to alert the driver

of certain collision risks. A radar detects if

your vehicle is rapidly approaching another

vehicle traveling in the same direction as

yours.

E156131

197

Driving Aids

If it is, a red warning light illuminates and

an audible warning chime sounds.

The brake support system assists the driver

in reducing the collision speed by charging

the brakes. If the risk of collision further

increases after the warning light

illuminates, the brake support prepares

the brake system for rapid braking. This

may be apparent to the driver. The system

does not automatically activate the brakes

but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force

braking is applied even if the brake pedal

is lightly pressed.

Using the Collision Warning System

WARNING

The collision warning system’s brake

support can only help reduce the

speed at which a collision occurs if

the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The

brake pedal must be pressed just like any

typical braking situation.

The warning system sensitivity can be

adjusted to one of three possible settings

by using the information display control.

See General Information (page 84).

Note: If the system cannot be turned off in

a vehicle equipped with MyKey®, See

Principle of Operation (page 48).

Note: If collision warnings are perceived as

being too frequent or disturbing then the

warning sensitivity can be reduced, though

the manufacturer recommends using the

highest sensitivity setting where possible.

Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer

and later system warnings. See General

Information (page 84).

Blocked Sensors

E145632

If a message regarding a blocked sensor

appears in the information display, the

radar signals from the sensor have been

obstructed. The sensors are located behind

a fascia cover near the driver side of the

lower grille. When the sensors are

obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be

detected and the collision warning system

does not function. The following table lists

possible causes and actions for this

message being displayed.

198

Driving Aids

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

or remove the object causing the obstruc-

tion

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty

or obstructed in some way

Wait a short time. It may take several

minutes for the radar to detect that it is no

longer obstructed

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean

but the message remains in the display

The collision warning system is temporarily

disabled. Collision warning should automat-

ically reactivate a short time after the

weather conditions improve

Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering

with the radar signals

The collision warning system is temporarily

disabled. Collision warning should automat-

ically reactivate a short time after the

weather conditions improve

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface

of the road may interfere with the radar

signals

System Limitations

WARNING

The collision warning system’s brake

support can only help reduce the

speed at which a collision occurs if

the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The

brake pedal must be pressed just like any

typical braking situation.

Due to the nature of radar technology,

there may be certain instances where

vehicles do not provide a collision warning.

These include:

• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving

below 6 mph (10 km/h).

• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.

• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

• Severe weather conditions (see

blocked sensor section).

• Debris build-up on the grille near the

headlamps (see blocked sensor

section).

• Small distance to vehicle ahead.

• Steering wheel and pedal movements

are large (very active driving style).

•

If the front end of the vehicle is hit or

damaged, the radar sensing zone may be

altered causing missed or false collision

warnings. See your authorized dealer to

have your collision warning radar checked

for proper coverage and operation.

199

Driving Aids

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with and without

a Trailer

This section will guide you in the

proper loading of your vehicle,

trailer or both, to keep your loaded

vehicle weight within its design

rating capability, with or without

a trailer. Properly loading your

vehicle will provide maximum

return of vehicle design

performance. Before loading your

vehicle, familiarize yourself with

the following terms for

determining your vehicle’s weight

ratings, with or without a trailer,

from the vehicle’s Tire Label or

Safety Compliance Certification

Label:

Base Curb Weight - is the weight

of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard

equipment. It does not include

passengers, cargo, or optional

equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight - is the

weight of your new vehicle when

you picked it up from your

authorized dealer plus any

aftermarket equipment.

E143816

PAYLOAD

Payload - is the combined weight

of cargo and passengers that the

vehicle is carrying. The maximum

payload for your vehicle can be

found on the Tire Label on the

B-Pillar or the edge of the driver

door (vehicles exported outside

the US and Canada may not have

a Tire Label). Look for “THE

COMBINED WEIGHT OF

OCCUPANTS AND CARGO

SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX

kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum

payload. The payload listed on the

Tire Label is the maximum

payload for the vehicle as built by

the assembly plant. If you install

any aftermarket or

200

Load Carrying

authorized-dealer installed

equipment on the vehicle, you

must subtract the weight of the

equipment from the payload listed

on the Tire Label in order to

determine the new payload.

WARNING

The appropriate loading capacity of

your vehicle can be limited either by

volume capacity (how much space

is available) or by payload capacity (how

much weight the vehicle should carry).

Once you have reached the maximum

payload of your vehicle, do not add more

cargo, even if there is space available.

Overloading or improperly loading your

vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and vehicle rollover.

Example only:

E142516

E142517

201

Load Carrying

E143817

CARGO

Cargo Weight - includes all

weight added to the Base Curb

Weight, including cargo and

optional equipment. When towing,

trailer tongue load or king pin

weight is also part of cargo weight.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is

the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) including

vehicle curb weight and all

payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

Rating) - is the maximum

allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or

rear). These numbers are shown

on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label. The label shall

be affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door

edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating

position. The total load on each

axle must never exceed its

Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Note: For trailer towing information refer

to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available

at an authorized dealer.

E143818

GVW

202

Load Carrying

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -

is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus

cargo, plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating) - is the maximum

allowable weight of the fully

loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers

and cargo). It is shown on the

Safety Compliance Certification

Label. The label shall be affixed

to either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge

that meets the door-latch post,

next to the driver's seating

position. The Gross Vehicle

Weight must never exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.

Example only:

E142523

E142524

203

Load Carrying

WARNING

Exceeding the Safety Compliance

Certification Label vehicle weight

rating limits could result in

substandard vehicle handling or

performance, engine, transmission and/or

structural damage, serious damage to the

vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

E143819

GCW GVW

GCW (Gross Combined Weight)

- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus

the weight of the fully loaded

trailer.

GCWR (Gross Combined

Weight Rating) - is the maximum

allowable weight of the vehicle

and the loaded trailer, including

all cargo and passengers, that the

vehicle can handle without risking

damage. (Important: The towing

vehicle’s braking system is rated

for operation at Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating, not at Gross

Combined Weight Rating.)

Separate functional brakes should

be used for safe control of towed

vehicles and for trailers where the

Gross Combined Weight of the

towing vehicle plus the trailer

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating of the towing vehicle. The

Gross Combined Weight must

never exceed the Gross

Combined Weight Rating.

Maximum Loaded Trailer

Weight - is the highest possible

weight of a fully loaded trailer the

vehicle can tow. It assumes a

vehicle with mandatory options,

driver and front passenger weight

(150 pounds [68 kilograms]

each), no cargo weight (internal

or external) and a tongue load of

10–15% (conventional trailer) or

king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth

wheel trailer). Consult an

authorized dealer (or the RV and

Trailer Towing Guide available at

an authorized dealer) for more

detailed information.

204

Load Carrying

Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel

King Pin Weight - refers to the

amount of the weight that a trailer

pushes down on a trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5000 pound

(2268 kilogram) conventional

trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and

0.15 to obtain a proper tongue

load range of 500 to 750 pounds

(227 to 340 kilograms). For an

11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth

wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and

0.25 to obtain a proper king pin

load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds

(782 to 1304 kilograms).

WARNINGS

Do not exceed the GVWR or the

GAWR specified on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label.

Do not use replacement tires with

lower load carrying capacities than

the original tires because they may

lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR

limitations. Replacement tires with a higher

limit than the original tires do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Exceeding any vehicle weight rating

limitation could result in serious

damage to the vehicle and/or

personal injury.

Steps for determining the

correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lb." on your

vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For

example, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lb. and there will be

five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =

650 lb.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

The following gives you a few

examples on how to calculate the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity:

205

Load Carrying

*Suppose your vehicle has a

1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo

and luggage capacity. You decide

to go golfing. Is there enough load

capacity to carry you, four of your

friends and all the golf bags? You

and four friends average 220

pounds (99 kilograms) each and

the golf bags weigh approximately

30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.

The calculation would be: 1400 -

(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100

- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have

enough load capacity in your

vehicle to transport four friends

and your golf bags. In metric units,

the calculation would be: 635

kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -

(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -

67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.

*Suppose your vehicle has a

1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo

and luggage capacity. You and

one of your friends decide to pick

up cement from the local home

improvement store to finish that

patio you have been planning for

the past two years. Measuring the

inside of the vehicle with the rear

seat folded down, you have room

for twelve 100-pound

(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do

you have enough load capacity to

transport the cement to your

home? If you and your friend each

weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),

the calculation would be: 1400 -

(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440

- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do

not have enough cargo capacity

to carry that much weight. In

metric units, the calculation would

be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99

kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =

635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.

You will need to reduce the load

weight by at least 240 pounds

(104 kilograms). If you remove

three 100-pound (45-kilogram)

cement bags, then the load

calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x

220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -

900 = 60 pounds. Now you have

the load capacity to transport the

cement and your friend home. In

metric units, the calculation would

be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99

kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =

635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.

The above calculations also

assume that the loads are

positioned in your vehicle in a

manner that does not overload

the Front or the Rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating specified for your

vehicle on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label. The label shall

be affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door

edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating

position.

206

Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING

Never tow a trailer with a Fusion

Hybrid. This powertrain is not

designed to tow.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,

contact a professional towing service or,

if you are a member of a roadside

assistance program, your roadside

assistance service provider.

We recommend the use of a wheel lift and

dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your

vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford

Motor Company has not approved a

slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle

damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or

by any other means.

Ford Motor Company produces a towing

manual for all authorized tow truck

operators. Have your tow truck operator

refer to this manual for proper hook-up

and towing procedures for your vehicle.

The front wheels (drive wheels) must be

on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle

from the rear using wheel lift equipment.

This prevents damage to the transmission.

We recommend placing the rear wheels

on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle

from the front using wheel lift equipment.

This prevents damage to the rear fascia.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON

FOUR WHEELS

Emergency Towing

If your vehicle becomes inoperable

(without access to wheel dollies,

car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport

vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels

on the ground, regardless of the powertrain

and transmission configuration) under the

following conditions:

• Tow only in the forward direction.

• The transmission in position N. If you

cannot move the transmission into N,

you may need to override it. See

Automatic Transmission (page 162).

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).

• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80

kilometers).

Recreational Towing

Note: Put your climate control system in

recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust

fumes from entering the vehicle. See

Climate Control (page ?).

207

Towing

Follow these guidelines if you have a need

for recreational (RV) towing. An example

of recreational towing would be towing

your vehicle behind a motorhome. We

designed these guidelines to prevent

damage to your transmission

You can tow your vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground or with the front

wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly.

If you are using a tow dolly, follow the

instructions specified by the equipment

provider.

If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground:

• Tow only in the forward direction.

• Release the parking brake.

• Place the transmission in position N.

• Place the ignition in the accessory

position. See Starting and Stopping

the Engine (page 132).

• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).

• Place the transmission in position P,

start the vehicle and allow it to run for

one minute at the beginning of each

day (you may need to press the

accelerator pedal in order to start the

vehicle). After allowing the vehicle to

run, place the transmission back into

position N and the ignition in the

accessory position.

208

Towing

BREAKING-IN

You need to break in new tires for

approximately 300 miles (480

kilometers). During this time, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving

characteristics. The engine also needs to

break in. Avoid hard accelerations and

driving too fast for the first 1000 miles

(1600 kilometers). If possible, avoid

carrying heavy loads up steep grades

during the break-in period.

ECONOMICAL DRIVING

Fuel economy is affected by several things

such as how you drive, the conditions you

drive under and how you maintain your

vehicle.

There are some things to keep in mind that

may improve your fuel economy:

• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.

• Drive at steady speeds.

• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.

• Combine errands and minimize

stop-and-go driving.

• When running errands, go to the

furthest destination first and then

work your way back home.

• Close the windows for high-speed

driving.

• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling

at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15%

less fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121

kph).

• Keep the tires properly inflated and use

only the recommended size.

• Use the recommended engine oil.

• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.

There are also some things you may want

to avoid doing because they reduce your

fuel economy:

• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.

• Avoid revving the engine before turning

off the car.

• Avoid long idle periods.

• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.

• Reduce the use of air conditioning and

heat.

• Avoid using speed control in hilly

terrain.

• Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight

(approximately 1 mpg [0.4

kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400

lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).

• Avoid adding particular accessories to

your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,

rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski

racks).

• Avoid driving with the wheels out of

alignment.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Note: Driving through deep water above

the recommended levels can cause vehicle

damage.

If driving through deep or standing water

is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never

drive through water that is higher than the

bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the

bottom of the hubs (for trucks).

209

Driving Hints

E142667

When driving through water, traction or

brake capability may be limited. Also,

water may enter your engine’s air intake

and severely damage your engine or your

vehicle may stall.

Once through the water, always dry the

brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while

applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as

quickly as dry brakes.

FLOOR MATS

E142666

WARNINGS

Always use floor mats that are

designed to fit the foot well of your

vehicle. Only use floor mats that

leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only

use floor mats that are firmly secured to

retention posts so that they cannot slip out

of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in

other ways.

Pedals that cannot move freely can

cause loss of vehicle control and

increase the risk of serious personal

injury.

Always make sure that the floor

mats are properly attached to the

retention posts in the carpet that are

supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must

be properly secured to both retention posts

to ensure mats do not shift out of position.

Never place floor mats or any other

covering in the vehicle foot well that

cannot be properly secured to

prevent them from moving and interfering

with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

Never place floor mats or any other

covering on top of already installed

floor mats. Floor mats should always

rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and

not another floor mat or other covering.

Additional floor mats or any other covering

will reduce the pedal clearance and

potentially interfere with pedal operation.

Check attachment of floor mats on

a regular basis. Always properly

reinstall and secure floor mats that

have been removed for cleaning or

replacement.

Always make sure that objects

cannot fall into the driver foot well

while the vehicle is moving. Objects

that are loose can become trapped under

the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

210

Driving Hints

WARNINGS

Failure to properly follow floor mat

installation or attachment

instructions can potentially cause

interference with pedal operation causing

loss of control of vehicle.

To install floor mats, position the

floor mat so that the eyelet is over

the retention post and press down

to lock in.

To remove the floor mat, reverse the

installation procedure.

211

Driving Hints

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU

NEED

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be

performed by an authorized dealer. While

any authorized dealer handling your vehicle

line will provide warranty service, we

recommend you return to your selling

authorized dealer who wants to ensure

your continued satisfaction.

Please note that certain warranty repairs

require special training and equipment, so

not all authorized dealers are authorized

to perform all warranty repairs. This means

that, depending on the warranty repair

needed, you may have to take your vehicle

to another authorized dealer.

A reasonable time must be allowed to

perform a repair after taking your vehicle

to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be

made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or

remanufactured or other parts that are

authorized by Ford.

Away From Home

If you are away from home when your

vehicle needs service, contact the Ford

Customer Relationship Center or use the

online resources listed below to find the

nearest authorized dealer.

In the United States:

Mailing address

Ford Motor Company

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 6248

Dearborn, MI 48121

Telephone

1-800-392-3673 (FORD)

(TDD for the hearing impaired:

1-800-232-5952)

Online

Additional information and resources are

available online at www.fordowner.com

These are some of the items that can be

found online:

• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,

City/State, or Zip Code

• Owner Manuals

• Maintenance Schedules

• Recalls

• Ford Extended Service Plans

• Ford Genuine Accessories

• Service specials and promotions.

In Canada:

Mailing address

Customer Relationship Centre

Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

P.O. Box 2000

Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8

Telephone

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

Online

www.ford.ca

Additional Assistance

If you have questions or concerns, or are

unsatisfied with the service you are

receiving, follow these steps:

1. Contact your Sales Representative or

Service Advisor at your selling/servicing

authorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remains

unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,

Service Manager or Customer Relations

Manager.

3. If you require assistance or clarification

on Ford Motor Company policies,

please contact the Ford Customer

Relationship Center.

212

Customer Assistance

In order to help you serve you better,

please have the following information

available when contacting a Customer

Relationship Center:

• Vehicle Identification Number.

• Your telephone number (home and

business).

• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.

• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.

In some states, you must directly notify

Ford in writing before pursuing remedies

under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is

also allowed a final repair attempt in some

states.

In the United States, a warranty dispute

must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE

before taking action under the

Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the

extent allowed by state law, before

pursuing replacement or repurchase

remedies provided by certain state laws.

This dispute handling procedure is not

required prior to enforcing state created

rights or other rights which are independent

of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or

state replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)

requires that, if a manufacturer or its

representative is unable to repair a motor

vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s

applicable express warranty after a

reasonable number of attempts, the

manufacturer shall be required to either

replace the vehicle with one substantially

identical or repurchase the vehicle and

reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to

the actual price paid or payable by the

consumer (less a reasonable allowance

for consumer use). The consumer has the

right to choose whether to receive a refund

or replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)

presumes that the manufacturer has had

a reasonable number of attempts to

conform the vehicle to its applicable

express warranties if, within the first 18

months of ownership of a new vehicle or

the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),

whichever occurs first:

1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely to

cause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are made

on the same nonconformity (a defect

or condition that substantially impairs

the use, value or safety of the vehicle)

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair

of nonconformities for a total of more

than 30 calendar days (not necessarily

all at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer

must also notify the manufacturer of the

need for the repair of the nonconformity

at the following address:

Ford Motor Company

16800 Executive Plaza Drive

Mail Drop 3NE-B

Dearborn, MI 48126

You are required to submit your warranty

dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting

in court any rights or remedies conferred

by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).

You are also required to use BBB AUTO

LINE before exercising rights or seeking

remedies created by the Federal

Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.

sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek

redress by pursuing rights and remedies

not created by California Civil Code Section

1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss

Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is

not required by those statutes.

213

Customer Assistance

THE BETTER BUSINESS

BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE

PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)

Your satisfaction is important to Ford

Motor Company and to your dealer. If a

warranty concern has not been resolved

using the three-step procedure outlined

earlier in this chapter in the Getting the

Services you need section, you may be

eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO

LINE program.

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of

two parts – mediation and arbitration.

During mediation, a representative of the

BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor

Company to explore options for settlement

of the claim. If an agreement is not reached

during mediation or you do not want to

participate in mediation, and if your claim

is eligible, you may participate in the

arbitration process. An arbitration hearing

will be scheduled so that you can present

your case in an informal setting before an

impartial person. The arbitrator will

consider the testimony provided and make

a decision after the hearing.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE

program are usually decided within forty

days after you file your claim with the BBB.

You are not bound by the decision, and

may reject the decision and proceed to

court where all findings of the BBB Auto

Line dispute, and decision, are admissible

in the court action. Should you choose to

accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford

is then bound by the decision, and must

comply with the decision within 30 days

of receipt of your acceptance letter.

BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the

information provided below, please call or

write to request a program application.

You will be asked for your name and

address, general information about your

new vehicle, information about your

warranty concerns, and any steps you have

already taken to try to resolve them. A

Customer Claim Form will be mailed that

will need to be completed, signed and

returned to the BBB along with proof of

ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will

review the claim for eligibility under the

Program Summary Guidelines.

You can get more information by

calling BBB AUTO LINE at

1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

BBB AUTO LINE

4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800

Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833

BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be

requested by calling the Ford Motor

Company Customer Relationship Center

at 1-800-392-3673.

Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the

right to change eligibility limitations, modify

procedures, or to discontinue this process

at any time without notice and without

obligation.

UTILIZING THE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION

PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

For vehicles delivered to authorized

Canadian dealers. In those cases where

you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford

of Canada and the authorized dealer to

resolve a factory-related vehicle service

concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of

Canada participates in an impartial third

party mediation/arbitration program

administered by the Canadian Motor

Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward

and relatively speedy alternative to resolve

a disagreement when all other efforts to

produce a settlement have failed. This

procedure is without cost to you and is

designed to eliminate the need for lengthy

and expensive legal proceedings.

214

Customer Assistance

In the CAMVAP program, impartial

third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at

mutually convenient times and places in

an informal environment. These impartial

arbitrators review the positions of the

parties, make decisions and, when

appropriate, render awards to resolve

disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,

and final as the arbitrator’s award is

binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

CAMVAP services are available in all

Canadian territories and provinces. For

more information, without charge or

obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial

Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685

or visit www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCE

OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND

CANADA

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign

country, contact the appropriate foreign

embassy or consulate. These officials can

inform you of local vehicle registration

regulations and where to find unleaded

fuel.

If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only

get fuel with an anti-knock index lower

than is recommended for your vehicle,

contact our Customer Relationship Center.

The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle

without proper conversion may damage

the effectiveness of your emission control

system and may cause engine knocking or

serious engine damage. Ford Motor

Company or Ford of Canada is not

responsible for any damage caused by use

of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may

also result in difficulty importing your

vehicle back into the United States.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you

are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,

Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,

Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer cannot help you,

contact:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY

FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL

INITIATIVES

Customer Relationship Center

1555 Fairlane Drive

Fairlane Business Park #3

Allen Park, Michigan 48101

U.S.A.

Telephone: (313) 594-4857

Fax: (313) 390-0804

Email: expcac@ford.com

For customers in Guam, the

Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana

Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the

U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call

our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD

(3673).

If your vehicle must be serviced while you

are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer cannot help you,

contact:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY

FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL

INITIATIVES

Customer Relationship Center

1555 Fairlane Drive

Fairlane Business Park #3

Allen Park, Michigan 48101

U.S.A.

Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)

FAX: (313) 390-0804

Email: prcac@ford.com

www.ford.com.pr

If your vehicle must be serviced while you

are traveling or living in the Middle East,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. If

the authorized dealer cannot help you,

contact:

215

Customer Assistance

Ford Middle East

Customer Relationship Center

P.O. Box 21470

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Telephone: +971 4 3326084

Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi

Arabia: 800 8971409

Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:

24810575

FAX: +971 4 3327299

Email: menacac@ford.com

www.me.ford.com

If you buy your vehicle in North America

and then relocate to any of the above

locations, register your vehicle

identification number (VIN) and new

address with Ford Motor Company Export

Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by

emailing expcac@ford.com.

If you are in another foreign country,

contact the nearest authorized dealer. In

the event your inquiry is unresolved,

communicate your concern with the

dealership’s Sales Manager, Service

Manager or Customer Relations Manager.

If you require additional assistance or

clarification, please contact the respective

Customer Relationship Center as

previously listed.

Customers in the U.S. should call

1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL

OWNER'S LITERATURE

To order the publications in this portfolio,

contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATED

47911 Halyard Drive

Plymouth, Michigan 48170

Attention: Customer Service

Or to order a free publication catalog, call

toll free: 1-800-782-4356

Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached

by their website:

www.helminc.com

(Items in this catalog may be purchased

by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s

Manual

French Owner’s Manual can be obtained

from your authorized dealer or by

contacting Helm, Incorporated using the

contact information listed previously in this

section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying

Ford Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Ford Motor

Company.

216

Customer Assistance

To contact NHTSA, you may call

the Vehicle Safety Hotline

toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to:

Administrator

1200 New Jersey Avenue,

Southeast

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle

safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(CANADA ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform Transport Canada.

Transport Canada Contact Information

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspxWebsite

1–800–333–0510Phone

217

Customer Assistance

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting

Roadside Assistance

To fully assist you should you have a

vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company

offers a complimentary roadside

assistance program. This program is

separate from the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. The service is available:

• 24 hours, seven days a week.

• for the coverage period listed on the

Roadside Assistance Card included in

your Owner's Manual portfolio.

Roadside assistance will cover:

• a flat tire change with a good spare, if

provided with the vehicle (except

vehicles that have been supplied with

a tire inflation kit).

• battery jump start.

• lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the customer's responsibility).

• fuel delivery — Independent Service

Contractors, if not prohibited by state,

local or municipal law, shall deliver up

to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of gasoline or

5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel

to a disabled vehicle. Fuel delivery

service is limited to two no-charge

occurrences within a 12-month period.

• winch out — available within 100 feet

(30.5 meters) of a paved or county

maintained road, no recoveries.

• towing — Ford and Lincoln eligible

vehicles towed to an authorized dealer

within 35 miles (56.3 kilometers) of the

disablement location or to the nearest

authorized dealer. If a member

requests to be towed to an authorized

dealer more than 35 miles (56.3

kilometers) from the disablement

location, the member shall be

responsible for any mileage costs in

excess of 35 miles (56.3 kilometers).

Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the

disabled eligible vehicle requires service at

the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer

is disabled, but the towing vehicle is

operational, the trailer does not qualify for

any roadside services.

Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using

Roadside Assistance

Complete the roadside assistance

identification card and place it in your

wallet for quick reference. This card is

found in the owner's information portfolio

in the glove compartment.

U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require

Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.

If you need to arrange roadside assistance

for yourself, Ford Motor Company will

reimburse a reasonable amount for towing

to the nearest dealership within 35 miles

(56.3 kilometers). To obtain

reimbursement information, U.S. Ford

vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.

Customers will be asked to submit their

original receipts.

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting

Roadside Assistance

Canadian customers who require roadside

assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using

Roadside Assistance

Complete the roadside assistance

identification card and place it in your

wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the

card is found in the warranty information

in the glove box.

Canadian roadside coverage and benefits

may differ from the U.S. coverage. Please

refer to your warranty information or visit

our website at www.ford.ca for information

on Canadian services and benefits.

218

Roadside Emergencies

Canadian customers who need to obtain

roadside information, call

1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at

www.ford.ca.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Note: If used when the vehicle is not

running, the battery will lose charge. There

may be insufficient power to restart your

vehicle.

The hazard warning button is

located on the instrument panel.

Use it when your vehicle is

creating a safety hazard for other

motorists.

• Press the button to turn on the hazard

warning function, and the front and

rear direction indicators will flash.

• Press the button again to turn them

off.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNING

Failure to inspect and, if necessary,

repair fuel leaks after a collision may

increase the risk of fire and serious

injury. Ford Motor Company recommends

that the fuel system be inspected by an

authorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severe

collision, this vehicle is equipped with a

fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the

flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact

will cause a shut-off.

Should your vehicle shut off after a

collision, you may restart your vehicle by

doing the following:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Turn the ignition to crank.

3. Turn the ignition off.

4. Turn the ignition on again to re-enable

the fuel pump.

For vehicles equipped with a push button

start system:

1. Press the START/STOP button to

turn the ignition off.

2. Press the brake pedal and press the

START/STOP button (crank

attempt).

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal

and press the START/STOP button

(ignition off).

4. Press the START/STOP button again

to re-enable the fuel system.

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGS

The gases around the battery can

explode if exposed to flames, sparks,

or lit cigarettes. An explosion could

result in injury or vehicle damage.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which

can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if

contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your

automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic

transmissions do not have push-start

capability. Attempting to push-start a

vehicle with an automatic transmission

may cause transmission damage.

Preparing Your Vehicle

Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your

vehicle.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the

disabled vehicle as this could damage the

vehicle's electrical system.

219

Roadside Emergencies

1. Park the booster vehicle close to the

hood of the disabled vehicle making

sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set

the parking brake on both vehicles and

stay clear of the engine cooling fan and

other moving parts.

2. Check all battery terminals and remove

any excessive corrosion before you

attach the battery cables. Ensure that

vent caps are tight and level.

3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles

to protect from any electrical surges.

Turn all other accessories off.

Connecting the Jumper Cables

Your vehicle has a 12 volt battery that has

two prongs accessible from under the

hood. Your vehicle can be jumped the

same way conventional vehicles can be

using these prongs. The illustration below

shows the two connector prongs used for

jump-starting your vehicle.

E155827

A. Negative prong (–)

B. Positive prong (+)

Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the

bottom is used to designate the assisting

(boosting) battery.

Note: Remove the red cap from the positive

prong (B) on your vehicle before connecting

the cables.

220

Roadside Emergencies

E148861

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) prong (B) of the

discharged battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive

(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal

of the assisting battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the

negative (-) terminal of the assisting

battery.

4. Make the final connection of the

negative (-) cable to the negative (-)

prong (A) of your vehicle.

Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable

to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake

manifold or electrical components as

grounding points.

WARNING

Do not connect the end of the

second cable to the negative (-)

terminal of the battery to be jumped.

A spark may cause an explosion of the

gases that surround the battery.

Ensure that the cables are clear of fan

blades, belts, moving parts of both engines,

or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump Starting

1. Start the booster vehicle and press the

accelerator moderately.

2. Start the disabled vehicle.

3. Once the disabled vehicle has been

started, run both vehicles for an

additional three minutes before

disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper Cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse

order that they were connected.

Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the

bottom is used to designate the assisting

(boosting) battery.

221

Roadside Emergencies

E148862

1. Remove the jumper cable from the

ground metal surface.

2. Remove the jumper cable on the

negative (-) terminal of the booster

vehicle's battery.

3. Remove the jumper cable from the

positive (+) terminal of the booster

vehicle's battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from the

positive (+) terminal of the disabled

vehicle's battery.

After the disabled vehicle has been started

and the jumper cables removed, allow it

to idle for several minutes so the vehicle

computer can relearn its idle conditions.

COLLISION, DAMAGE OR FIRE

EVENT

Guidance for Ford Motor Company

Electric and Hybrid-Electric

Vehicles Equipped With High

Voltage Batteries

(Vehicle Owner/Operator/General

Public)

Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle

Considerations

In the event of damage or fire involving

an electric vehicle (EV) or

hybrid-electric vehicle (HEV):

• Always assume the high-voltage

battery and associated components

are energized and fully charged.

• Exposed electrical components, wires

and high-voltage batteries present

potential high-voltage shock hazards.

• Venting/off-gassing high-voltage

battery vapors are potentially toxic and

flammable.

• Physical damage to the vehicle or

high-voltage battery may result in

immediate or delayed release of toxic,

flammable gases and fire.

Vehicle Information and General

Safety Practices

• Know the make and model of your

vehicle.

• Review the owner’s manual and

become familiar with your vehicle’s

safety information and recommended

safety practices.

• Do not attempt to repair damaged

electric and hybrid-electric vehicles

yourself. Contact an authorized Ford

Dealer or vehicle manufacturer

representative for service.

222

Roadside Emergencies

Crashes

A crash or impact significant enough to

require an emergency response for

conventional vehicles would also require

the same response for an electric or

hybrid-electric vehicle.

If possible

• Move your car to a safe, nearby

location and remain on the scene.

• Roll down the windows before shutting

your vehicle off.

• Place your vehicle in Park, set the

parking brake, turn off the vehicle,

activate the hazard lights, and move

your key(s) at least 16 feet (5 meters)

away from the vehicle.

Always

• Call 911 if assistance is needed and

advise that an electric or hybrid-electric

vehicle is involved.

• Do not touch exposed electrical

components or the engine

compartment, as a shock hazard may

exist.

• Avoid contact with leaking fluids and

gases, and remain out of the way of

oncoming traffic until emergency

responders arrive.

• When emergency responders arrive,

tell them that the vehicle involved is an

electric vehicle or hybrid vehicle.

Fires

As with any vehicle, call 911 immediately if

you see sparks, smoke or flames coming

from the vehicle.

• Exit the vehicle immediately.

• Advise 911 that an electric or

hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.

• As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale

smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle,

as they may be hazardous.

• Remain a safe distance upwind and

uphill from the vehicle fire.

• Stay out of the roadway and stay out

of the way of any oncoming traffic

while awaiting the arrival of emergency

responders.

Post-Incident

• Do not store a severely damaged

vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside

a structure or within 50 feet (15

meters) of any structure or vehicle.

• Make sure that passenger and cargo

compartments remain ventilated (i.e.,

open window, door, or trunk).

• For vehicles in the United States, notify

Ford Motor Company 1-800-392-3673

(then follow the prompts on the voice

response menu), an authorized Ford

dealer or service center as soon as

possible as there may be other steps

to secure and discharge the

high-voltage battery.

• For vehicles in Canada, notify Ford

Motor Company 1-800-565-3673

(then follow the prompts on the voice

response menu), an authorized Ford

dealer or service center as soon as

possible as there may be other steps

to secure and discharge the

high-voltage battery.

• Call 911 if you observe leaking fluids,

sparks, smoke or flames, or hear

gurgling or bubbling from the

high-voltage battery.

223

Roadside Emergencies

CHANGING A FUSE

Fuses

WARNING

Always replace a fuse with one that

has the specified amperage rating.

Using a fuse with a higher amperage

rating can cause severe wire damage and

could start a fire.

E142430

If electrical components in the vehicle are

not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown

fuses are identified by a broken wire within

the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses

before replacing any electrical

components.

Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color

Color

J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating

--TanTan5A

--BrownBrown7.5A

--RedRed10A

-GreyBlueBlue15A

BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A

WhiteWhite-White25A

PinkPink-Green30A

GreenGreen--40A

Red---50A

Yellow---60A

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Power Distribution Box

WARNINGS

Always disconnect the battery before

servicing high-current fuses.

WARNINGS

To reduce risk of electrical shock,

always replace the cover to the

power distribution box before

reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid

reservoirs.

224

Fuses

The power distribution box is located in

the engine compartment. It has

high-current fuses that protect your

vehicle's main electrical systems from

overloads.

If the battery has been disconnected and

reconnected, some features will need to

be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery

(page 243).

E144783

The high-current fuses are coded as

follows:

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Wiper motor #2

25A3

Not used—2

Autowipers

15A1

Blower motor relay—4

Power point 3 - Back of console

20A3

Not used—6

225

Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Powertrain control module - vehicle power

20A1

Powertrain control module - vehicle power

20A1

Powertrain control module relay—9

Power point 1 - driver front

20A3

Powertrain control module - vehicle power

15A2

Powertrain control module - vehicle power

15A2

Not used (spare)

10A2

Not used (spare)

10A2

Run/start relay—15

Power point 2 - console

20A3

Transmission oil (Fusion Energi)

20A3

Powertrain and hybrid powertrain control

module - keep alive power

10A1

Run/start electronic power assist steering

10A1

Run/start lighting

10A1

Run/start hybrid powertrain control

module

15A1

Not used—22

Run/start: blind spot information system,

Rear view camera, Adaptive cruise control,

Heads-up display

15A1

Run/start transmission oil pump (Fusion

Energi)

10A1

Run/start anti-lock brake system

10A2

Run/start powertrain control module

10A2

226

Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Fuel door solenoid (Fusion Energi)

10A1

Not used—28

Hybrid content vehicle power 5

15A1

Not used—30

Not used—31

Cooling fan relay (Hybrid)—32

Not used—33

Not used—34

Charger (Fusion Energi)

15A2

Battery electric control module fan (Fusion

Energi)

15A2

Not used—37

Vacuum pump #1 relay—38

Vacuum pump #2 relay—39

Fuel pump relay—40

Horn relay—41

Not used—42

Not used—43

Not used—44

Vacuum pump monitor

5A1

Charge port light ring

10A2

Brake on/off switch

10A2

Horn

20A1

Not used—49

Not used—50

227

Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Hybrid content vehicle power 1

15A2

Hybrid content vehicle power 2

15A2

Power seats

10A1

Hybrid content vehicle power 4

10A2

Hybrid content vehicle power 3

10A2

1Micro fuse

2Dual micro fuse

3M-type fuse

Power Distribution Box - Bottom

E145983

There are fuses located on the bottom of

the fuse box. To access the bottom of the

fuse box, do the following:

1. Release the two latches, located on

both sides of the fuse box.

2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box

from the cradle.

3. Move the fuse box toward the center

of the engine compartment.

4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box

to access the bottom side.

228

Fuses

E144949

The high-current fuses are coded as

follows:

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Fuel pump feed

30A1

Not used—57

Not used—58

Vacuum pump relay

40A1

PWM fan

40A1

Not used—61

Body control module 1

50A2

Not used—63

Charger B+ output (Fusion Energi)

40A1

229

Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Front heated seat

20A1

Not used—66

Body control module 2

50A2

Heated rear window

40A1

Anti-lock brake system valves

30A1

Passenger seat

30A1

Not used—71

Not used (spare)

30A1

Not used (spare)

20A1

Driver seat module

30A1

Not used—75

Not used (spare)

20A1

Not used (spare)

30A1

Not used—78

Blower motor

40A1

Not used (spare)

30A1

110 volt inverter

40A1

Anti-lock brake system pump

60A2

Wiper motor #1

25A1

Not used—84

Not used (spare)

30A1

1 M-type fuse

2J-type fuse

230

Fuses

Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel

The fuse panel is located under the

instrument panel to the left of the steering

column.

Note: It may be easier to access the fuse

panel if you remove the finish trim piece.

E145984

The fuses are coded as follows:

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome,

trunk)

10A1

Memory seats, Lumbar, Power mirror

7.5A1

Driver door unlock

20A1

Not used (spare)

5A1

Subwoofer amplifier

20A1

Not used (spare)

10A2

231

Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Not used (spare)

10A2

Not used (spare)

10A2

Not used (spare)

10A2

Keypad, Cell phone passport module

(Fusion Energi)

5A2

Not used (spare)

5A2

Climate control, Gear shift

7.5A2

Steering wheel column, Cluster, Datalink

logic

7.5A2

Traction battery control module (Hybrid)

10A2

Datalink/Gateway module

10A2

Trunk release

15A1

Not used (spare)

5A2

Ignition, Push button stop/start

5A2

Passenger airbag disabled indicator,

Transmission range

5A2

Not used (spare)

5A2

Humidity and in–car temperature (Hybrid)

5A2

Occupant classification sensor

5A2

Delayed Accessory (Power inverter logic,

Moonroof logic)

10A1

Central lock/unlock

30A1

Driver door (window, mirror)

30A1

Front passenger door (window, mirror)

30A1

Moonroof

30A1

232

Fuses

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Sony amplifier

20A1

Rear driver side door (window)

30A1

Rear passenger side door (window)

30A1

Not used (spare)

15A1

GPS, Voice control, Display, Adaptive cruise

control, Radio frequency receiver

10A1

Radio, Active noise control

20A1

Run/start (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37,

circuit breaker)

30A1

Restraints control module

5A1

Auto-dimming rear view mirror

15A1

Not used (spare)

15A1

Not used (spare)30A38

1Micro fuse

2Dual micro fuse

233

Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATION

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help

maintain its roadworthiness and resale

value. There is a large network of Ford

authorized dealers that are there to help

you with their professional servicing

expertise. We believe that their specially

trained technicians are best qualified to

service your vehicle properly and expertly.

They are supported by a wide range of

highly specialized tools developed

specifically for servicing your vehicle.

To help you service your vehicle, we

provide scheduled maintenance

information which makes tracking routine

service easy. See Scheduled

Maintenance (page 438).

If your vehicle requires professional service,

your authorized dealer can provide the

necessary parts and service. Check your

warranty information to find out which

parts and services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,

fluids and service parts conforming to

specifications. Motorcraft® parts are

designed and built to provide the best

performance in your vehicle.

Precautions

• Do not work on a hot engine.

• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed space,

unless you are sure you have enough

ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burning

material (such as cigarettes) away

from the battery and all fuel related

parts.

Working with the Engine Off

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P

(Park).

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key

(if equipped).

3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine On

WARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage

and/or personal burn injuries, do not

start your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while the

engine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P

(Park).

2. Block the wheels

OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD

E142457

1. To open the hood, go inside the vehicle

and pull the hood release handle

located under the left hand side of the

instrument panel.

234

Maintenance

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

locate the secondary release lever,

which is located under the front of the

hood, to your right of the center of the

vehicle (driver's side), near the

headlight.

3. Release the hood latch by pushing the

yellow secondary release lever to your

left, toward the center of the vehicle.

E87786

4. Raise the hood and support it with the

prop rod.

5. To close the hood, lower and secure

the prop rod in the clip.

6. Lower the hood and allow it to drop the

last 10-12 inches (25 to 30

centimeters).

Note: Make sure that the hood is closed

properly and fully latched on both sides of

the hood.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW -

2.0L HYBRID

WARNING

The inverter system controller

contains various high-voltage

components that can cause serious

bodily harm or death. The inverter system

controller is not serviceable and should

never be touched, probed, or tampered

with.

Note: Do not attempt to service any of the

high-voltage components or wiring. For

easier identification, the high-voltage wiring

insulation is color coated orange.

235

Maintenance

E146046

Engine coolant reservoir capA

Engine oil filler capB

Engine air cleaner coverC

Brake fluid reservoir capD

Power distribution boxE

Inverter system controllerF

Inverter system controller coolant reservoir capG

Engine oil dipstickH

Windshield washer fluid reservoir capI

236

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L

HYBRID

A B

E146094

MINA

MAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECK

Note: Check the level before starting the

engine.

Note: Make sure that the level is between

the MIN and the MAX marks.

1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level

ground.

2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes

for the oil to drain into the oil pan.

3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with

a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the

dipstick and remove it again to check

the oil level.

If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil

immediately.

Adding Engine Oil

Note: Do not remove the filler cap when

the engine is running.

Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX

mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may

cause engine damage.

E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines

by the American Petroleum Institute (API).

An oil with this trademark symbol

conforms to the current engine and

emission system protection standards and

fuel economy requirements of the

International Lubricants Specification

Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of

U.S. and Japanese automobile

manufacturers.

1. Remove the filler cap.

2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford

specifications. See Capacities and

Specifications (page ?).

3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you

feel a strong resistance.

Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring

System

Note: Reset the oil life monitoring only after

an oil change.

1. Turn the ignition key to the on position.

Do not start the engine. For vehicles

with push-button start, press and hold

the start button for two seconds

without pressing the brake pedal. Do

not attempt to start the engine.

2. Press both the accelerator and brake

pedals at the same time.

3. Keep both pedals fully pressed.

237

Maintenance

4. After three seconds, the Service: Oil

reset in prog. message will be

displayed.

5. After 25 seconds, the Service: Oil reset

complete message will be displayed.

6. Release both the accelerator and brake

pedals.

7. The Service: Oil reset complete

message will no longer be displayed.

8. Rotate the key to the off position. For

vehicles with push-button start, press

the start button to turn the vehicle off

completely.

Oil Maintenance Mode (If Equipped)

The oil maintenance mode is equipped on

Energi models only. The oil maintenance

mode keeps the engine oil quality in good

condition when you drive the vehicle with

limited engine use. If the vehicle is in oil

maintenance mode when you start the

vehicle, a message will appear in the

instrument cluster. While the vehicle is in

oil maintenance mode, the vehicle will run

the engine as necessary.

If you select the EV Now mode while the

vehicle is in the oil maintenance mode, the

oil maintenance mode will be suspended

for as long as you continue driving the

vehicle. The oil maintenance mode will

resume the next time you start the vehicle.

Changing the engine oil and resetting the

oil life monitoring system will suspend the

oil maintenance mode.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

Engine Coolant and Inverter

System Controller Coolant

Your vehicle is equipped with two separate

cooling systems. One is for cooling the

engine and one is for cooling the inverter

system controller that is specific to the

hybrid operating system. The two systems

operate similarly, with the inverter system

controller cooling system generally

operating at a lower temperature and

pressure.

Checking the Engine Coolant

When the engine is cold, check the

concentration and level of the engine

coolant at the intervals listed in the

scheduled maintenance information. See

Scheduled Maintenance (page 438).

Note: Make sure that the level is between

the MIN and MAX marks on the engine

coolant reservoir.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The

level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below

the MIN mark, or empty, add prediluted

coolant immediately. See Adding Engine

Coolant in this chapter.

The coolant concentration should be

maintained within 48% to 50%, which

equates to a freeze point between -30°F

(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).

Note: For best results, coolant

concentration should be tested with a

refractometer such as Rotunda tool

300-ROB75240 available from your dealer.

Ford does not recommend the use of

hydrometers or coolant test strips for

measuring coolant concentrations.

238

Maintenance

Note: Automotive fluids are not

interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant

or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid

outside of its specified function and vehicle

location.

Checking the Inverter System

Controller Coolant

When the engine is cold, check the

concentration and level of the inverter

system controller coolant at the intervals

listed in the scheduled maintenance

information. See Scheduled

Maintenance (page 438).

Note: Make sure that the level is between

the MIN and MAX marks on the inverter

system controller coolant reservoir.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The

level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below

the MIN mark, or empty, add prediluted

coolant immediately. See Adding Inverter

System Controller Coolant in this chapter.

The coolant concentration should be

maintained within 48% to 50%, which

equates to a freeze point between -30°F

(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).

Note: For best results, coolant

concentration should be tested with a

refractometer such as Rotunda tool

300-ROB75240 available from your dealer.

Ford does not recommend the use of

hydrometers or coolant test strips for

measuring coolant concentrations.

Note: Automotive fluids are not

interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant

or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid

outside of its specified function and vehicle

location.

Adding Coolant

WARNINGS

Do not add engine coolant when the

engine is hot. Steam and scalding

liquids released from a hot cooling

system can burn you badly. Also, you can

be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine

parts.

Do not put engine coolant in the

windshield washer fluid container. If

sprayed on the windshield, engine

coolant could make it difficult to see

through the windshield.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,

make sure the engine is cool before

unscrewing the coolant pressure

relief cap. The cooling system is under

pressure; steam and hot liquid can come

out forcefully when the cap is loosened

slightly.

Do not add coolant further than the

MAX mark.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling

system sealants, or additives as they can

cause damage to the cooling or heating

systems. This damage would not be covered

under your vehicle’s warranty.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, the

coolant may change color from orange to

pink or light red. As long as the coolant is

clear and uncontaminated, this color change

does not indicate the coolant has degraded

nor does it require the coolant to be drained,

the system to be flushed, or the coolant to

be replaced.

Note: It is very important to use prediluted

coolant meeting the Ford specification in

order to avoid plugging the small coolant

passageways. Use of concentrated coolant

and water may cause coolant passageway

plugging and void the warranty. See

Capacities and Specifications (page 290).

239

Maintenance

• Do not mix different colors or types of

coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the

correct coolant is used. Mixing of

coolants may harm your cooling

system. The use of an improper coolant

may harm the engine, inverter system

controller, and cooling system

components and may void the

warranty.

• In case of emergency, a large amount

of water without engine coolant may

be added to the engine cooling system

only in order to reach a vehicle service

location. In this instance, the engine

cooling system must be drained,

chemically cleaned with Motorcraft

Premium Cooling System Flush, and

refilled with prediluted engine coolant

as soon as possible. Water alone

(without engine coolant) can cause

engine damage from corrosion,

overheating, or freezing. DO NOT use

this method for the inverter system

controller cooling system. The inverter

system controller cooling system

operates close to ambient

temperature, and is susceptible to

freezing in any subfreezing environment

in the absence of coolant.

• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or

any engine coolants mixed with alcohol

or methanol antifreeze (coolant).

Alcohol and other liquids can cause

engine damage from overheating or

freezing.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives

to the coolant. These can be harmful

and compromise the corrosion

protection of the engine coolant.

Adding Engine Coolant

1. Unscrew the engine coolant reservoir

cap slowly. Any pressure will escape

as you unscrew the cap.

2. Use a funnel to add prediluted engine

coolant to the engine coolant reservoir.

Make sure that the level is between the

MIN and MAX marks on the engine

coolant reservoir. Use prediluted engine

coolant meeting the Ford specification.

See Capacities and Specifications

(page 290).

3. Close the engine coolant reservoir cap.

Whenever you add coolant, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir

the next few times you drive the vehicle. If

necessary, add enough prediluted engine

coolant to bring the engine coolant level

to the proper level.

Adding Inverter System Controller

Coolant

1. Open the inverter system controller

coolant reservoir cap.

2. Use a funnel to add prediluted coolant

to the inverter system controller

coolant reservoir. Make sure that the

level is between the MIN and MAX

marks on the inverter system controller

coolant reservoir. Use prediluted

coolant meeting the Ford specification.

See Capacities and Specifications

(page 290).

3. Close the inverter system controller

coolant reservoir cap.

Whenever you add coolant, check the

coolant level in the inverter system

controller coolant reservoir the next few

times you drive the vehicle. If necessary,

add enough prediluted coolant to bring the

inverter system controller coolant level to

the proper level.

Recycled Engine Coolant

Ford Motor Company does not recommend

the use of recycled engine coolant since a

Ford-approved recycling process is not yet

available.

240

Maintenance

Used engine coolant should be disposed

of in an appropriate manner. Follow your

community’s regulations and standards

for recycling and disposing of automotive

fluids.

Severe Climates

If you drive in extremely cold climates:

• It may be necessary to have an

authorized Ford dealer increase the

coolant concentration above 50%.

• A coolant concentration of 60% will

provide improved freeze point

protection. Engine coolant

concentrations above 60% will

decrease the overheat protection

characteristics of the engine coolant

and may cause engine damage.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:

• It may be necessary to have an

authorized Ford dealer decrease the

coolant concentration to 40%.

• A coolant concentration of 40% will

provide improved overheat protection.

Engine coolant concentrations below

40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze

protection characteristics of the engine

coolant and may cause engine

damage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme

climates should use prediluted coolant

meeting the Ford specification for

optimum cooling system and engine

protection.

What You Should Know About Fail-

Safe Cooling

If the engine coolant supply is depleted,

this feature allows the vehicle to be driven

temporarily before incremental component

damage is incurred. The “fail-safe”

distance depends on ambient

temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.

How Fail-Safe Cooling Works

If the engine begins to overheat, the engine

coolant temperature gauge will move to

the red (hot) area and:

The coolant temperature

warning light will illuminate.

The service engine soon

indicator will illuminate.

If the engine reaches a preset

over-temperature condition, the engine

will automatically switch to alternating

cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder

acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

When this occurs the vehicle will still

operate. However:

• The engine power will be limited.

• The air conditioning system will be

disabled.

Continued operation will increase the

engine temperature and the engine will

completely shut down, causing steering

and braking effort to increase.

Once the engine temperature cools, the

engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer as soon as possible

to minimize engine damage.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

WARNINGS

Fail-safe mode is for use during

emergencies only. Operate the

vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long

as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in

a safe location and seek immediate repairs.

When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will

have limited power, will not be able to

maintain high-speed operation, and may

completely shut down without warning,

potentially losing engine power, power

steering assist, and power brake assist,

which may increase the possibility of a

crash resulting in serious injury.

241

Maintenance

WARNINGS

Never remove the coolant reservoir

cap while the engine is running or hot.

Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing

the engine problem increases the chance of

engine damage. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

You have limited engine power when in the

fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with

caution. The vehicle will not be able to

maintain high-speed operation and the

engine will run rough. Remember that the

engine is capable of completely shutting

down automatically to prevent engine

damage, therefore:

1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and turn off the engine.

2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to

an authorized dealer.

3. If this is not possible, wait a short

period for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level and replenish

if low.

5. Re-start the engine and take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID CHECK

Note: Transmission fluid should be checked

by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid

should be added by an authorized dealer.

The automatic transmission does not have

a transmission fluid dipstick.

Have an authorized dealer check and

change the transmission fluid at the

correct service interval. See Scheduled

Maintenance (page ?). Your

transmission does not consume fluid.

However, the fluid level should be checked

if the transmission is not working properly,

(i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts

slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid

leakage.

Do not use supplemental transmission

fluid additives, treatments or cleaning

agents. The use of these materials may

affect transmission operation and result

in damage to internal transmission

components.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX

lines are within the normal operating range;

there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid

levels are outside of the normal operating

range, the performance of the system

could be compromised; seek service from

your authorized dealer immediately.

POWER STEERING FLUID

CHECK

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering (EPS) system. There is no

fluid reservoir to check or fill.

FUEL FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime

fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel

tank. Regular maintenance or replacement

is not needed.

242

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID CHECK

WARNING

If you operate your vehicle in

temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use

washer fluid with antifreeze

protection. Failure to use washer fluid with

antifreeze protection in cold weather could

result in impaired windshield vision and

increase the risk of injury or accident.

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is

low. Only use a washer fluid that meets

Ford specifications. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 286).

State or local regulations on volatile

organic compounds may restrict the use

of methanol, a common windshield washer

antifreeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol antifreeze

agents should be used only if they provide

cold weather protection without damaging

the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or

washer system.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNINGS

Batteries normally produce explosive

gases which can cause personal

injury. Therefore, do not allow

flames, sparks or lighted substances to

come near the battery. When working near

the battery, always shield your face and

protect your eyes. Always provide proper

ventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,

excessive pressure on the end walls

could cause acid to flow through the

vent caps, resulting in personal injury and

damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the

battery with a battery carrier or with your

hands on opposite corners.

WARNINGS

Keep batteries out of reach of

children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing. Shield your eyes when working

near the battery to protect against possible

splashing of acid solution. In case of acid

contact with skin or eyes, flush

immediately with water for a minimum of

15 minutes and get prompt medical

attention. If acid is swallowed, call a

physician immediately.

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery

which normally does not require additional

water during its life of service.

Note: If your battery has a cover/shield,

make sure it is reinstalled after the battery

has been cleaned or replaced.

Note: See an authorized dealer for low

voltage battery access, testing, or

replacement.

When a low voltage battery replacement

is necessary, see an authorized dealer to

replace the low voltage battery with a Ford

recommended replacement low voltage

battery that matches the electrical

requirements of the vehicle

To ensure proper operation of the battery

management system (BMS), do not allow

a technician to connect any electrical

device ground connection directly to the

low voltage battery negative post. A

connection at the low voltage battery

negative post can cause inaccurate

measurements of the battery condition

and potential incorrect system operation.

Note: Note: If a person adds electrical or

electronic accessories or components to the

vehicle, the accessories or components may

adversely affect the low voltage battery

performance and durability and may also

affect the performance of other electrical

systems in the vehicle.

243

Maintenance

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the

top of the battery clean and dry. Also,

make certain the battery cables are always

tightly fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or

terminals, remove the cables from the

terminals and clean with a wire brush. You

can neutralize the acid with a solution of

baking soda and water.

When a battery replacement is required,

the battery should only be replaced with

a Ford recommended replacement battery

that matches the electrical requirements

of the vehicle.

Because your vehicle’s engine is

electronically-controlled by a computer,

some engine control settings are

maintained by power from the low voltage

battery. Some engine computer settings,

like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,

optimize the driveability and performance

of the engine. Some other computer

settings, like the clock and radio station

presets, are also maintained in memory by

power from the low voltage battery. When

a technician disconnects and connects the

low voltage battery, these settings are

erased. Complete the following procedure

in order to restore the settings:

1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,

set the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission into P.

3. Turn off all accessories.

4. Step on the brake pedal and start the

vehicle.

5. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature. While the

engine is warming up, complete the

following: Reset the clock. See Audio

System (page 297). Reset the power

windows bounce-back feature. See

Windows and Mirrors (page 72).

Reset the radio station presets. See

Audio System (page 297).

6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one

minute. If the engine turns off, step on

the accelerator to start the engine.

7. While the engine is running, step on the

brake pedal and shift the transmission

to N.

8. Allow the engine to run for at least one

minute by pressing on the accelerator

pedal.

9. Drive the vehicle at least 10 miles (16

kilometers) to completely relearn the

idle and fuel trim strategy.

Note: If you do not allow the engine to

relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the

idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely

affected until the engine computer

eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel

trim strategy.

Note: Always dispose of automotive

batteries in a responsible manner. Follow

your local authorized standards for disposal.

Call your local authorized recycling center

to find out more about recycling automotive

batteries.

Note: It is recommended that the negative

battery cable terminal be disconnected from

the battery if you plan to store your vehicle

for an extended period of time.

CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

the blade to check for roughness.

244

Maintenance

Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid

or water applied with a soft sponge or

cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER

BLADES

The wiper arms can be manually moved

when the ignition is off. This allows for ease

of blade replacement and cleaning under

the blades.

E129990

1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away

from the glass.

2. Press the locking buttons together.

3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.

4. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks

into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade

back to the windshield. The wiper arms will

automatically return to their normal position

when the ignition is turned on.

Replace wiper blades at least once per

year for optimum performance.

Poor wiper quality can be improved by

cleaning the wiper blades and the

windshield.

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER

WARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage

and/or personal burn injuries do not

start your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while the

engine is running.

When changing the air filter element, use

only the air filter element listed. See

Capacities and Specifications (page

286).

Change the air filter element at the proper

interval. See Scheduled Maintenance

(page 438).

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter

element may result in severe engine

damage. The customer warranty may be

void for any damage to the engine if the

correct air filter element is not used.

E146048

1. Loosen the 5 bolts on the air cleaner

cover.

2. Remove the air cleaner cover.

3. Remove the engine air filter element

from the engine air cleaner assembly.

4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter

housing and cover to make sure no dirt

gets in the engine and to make sure you

have a good seal.

245

Maintenance

5. Install the new engine air filter element

to the engine air cleaner assembly.

6. Install the air cleaner cover.

7. Tighten the 5 bolts to the air cleaner

cover.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment

The headlamps on your vehicle are

properly aimed at the assembly plant. If

your vehicle has been in an accident, the

alignment of your headlamps should be

checked by your authorized dealer.

Headlamp Aiming Target

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters)A

Center height of lamp to groundB

25 feet (7.6 meters)C

Horizontal reference lineD

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,

approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)

away.

2. Measure the height of the headlamp

bulb center from the ground and mark

an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal

reference line on the vertical wall or

screen at this height.

Note: To see a clearer light pattern for

adjusting, you may want to block the light

from one headlamp while adjusting the

other.

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and open

the hood.

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observe

a flat zone of high intensity light

located at the top of the right hand

portion of the beam pattern. If the top

edge of the high intensity light zone is

not at the horizontal reference line, the

headlamp will need to be adjusted.

E145594

246

Maintenance

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each

headlamp. Using a Phillips #2

screwdriver, turn the adjuster either

clockwise or counterclockwise in order

to adjust the vertical aim of the

headlamp. The horizontal edge of the

brighter light should touch the

horizontal reference line.

6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment

Horizontal aim is not required for this

vehicle and is not adjustable.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in

the Off position and open the hood.

E159693

1. Remove the six fasteners securing the

front fascia to the front trim cover.

2. Remove the three bumper cover upper

screws.

3. Remove the fastener at the inboard

side of the headlamp to be serviced.

E159694

4. Remove the two headlamp assembly

screws.

247

Maintenance

E159695

5. Remove the lower three wheelhousing

fasteners.

E159696

6. Remove the three front bumper cover

lower fasteners, only on the side of

headlamp being serviced.

E159697

7. Separate the front bumper cover from

the fender, pull the fender outward 3

cm.

E159698

8. From the front of the vehicle, pull the

front bumper cover forward 10 cm.

E159699

9. Carefully pull the headlamp assembly

outward to disengage it from the lower

fixing point.

10. Carefully lift the headlamp and

remove from vehicle.

11. Disconnect the electrical connector.

CHANGING A BULB

Lamp Assembly Condensation

Exterior lamps are vented to

accommodate normal changes in pressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-product

of this design. When moist air enters the

lamp assembly through the vents, there is

a possibility that condensation can occur

when the temperature is cold. When

248

Maintenance

normal condensation occurs, a thin film of

mist can form on the interior of the lens.

The thin mist eventually clears and exits

through the vents during normal operation.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours

under dry weather conditions.

Examples of acceptable condensation are:

• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip

marks or droplets).

• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.

Examples of unacceptable moisture

(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:

• Water puddle inside the lamp.

• Large water droplets, drip marks or

streaks present on the interior of the

lens.

Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if

any of the above conditions of

unacceptable moisture are present.

Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs

WARNING

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb

carefully and keep out of children’s

reach. Grasp the bulb by only its

plastic base and do not touch the glass.

The oil from your hand could cause the

bulb to break the next time the headlamps

are operated.

Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it

should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol

before being used.

E159753

Headlamp assembly:

A. Side marker lamp bulb

B. High beam headlamp bulb

C. Low beam headlamp bulb

D. Front parking/Turn signal lamp bulb

Replacing the High Beam Headlamp

Bulb

1. Remove the headlamp assembly.

2. Remove the service cap.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it from the headlamp

assembly.

5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp

Bulb

1. Remove the headlamp assembly.

2. Remove the service cap.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Release the retainer spring and remove

it from the headlamp assembly.

5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing the Front Parking/Turn

Signal Lamp Bulb

1. Remove the headlamp assembly.

249

Maintenance

2. Turn the bulb assembly

counterclockwise and remove it from

the headlamp assembly.

3. Separate the bulb from the bulb

socket.

4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing the Side Marker Lamp Bulb

1. Remove the headlamp assembly.

2. Remove the service cap.

3. Depress the tabs on the socket and

remove the socket and bulb together.

4. Separate the bulb from the bulb

socket.

5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing the Tail, Brake, High-

Mount Brake Lamp, and Turn

Signal Lamp Bulbs

These lamps are designed with LED light

sources. For replacement, see your

authorized dealer.

Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb

1. Make sure the lighting control is in the

off position.

2. Open the trunk deck lid.

E145777

3. Remove the push pins and reposition

the inner body side trim.

E145778

4. Remove the three lamp assembly nuts.

5. Gently pull the lamp assembly away

from the vehicle.

E145779

6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove the bulb holder.

250

Maintenance

E145780

7. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing the License Plate Lamp

Bulb

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.

2. Remove the lamp.

3. Remove the bulb.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Replacement bulbs are specified in the

chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be

marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for

North America to make sure they have the

proper lamp performance, light brightness,

light pattern, and safe visibility. The correct

bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly

or void the lamp assembly warranty and

will provide quality bulb illumination time.

Trade nameFunction

H7LL*Headlamp high beam (Halogen)

H11LL*Headlamp low beam (Halogen)

LED*Side marker lamp - front

W5W*Park lamp - front

PWY24W*Turn lamp - front

H11*Fog lamp - front

LED*Tail and brake lamp - high series

LED*Tail and brake lamp - low series

921Reverse lamp

251

Maintenance

Trade nameFunction

LED*Turn lamp - rear - high series

LED*Turn lamp - rear - low series

LED*Side marker lamp - rear

W5WLicense plate lamp

W5W*Trunk lamp

LED*High-mount brake lamp

LED*Side repeater lamp

LED*Interior lamp

*To replace these bulbs, see your authorized dealer.

To replace all instrument panel bulbs, see your authorized dealer.

252

Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION

Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has

many quality products available to clean

your vehicle and protect its finishes.

CLEANING PRODUCTS

For best results, use the following products

or products of equivalent quality:

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover

(ZC-42)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner

(ZC-15)

Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)

Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and

Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo (Canada

only) (CXC-66-A)

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner

(Canada only) (CXC-101)

Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner

(Canada only) (CXC-100)

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield

Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,

B, D or F)]

Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Washer

Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-32-A)

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet

& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.

only) (ZC-14)

Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner (ZC-23)

Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only)

(CXC-93)

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner

(ZC-37-A)

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or

lukewarm water and a neutral pH

shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail

Wash.

• Never use strong household detergents

or soap, such as dish washing or

laundry liquid. These products can

discolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the

touch” or during exposure to strong,

direct sunlight.

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft

terry cloth towel in order to eliminate

water spotting.

• Immediately remove items such as

gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and

insect deposits because they can cause

damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and

trim over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug

and Tar Remover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, such

as antennas, before entering a car

wash.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents

can damage any painted surface; if these

substances come in contact with your

vehicle, wash off as soon as possible.

Exterior Chrome

Note: Never use abrasive materials such as

steel wool or plastic pads as they can

scratch the chrome surface.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal

cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel

covers

253

Vehicle Care

• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or

lukewarm water and a neutral pH

shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail

Wash.

• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal

Cleaner. Apply the product as you

would a wax to clean bumpers and

other chrome parts; allow the cleaner

to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off

the haze with a clean, dry rag.

• Do not apply cleaning product to hot

surfaces and do not leave cleaning

product on chrome surfaces for a

period of time exceeding that which is

recommended.

• Using other non-recommended

cleaners can result in severe and

permanent cosmetic damage.

Underbody

Flush the complete underside of your

vehicle frequently. Keep body and door

drain holes free from packed dirt.

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to clean

plastic parts

• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft®

Detail Wash.

• If tar or grease spots are present, use

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT

DAMAGE

Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint

to match your vehicle’s color. Take your

color code (printed on a sticker in the

driver’s door jamb) to your authorized

dealer to ensure you get the correct color.

• Remove particles such as bird

droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar

spots, road salt and industrial fallout

before repairing paint chips.

• Always read the instructions before

using the products.

WAXING

Regular waxing is necessary to protect your

car's paint from the elements. We

recommend that you wash and wax the

painted surface once or twice a year.

When washing and waxing, park your

vehicle in a shaded area out of direct

sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before

applying wax.

• Use a quality wax that does not contain

abrasives.

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

to apply and remove the wax.

• Apply a small amount of wax in a

back-and-forth motion, not in circles.

• Do not allow wax to come in contact

with any non-body (low-gloss black)

colored trim. The wax will discolor or

stain the parts over time.

• Roof racks.

• Bumpers.

• Grained door handles.

• Side mouldings.

• Mirror housings.

• Windshield cowl area.

• Do not apply wax to glass areas.

• After waxing, your car's paint should

feel smooth, and be free of streaks and

smudges.

254

Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE ENGINE

Engines are more efficient when they are

clean because grease and dirt buildup keep

the engine warmer than normal.

When washing:

• Take care when using a power washer

to clean the engine. The high-pressure

fluid could penetrate the sealed parts

and cause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with cold

water to avoid cracking the engine

block or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo

and Degreaser on all parts that require

cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In

Canada, use Motorcraft® Engine

Shampoo.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it

is hot or running; water in the running

engine may cause internal damage.

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,

spark plug wire or spark plug well, or

the area in and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distribution

box, and air filter assembly to prevent

water damage when cleaning the

engine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND

WIPER BLADES

The windows and wiper blades should be

cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe

properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass

or the wiper blades may cause squeaking

or chatter noise from the blades, and

streaking and smearing of the windshield.

To clean these items, follow these tips:

• The windows may be cleaned with a

non-abrasive cleaner such as

Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner.

• The wiper blades can be cleaned with

isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or

Motorcraft® Premium Windshield

Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or

Premium Quality Windshield Washer

Fluid in Canada. Be sure to replace

wiper blades when they appear worn

or do not function properly.

• Do not use abrasives, as they may

cause scratches

• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint

thinner to clean any parts.

If you cannot remove those streaks after

cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the

wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield

is clean if beads do not form when you

rinse the windshield with water.

Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a

razor blade, to clean the inside of the rear

window or to remove decals, as it may cause

damage to the rear window defroster’s

heated grid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNINGS

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach

or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,

as these actions may weaken the

belt webbing.

255

Vehicle Care

WARNINGS

On vehicles equipped with

seat-mounted airbags, do not use

chemical solvents or strong

detergents. Such products could

contaminate the side airbag system and

affect performance of the side airbag in a

collision.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts

and seats equipped with side airbags:

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.

• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft® Professional Strength

Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

• If grease or tar is present on the

material, spot-clean the area first with

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover.

In Canada, use Motorcraftt

Multi-Purpose Cleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot

cleaning, clean the entire area

immediately (but do not oversaturate)

or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaning

products or glass cleaners, which can

stain and discolor the fabric and affect

the flame retardant abilities of the seat

materials.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT

PANEL AND INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER LENS

WARNING

Do not use chemical solvents or

strong detergents when cleaning the

steering wheel or instrument panel

to avoid contamination of the airbag

system.

Clean the instrument panel and cluster

lens with a clean, damp, white cotton

cloth, then use a clean and dry white

cotton cloth to dry these areas.

• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase

the gloss of the upper portion of the

instrument panel. The dull finish in this

area helps protect you from

undesirable windshield reflection.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands

clean if you have been in contact with

certain products such as insect

repellent and suntan lotion in order to

avoid possible damage to the interior

painted surfaces.

• Do not use household or glass cleaners

as these may damage the finish of the

instrument panel, interior trim and

cluster lens.

• Do not allow air fresheners and hand

sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.

If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.

Damage may not be covered by your

warranty.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has

been spilled on the instrument panel or on

interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

white, cotton cloth.

2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,

white cotton cloth. For more thorough

cleaning, use a mild soap and water

solution. If the spot cannot be

completely cleaned by this method,

the area may be cleaned using a

commercially available cleaning

product designed for automotive

interiors.

3. If necessary, apply more soap and

water solution or cleaning product to

a clean, white, cotton cloth and press

the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow

this to set at room temperature for 30

minutes.

256

Vehicle Care

4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not

soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the

area by using a rubbing motion for 60

seconds.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with a

clean, white, cotton cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF

EQUIPPED)

For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with

a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough

cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap

and water solution. Dry the area with a soft

cloth. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl

Cleaner.

If the leather cannot be completely

cleaned using a mild soap and water

solution, the leather may be cleaned using

a commercially available leather cleaning

product designed for automotive interiors.

Note: To check for compatibility, first test

any cleaner or stain remover on an

inconspicuous part of the leather.

You should:

• remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.

• clean spills and stains as quickly as

possible.

• To check for compatibility, first test any

cleaner or stain remover on an

inconspicuous part of the leather.

Do not use the following products as these

may damage the leather:

• oil/petroleum-based leather

conditioners.

• household cleaners.

• alcohol solutions.

• solvents or cleaners intended for

rubber, vinyl and plastics.

CLEANING THE ALLOY

WHEELS

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to

warm or hot wheel rims and covers.

Note: Some automatic car washes may

cause damage to the finish on your wheel

rims and covers.

Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty

cleaners in combination with brush agitation

to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear

away the clear coat finish over a period time.

Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based

or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel

wool, fuels or strong household detergents.

Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for

an extended period after cleaning the

wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your

vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.

This will reduce the risk of increased

corrosion of the brake discs.

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated

with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain

their condition we recommend that you:

• Clean the wheels weekly, with the

recommended Ford service wheel and

tire cleaner. Apply using

manufacturer's instructions. Use

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner

(ZC-37-A).

• Use a sponge to remove heavy

deposits of dirt and brake dust

accumulation.

• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream

of water when you have completed the

cleaning process.

• To remove tar and grease, use

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover

(ZC-42).

257

Vehicle Care

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you plan on storing your vehicle for an

extended period of time (30 days or more),

read the following maintenance

recommendations to make sure your

vehicle stays in good operating condition.

All motor vehicles and their components

were engineered and tested for reliable,

regular driving. Long term storage under

various conditions may lead to component

degradation or failure unless specific

precautions are taken to preserve the

components.

General

• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.

• Protect from sunlight, if possible.

• If vehicles are stored outside, they

require regular maintenance to protect

against rust and damage.

Body

• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove

dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior

surfaces, rear-wheel housing and

underside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash vehicles stored in

exposed locations.

• Touch-up raw or primed metal to

prevent rust

• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts

with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent

discoloration. Re-wax as necessary

when the vehicle is washed.

• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid

hinges, and latches with a light grade

oil.

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.

• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

Engine

• The engine oil and filter should be

changed prior to storage, as used

engine oil contain contaminates that

may cause engine damage.

• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at

fast idle until it reaches normal

operating temperature

• With your foot on the brake, shift

through all the gears while the engine

is running.

Fuel system

• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of the

fuel pump nozzle.

Note: During extended periods of vehicle

storage (30 days or more), fuel may

deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality

gas stabilizer product to the vehicle fuel

system whenever actual or expected

storage periods exceed 30 days. Follow the

instructions on the additive label. The

vehicle should then be operated at idle

speed to circulate the additive throughout

the fuel system.

Cooling system

• Protect against freezing temperatures.

• When removing vehicle from storage,

check coolant fluid level. Confirm there

are no cooling system leaks, and fluid

is at the recommended level.

Battery

• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.

• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery, it

may be advisable to disconnect the

battery cables to ensure battery charge

is maintained for quick starting.

258

Vehicle Care

Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it

will be necessary to reset memory features.

Brakes

• Make sure brakes and parking brake

are fully released.

Tires

• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous

• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers

and pins under vehicle are covered with

grease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8

meters) every 15 days to lubricate

working parts and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From Storage

When your vehicle is ready to come out of

storage, do the following:

• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt

or grease film build-up on window

surfaces.

• Check windshield wipers for any

deterioration.

• Check under the hood for any foreign

material that may have collected

during storage (mice/squirrel nests).

• Check the exhaust for any foreign

material that may have collected

during storage.

• Check tire pressures and set tire

inflation per the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the

vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters) back and

forth to remove rust build-up.

• Check fluid levels (including coolant,

oil and gas) to make sure there are no

leaks, and fluids are at recommended

levels.

• If the battery was removed, clean the

battery cable ends and inspect.

Contact your authorized dealer if you have

any concerns or issues.

259

Vehicle Care

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT

Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant

compound in the canister is to be used for

one tire only. See your Ford authorized

dealer for additional replacement sealant

canisters.

The kit is located in the spare tire well in

the trunk. The kit consists of an air

compressor to reinflate the tire and a

sealing compound in a canister that will

effectively seal most punctures caused by

nails or similar objects. This kit will provide

a temporary seal allowing you to drive your

vehicle up to 120 miles (200 kilometers)

at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80

km/h).

E144618

Air compressor (inside)A

Diverter knobB

On/off buttonC

Air pressure gaugeD

Sealant bottle and canisterE

Sealant filling clear tubeF

Sealant tube - tire valve

connector

Yellow cap toolH

Air compressor hoseI

Air hose -tire valve connectorJ

Accessory power plugK

Casing/housingL

General Information

WARNING

Failure to follow these guidelines

could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become

severely damaged by driving the vehicle with

a tire that has insufficient air pressure. Only

punctured areas located within the tire tread

can be sealed with the kit.

Do not attempt to repair punctures larger

than 1.4 inch (6.4 millimeters) or damage

to the tire's sidewall. The tire may not

completely seal.

Loss of air pressure may adversely affect

tire performance. For this reason:

Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50

mph (80 km/h).

Note: Do not drive further than 120 miles

(200 kilometers). Drive only to the closest

Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or

tire repair shop to have your tire inspected.

260

Wheels and Tires

• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers.

• Periodically monitor tire inflation

pressure in the affected tire; if the tire

is losing pressure, have the vehicle

towed.

• Read the information in the Tips for

Use of the Kit section to make sure safe

operation of the kit and your vehicle.

Tips for Use of the Kit

Read the following list of tips to ensure

safe operation of the kit:

• Before operating the kit, make sure

your vehicle is safely off the road and

away from moving traffic. Turn on the

hazard lights.

• Always set the parking brake to ensure

the vehicle doesn't move unexpectedly.

• Do not remove any foreign objects,

such as nails or screws, from the tire.

• When using the kit, leave the engine

running (only if the vehicle is outdoors

or in a well-ventilated area) so the

compressor doesn't drain the vehicle's

battery.

• Do not allow the compressor to

operate continuously for more than 15

minutes; this will help prevent the

compressor from overheating.

• Never leave the kit unattended when

it is operating.

• Sealant compound contains latex.

Make sure that you use the non-latex

gloves provided to avoid an allergic

reaction.

• Keep the kit away from children.

• Only use the kit when the ambient

temperature is between -22°F (–30°C)

and 158°F (70°C).

• Only use the sealing compound before

the use by date. The use by date is on

the lower right hand corner of the label

located on the sealant canister

(bottle). Check the use by date

regularly and replace the canister after

four years.

• Do not store the kit unsecured inside

the passenger compartment of the

vehicle as it may cause injury during a

sudden stop or crash. Always store the

kit in its original location.

• After sealant use, the tire pressure

monitoring system sensor and valve

stem on the wheel must be replaced

by an authorized Ford dealer.

• When inflating a tire or other objects,

use the black air hose only. Do not use

the transparent hose which is designed

for sealant application only.

• Operating the kit could cause an

electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and

DVD player operation.

What to do when a Tire Is

Punctured

A tire puncture within the tire's tread area

can be repaired in two stages with the kit.

• In the first stage, the tire will be

reinflated with a sealing compound

and air. After the tire has been

reinflated, you will need to drive the

vehicle a short distance (about 4 miles

[6 kilometers]) to distribute the

sealant in the tire.

• In the second stage, you will need to

check the tire pressure and adjust, if

necessary, to the vehicle's tire inflation

pressure.

261

Wheels and Tires

First Stage: Reinflating the Tire

with Sealing Compound and Air

WARNINGS

Do not stand directly over the kit

while inflating the tire. If you notice

any unusual bulges or deformations

in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stop

and call roadside assistance.

If the tire doesn't inflate to the

recommended tire pressure within

15 minutes, stop and call roadside

assistance.

Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level

and secure area, away from moving traffic.

Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking

brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the

flat tire for visible damage.

Sealant compound contains latex. To

avoid any allergic reactions, use the

non-latex gloves located in the accessory

box on the underside of the kit housing.

Do not remove any foreign object that has

pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in

the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside

assistance.

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve.

2. Unwrap the clear tube from the

compressor housing.

3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the

metal connector of the tube to the tire

valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the

connection is tightly fastened.

E144619

4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt

power point in the vehicle.

5. Remove the warning sticker found on

the canister and place it on the top of

the instrument panel or the center of

the dash.

6. Start the engine only if the vehicle is

outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.

E144924

7. Push and turn dial (A)

counterclockwise to the sealant

position. Turn on the kit by pressing the

on/off button (B).

262

Wheels and Tires

E144621

8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on

the tire label located on the driver's

door or the door jamb area. When the

sealing compound is first added into

the tire, the air pressure gauge reading

on the compressor unit may indicate a

higher value; this is normal and should

be no reason for concern. The pressure

will drop after about 30 seconds of

operation. The tire pressure has to be

checked with the compressor in the

OFF position to get the correct tire

pressure reading.

9. When the recommended tire pressure

is reached, turn off the kit by pressing

the on button; disconnect the kit from

the tire valve and the power point.

Re-install the valve cap on the tire

valve, place the tube cap on the metal

connector, and return the kit to the

stowage area

10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the

vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to

distribute the sealant evenly inside

the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80

km/h).

11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and

check the tire pressure. See Second

stage: Checking tire pressure.

Note: If you experience any unusual

vibration, ride disturbance or noise while

driving, reduce your speed until you can

safely pull off to the side of the road to call

for roadside assistance. Note: Do not

proceed to the second stage of this

operation.

Second Stage: Checking Tire

Pressure

WARNINGS

If you are proceeding from the First

stage: Re–inflating the tire with

sealing compound and air section

and have injected sealant in the tire and

the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar), stop

and call roadside assistance. If tire

pressure is above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue

to the next step.

The power plug may get hot after use

and should be handled carefully

while unplugging.

Check the air pressure of your tires as

follows:

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve.

2. Unhook the black hose from the side

of the compressor and fasten firmly on

the valve stem by turning clockwise.

3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the

air position. Turn on the kit by pressing

the on button.

263

Wheels and Tires

E144622

4. Adjust the tire to the recommended

inflation pressure from the tire label

located on the driver's door or door

jamb area. The tire pressure has to be

checked with the compressor in the

OFF position to get the correct tire

pressure reading.

5. Turn the compressor off by pressing

the on/off button.

6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve

cap on the tire and return the kit to the

stowage area.

What to do after the Tire has been

Sealed

After using the kit to seal your tire, you will

need to replace the sealant canister and

clear tube (hose). Sealing compound and

spare parts can be obtained and replaced

at an authorized Ford Motor Company

dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant

bottles may be disposed of at home;

however, liquid residue from the sealing

compound should be disposed by your

local Ford Motor Company dealership or

tire dealer, or in accordance with local

waste disposal regulations.

Note: After the sealing compound has been

used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph

(80 km/h) and the maximum driving

distance is 120 miles (200 kilometers). The

sealed tire should be inspected immediately.

Note: After sealant use, the tire pressure

monitoring system sensor and valve stem

on the wheel must be replaced by an

authorized Ford dealer.

You can check the tire pressure any time

within the 120 miles (200 kilometers) by

performing the procedure from Second

stage: Checking tire pressure listed

previously.

Removal of the sealant canister from

the kit

E144623

1. Unwrap the clear tube from the

compressor housing.

E144624

2. Locate the yellow cap at the end of the

clear tube.

264

Wheels and Tires

E144625

3. Using the yellow cap tool, press the tab

located on the kit compressor housing

while pulling up on the sealant canister.

Installation of the sealant canister to

the kit

E144626

1. Align the sealant canister with the kit

housing.

E161567

2. Once aligned, seat the sealant canister

by lightly pushing down until you hear

an audible click.

E144628

3. Wrap the clear tube around the

compressor housing.

Note: If you experience any difficulties with

the removal or installation of the sealant

canister, consult your Ford Motor Company

authorized dealer for assistance.

E144629

Be sure to check the sealant compound's

use by date regularly. The use by date is

on the lower right hand corner of the label

located on the sealant canister (bottle).

The sealant canister should be replaced

after four years.

265

Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE

Information About Uniform Tire

Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality

grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder

and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A.

These Tire Quality Grades are determined

by standards that the United States

Department of Transportation has set.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new

pneumatic passenger car tires. They do

not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow

tires, space-saver or temporary use spare

tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches

or limited production tires as defined in

Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part

575.104 (c)(2).

U.S. Department of Transportation Tire

quality grades: The U.S. Department of

Transportation requires Ford Motor

Company to give you the following

information about tire grades exactly as

the government has written it.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½

times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits, service

practices, and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning or peak traction

characteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest

are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement

as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance.

Temperature A B C

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or

excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup and

possible tire failure.

266

Wheels and Tires

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C, representing the tire’s

resistance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 139. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the

minimum required by law.

Glossary of Tire Terminology

* Tire label: A label showing the

OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,

recommended inflation pressure

and the maximum weight the

vehicle can carry.

*Tire Identification Number

(TIN): A number on the sidewall

of each tire providing information

about the tire brand and

manufacturing plant, tire size and

date of manufacture. Also referred

to as DOT code.

*Inflation pressure: A measure

of the amount of air in a tire.

*Standard load: A class of

P-metric or Metric tires designed

to carry a maximum load at 35 psi

[37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not

increase the tire’s load carrying

capability.

*Extra load: A class of P-metric

or Metric tires designed to carry a

heavier maximum load at 41 psi

[43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not

increase the tire’s load carrying

capability.

*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of

air pressure.

*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a

standard unit of air pressure.

*Cold tire pressure: The tire

pressure when the vehicle has

been stationary and out of direct

sunlight for an hour or more and

prior to the vehicle being driven for

1 mile (1.6 km).

267

Wheels and Tires

*Recommended inflation

pressure: The cold inflation

pressure found on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door

edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating

position), or Tire Label located on

the B-Pillar or the edge of the

driver’s door.

*B-pillar: The structural member

at the side of the vehicle behind

the front door

* Bead area of the tire: Area of

the tire next to the rim.

*Sidewall of the tire: Area

between the bead area and the

tread.

*Tread area of the tire: Area of

the perimeter of the tire that

contacts the road when mounted

on the vehicle.

*Rim: The metal support (wheel)

for a tire or a tire and tube

assembly upon which the tire

beads are seated.

Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall

Both U.S. and Canada Federal

regulations require tire

manufacturers to place

standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This

information identifies and

describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also

provides a U.S. DOT Tire

Identification Number for safety

standard certification and in case

of a recall.

Information on P Type Tires

CDEFG

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example of

a tire size, load index and speed

rating. The definitions of these

items are listed below. (Note that

the tire size, load index and speed

rating for your vehicle may be

different from this example.)

268

Wheels and Tires

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated

by the Tire and Rim Association,

that may be used for service on

cars, sport utility vehicles,

minivans and light trucks. Note: If

your tire size does not begin with

a letter this may mean it is

designated by either the European

Tire and Rim Technical

Organization or the Japan Tire

Manufacturing Association.

B. 215: Indicates the nominal

width of the tire in millimeters

from sidewall edge to sidewall

edge. In general, the larger the

number, the wider the tire.

C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio

which gives the tire's ratio of

height to width.

D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.

E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim

diameter in inches. If you change

your wheel size, you will have to

purchase new tires to match the

new wheel diameter.

F. 95: Indicates the tire's load

index. It is an index that relates to

how much weight a tire can carry.

You may find this information in

your owner’s manual. If not,

contact a local tire dealer.

Note: You may not find this information on

all tires because it is not required by federal

law.

G. H: Indicates the tire's speed

rating. The speed rating denotes

the speed at which a tire is

designed to be driven for extended

periods of time under a standard

condition of load and inflation

pressure. The tires on your vehicle

may operate at different

conditions for load and inflation

pressure. These speed ratings may

need to be adjusted for the

difference in conditions. The

ratings range from 81 mph (130

km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).

These ratings are listed in the

following chart.

Note: You may not find this information on

all tires because it is not required by federal

law.

mph ( km/h)Letter rating

81 mph (130 km/h)M

87 mph (140 km/h)N

99 mph (159 km/h)Q

106 mph (171 km/h)R

112 mph (180 km/h)S

118 mph (190 km/h)T

124 mph (200 km/h)U

130 mph (210 km/h)H

149 mph (240 km/h)V

269

Wheels and Tires

mph ( km/h)Letter rating

168 mph (270 km/h)W

186 mph (299 km/h)Y

Note: For tires with a maximum speed

capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire

manufacturers sometimes use the letters

ZR. For those with a maximum speed

capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire

manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification

Number (TIN): This begins with

the letters DOT and indicates that

the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers

or letters are the plant code

designating where it was

manufactured, the next two are

the tire size code and the last four

numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For

example, the numbers 317 mean

the 31st week of 1997. After 2000

the numbers go to four digits. For

example, 2501 means the 25th

week of 2001. The numbers in

between are identification codes

used for traceability. This

information is used to contact

customers if a tire defect requires

a recall.

I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or

AT: All Terrain, or

AS: All Season.

J. Tire Ply Composition and

Material Used: Indicates the

number of plies or the number of

layers of rubber-coated fabric in

the tire tread and sidewall. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the ply materials in the tire and the

sidewall, which include steel,

nylon, polyester, and others.

K. Maximum Load: Indicates the

maximum load in kilograms and

pounds that can be carried by the

tire. See the Safety Compliance

Certification Label (affixed to

either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge

that meets the door-latch post,

next to the driver's seating

position), for the correct tire

pressure for your vehicle.

L. Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades:

* Treadwear The treadwear

grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified

government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half times as

well on the government course as

a tire graded 100.

270

Wheels and Tires

*Traction: The traction grades,

from highest to lowest are AA, A,

B, and C. The grades represent the

tire's ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction

performance.

* Temperature: The temperature

grades are A (the highest), B and

C, representing the tire's

resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel.

M. Maximum Inflation

Pressure: Indicates the tire

manufacturers' maximum

permissible pressure or the

pressure at which the maximum

load can be carried by the tire. This

pressure is normally higher than

the vehicle manufacturer's

recommended cold inflation

pressure which can be found on

the Safety Compliance

Certification Label (affixed to

either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge

that meets the door-latch post,

next to the driver's seating

position), or Tire Label which is

located on the B-Pillar or the edge

of the driver’s door. The cold

inflation pressure should never be

set lower than the recommended

pressure on the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may have

additional markings, notes or

warnings such as standard load

or radial tubeless.

Additional Information Contained on

the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires

Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to

this type of tire.

E142544

LT type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P

type tires; these differences are

described below.

271

Wheels and Tires

A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated

by the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that is intended for

service on light trucks.

B. Load Range and Load

Inflation Limits: Indicates the

tire's load-carrying capabilities

and its inflation limits.

C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the

maximum load and tire pressure

when the tire is used as a dual;

defined as four tires on the rear

axle (a total of six or more tires on

the vehicle).

D. Maximum Load Single lb

(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates

the maximum load and tire

pressure when the tire is used as

a single; defined as two tires

(total) on the rear axle.

Information on T Type Tires

T145/80D16 is an example of a

tire size.

Note: The temporary tire size for your

vehicle may be different from this example.

Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type

of tire.

BCDE

E142545

T type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P

type tires; these differences are

described below:

A. T: Indicates a type of tire,

designated by the Tire and Rim

Association, that is intended for

temporary service on cars,

sport-utility vehicles, minivans and

light trucks.

B. 145: Indicates the nominal

width of the tire in millimeters

from sidewall edge to sidewall

edge. In general, the larger the

number, the wider the tire.

272

Wheels and Tires

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio

which gives the tire's ratio of

height to width. Numbers of 70 or

lower indicate a short sidewall.

D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.

R: Indicates a radial type tire.

E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim

diameter in inches. If you change

your wheel size, you will have to

purchase new tires to match the

new wheel diameter.

Location of the Tire Label

You will find a Tire Label

containing tire inflation pressure

by tire size and other important

information located on the B-Pillar

or the edge of the driver’s door.

Inflating Your Tires

Safe operation of your vehicle

requires that your tires are

properly inflated. Remember that

a tire can lose up to half of its air

pressure without appearing flat.

Every day before you drive, check

your tires. If one looks lower than

the others, use a tire gauge to

check pressure of all tires and

adjust if required.

At least once a month and before

long trips, inspect each tire and

check the tire pressure with a tire

gauge (including spare, if

equipped). Inflate all tires to the

inflation pressure recommended

by Ford Motor Company.

You are strongly urged to buy a

reliable tire pressure gauge, as

automatic service station gauges

may be inaccurate. Ford

recommends the use of a digital

or dial-type tire pressure gauge

rather than a stick-type tire

pressure gauge.

Use the recommended cold

inflation pressure for optimum tire

performance and wear.

Under-inflation or over-inflation

may cause uneven treadwear

patterns

WARNING

Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failures and may result

in severe tire cracking, tread

separation or blowout, with unexpected

loss of vehicle control and increased risk

of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall

flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in

heat buildup and internal damage to the

tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire

stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle

control and accidents. A tire can lose up

to half of its air pressure and not appear

to be flat!

273

Wheels and Tires

Always inflate your tires to the

Ford recommended inflation

pressure even if it is less than the

maximum inflation pressure

information found on the tire. The

Ford recommended tire inflation

pressure is found on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door

edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating

position), or Tire Label which is

located on the B-Pillar or the edge

of the driver’s door. Failure to

follow the tire pressure

recommendations can cause

uneven treadwear patterns and

adversely affect the way your

vehicle handles

Maximum Inflation Pressure is

the tire manufacturer's maximum

permissible pressure and the

pressure at which the maximum

load can be carried by the tire. This

pressure is normally higher than

the manufacturer’s recommended

cold inflation pressure which can

be found on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge

pillar, door-latch post, or the door

edge that meets the door-latch

post, next to the driver's seating

position), or Tire Label which is

located on the B-Pillar or the edge

of the driver’s door. The cold

inflation pressure should never be

set lower than the recommended

pressure on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label or

Tire Label.

When weather temperature

changes occur, tire inflation

pressures also change. A 10°F

(6°C) temperature drop can

cause a corresponding drop of 1

psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.

Check your tire pressures

frequently and adjust them to the

proper pressure which can be

found on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label or Tire Label.

To check the pressure in your

tire(s):

1. Make sure the tires are cool,

meaning they are not hot from

driving even a mile.

Note: If you are checking tire pressure when

the tire is hot, (for example, driven more

than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or

reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from

driving and it is normal for pressures to

increase above recommended cold

pressures. A hot tire at or below

recommended cold inflation pressure could

be significantly under-inflated.

Note: If you have to drive a distance to get

air for your tire(s), check and record the tire

pressure first and add the appropriate air

pressure when you get to the pump. It is

normal for tires to heat up and the air

pressure inside to go up as you drive.

274

Wheels and Tires

2. Remove the cap from the valve

on one tire, then firmly press the

tire gauge onto the valve and

measure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach the

recommended air pressure.

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by

pressing on the metal stem in the center of

the valve. Then recheck the pressure with

your tire gauge.

4. Replace the valve cap.

5. Repeat this procedure for each

tire, including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher

inflation pressure than the other tires. For T

type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar

spare wheel and tire assembly information

for a description. Store and maintain at 60

psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar

spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel

and tire assembly information for a

description. Store and maintain at the higher

of the front and rear inflation pressure as

shown on the Tire Label.

6. Visually inspect the tires to

make sure there are no nails or

other objects embedded that

could poke a hole in the tire and

cause an air leak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make

sure there are no gouges, cuts or

bulges.

Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve

Stems

Periodically inspect the tire treads

for uneven or excessive wear and

remove objects such as stones,

nails or glass that may be wedged

in the tread grooves. Check the tire

and valve stems for holes, cracks,

or cuts that may permit air

leakage and repair or replace the

tire and replace the valve stem.

Inspect the tire sidewalls for

cracking, cuts, bruises and other

signs of damage or excessive

wear. If internal damage to the tire

is suspected, have the tire

demounted and inspected in case

it needs to be repaired or replaced.

For your safety, tires that are

damaged or show signs of

excessive wear should not be used

because they are more likely to

blow out or fail.

Improper or inadequate vehicle

maintenance can cause tires to

wear abnormally. Inspect all your

tires, including the spare,

frequently, and replace them if

one or more of the following

conditions exist:

275

Wheels and Tires

Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down to

one sixteenth of an inch (2

millimeters), tires must be

replaced to help prevent your

vehicle from skidding and

hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear

indicators, or wear bars, which

look like narrow strips of smooth

rubber across the tread will

appear on the tire when the tread

is worn down to one sixteenth of

an inch (2 millimeters)

When the tire tread wears down

to the same height as these wear

bars, the tire is worn out and must

be replaced.

Damage

Periodically inspect the tire treads

and sidewalls for damage (such

as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,

cracks in the tread groove and

separation in the tread or

sidewall). If damage is observed

or suspected have the tire

inspected by a tire professional.

Tires can be damaged during

off-road use, so inspection after

off-road use is also

recommended.

Age

WARNING

Tires degrade over time depending

on many factors such as weather,

storage conditions, and conditions

of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the

tires experience throughout their lives.

In general, tires should be replaced after

six years regardless of tread wear.

However, heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading conditions can

accelerate the aging process and may

require tires to be replaced more

frequently.

You should replace your spare tire when

you replace the road tires or after six years

due to aging even if it has not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

Both United States and Canada

Federal regulations require tire

manufacturers to place

standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This

information identifies and

describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also

provides a U.S. DOT Tire

Identification Number for safety

standard certification and in case

of a recall.

276

Wheels and Tires

This begins with the letters DOT

and indicates that the tire meets

all federal standards. The next

two numbers or letters are the

plant code designating where it

was manufactured, the next two

are the tire size code and the last

four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For

example, the numbers 317 mean

the 31st week of 1997. After 2000

the numbers go to four digits. For

example, 2501 means the 25th

week of 2001. The numbers in

between are identification codes

used for traceability. This

information is used to contact

customers if a tire defect requires

a recall.

Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires

designed to provide a safe ride

and handling capability.

WARNINGS

Only use replacement tires and

wheels that are the same size, load

index, speed rating and type (such

as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season

versus all-terrain) as those originally

provided by Ford. The recommended tire

and wheel size may be found on either the

Safety Compliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,

door-latch post, or the door edge that

meets the door-latch post, next to the

driver's seating position), or the Tire Label

which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of

the driver’s door. If this information is not

found on these labels then you should

contact your authorized dealer as soon as

WARNINGS

possible. Use of any tire or wheel not

recommended by Ford can affect the

safety and performance of your vehicle,

which could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,

personal injury and death. Additionally the

use of non-recommended tires and wheels

could cause steering, suspension, axle,

transfer case or power transfer unit failure.

If you have questions regarding tire

replacement, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

To reduce the risk of serious injury

when mounting replacement tires

and wheels, you should not exceed

the maximum pressure indicated on the

sidewall of the tire to set the beads without

additional precautions listed below. If the

beads do not seat at the maximum

pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try

again

When inflating the tire for mounting

pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater

than the maximum pressure on the tire

sidewall, the following precautions must

be taken to protect the person mounting

the tire:

1. Make sure that you have the correct tire

and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead

seat area again.

3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66

meters) away from the wheel and tire

assembly.

4. Use both eye and ear protection.

For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi

(1.38 bar) greater than the maximum

pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service

professional should do the mounting.

277

Wheels and Tires

WARNINGS

Always inflate steel carcass tires with a

remote air fill with the person inflating

standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66

meters) away from the wheel and tire

assembly

Important: Remember to replace

the wheel valve stems when the

road tires are replaced on your

vehicle

It is recommended that the two

front tires or two rear tires

generally be replaced as a pair.

The tire pressure sensors mounted

in the wheels (originally installed

on your vehicle) are not designed

to be used in aftermarket wheels.

The use of wheels or tires not

recommended by Ford Motor

Company may affect the

operation of your tire pressure

monitoring system.

If the TPMS indicator is flashing,

your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your

replacement tire might be

incompatible with your TPMS, or

some component of the TPMS

may be damaged.

Safety Practices

WARNINGS

If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud,

sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the

tires; spinning the tires can tear the

tire and cause an explosion. A tire can

explode in as little as three to five seconds.

WARNINGS

Do not spin the wheels at over 35

mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail

and injure a passenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great deal to do

with your tire mileage and safety.

*Observe posted speed limits

*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

*Avoid potholes and objects on

the road

*Do not run over curbs or hit the

tire against a curb when parking

Highway Hazards

No matter how carefully you drive

there’s always the possibility that

you may eventually have a flat tire

on the highway. Drive slowly to the

closest safe area out of traffic.

This may further damage the flat

tire, but your safety is more

important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or

ride disturbance while driving, or

you suspect your tire or vehicle

has been damaged, immediately

reduce your speed. Drive with

caution until you can safely pull

off the road. Stop and inspect the

tires for damage. If a tire is

under-inflated or damaged,

deflate it, remove wheel and

278

Wheels and Tires

replace it with your spare tire and

wheel. If you cannot detect a

cause, have the vehicle towed to

the nearest repair facility or tire

dealer to have the vehicle

inspected.

Tire and Wheel Alignment

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or

pothole can cause the front end

of your vehicle to become

misaligned or cause damage to

your tires. If your vehicle seems to

pull to one side when you’re

driving, the wheels may be out of

alignment. Have an authorized

dealer check the wheel alignment

periodically.

Wheel misalignment in the front

or the rear can cause uneven and

rapid treadwear of your tires and

should be corrected by an

authorized dealer. Front-wheel

drive vehicles and those with an

independent rear suspension (if

equipped) may require alignment

of all four wheels.

The tires should also be balanced

periodically. An unbalanced tire

and wheel assembly may result in

irregular tire wear.

Tire Rotation

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask

an authorized dealer to check for and correct

any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or

mechanical problem involved before tire

rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with

a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly

is defined as a spare wheel and tire

assembly that is different in brand, size or

appearance from the road tires and wheels.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire

assembly it is intended for temporary use

only and should not be used in a tire

rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated,

inflation pressure must be checked and

adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

Rotating your tires at the

recommended interval (as

indicated in the Scheduled

Maintenance chapter) will help

your tires wear more evenly,

providing better tire performance

and longer tire life.

Front-wheel drive and all-wheel

vehicles (front tires on the left side

of the diagram)

E142547

All vehicles with directional tires

(front tires on the left side of the

diagram)

279

Wheels and Tires

E147237

Sometimes irregular tire wear can

be corrected by rotating the tires.

Summer Tires

Your Ford vehicle may be

equipped with summer tires to

provide superior performance on

wet and dry roads. Summer tires

do not have the Mud and Snow

(M+S or M/S) tire traction rating

on the tire side wall. Since

summer tires do not have the

same traction performance as

All-season or Snow tires, Ford

does not recommend using

summer tires when temperatures

drop to approximately 40°F (5°C)

or below (depending on tire wear

and environmental conditions) or

in snow and ice conditions. Like

any tire, summer tire performance

is affected by tire wear and

environmental conditions. If you

must drive in those conditions,

Ford recommends using Mud and

Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or

Snow tires.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM

WARNING

The tire pressure monitoring system

is not a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked periodically

(at least monthly) using a tire gauge. See

Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure

to properly maintain your tire pressure

could increase the risk of tire failure, loss

of control, vehicle rollover and personal

injury.

Each tire, including the spare (if

provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated

to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale when one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure

telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

280

Wheels and Tires

Please note that the tire pressure

monitoring system is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance. It is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of

the tire pressure monitoring system low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system

malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The

malfunction indicator is combined with the

low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able

to detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. System malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate

tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the system from functioning properly.

Always check the tire pressure monitoring

system malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle

to make sure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the

system to continue to function properly.

Changing Tires with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor located inside the wheel

and tire assembly cavity. The pressure

sensor is attached to the valve stem. The

pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is

not visible unless the tire is removed. Care

must be taken when changing the tire to

avoid damaging the sensor

It is recommended that you always have

your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.

The tire pressure should be checked

periodically (at least monthly) using an

accurate tire gauge. See Inflating your tires

in this chapter.

Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System

The tire pressure monitoring system

measures pressure in your four road tires

and sends the tire pressure readings to

your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning

light will turn on if the tire pressure is

significantly low. Once the light is

illuminated, your tires are under-inflated

and need to be inflated to the

manufacturer’s recommended tire

pressure. Even if the light turns on and a

short time later turns off, your tire pressure

still needs to be checked.

281

Wheels and Tires

When your Temporary Spare Tire is

Installed

When one of your road tires needs to be

replaced with the temporary spare, the tire

pressure monitoring system will continue

to identify an issue to remind you that the

damaged road wheel and tire assembly

needs to be repaired and put back on your

vehicle.

To restore the full function of the tire

pressure monitoring system, have the

damaged road wheel and tire assembly

repaired and remounted on your vehicle.

When you Believe your System is not

Operating Properly

The main function of the tire pressure

monitoring system is to warn you when

your tires need air. It can also warn you in

the event the system is no longer capable

of functioning as intended. See the

following chart for information concerning

your tire pressure monitoring system.

282

Wheels and Tires

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure

warning light

1. Make sure tires are at the proper pres-

sure. See Inflating your tires in this

chapter. 2. After inflating your tires to the

manufacturer’s recommended pressure

as shown on the Tire Label (located on

the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),

the vehicle must be driven for at least

two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)

before the light turns off.

Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire

assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle

to restore system functionality. For a

description on how the system functions,

see When your temporary spare tire is

installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and the

spare tire is not in use but the light

remains on, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Tire pressure monitoring

system malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire

assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle

to restore system function. For a

description on how the system functions,

see When your temporary spare tire is

installed in this section.

Spare tire in useFlashing warning

light

If the tires are properly inflated and the

spare tire is not in use but the light

remains on, contact your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Tire pressure monitoring

system malfunction

When Inflating your Tires

When putting air into your tires (such as at

a gas station or in your garage), the tire

pressure monitoring system may not

respond immediately to the air added to

your tires.

It may take up to two minutes of driving

over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn

off after you have filled your tires to the

recommended inflation pressure

283

Wheels and Tires

How Temperature Affects your Tire

Pressure

The tire pressure monitoring system

monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic

tire. While driving in a normal manner, a

typical passenger tire inflation pressure

may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14

to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If

the vehicle is stationary overnight with the

outside temperature significantly lower

than the daytime temperature, the tire

pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21

kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient

temperature. This lower pressure value

may be detected by the tire pressure

monitoring system as being significantly

lower than the recommended inflation

pressure and activate the system warning

light for low tire pressure. If the low tire

pressure warning light is on, visually check

each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one

or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.)

Check air pressure in the road tires. If any

tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the

vehicle to the nearest location where air

can be added to the tires. Inflate all the

tires to the recommended inflation

pressure.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNING

If you choose to install snow tires on

your vehicle, they must be the same

size, construction, and load range as

the original tires listed on the tire placard,

and they must be installed on all four

wheels. Mixing tires of different size or

construction on your vehicle can adversely

affect your vehicle's handling and braking,

and may lead to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use snow chains or cables on this

vehicle as they may cause damage to your

vehicle which may lead to loss of vehicle

control.

Snow chains or cables have not been

approved for use on your vehicle.

The original equipment tires on your vehicle

may have an all-weather tread design to

provide traction, handling, and braking

performance in year-round driving. You

may install snow tires for improved traction

when driving in areas with sustained

periods of snow or icy driving conditions

284

Wheels and Tires

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNING

When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials

present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,

brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners

that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting

surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the

wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off

while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

Ib-ft (Nm)*

Bolt size

100 (135)M12 x 1.5

*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford

recommended replacement fasteners.

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any

wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

E145950

Wheel pilot boreA

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and

mounting surface prior to installation.

Remove any visible corrosion or loose

particles.

285

Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

2.0L ATK iVCT EngineEngine

122Cubic inches

Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel

1-3-4-2Firing order

Coil on plug (COP)Ignition system

12.3:1Compression

ratio

0.051 in. ± 0.002 in. (1.3 mm ± 0.05 mm)Spark plug gap

286

Capacities and Specifications

MOTORCRAFT PARTS

2.0L ATK iVCT EngineComponent

FA-1911Air filter

element1

FL-910-S

Oil filter2

BXT-96R-500Battery

BXT-96R-590

SP-531

Spark plugs3

FP-71Cabin air filter

WW-2700 (driver side)Windshield

wiper blade WW-2601 (passenger side)

1 Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The

customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter

element is not used.

2 Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter can

result in engine damage.

3 For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the

appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 438).

Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications

for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent replacement parts. The customer

warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.

287

Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

The vehicle identification number is

located on the left-hand side of the

instrument panel.

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is

representative of your vehicle identification

number.

The Vehicle Identification Number contains

the following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierA

Brake system, Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating, Restraint Devices

and their locations

Make, vehicle line, series, body

type

Engine typeD

Check digitE

Model yearF

Assembly plantG

Production sequence numberH

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

E142478

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration Regulations require that a

Safety Compliance Certification Label be

affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where

the Safety Compliance Certification Label

may be located. The Safety Compliance

Certification Label shall be affixed to either

the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,

or the edge of the door near the door latch,

next to the driver's seating position.

288

Capacities and Specifications

TRANSMISSION CODE

DESIGNATION

E142806

The transmission code is on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label. The

following table shows the transmission

code along with the transmission

description.

CodeDescription

JElectronic continuously variable transmission (ECVT),

automatic, power split, shift by wire

289

Capacities and Specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Ford Part Number /

Ford Specification

Ford Part Name or

Equivalent

CapacityItem

PM-1-C /Motorcraft DOT 4 LV

High Performance

Brake Fluid

Between MIN and

MAX on reservoir

Brake fluid 1

WSS-M6C65-A2 and

ISO 4925 Class 6

XG-4 or XL-5 or equi-

valent

Multi-Purpose

Grease (lithium

grease)

Not applicableDoor latch, hood

latch, auxiliary hood

latch, trunk latch, seat

tracks.

/ESB-M1C93-B

XL-1 /NoneMotorcraft Penet-

rating and Lock

Lubricant

Not applicableLock cylinder

XT-10-QLV MERCON

Motorcraft MERCON

LV ATF

5.7 qt (5.4L)Automatic transmis-

sion fluid 2, 3

WSS-M2C945-AMotorcraft SAE 5W-

20 or equivalent

4.5 qt (4.3L)

Engine oil 4, 5

VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)Motorcraft Orange

Antifreeze / Coolant

Prediluted

8.8 qt (8.3L)Energi engine coolant

6CVC-3DIL-B

(Canada)

7 qt (7.4L)Hybrid engine coolant

/WSS-M97B44-D2

1 qt (1.1L)Inverter system

controller coolant6

ZC-32-A (U.S.)Motorcraft Premium

Windshield Washer

Concentrate (U.S.)

Fill as requiredWindshield washer

fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, and

F) (Canada)

Premium Quality

Windshield Washer

Fluid (Canada)

/WSB-M8B16-A2

Not applicableNot applicable14 gal (53L)Energi fuel tank

13.5 gal (51.1L)Hybrid fuel tank

YN-19 (US)Motorcraft R-134a

Refrigerant

1.25 lb (0.567 kg)

A/C Refrigerant7

CYR-16-R (Canada)

290

Capacities and Specifications

Ford Part Number /

Ford Specification

Ford Part Name or

Equivalent

CapacityItem

/WSH-M17B19-A

YN-32Motorcraft POE

Refrigerant

Compressor Oil

5.17 fl oz (152.8 ml)A/C Refrigerant

Compressor Oil7/WSS-M2C31-B2

1Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent, meeting

WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the recommended

fluid may cause brake system damage.

2Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

3Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should

only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid.

Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.

Change the automatic transmission fluid at the correct service interval. See Scheduled

Maintenance (page 438).

4Your engine has been designed to use engine oil that meets Ford specification. It is also

acceptable to use an engine oil of recommended viscosity grade that displays the API

Certification Mark for gasoline engines.

5Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine treatments. They

are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty.

Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced

engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.

6Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.

WARNING

The A/C refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening

the A/C refrigerant system can cause personal injury. A/C refrigerant system is to

be serviced only by qualified personnel.

291

Capacities and Specifications

For a complete listing of the accessories

that are available for your vehicle, please

contact your dealer or visit our online store

at: Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).

Ford Custom Accessories are available for

your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford

of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company

will repair or replace any properly

dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories

found to be defective in factory-supplied

materials or workmanship during the

warranty period, as well as any component

damaged by the defective accessories. The

accessories will be warranted for

whichever provides you the greatest

benefit:

• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000

km) (whichever occurs first), or

• the remainder of your new vehicle

limited warranty.

Contact your dealer for details and a copy

of the warranty.

Exterior style

• Hood deflectors

• Side-window deflectors

• Splash guards

• Rear spoiler

• Wheels

• Bumper protectors

Interior style

• All-weather floor mats

• Rear seat entertainment*

• Premium carpeted floor mats

• Lighted door sill plates

• Electrochromatic

compass/temperature interior mirrors

Lifestyle

• Ash cup / smoker's packages

• Roof racks and carriers*

• Cargo area protectors

• Cargo net

• Cargo organizers

• Interior light kit

Peace of mind

• Remote start

• Vehicle security systems

• Wheel locks

• Bumper-mounted parking sensor*

• Locking fuel plug for capless fuel

system

*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are

warranted by the accessory

manufacturer's warranty. Ford Licensed

Accessories are fully designed and

developed by the accessory manufacturer

and have not been designed or tested to

Ford Motor Company engineering

requirements. Contact your Ford dealer for

details regarding the manufacturer's

limited warranty and a copy of the FLA

product limited warranty offered by the

accessory manufacturer.

For maximum vehicle performance, keep

the following information in mind when

adding accessories or equipment to your

vehicle:

292

Accessories

• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to your

vehicle, do not exceed the total weight

capacity of the vehicle or of the front

or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as

indicated on the Safety Compliance

Certification label). Consult your

authorized dealer for specific weight

information.

• The Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) and Canadian

Radio Telecommunications

Commission (CRTC) regulate the use

of mobile communications systems —

such as two-way radios, telephones

and theft alarms - that are equipped

with radio transmitters. Any such

equipment installed in your vehicle

should comply with FCC or CRTC

regulations and should be installed

only by a qualified service technician.

• Mobile communications systems may

harm the operation of your vehicle,

particularly if they are not properly

designed for automotive use.

• To avoid interference with other vehicle

functions, such as anti-lock braking

systems, amateur radio users who

install radios and antennas onto their

vehicle should not locate the amateur

radio antennas in the area of the

driver's side hood.

• Any non-Ford custom electrical or

electronic accessories or components

that are added to the vehicle by the

authorized dealer or the owner, may

adversely affect battery performance

and durability, and may also adversely

affect the performance of other

electrical systems in the vehicle.

293

Accessories

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD

EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)

More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln

owners have discovered the powerful

protection of Ford Extended Service Plan.

It is the only extended service plan backed

by Ford Motor Company, and provides

peace of mind protection beyond the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.

Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself

One service bill – the cost of parts and

labor – can easily exceed the price of your

Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford

ESP, you minimize your risk for unexpected

repair bills and rising repair costs.

Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle

Components

There are four Extended Service Plans with

different levels of coverage. Ask your

dealer for details.

1. PremiumCARE - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over

500 covered components, this plan is

so complete that we generally only

discuss what’s not covered.

2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,

and includes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.

4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical

components.

Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by

all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S. and

Canada. It is the only extended service plan

authorized and backed by Ford Motor

Company.

That means you get:

• Reliable, quality service anywhere you

• Repairs performed by factory trained

technicians, using Genuine Ford and

Lincoln parts

Rental Car Reimbursement

1st day Rental Benefit

You take advantage of replacement

transportation if your vehicle is at the

dealership for same day covered repairs.

Extended Rental Benefits

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered

repairs, you are eligible for rental car

coverage, including Bumper to Bumper

warranty repairs, or Field Service Actions.

Roadside Assistance

Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,

including:

• Towing, flat-tire change and battery

jump starts

• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance

• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car

• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,

rental car coverage and emergency

transportation

Transferable Coverage

If you sell your vehicle before your Ford

Extended Service Plan coverage expires,

you can transfer any remaining coverage

to the new owner. Whenever you sell your

vehicle, prospective buyers may have a

higher degree of confidence that vehicle

was properly maintained with Ford ESP,

thereby improving resale value.

294

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly

Maintaining Your Vehicle!

Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a

Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all

scheduled maintenance, and select items

that routinely wear out.

The coverage is prepaid, so you never have

to worry about affording your vehicle

maintenance. It covers regular checkups,

routine inspections, preventive care and

replacement of select items that require

periodic attention for normal wear:

• Windshield Wiper Blades

• Spark Plugs (except in California)

• The Clutch Disc

• Brake Pads and Linings

• Shock Absorbers

• Belts and Hoses

• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment

Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln

dealership today so they can customize a

Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your

driving lifestyle and budget.

Interest Free Finance Options

Available

Take advantage of our interest free

installment payment plan. Just a 10%

down payment will provide you with an

affordable, no interest, no fee payment

program.

To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists

at 800-367-3377. Don’t forget to ask about

our interest free payment program,

allowing you all the security and benefits

Ford ESP has to offer while paying over

time. You are pre-approved with no credit

checks, no hassles!

Complete the information below and mail

to:

Ford ESP

P.O. Box 8072

Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039

Name (PLEASE PRINT)

APT.#ADDRESS

ZIPSTATECITY

E-MAIL

295

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)

You can get more protection for your

vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended

Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan

is the only service contract backed by Ford

Motor Company of Canada, Limited.

Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford

Extended Service Plan provides benefits

such as:

• Rental reimbursement

• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items

• Protection against repair costs after

your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Coverage expires

• Roadside Assistance benefits

There are several Ford Extended Service

Plans available in various time, distance

and deductible combinations. Each plan

is tailored to fit your own driving needs,

including reimbursement for towing and

rental.

When you purchase Ford Extended Service

Plan, you receive added peace-of-mind

protection throughout Canada and the

United States, provided by a network of

participating Ford Motor Company dealers.

The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan

is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.

Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada

and the United States are not eligible for

Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.

This information is subject to change.

For more information, visit your local Ford

of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find

the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right

for you.

296

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)

GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Factors

AM and FM frequencies are established by

the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and

Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).

Those frequencies are:

• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz

• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio Reception Factors

The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the

signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance and strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and

thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and

result in the audio system muting.

Station overload

CD and CD Player Information

Note: CD units play commercially pressed

4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact

discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,

certain recordable and re-recordable

compact discs may not function correctly

when used in Ford CD players.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade

paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player

as the label may peel and cause the CD to

become jammed. You should use a

permanent felt tip marker rather than

adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.

Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please

contact an authorized dealer for further

information.

Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped

discs or discs with a scratch protection film

attached.

Always handle discs by their edges only.

Clean the disc with an approved CD

cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the

disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a

circular motion.

Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or

heat sources for extended periods.

MP3 Track and Folder Structure

Audio systems capable of recognizing and

playing MP3 individual tracks and folder

structures work as follows:

• There are two different modes for MP3

disc playback: MP3 track mode

(system default) and MP3 folder

mode.

• MP3 track mode ignores any folder

structure on the MP3 disc. The player

numbers each MP3 track on the disc

(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from

T001 to a maximum of T255. The

maximum number of playable MP3

files may be less depending on the

structure of the CD and exact model

of radio present.

297

Audio System

• MP3 folder mode represents a folder

structure consisting of one level of

folders. The CD player numbers all MP3

tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3

file extension) and all folders

containing MP3 files, from F001

(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level of

folders helps with navigation through

the disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is

important to understand how the system

reads the structures you create. While

various files may be present, (files with

extensions other than mp3), only files with

the .mp3 extension are played; other files

are ignored by the system. This enables

you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety

of tasks on your work computer, home

computer and your in-vehicle system.

In track mode, the system displays and

plays the structure as if it were only one

level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless

of being in a specific folder). In folder

mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files

in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE

RADIO

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: Depending on your vehicle option

package, your system may look different

from what you see here.

Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS

satellite radio, may not be available in your

location. Check with an authorized dealer.

E144488

298

Audio System

CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the

radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.

SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade

and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.

When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change

the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set

for each audio source independently.

Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.C

Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access.

When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons

to enter a phone number.

Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending

on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.F

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.G

Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system

stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly

to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button

to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward

through the current track.

End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call.I

Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the

various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow

buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.

CD slot: Insert a CD.K

Pick-up or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming

phone call or to make a phone call.

Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system

stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move

quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press

this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move

quickly backward through the current track.

Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD.N

VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to

adjust the volume.

PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system.

See SYNC™ (page 310).

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu

Structure later in this section.

299

Audio System

MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between

devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.

Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow

controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing

the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.

RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies

bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different

radio functions.

SIRIUS: Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.U

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

PREMIUM AM/FM/CD

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: The MyFord Touch® system controls

most of the audio features. See MyFord

Touch™ (page 348).

300

Audio System

E144489

VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to

adjust the volume.

CD slot: Insert a CD.B

TUNE: Once you select a frequency band, turn the control to find the desired

station manually.

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.D

Seek and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press

this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold

the button to move quickly to the next strong radio station or memory preset.

In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button

to move quickly forward through the current track.

Seek and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this

button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold

the button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory

preset. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and

hold the button to move quickly backward through the current track.

301

Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

SONY AM/FM/CD

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, accident and

injury. Ford strongly recommends

that you use extreme caution when using

any device or feature that may take your

focus off the road. Your primary

responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. We recommend against the use

of any handheld device while driving,

encourage the use of voice-operated

systems when possible and that you

become aware of applicable state and

local laws that may affect use of electronic

devices while driving.

Note: The MyFord Touch® system controls

most of the audio features. See MyFord

Touch™ (page 348).

E144490

Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on.A

CD slot: Insert a CD.B

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.C

TUNE + and TUNE -: Press these buttons to search the frequency bands in

individual increments.

SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade

and Balance.

302

Audio System

VOL: Turn the control to adjust the volume.F

SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes such as AM, FM

and A/V Input.

Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band

and press one of these buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in

that direction. Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that

direction to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press

one of these buttons to select the previous or next track. Press and hold one of

these buttons to move quickly in that direction within the current track.

Menu Structure

Note: Depending on your system, some

options may appear slightly different.

Press MENU.

Press the up and down arrow buttons to

scroll through the options.

Press the right arrow to enter a menu.

Press the left arrow to exit a menu.

Press OK to confirm a selection.

Radio

Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the

frequency band.

Manual tune

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan

Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-

AST and FM-AST frequency bands.

AST

Select to have the system search by certain music

categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).

PTY/Set Category

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This

feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a

category.

RBDS/RDS

303

Audio System

SIRIUS

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan

Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number

(ESN). You will need this number when communicating

with SIRIUS® to activate, modify or track your account.

Show ESN

Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK

to open a list of the following options for this channel:

Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once you

skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing

Direct and entering the channel number. Locking or

unlocking a channel requires your PIN.

Channel Guide

Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or

News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions

only stop on channels in that category.

Set Category

Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs, artists or

teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing

on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.

Alerts

Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock All Stations

Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip No stations

Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock

channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Parental Lock (PIN)

Audio Settings

Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for

speed and wind noise. You can set the system between

0 and +7.

Spd. Comp. Vol.

Select to adjust settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade

and Balance.

Sound

Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating

position.

Occupancy Mode

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This

feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a

category.

RBDS/RDS Text

Choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO

mode.

DSP

304

Audio System

CD Settings

Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder

Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more

consistent listening level.

CD Compression

Clock Settings

Select to set the time.Set Time

Select to set the calendar date.Set Date

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour

mode.

24h Mode

Display Settings

Select to change display brightness.Dimming

Select to display the language in English, French or

Spanish.

Language

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit

or Celsius.

Temp. setting

SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,

news, sports, weather, traffic and

entertainment satellite radio channels. For

more information and a complete list of

SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit

www.siriusxm.com in the United States,

www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at

1-888-539-7474.

Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is

published under the eCos License.

305

Audio System

Satellite Radio Reception Factors

Potential satellite radio reception issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other

material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and

thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and

the audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the

interference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-

ence

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service

Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right

to change, rearrange, add or delete

programming including canceling, moving

or adding particular channels, and its prices,

at any time, with or without notice to you.

Ford Motor Company shall not be

responsible for any such programming

changes.

E142593

SIRIUS satellite radio is a

subscription-based satellite radio service

that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,

news, weather, traffic and entertainment

programming. Your factory-installed

SIRIUS satellite radio system includes

hardware and a limited subscription term,

which begins on the date of sale or lease

of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer

for availability.

For more information on extended

subscription terms (a service fee is

required), the online media player and a

complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio

channels, and other features, please visit

www.siriusxm.com in the United States,

www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at

1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)

You need your ESN to activate, modify or

track your satellite radio account. When in

satellite radio mode, press Options.

306

Audio System

Troubleshooting

Possible actionConditionRadio display

No action required. This

message should disappear

shortly.

Radio requires more than

two seconds to produce

audio for the selected

channel.

Acquiring

If this message does not

clear shortly, or with an igni-

tion key cycle, your receiver

may have a fault. See an

authorized dealer for service.

There is an internal module

or system failure present.

Sat Fault/SIRIUS system

failure

Tune to another channel or

choose another preset.

The channel is no longer

available.

Invalid Channel

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to subscribe to

the channel, or tune to

another channel.

Your subscription does not

include this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. When

you move into an open area,

the signal should return.

The signal is lost from the

SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS

tower to your vehicle

antenna.

No Signal

No action required. The

process may take up to

three minutes.

Update of channel

programming in progress.

Updating

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to resolve

subscription issues.

Your satellite service is no

longer available.

Call SIRIUS 1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide to

turn off the Lock or Skip

function on that station.

All the channels in the

selected category are either

skipped or locked.

None found. Check Channel

Guide.

No action required.SIRIUS has updated the

channels available for your

vehicle.

Subscription Updated

307

Audio System

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

WARNINGS

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any hand-held device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

For safety reasons, do not connect

or adjust the settings on your

portable music player while your

vehicle is moving.

Store the portable music player in a

secure location, such as the center

console or the glove box, when your

vehicle is moving. Hard objects may

become projectiles in a collision or sudden

stop, which may increase the risk of serious

injury. The audio extension cable must be

long enough to allow the portable music

player to be safely stored while your

vehicle is moving.

E149149

The auxiliary input jack allows you to

connect and play music from your portable

music player through your vehicle speakers.

You can use any portable music player

designed for use with headphones. Your

audio extension cable must have male

1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at

each end.

1. Switch off the engine, radio and

portable music player. Set the parking

brake and put the transmission in

position P (vehicle with an automatic

transmission) or neutral (vehicle with

a manual transmission).

2. Plug the extension cable from the

portable music player into the auxiliary

input jack.

3. Switch the radio on. Select either a

tuned FM station or a CD.

4. Adjust the volume as desired.

5. Switch your portable music player on

and adjust its volume to half its

maximum level.

6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN

appears in the display. You should hear

music from your device even if it is low.

7. Adjust the volume on your portable

music player until it reaches the volume

level of the FM station or CD. Do this

by switching back and forth between

the AUX and FM or CD controls.

308

Audio System

USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)

E149148

The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge

devices (if supported). See SYNC® (page

?).

MEDIA HUB (IF EQUIPPED)

The media hub is located in the center

console and has the following features:

E142605

A/V inputsA

SD card slotB

USB portsC

See MyFord Touch™ (page 348).

309

Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION

E142598

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications

system that works with your

Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and

portable media player. This allows you to:

• Make and receive calls.

• Access and play music from your

portable music player.

• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report

and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions

& Information).*

• Use applications, such as Pandora and

Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink.

• Access phonebook contacts and music

using voice commands.

• Stream music from your connected

phone.

• Text message.

• Use the advanced voice recognition

system

• Charge your USB device (if your device

supports this).

*These features require activation.

Make sure that you review your device's

manual before using it with SYNC.

Support

The SYNC support team is available to

help you with any questions you cannot

answer on your own.

Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.

In the United States, call 1-888-270-1055.

In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.

310

SYNC™

Times are subject to change due to

holidays.

SYNC Owner Account

Why do I need a SYNC owner account?

• Required to activate Vehicle Health

Report and to view the reports online.

• Required to activate the

subscription-based SYNC Services and

to personalize your Saved Points and

Favorites.

• Essential for keeping up with the latest

software downloads available for

SYNC.

• Access to customer support for any

questions you may have.

Driving Restrictions

For your safety, certain features are

speed-dependent and restricted when your

vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any hand-held device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

When using SYNC:

• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, split

or damaged. Place cords and cables

out of the way, so they do not interfere

with the operation of pedals, seats,

compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in your

vehicle during extreme conditions as it

could cause them damage. See your

device's manual for further information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the

system. See an authorized dealer.

Privacy Information

When a cellular phone is connected to

SYNC, the system creates a profile within

your vehicle that is linked to that cellular

phone. This profile is created in order to

offer you more cellular features and to

operate more efficiently. Among other

things, this profile may contain data about

your cellular phone book, text messages

(read and unread), and call history,

including history of calls when your cellular

phone was not connected to the system.

In addition, if you connect a media device,

the system creates and retains an index of

supported media content. The system also

records a short development log of

approximately 10 minutes of all recent

system activity. The log profile and other

system data may be used to improve the

system and help diagnose any problems

that may occur.

The cellular profile, media device index,

and development log will remain in the

vehicle unless you delete them and are

generally accessible only in the vehicle

when the cellular phone or media player

is connected. If you no longer plan to use

the system or the vehicle, we recommend

you perform a Master Reset to erase all

stored information.

311

SYNC™

System data cannot be accessed without

special equipment and access to the

vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor

Company and Ford of Canada will not

access the system data for any purpose

other than as described absent consent, a

court order, or where required by law

enforcement, other government

authorities, or other third parties acting

with lawful authority. Other parties may

seek to access the information

independently of Ford Motor Company and

Ford of Canada. For further privacy

information, see the sections on 911 Assist,

Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,

Directions and Information.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

This system helps you control many

features using voice commands. This

allows you to keep your hands on the

wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Push the voice icon. A tone

sounds and Listening appears in

the display. Say any of the

following:

If You Want ToSay

Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"

Cancel the requested action."Cancel"

Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack."Line in"

Access mobile applications.

"Mobile apps" *

Make calls."Phone"

Access the SYNC Services portal.

"Services" *

Return to the main menu."SYNC"

Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"

Run a vehicle health report.

"Vehicle health report" *

Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"

Hear a list of voice commands available in the current

mode.

"Help"

* This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.

312

SYNC™

System Interaction and Feedback

The system provides feedback through

audible tones, prompts, questions and

spoken confirmations depending on the

situation and the chosen level of

interaction (voice settings). You can

customize the voice recognition system to

provide more or less instruction and

feedback.

The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use

the system. You can change these settings

at any time.

Adjusting the Interaction Level

E142599

Push the voice icon. Say "Voice

settings" when prompted, then

any of the following:

The system:When you say:

Provides more detailed interaction and

guidance.

"Interaction mode standard"

Provides less audible interaction and more

tone prompts.

"Interaction mode advanced"

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.

Confirmation prompts are short questions

the system asks when it is not sure of your

request or when there are multiple possible

responses to your request. For example,

the system may ask "Phone, is that

correct?". If turned off, the system simply

makes a best guess as to what you

requested and may ask you to confirm

settings.

The system:When you say:

Makes a best guess from the command;

you may still occasionally be asked to

confirm settings.

"Confirmation prompts off"

Clarifies your voice command with a short

question.

"Confirmation prompts on"

The system creates candidate lists when

it has the same confidence level of several

options based on your voice command.

When turned on, it may prompt you with

as many as four possibilities for

clarification.

For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to

call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone

to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after

the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You

could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play

John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play

Johnny Doe."

313

SYNC™

The system:When you say:

Makes a best guess from the media

candidate list. You may still occasionally

be asked questions.

"Media candidate lists off"

Clarifies your voice command for media

candidates.

"Media candidate lists on"

Makes a best guess from the phone

candidate list. You may still occasionally

be asked questions.

"Phone candidate lists off"

Clarifies your voice command for phone

candidates

"Phone candidate lists on"

Helpful Hints

• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise from

open windows and road vibrations may

prevent the system from correctly

recognizing spoken commands.

• After pressing the voice icon, wait until

after the tone sounds and Listening

appears before saying a command. Any

command spoken before this does not

• Speak naturally, without long pauses

between words.

• At any time, you can interrupt the

system while it is speaking by pressing

the voice icon.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR

PHONE

Hands-free calling is one of the main

features of SYNC. While the system

supports a variety of features, many are

dependent on your cellular phone's

functionality. At a minimum, most cellular

phones with Bluetooth wireless technology

support the following functions:

• Answering an incoming call.

• Ending a call.

• Using privacy mode.

• Dialing a number.

• Redialing.

• Call waiting notification.

• Caller ID.

Other features, such as text messaging

using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook

download, are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone's compatibility, see

your phone's manual and visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

314

SYNC™

Pairing a Phone for the First Time

Note: SYNC can support downloading up

to approximately 2000 entries per

Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.

Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition

and the radio. Put the transmission in

position P (automatic transmission) or

neutral with the parking brake applied

(manual transmission).

Note: To scroll through the menus, press

the up and down arrows on your audio

system.

Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC

allows you to make and receive hands-free

calls.

1. Press the phone button. When the

display indicates there is no phone

paired, press OK.

2. When Find SYNC appears in the

display, press OK.

3. Put your phone into Bluetooth

discovery mode. See your device's

manual if necessary.

4. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC in the radio display. The

display indicates when the pairing is

successful.

Depending on your phone's capability and

your market, the system may prompt you

with questions, such as setting the current

phone as the primary phone (the phone

SYNC automatically tries to connect with

first upon vehicle start-up) and

downloading your phonebook.

Pairing Subsequent Phones

Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition

and the radio. Put the transmission in

position P (automatic transmission) or

neutral with the parking brake applied

(manual transmission).

Note: To scroll through the menus, press

the up and down arrows on your audio

system.

1. Press the phone button, and then scroll

to System Settings. Press OK.

2. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Press OK.

3. Scroll to Add Bluetooth Device. Press

OK.

4. When Find SYNC appears in the

display, press OK.

5. Put your phone into Bluetooth

discovery mode. See your phone's

manual if necessary.

6. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC in the radio display. The

display indicates when the pairing is

successful.

The system then prompts with questions,

such as if you would like to set the current

phone as the primary phone (the phone

SYNC automatically tries to connect with

first upon vehicle start-up) or download

your phone book.

Phone Voice Commands

Press the voice icon and say "Phone". Say

any of the following:

"PHONE"

"Go to privacy"

"Call <name>"1,2

"Hold"

"Call <name> at home"1,2

"Join"

"Call <name> at work"1,2

315

SYNC™

"PHONE"

"Menu"2,4

"Call <name> in office"1,2

"Phone book <name>"2

"Call <name> on mobile OR cell"1,2

"Phone book <name> at home"2

"Call <name> on other"1,2

"Phone book <name> at office"2

"Call history incoming"2

"Phone book <name> at work"2

"Call history missed"2

"Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell"2

"Call history outgoing"2

"Phone book <name> on other"2

"Connections"2

"Dial"1,3

1 These commands do not require you to say "Phone" first.

2 These commands are not available until phone information is completely downloaded

using Bluetooth.

3 See Dial table below.

4 See Menu table below.

Phone book commands: When you ask

SYNC to access things such as a

phonebook name or number, the

requested information appears in the

display to view. Press the phone button

and say, "Call" to call the contact.

"DIAL"

"411 (four-one-one)", "911" (nine-one-one)

"700" (seven hundred)

"800" (eight hundred)

"900" (nine hundred)

"Pound" (#)

"Number <0-9>"

"Asterisk" (*)

316

SYNC™

"DIAL"

"Clear" (deletes all entered digits)

"Delete" (deletes one digit)

"Plus"

"Star"

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the

phone button or press MENU to go to the

phone menu.

"MENU"

"(Phone) connections"

"(Phone) settings (message) notification off"

"(Phone) settings (message) notification on"

"(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3"

"(Phone) settings (set) ringer off"

"Battery"

"Phone name"

"Signal"

"Text message inbox"

Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the

command.

Making Calls

Press the voice icon and when prompted

say:

1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the

desired number.

2. When the system confirms the number,

say, "Dial" again to initiate the call.

To erase the last spoken digit, say, "Delete"

or press the left arrow button. To erase all

spoken digits, say "Clear" or press and hold

the left arrow button.

To end the call, press and hold the phone

button.

317

SYNC™

Receiving Calls

When receiving a call, you can:

• Answer the call by pressing the phone

button.

• Reject the call by pressing and holding

the phone button.

• Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an Active

Call

During an active call, you have more menu

features that become available, such as

putting a call on hold or joining calls. Use

the arrow buttons to scroll through the

menu options.

1. Press MENU during an active call.

2. After selecting Active Call Menu, press

OK.

3. Scroll to cycle through the following

options:

You can:When you select:

Mute the call.Mute Call?

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to

your cellular phone for a more private conversation.

Privacy

Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The display

indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call.)

Put an active call on hold.Call Hold

Press OK when Hold on/off appears. To answer another

call at this time, press the phone button.

Enter "tones", such as numbers for passwords.Enter Tones

Scroll until the desired number appears in the display, then

press OK; a tone sounds as confirmation. Repeat as

necessary.

Join two separate calls. (SYNC supports a maximum of

three callers on a multiparty call or conference call.)

Join Calls

1. Press the phone button.

2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice

commands to place the second call. Once actively in the

second call, press MENU.

3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press OK. Press OK again when

Join Calls? appears.

Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook

1. Press OK to select, and then scroll through your phone-

book contacts.

2. Press OK again when the desired selection appears in

the display.

318

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

3. Press the phone button.

Access your call history log.Call History

1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your call history

options (incoming, outgoing or missed).

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display.

3. Press the phone button to call the selection.

Exit the current menu.Return

Accessing Features through the

Phone Menu

SYNC's phone menu allows you to redial

a number, access your call history and

phonebook and sends text messages as

well as access phone and system settings.

You can also access advanced features,

such as 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report

and SYNC Services.

1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through:

You can:When you select:

Redial the last number called (if available). Press OK to

select, and then press OK again to confirm.

Phone Redial

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after

you connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC.

Call History1

1. Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming, Call History

Outgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK to make your

selection.

3. Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec-

tion.

Note: The system attempts to automatically re-download

your phonebook and call history each time your phone

connects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and

your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports this

feature).

Access and call any contacts in your previously down-

loaded phonebook.

Phonebook1,2

319

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your phonebook has

fewer than 255 listings, they appear alphabetically in flat

file mode. If there are more than 255 entries, the system

organizes them into alphabetical categories.

2. Scroll until the desired contact appears, then press OK.

3. Press OK or the phone button.

Send, download and delete text messages.

Text Message1

View your phone's status, set ring tones, select your

message notification, change phone book entries and

automatically download your cellular phone among other

features.

Phone Settings 1

Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request

various types of information, traffic reports and directions.

SYNC Services3

Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an

accident, when used properly.

911 Assist4

Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.

Vehicle Health Report3

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your

smartphone.

Mobile Apps3

Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (Add, Connect,

Set as Primary, On and Off, Delete) as well as Advanced

menu listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset,

install application and system information).

System Settings

Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.Exit Phone Menu

1 This is a phone-dependent feature.

2 This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.

3 This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.

4 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.

Text Messaging

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

SYNC allows you to receive, send,

download and delete text messages. The

system can also read incoming text

messages to you so that you do not have

to take your eyes off the road.

Receiving a Text Message

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

Your phone must support downloading text

messages using Bluetooth to receive

incoming text messages.

320

SYNC™

When a new message arrives, an audible

tone sounds and the display indicates you

have a new message. You have these

options:

• Press the voice button, wait for the

prompt and say "Read message" to

have SYNC read the message to you.

• Press OK to receive and open the text

message or do nothing and the

message goes into your text message

inbox. Press OK again and SYNC reads

your message aloud as you are not able

to view the message. You can then also

choose to reply or forward the

message.

• Press OK and scroll to choose

between:

•Reply to Text Message: Press OK

to access and then scroll through

the list of pre-defined messages to

send.

•Forward Text Message: Press OK

to forward the message to anyone

in your Phonebook or Call History.

You can also choose Enter Number.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting

Your Text Messages

Note: Forwarding a text message is a

speed-dependent feature and is only

available done when your vehicle is traveling

at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.

Note: You can only have one recipient per

text message.

Text messaging is a phone-dependent

feature. If your phone is compatible, SYNC

allows you to receive, send, download and

delete text messages.

1. Press the phone button.

2. Scroll to Text Message, and then press

OK.

Scroll to select from the following options:

•Send Text Message? allows you to

send a new text message based on a

pre-defined set of 15 messages.

•Download Unread Msgs allows you

to download your unread messages

(only) to SYNC. To download the

messages, press OK to select. The

display indicates that it is downloading

your messages. When it is complete,

SYNC takes you to your inbox.

•Delete All Messages? allows you to

delete current text messages from

SYNC (not your phone). To delete the

messages, press OK to select. The

display indicates when it is finished

deleting all your text messages. SYNC

returns you to the text message menu.

•Return exits the current menu when

you press OK.

If you select Send Text Message?:

1. Press OK to select. If the system

detects your phone does not support

this feature, Unsupported appears in

the display and SYNC returns to the

main menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through the message

options in the following chart.

3. Press OK when the desired selection

is in the display.

4. Enter the name of the recipient. Scroll

to cycle through Phonebook or Call

History entries. You can also select

Enter Number to say the desired

number.

5. Press OK to enter the desired menu

and scroll to select the specific

contact.

321

SYNC™

6. Press OK when the contact appears

and press OK again to confirm when

the system asks if you would like to

send the message. The system sends

each text message with the following

signature: "This message was sent

from my <Ford or Lincoln>".

Pre-defined text message options

Can't talk right now

Call me

Call U later

Be there in 10 minutes

Be there in 20 minutes

Yes

Why?

Thanks

Where R you?

I need more directions

I love you

Too funny

Can't wait to see you

I'm stuck in traffic

Accessing Your Phone Settings

These are phone-dependent features. Your

phone settings allow you to access and

adjust features such as your ring tone, text

message notification, modify your

phonebook and set up automatic

download.

1. Press the phone button.

2. Scroll to Phone Settings, and then

press OK.

3. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You can:When you select:

See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and

roaming status of your connected phone.

Phone Status

322

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Press OK to select and scroll to view the information.

When done, press OK again to return to the phone status

menu.

Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call (one

of the system's or your phone's).

Set Ringer

1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1, Ringer 2,

Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer.

2. Press OK to select.

If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ring

tone plays when you choose Phone Ringer.

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you

when a text message arrives.

Message Notification

1. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Notific-

ation On and Message Notification Off.

2. Press OK to select.

Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,

delete or download). Press OK to choose between:

Modify Phonebook

Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts from your

phone book. Push the desired contact(s) on your phone.

See your phone's manual on how to push contacts.

Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the current phone

book and call history. When Delete Phonebook appears,

press OK to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone

Settings menu.

Download Phonebook: Press OK to select, then and press

OK again when Confirm Download? appears.

Automatically download your phone book each time your

phone connects to SYNC.*

Auto Download

Press OK to select. When Auto Download On? appears,

press OK to have your phonebook automatically down-

loaded each time.**

323

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Select Off if you do not want to download your phonebook

every time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,

call history and text messages can only be accessed when

your specific phone is connected to SYNC.

Exit the current menu.Return

*Downloading times are phone-dependent and quantity-dependent.

**When Auto Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions

saved since your last download.

System Settings

This menu provides access to your

Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu

features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll

through the menu options.

Bluetooth Devices

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you

to add, connect and delete devices, set a

phone as primary as well as turn your

Bluetooth feature on and off.

1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu

2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.

3. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Press OK.

4. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You can:If you select:

See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 314).

Add Bluetooth Device*

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.**

Connect Bluetooth Device

1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired

phones.

2. Scroll until you find the desired device, and then press

OK to connect the phone.

Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.Set as Primary Phone

Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.

Press OK to confirm.

SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every

ignition cycle. When you select a phone as a primary phone,

it appears first in the list and the system marks it with an

asterisk.

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.Set Bluetooth

324

SYNC™

You can:If you select:

Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. Make

a selection, and then press OK.

Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices

and turns off all Bluetooth features.

Delete a paired phone.Delete Device

Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to

confirm.

Delete all previously paired phones (and all information

originally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices

Press OK to select.

Exit the current menu.Return

* This is a speed-dependent feature.

**You can only connect one device at a time. When another phone is connected, the

previous one is disconnected.

Advanced

The Advanced menu allows you to access

and set prompts, languages, defaults,

perform a master reset, install an

application and view system information.

1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu

2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.

3. Scroll to Advanced. Press OK.

4. Scroll to select from the following

options:

You can:If you select:

Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or

asking you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on

or off:

Prompts

1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between On and

Off.

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Choose between English, Français and Español. Once

selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the

selected language.

Languages

1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.

325

SYNC™

You can:If you select:

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display. If you change the language setting, the display

indicates that the system is updating. When complete,

SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does

not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call

history, text messages and paired devices).

Factory Defaults

1. Press OK to select and then press OK again when

Restore Defaults? appears in the display.

2. Press OK to confirm.

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC

(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired

devices) and return to the factory default settings.

Master Reset

Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete

and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Install applications you have downloaded.Install Application?

Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to confirm.

Delete all previously paired phones (and all information

originally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices

Press OK to select.

Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN

number.

System Info

Press OK to select.

This is a Bluetooth component, which can further help

your phone with the exchange of text messages.

MAP Profile

Exit the current menu.Return

326

SYNC™

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND

SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)

In order for the following features to work,

your cellular phone must be compatible

with SYNC. To check your phone's

compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

• SYNC Services*: Provides access to

traffic, directions and information such

as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and

more.

• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of

an emergency.

• Vehicle Health Report*: Provides a

diagnostic and maintenance report

card of your vehicle.

*This is an optional feature and available

in the United States only.

911 Assist

WARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on

before a crash, the system will not

dial for help which could delay

response time, potentially increasing the

risk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an

emergency call if you can do it

yourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed response

time which could increase the risk of

serious injury or death after a crash. If you

do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds

of the crash, the system or phone may be

damaged or non-functional.

WARNINGS

Always place your phone in a secure

location in your vehicle so it does not

become a projectile or get damaged

in a crash. Failure to do so may cause

serious injury to someone or damage the

phone which could prevent 911 Assist from

working properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be

set on before the incident.

Note: Before setting this feature on, make

sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy

Notice later in this section for important

information.

Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,

that setting applies for all paired phones. If

911 Assist is turned off, either a voice

message plays or a display message (or

icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle

is started after a previously paired phone

connects.

Note: Every phone operates differently.

While SYNC 911 Assist works with most

cellular phones, some may have trouble

using this feature.

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding

knee airbags and rear inflatable safety

belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel

pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped

vehicle may be able to contact emergency

services by dialing 911 through a paired and

connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You

can learn more about the 911 Assist

feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Important information about airbag

deployment is in this chapter.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 218).

Important information about the fuel pump

shut-off is in this chapter.

327

SYNC™

Setting 911 Assist On

1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu.

2. Scroll to select 911 Assist.

3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911

Assist menu.

4. Scroll to select between On and Off.

5. Press OK when the desired option

appears in the radio display. Set On or

Set Off appears in the display as

confirmation.

Off selections include:

• Off with reminder: Provides a display

and voice reminder at phone

connection at vehicle start.

• Off without reminder: Provides a

display reminder only without a voice

reminder at phone connection.

To make sure that 911 Assist works

properly:

• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident and

throughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set on

before the incident.

• You must pair and connect a

Bluetooth-enabled and compatible

cell phone to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have the ability to make and

maintain an outgoing call at the time

of the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,

battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery power

and be located in the U.S., Canada or

in a territory in which 911 is the

emergency number.

In the Event of a Crash

Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or

activate the fuel pump shut-off (the

triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell

phone sustains damage or loses its

connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC

will search for and try to connect to a

previously paired cell phone; SYNC will

then attempt to call the emergency

services.

Before making the call:

• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.

If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC

attempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similar

message: "SYNC will attempt to call

911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on

your screen or press and hold the

phone button on your steering wheel."

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC

makes a successful call, a pre-recorded

message plays for the 911 operator, and

then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able

to talk with the operator. Be prepared to

provide your name, phone number and

location immediately, because not all 911

systems are capable of receiving this

information electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If

• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.

• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.

• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected to

the system.

328

SYNC™

911 Assist Privacy Notice

When you turn on 911 Assist, it may

disclose to emergency services that your

vehicle has been in a crash involving the

deployment of an airbag or activation of

the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or

updates to 911 Assist may also be capable

of electronically or verbally disclosing to

911 operators your vehicle location or other

details about your vehicle or crash to assist

911 operators to provide the most

appropriate emergency services. If you do

not want to disclose this information, do

not turn the feature on.

Vehicle Health Report

WARNING

Always follow scheduled

maintenance instructions, regularly

inspect your vehicle, and seek repair

for any damage or problem you suspect.

Vehicle Health Report supplements, but

cannot replace, normal maintenance and

vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report

only monitors certain systems

electronically monitored by your vehicle

and will not monitor or report the status

of any other system, (such as brake lining

wear). Failure to perform scheduled

maintenance and regularly inspect your

vehicle may result in vehicle damage and

serious injury.

Note: This feature is only available in the

United States.

Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature

requires activation before use. Visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There

is no fee or subscription associated with

Vehicle Health Report, but you must register

to use this feature.

Note: This feature may not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your cellular phone. Before

running a report, review the Vehicle Health

Report Privacy Notice.

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for

your vehicle, you may not be able to create

a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle

odometer has reached 200 miles.

Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may

apply when making a report.

your report preferences at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,

you can request a Vehicle Health Report

(inside your vehicle). Return to your

account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view

your report. You can also choose for SYNC

to remind you automatically to run reports

at specific mileage intervals.

The system allows you to check your

vehicle's overall health in the form of a

diagnostic report card. The vehicle health

report contains valuable information such

as:

• Vehicle diagnostic information

• Scheduled maintenance

• Open recalls and Field Service Actions

• Items noted during vehicle inspections

by an authorized dealer that still need

servicing.

You can run a report (after your vehicle has

been running a minimum of 60 seconds)

by pressing the voice button and saying

"Vehicle health report", or pressing the

phone button.

To run a report using the phone button:

1. Press the phone button to enter phone

menu.

2. Scroll to select Vehicle Health, and

then press OK.

3. Scroll to select from the following

options:

329

SYNC™

Vehicle health report options

Automatic Reports: Press OK to and select On or Off.

Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run

a health report at certain mileage intervals.*

User Preferences: Press OK

to select and enter the

menu. Scroll to select from:

Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select between

5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals and press OK to make

your selection.

Return: Press OK to exit the menu.

Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle's

diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it

combines with scheduled maintenance information, open

recalls and other field service actions and vehicle inspec-

tion items that still need servicing from an authorized

dealer.

Run Report?

*You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice

When you create a Vehicle Health Report,

Ford Motor Company may collect your

cellular phone number (to process your

report request) and diagnostic information

about your vehicle. Certain versions or

updates to Vehicle Health Report may also

collect more vehicle information. Ford may

use your vehicle information it collects for

any purpose. If you do not want to disclose

your cellular phone number or vehicle

information, do not run the feature or set

up your Vehicle Health Report profile at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. See

www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health

Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy

Statement) for more information.

SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions

& Information (TDI)

Note: SYNC Services requires activation

before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to

complimentary services. Standard phone

and message rates may apply. Subscription

may be required. You must also have the

active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled

cellular phone paired and connected to the

system in order to connect to, and use,

SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With

Your Phone (page 314).

Note: This feature does not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure

your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID

before using SYNC Services.

330

SYNC™

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible

for the safe operation of the vehicle, and

therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe

to follow the suggested directions. Any

navigation features provided are only an aid.

Make your driving decisions based on your

observations of local conditions and existing

traffic regulations. Do not follow the route

suggestions if doing so would result in an

unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an

unsafe situation, or if you would be directed

into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps

used by this system may be inaccurate

because of errors, changes in roads, traffic

conditions or driving conditions.

Note: When you connect, the service uses

GPS technology and advanced vehicle

sensors to collect your vehicle's current

location, travel direction and speed to help

provide you with the directions, traffic

reports, or business searches you request.

Further, to provide the services you request,

for continuous improvement, the service

may collect and record call details and voice

communications. For more information, see

SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want

Ford or its service providers to collect your

vehicle travel information or other

information identified in the Terms and

Conditions, do not subscribe or use the

service.

SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle

sensors, integrated GPS technology and

comprehensive map and traffic data, to

give you personalized traffic reports,

precise turn-by-turn directions, business

search, news, sports, weather and more.

For a complete list of services, or to learn

more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

Voice Commands

1. Press the voice button.

2. When prompted, say "Services". This

initiates an outgoing call to SYNC

Services using your paired and

connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular

phone.

3. Once you connect to the service, follow

the voice prompts to request the

desired service, such as Traffic or

Directions. You can also say, "What are

my choices?" to receive a list of

available services from which to

choose.

4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services

main menu or for help, say, "Help".

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

the Phone Menu

1. Press the phone button to enter the

phone menu.

2. Scroll to Services.

3. Press OK to confirm and enter the

Services menu. The display indicates

the system is connecting.

4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the

Services portal.

5. Once you connect to the service, follow

the voice prompts to request the

desired service, such as Traffic or

Directions. You can also say, "What are

my choices?" to receive a list of

available services from which to

choose.

6. Say, "Services" to return to the Services

main menu or for help, say, "Help".

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions

1. When connected to SYNC Services,

say "Directions" or "Business search".

To find the closest business or type of

business to your current location, just

say "Business search" and then

"Search near me". If you need further

assistance in finding a location you can

say "Operator" at any time within a

331

SYNC™

Directions or Business search to speak

with a live operator. The system may

prompt you to speak with an operator

when it has difficulty matching your

voice request. The live operator can

assist you by searching for businesses

by name or by category, residential

addresses by street address or by

name or specific street intersections.

Operator Assist is a feature of your

SYNC Services subscription. For more

information on Operator Assist, visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Follow the voice prompts to select your

destination. Once you select your

destination, the system uploads your

current vehicle location, calculates a

route based on current traffic

conditions and sends it back to your

vehicle. After the route download is

complete, the phone call automatically

ends. You then receive audible and

visual driving instructions as you travel

toward your destination.

3. While on an active route, you can select

or say "Route summary" or "Route

status" to view the Route Summary

turn list or the Route Status ETA. You

can also turn voice guidance on or off,

cancel the route or update the route.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks

if you want the route updated. Just say,

"Yes" when prompted and the system

sends a new route to your vehicle.

Disconnecting from SYNC Services

1. Press and hold the phone button on

the steering wheel.

2. Say "Goodbye" from the SYNC

Services main menu.

SYNC Services quick tips

You can personalize your Services feature to provide

quicker access to your most used or favorite information.

You can save address points such as work or home. You

can also save favorite information like sports teams or a

news category. You can learn more about personalization

by logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Personalizing

Press the voice button at any time (while connected to

SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio

clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.

Push to interrupt

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-

enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle

Identification Number). You can pair and connect your

phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and

Information and continue enjoying your personalized

services.

Portable

332

SYNC™

SYNC Services quick tips

You can even access your account outside your vehicle.

Just use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic

and Directions features do not function properly but

information services and the 411 connect and text message

features are available.

SYNC AppLink

Note: This feature is only available in the

United States.

Note: You must pair and connect your

smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.

Note: iPhone users need to connect the

phone to the USB port in order to start the

application. We recommend you lock your

iPhone after starting an application.

Note: The AppLink feature is not available

if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord

Touch or MyLincoln Touch system.

Note: Depending on your display type, you

can access AppLink from the media menu,

the phone menu, or by using voice

commands. Once an app is running through

AppLink, you can control main features of

the app through voice commands and

steering wheel controls.

To Access Using the Phone Menu

1. Press the phone button to access the

SYNC phone menu on-screen.

2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to

access a list of available applications.

3. Scroll through the list of available

applications and press OK to select a

particular app.

4. Once an app is running through SYNC,

you can access an app’s menu by

pressing the MENU button to first

access the SYNC menu.

5. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.

6. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is

displayed (such as, Pandora Menu),

then press OK. From here, you can

access an application's features, such

as Thumbs up and Thumbs down. For

more information, please visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com.

To Access Using the Media Menu

1. Press the AUX button on the center

console.

2. Press MENU to access the SYNC

menu.

3. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.

4. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to

access a list of available applications.

5. Scroll through the list of available

applications and press OK to select a

particular app.

6. Once an app is running through SYNC,

you can access an app’s menu by

pressing the MENU button to first

access the SYNC menu.

7. Select "SYNC-Media" by pressing OK.

8. Scroll until "<App name> Menu" is

displayed (such as, Pandora Menu),

then press OK. From here, you can

access an application's features, such

as Thumbs up and Thumbs down. For

more information, please visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com.

To Access Using Voice Commands

1. Press the voice icon.

2. When prompted, say "Mobile Apps".

333

SYNC™

3. Say the name of the application after

the tone.

4. The app should start. While an app is

running through SYNC, you can press

the voice button and speak commands

specific to the app, such as "Play

Station Quickmix". Say "Help" to

discover available voice commands.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR

MEDIA PLAYER

You can access and play music from your

digital music player over your vehicle's

speaker system using the system's media

menu or voice commands. You can also

sort and play your music by specific

categories, such as artist and album.

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any

digital media player including: iPod®,

Zune™, Plays from device players, and

most USB drives. SYNC also supports

audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV

and ACC.

Connecting Your Digital Media

Player to the USB Port

Note: If your digital media player has a

power switch, make sure you switch it on

before plugging it in.

To Connect Using Voice Commands

1. Plug the device into the USB port.

2. Press the voice icon and when

prompted, say "USB".

3. You can now play music by saying any

of the appropriate voice commands.

See the media voice commands.

To Connect Using the System Menu

1. Plug the device into the USB port.

2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.

3. Scroll to Select Source. Press OK.

4. Scroll to USB. Press OK.

5. Depending on how many digital media

files are on your connected device,

Indexing may appear in the radio

display. When indexing is complete, the

screen returns to the Play menu.

Press OK and scroll through selections of:

• Play All

• Albums

• Genres

• Playlists

• Tracks

•Explore USB

• Similar Music

• Return

What's Playing?

At any time when a track is playing, you

can press the voice icon and ask the

system "What's playing?". The system

reads the metadata tags (if populated) of

the playing track to you.

Media Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice icon. When

prompted, say "USB", then any

of the following:

"USB"

"Autoplay off"

"Autoplay on"

"Connections"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play album <name>"1,2

"Play all"

334

SYNC™

"USB"

"Play artist <name>"1,2

"Play genre <name>"1,2

"Play next folder"3

"Play next track"

"Play playlist <name>"1,2

"Play previous folder"3

"Play previous track"

"Play song <name>"1

"Play track <name>"1,2

"Refine album <name>"1,2

"Refine artist <name>"1,2

"Refine song <name>"1

"Refine track <name>"1,2

"Repeat off"

"USB"

"Repeat on"

"Search album <name>"1,2

"Search artist <name>"1,2

"Search genre <name>"1

"Search song <name>"1

"Search track <name>"1,2

"Shuffle off"

"Shuffle on"

"Similar music"

"What's playing?"

1 <name> is a dynamic listing, meaning that

it could be the name of anything, such as

a group, artist or song.

2 This voice command is not available until

indexing is complete.

3 This voice command is only available in

folder mode.

Voice command guide

Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during

indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process

to finish before the system plays any of your music.*

"Autoplay"

The system searches all the data from your indexed music

and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.

You can only play genres of music that are present in the

GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital media

player.

"Search genre" or "Play

genre"

The system compiles a playlist and then plays music

similar to what is currently playing from the USB port using

indexed metadata information.

"Similar music"

335

SYNC™

Voice command guide

The system searches for specific artist, track or album

information from the music indexed through the USB port.

"Search" or "Play" artist,

track or album

This allows you to make your previous command more

specific. For example, if you asked to search and play all

music by a certain artist, you could then say, "Refine

album" and choose a specific album from the list to view.

If you then select Play, the system only plays music from

that specific album.

"Refine"

*Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs

the system needs to process.

Press the voice icon. When prompted, say,

"Bluetooth audio", then any of the

following:

"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"

"Connections"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play next track"

"Play previous track"

Media Menu Features

The media menu allows you to select your

media source, how to play your music

(such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat),

and also to add, connect or delete devices.

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.

2. Scroll to cycle through:

You can:When you select:

Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlist, track,

similar music or play all music. You can also choose to

Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on

your playing device.

Play Menu

Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary input

jack (line in) or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled

phone.

Select Source

SYNC USB: Press OK to access music plugged into your

USB port. You can also plug in devices to charge them (if

supported by your device). Once connected, the system

indexes any readable media files.1

336

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent feature that

allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth-

enabled phone. If supported by your device, you can press

SEEK to play the previous or next track.

SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play music from your

portable music player over your vehicle's speakers.2

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your

Autoplay settings. Once you turn these selections on, they

remain on you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the

previous or next track.3

Media Settings

Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media files in the

current playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must select

Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle.

Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.

Autoplay: Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed

during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing

process to finish before the system plays any of your

music.4

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your

smartphone.

Mobile Apps

337

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (Add, Connect, Set

as Primary, On and Off, Delete) as well as Advanced menu

listings (prompts, languages, defaults, master reset, install

application and system information).

System Settings

Press OK to exit the media menu.Exit Media Menu

1The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs

to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay

is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable

of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum

indexing file size.

2If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in

feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data

and music separately.

3Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music

separately

4Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs

the system needs to process.

Accessing Your Play Menu

This menu allows you to select and play

your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,

track, similar music or even to explore what

is on your USB device.

Note: If your digital media player has a

power switch, make sure you switch it on

before plugging it in.

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.

2. Scroll to Play. Press OK.

If there are no media files to access, the

display indicates there is no media. If there

are media files, you have the following

options:

You can:When you select:

Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device

in flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.

Play All

Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the

display.

Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system

lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. If

there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists

them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more

than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.

Artists

338

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

1. Press OK to select. You can select to play All Artists or

any indexed artist.

2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press OK.

Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than

255 indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically

in flat file mode. If there are more than 255, the system

categorizes them alphabetically.

Albums

1. Press OK to enter the album menu and select from

playing all albums or from any individual indexed album.

2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press OK.

Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists

the genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more

than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.

Genres

1. Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press OK.

Access your playlists (from formats, such as .ASX, .M3U,

.WPL or .MTP). The system lists your playlists alphabetic-

ally in flat-file mode. If there are more than 255, the system

categorizes them alphabetically.

Playlists

1. Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press OK.

Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists

your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are

more than 255, the system categorizes them alphabetic-

ally.

Tracks

1. Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press OK.

Explore all supported digital media on your media device

connected to the USB port. You can only view media

content which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved

are not visible.

Explore USB

1. Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.

Play music similar to what is currently playing from the

USB port. The system uses the metadata information of

each song to compile a playlist for you.

Similar Music*

339

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Press OK to select. The system creates a new list of similar

songs and begins playing. This feature does not include

tracks with incomplete metadata information.

Exit the current menu.Return

*With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not

available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these

tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice

recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items

into any unpopulated metadata tag.

System Settings

Bluetooth Devices

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you

to add, connect and delete a device as turn

the Bluetooth feature on and off.

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.

2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.

3. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Press OK.

You can:When you select:

Pair more devices to the system.

Add Bluetooth Device*

1. Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC

appears in the display.

2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your

phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the

display.

3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter

the PIN.

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled device.Connect Bluetooth Device

1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired

devices.

2. Scroll until you find the desired device, and then press

OK to connect the device.

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.**

Set Bluetooth

1. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off.

2. Make a selection, and then press OK.

Delete a paired media device.Delete Device

1. Press OK and scroll to select the device.

2. Press OK to confirm.

Delete all previously paired devices.Delete All Devices

340

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Press OK to select.

Exit the current menu.Return

*This is a speed-dependent feature.

**Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth

features.

Advanced

The Advanced menu allows you to access

and set prompts, languages, defaults and

perform a master reset.

1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter

the media menu.

2. Scroll to System Settings. Press OK.

3. Scroll to Advanced. Press OK.

You can:When you select:

Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints

or ask you for a specific action.

Prompts

1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or

off.

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu.

Choose from English, Français or Español. The displays

and prompts are in the selected language.

Languages

1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.

2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the

display.

3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates

that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes

you back to the Advanced menu.

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does

not erase your indexed information (phonebook, call

history, text messages and paired devices).

Factory Defaults

1. Press OK to select.

2. Press OK again when Restore Defaults? appears in

the display.

3. Press OK to confirm.

341

SYNC™

You can:When you select:

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (all

phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired

devices) and return to the factory default settings.

Master Reset

Download new software applications (if available) and

then load the desired applications through your USB port.

See the web site for more information.

Application

Exit the current menu.Return

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING

Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,

should questions arise, see the tables

below.

Use the website at any time to check your

phone's compatibility, register your

account and set preferences as well as

access a customer representative via an

online chat (during certain hours). Visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca for more

information.

Phone issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

Review your phone's manual

about audio adjustments.

The audio control settings

on your phone may be

affecting SYNC perform-

ance.

There is excessive back-

ground noise during a phone

call.

Try turning off the device,

resetting the device,

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

This may be a possible

phone malfunction.

During a call, I can hear the

other person but they

cannot hear me.

· Go to the website to review

your phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

SYNC is not able to down-

load my phonebook.

· Try turning off the device,

resetting the device or

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

· This may be a possible

phone malfunction.

· Try pushing your phone-

book contacts to SYNC by

using the Add Contacts

feature.

· Use the SYNCmyphone

feature available on the

website.

342

SYNC™

Phone issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

· Try pushing your phone-

book contacts to SYNC by

using the Add Contacts

feature.

This may be a limitation on

your phone's capability.

The system says Phonebook

Downloaded but the

phonebook in SYNC is

empty or missing contacts.

· If the missing contacts are

stored on your SIM card, try

moving them to the device

memory.

· Remove any pictures or

special ring tones associ-

ated with the missing

contact.

· Go to the website to review

your phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

I am having trouble

connecting my phone to

SYNC. · Try turning off the device,

resetting the device or

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

· This may be a possible

phone malfunction.

· Try deleting your device

from SYNC, deleting SYNC

from your device and trying

again.

· Check the security and auto

accept and prompt always

settings relative to the SYNC

Bluetooth connection on

your phone.

· Update your device's firm-

ware.

· Turn off the Auto phone-

book download setting.

· Go to the website to review

your phone's compatibility.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

Text messaging is not

working on SYNC.

· Try turning off the device,

resetting the device or

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

· This may be a possible

phone malfunction.

343

SYNC™

USB and media issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

· Try turning off the device,

resetting the device,

removing the device's

battery, then trying again.

This may be a possible

device malfunction.

I am having trouble

connecting my device.

· Make sure you are using the

manufacturer's cable.

· Make sure you insert the

USB cable properly into the

device and the USB port.

· Make sure that the device

does not have an auto-

install program or active

security settings.

Make sure you are not

leaving the device in your

vehicle during very hot or

cold temperatures.

This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize

my device when I turn on the

car.

Make sure you properly

connect the device to SYNC

and that you have pressed

play on your device.

· This is a phone-dependent

feature.

· The device is not

connected.

Bluetooth audio does not

stream.

· Make sure that all song

details are populated.

· Your music files may not

contain the proper artist,

song title, album or genre

information.

SYNC does not recognize

music that is on my device.

· Some devices require you

to change the USB settings

from mass storage to MTP

class.

· The file may be corrupted.

· The song may have copy-

right protection, which does

not allow it to play.

Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

· This is a free feature, but

you must first register online

to use it.

· You did not activate your

account on the website.

· You may have the wrong

VIN (vehicle identification

number) listed.

I received a text that I did

not activate Vehicle Health

Report.

344

SYNC™

Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

· Make sure that your VIN is

correctly listed in your

account.

When you register your

account, you must choose a

preferred dealer. If it already

lists a dealer, try selecting

another dealer and logging

out. Log back in, change it

back to your preferred

dealer, and retrieve the

report.

The preferred dealer

information did not load

correctly.

I am unable to retrieve the

report on the website, or I

receive a system error.

· Update your cellular

number in your account on

the website.

· This could be due to your

phone's compatibility.

· Bad signal strength.

I am unable to submit a

report.

· Make sure you have full

signal strength and that your

Bluetooth volume level has

been turned up.

· You did not activate your

phone on the website.

· Try deleting your phone

and performing a clean

pairing.

· This is a free feature, but

you must first register online

to use it.

· You did not activate this

phone for this service.

· Your phone has ID blocker

active.

I heard a commercial when

I tried to use Traffic, Direc-

tions and Information.

· Turn off ID blocker on your

phone as the system recog-

nizes you by your phone

number.

· Make sure the currently

connected phone is the

same one that is registered

on your SYNCMyRide

account.

345

SYNC™

Voice command issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

· Review the phone voice

commands and the media

voice commands at the

beginning of their respective

sections.

· You may be using the

wrong voice commands.

· You may be speaking too

soon or at the wrong time.

SYNC does not understand

what I am saying.

· Be aware that SYNC's

microphone is either in your

rear view mirror or in the

headliner just above the

windshield.

· Review the media voice

commands at the beginning

of the media section.

· You may be using the

wrong voice commands.

· You may be saying the

name differently than the

way you saved it.

SYNC does not understand

the name of a song or artist.

· Say the song or artist

exactly as listed. If you say

"Play Artist Prince", the

system does not play music

by Prince and the Revolution

or Prince and the New

Power Generation.

· The system may not be

reading the name the same

way you are saying it.

· Make sure you are saying

the complete title, such as

"California remix featuring

Jennifer Nettles".

· If the song titles are in all

CAPS, you have to spell

them. LOLA requires you to

say "L-O-L-A".

· Do not use special charac-

ters in the title. The system

does not recognize them.

· Review the Phone voice

commands at the beginning

of the phone section.

· You may be using the

wrong voice commands.

· You may be saying the

name differently than the

way you saved it.

SYNC does not understand

or is calling the wrong

contact when I want to

make a call. · Make sure you are saying

the contacts exactly as they

are listed. For example, if

you save a contact as Joe

Wilson, say "Call Joe

Wilson".

· Contacts in your phone-

book may be very short and

similar, or they may contain

special characters.

346

SYNC™

Voice command issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

· The system works better if

you list full names, such as

"Joe Wilson" rather than

"Joe".

· Your phonebook contacts

may be in CAPS.

· Do not use special charac-

ters, such as 123 or ICE, as

the system does not recog-

nize them.

· If a contact is in CAPS, you

have to spell it. JAKE

requires you to say "Call J-

A-K-E".

347

SYNC™

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any handheld device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

DG EF

E161890

PhoneA

Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation)B

ClimateC

SettingsD

EV InformationE

HomeF

InformationG

EntertainmentH

348

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

This system uses a four-corner strategy to

provide quick access several vehicle

features and settings. The touchscreen

provides easy interaction with your cellular

phone, multimedia, climate control and

navigation system. The corners display any

active modes within those menus, such as

phone status or the climate temperature.

Note: Some features are not available while

your vehicle is moving.

Note: Your system is equipped with a

feature that allows you to access and

control audio features for 30 minutes after

you switch the ignition off (and no doors

open).

PHONE

Press to select any of the following:

• Phone

• Quick Dial

• Phonebook

• History

• Messaging

• Settings

NAVIGATION

Press to select any of the following:

• My Home

• Favorites

• Previous Destinations

• Point of Interest

• Emergency

• Street Address

• Intersection

• City Center

• Map

• Edit Route Cancel Route

CLIMATE

Press to select any of the following:

• Driver Settings

• Recirculated Air

• Auto

•Dual

• Passenger Settings

•A/C

• Defrost

E142607

SETTINGS

Press to select any of the following:

• Clock

• Display

• Sound

• Vehicle

• Settings

• Help

E161716

EV Information

Press to access features

specific to your hybrid or plug-in

hybrid electric vehicle.

E142613

HOME

Press to access your home

screen. Depending on your

vehicle’s option package and software,

your screens may vary in appearance from

the descriptions in this section. Your

features may also be limited depending on

your market. Check with an authorized

dealer for availability.

E142608

INFORMATION

Press to select any of the following:

• Services

• Travel Link

• Alerts

• Calendar

• Apps

ENTERTAINMENT

349

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Press to select any of the following:

•AM

•FM

• SIRIUS

•CD

•USB

• BT Stereo

• SD Card

• A/V In

Using the Touch-Sensitive

Controls on Your System

To turn a feature on and off, just touch the

graphic with your finger. To get the best

performance from the touch-sensitive

controls:

• Do not press hard on the controls. They

are sensitive to light touch.

• Use your bare finger to touch the center

of a touch-control graphic. Touching

off-center of the graphic may affect

operation of a nearby control.

• Make sure your hands are clean and

dry.

• Since the touchscreen operates based

on the touch of a finger, you may have

trouble using it if you are wearing

gloves.

• Keep metal and other conductive

material away from the surface of the

touchscreen as this may cause

electronic interference (for example,

inadvertently turning on a feature other

than the one you meant to turn on).

Depending on your vehicle and option

package, you may also have these controls

on your bezel:

• Power: Switch the media or climate

features off and on.

•VOL: Control the volume of playing

media.

• Fan: Control the speed of the climate

system fan.

• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you

normally would in media modes.

• Eject: Eject a CD from the

entertainment system.

•SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly

to see all available media modes. The

screen does not change, but you see

the media change in the lower left

status bar.

•SOUND: Touch the word to access the

Sound menu where you can adjust

settings such as: Bass, Treble,

Midrange, Balance and Fade, DSP

(Digital Signal Processing), Occupancy

Mode and Speed Compensated

Volume. (Your vehicle may not have

all of these sound options.)

• Hazard flasher: Switch the hazard

flashers off and on.

Cleaning the Touchscreen Display

Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used

for cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints

are still visible, apply a small amount of

alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray

alcohol onto the display. Do not use

detergent or any type of solvent to clean

the display.

Support

The SYNC support team is available to

help you with any questions you are not

able to answer on your own.

Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.

In the United States, call: 1-888-270-1055.

In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.

Times are subject to change due to

holidays.

350

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Safety Information

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any handheld device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the

system. See an authorized dealer.

• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, split

or damaged. Place cords and cables

out of the way, so they do not interfere

with the operation of pedals, seats,

compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in your

vehicle during extreme conditions as it

could cause them damage. See your

device's user guide for further

information.

• For your safety, some SYNC functions

are speed-dependent. Their use is

limited to when your vehicle is traveling

at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).

Make sure that you review your device's

manual before using it with SYNC.

Speed-restricted Features

Some features of this system may be too

difficult to use while your vehicle is moving

so they are restricted from use unless your

vehicle is stationary.

• Screens crowded with information,

such as Point of Interest reviews and

ratings, SIRIUS Travel Link sports

scores, movie times or ski conditions.

• Any action that requires you to use a

keyboard is restricted, such as entering

a navigation destination or editing

information.

• All lists are limited so the user can view

fewer entries (such as phone contacts

or recent phone call entries).

See the following chart for more specific

examples.

Restricted Features

Pairing a Bluetooth phoneCellular Phone

Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook

contacts (from a USB)

List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent

phone call entries

Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality

Enabling Valet Mode

351

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Restricted Features

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park

assist are active

Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless

Editing the list of wireless networks

Playing videoVideos, Photos and Graphics

Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper

Composing text messagesText Messages

Viewing received text messages

Editing preset text messages

Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation

Demo navigation route

Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas

Privacy Information

When you connect a cellular phone to

SYNC, the system creates a profile within

your vehicle that links to that cellular

phone. This profile helps in offering you

more cellular features and operating more

efficiently. Among other things, this profile

may contain data about your cellular

phone book, text messages (read and

unread), and call history, including history

of calls when your cell phone was not

connected to the system. In addition, if you

connect a media device, the system

creates and retains an index of supported

media content. The system also records a

short development log of approximately

10 minutes of all recent system activity.

The log profile and other system data may

be used to improve the system and help

diagnose any problems that may occur.

The cellular profile, media device index,

and development log remain in your

vehicle unless you delete them and are

generally accessible only in your vehicle

when the cellular phone or media player

is connected. If you no longer plan to use

the system or your vehicle, we recommend

you perform a Master Reset to erase all

stored information.

System data cannot be accessed without

special equipment and access to your

vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor

Company and Ford of Canada do not

access the system data for any purpose

other than as described absent consent, a

court order, or where required by law

enforcement, other government

authorities, or other third parties acting

with lawful authority. Other parties may

seek to access the information

independently of Ford Motor Company and

Ford of Canada. For further privacy

information, see the sections on 911 Assist,

Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,

Directions and Information.

352

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information

Display

E145459

The display is located on the right side of

your instrument cluster. You can use your

steering wheel controls to view and make

minor adjustments to active modes

without taking your hands off the wheel.

For example:

• In Entertainment mode, you can view

what is now playing, change the audio

source, select memory presets and

make some adjustments.

• In Phone mode, you can accept or

reject an incoming call.

• If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, you can view the current

route or activate a route.

• In Efficiency Leaves mode, you can

learn how your vehicle informs you of

your driving efficiency. Press OK to exit

the menu.

E144811

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right

side of your steering wheel to scroll

through the available modes:

E142611

Entertainment

E142609

Phone

E142610

Navigation

353

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

You can make selections from the menu

by using the OK button. The selection

menu expands and different options

appear.

• Press the up and down arrows to scroll

through the modes.

• Press the right arrow to enter the mode.

• Press the left or right arrows to make

adjustments within the chosen mode.

• Press OK to confirm your selection.

Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with

Navigation, Compass appears in the display

instead of Navigation. If you press the right

arrow to go into the Compass menu, you

can see the compass graphic. The compass

displays the direction in which the vehicle

is traveling, not true direction (for example,

if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle

of the compass graphic displays west; north

displays to the left of west though its true

direction is to the right of west).

Using Voice Recognition

This system helps you control many

features using voice commands. This

allows you to keep your hands on the

wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

The system provides feedback through

audible tones, prompts, questions and

spoken confirmations depending on the

situation and the chosen level of

interaction (voice settings).

The system also asks short questions

(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure

of your request or when there are multiple

possible responses to your request.

When using voice commands, words and

icons may appear in the lower left status

bar indicating the status of the voice

session (such as Listening, Success, Failed,

Paused or Try Again).

How to Use Voice Commands with Your

System

E142599

Press the voice icon. After the

tone, speak your command

clearly.

These commands can be said at any time

during a voice session

"Cancel"

"Exit"

"Go back"

"List of commands"

"Main menu"

"Next page"

"Previous page"

"What can I say?"

"Help"

What Can I Say?

To access the available voice commands

for the current session, do one of the

following:

• During a voice session, press the help

icon (?) in the lower left status bar of

the screen.

• Say, "What can I say?" for an

on-screen listing of the possible voice

commands associated with your

current voice session.

• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say,

"Help" for an audible list of possible

voice commands.

354

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Helpful Hints

• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise from

open windows and road vibrations may

prevent the system from correctly

recognizing spoken commands.

• After pressing the voice icon, wait until

after the tone sounds and Listening

appears before saying a command. Any

command spoken before this does not

• Speak naturally, without long pauses

between words.

• At any time, you can interrupt the

system while it is speaking by pressing

the voice icon.

Accessing a List of Available Commands

• If you use the touchscreen, press the

Settings icon > Help > Voice

Command List.

• If you use the steering wheel control,

press the voice icon. After the tone,

speak your command clearly.

Available voice commands

"Audio list of commands"

"Bluetooth audio list of commands"

"Browse list of commands"

"CD list of commands"

"Climate control list of commands"

"List of commands"

"Navigation list of commands" *

"Phone list of commands"

"Radio list of commands"

"SD card list of commands"

"Sirius satellite list of commands" **

Available voice commands

"Travel link list of commands" *

"USB list of commands"

"Voice instructions list of commands"

"Voice settings list of commands"

"Help"

* This command is only available when

your vehicle is equipped with the

navigation system, and the navigation

system SD card is in the card slot.

** This command is only available when

you have an active SIRIUS satellite radio

subscription.

Voice Settings

Voice settings allow you to customize the

level of system interaction, help and

feedback. The system defaults to standard

interaction that uses candidate lists and

confirmation prompts as these provide the

highest level of guidance and feedback.

•Interaction Mode: Novice mode

provides detailed interaction and

guidance while the advanced mode

has less audible interaction and more

tone prompts.

•Confirmation Prompts: The system

uses these short questions to confirm

your voice request. If turned off, the

system simply makes a best guess as

to what you requested. The system

may still occasionally ask you to

confirm settings.

•Phone and Media Candidate Lists:

Candidate lists are lists of possible

results from your voice commands. The

system creates these lists when it has

the same confidence level of several

options based on your voice command.

355

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

To access these settings using the

touchscreen:

1. Press the Settings icon > Settings >

then Voice Control.

2. Select from the following:

• Interaction Mode

• Confirmation Prompts

• Media Candidate Lists

• Phone Candidate Lists

• Voice Control Volume.

To access these settings using voice

commands:

1. Press the voice icon. Wait for the

prompt "Please say a command".

Another tone sounds to let you know

the system is listening.

2. Say any of the following commands:

Voice settings using voice commands

"Confirmation prompts off"

"Confirmation prompts on"

"Interaction mode advanced"

"Interaction mode novice"

"Media candidate lists off"

"Media candidate lists on"

"Phone candidate lists off"

"Phone candidate lists on"

"Help"

Using Voice Commands with the

Touchscreen Options

Your voice system has a dual mode feature

which allows you to switch between using

voice commands and making on-screen

selections. This is most often available

when using navigation.

Buttons outlined in blue indicate selections

that are part of the dual mode feature. For

example, if while you are in a voice session,

rather than saying the command "Enter

street name" to change the field, you can

press Street and the voice session does

not end. Instead, the voice system changes

to the Street field and asks you to say the

street name. You cannot use the buttons

not outlined in blue as voice commands.

If they are touched during a voice session,

the voice session ends.

For example, you can choose from the

following on the Navigation home screen:

• My Home

• Favorites

• Previous Destinations

• Point of Interest (POI)

• Emergency

• Street Address

• Intersection

• Cancel Route.

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Destination

"Destination emergency"

"Destination favorites"

"Destination intersection"

"Destination my home"

"Destination POI"

"Destination previous destinations"

"Destination street address"

356

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

If you choose Street Address from the

navigation screen, you can choose from

the following:

• Number

• City

• Street Name

• State/Prov.

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Street address

"Enter house number"

"Change house number"

"Enter street name"

"Change street name"

"Enter city"

"Change city"

"Enter state"

"Change state"

If you choose Points of Interest from the

navigation screen, you can choose from

the following:

• Search Area

• Search By Name

• Fuel Station

•ATM

• All Restaurants

• Accommodations

• Parking.

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Points of interest or POI

"Change search area"

"Change state"

"Destination <POI category name>"

"Search by category"

"Search by name"

Note: These are just a sample of the voice

commands available within the Points of

Interest section; the categories themselves

are also technically voice commands.

If you choose Intersection from the

navigation screen, you can choose from

the following:

•1st Street

• 2nd Street

• City

• State/Prov.

Some of the voice commands that are

available while viewing this screen are:

Intersection

"Enter first street name"

"Change first street name"

"Enter second street name"

"Change second street name"

"Enter city"

"Change city"

"Enter state"

"Change state"

357

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

The dual mode feature is also available

when the voice system displays a list of

items to pick from during a voice session,

where you would be able to touch the line

item or say "Line 2". If the system does not

understand a voice command, or there are

multiple options, the system displays a

voice command list for you.

SETTINGS

E161968

ClockA

DisplayB

SoundC

VehicleD

SettingsE

HelpF

E142607

Under this menu, you can set

your clock, access and adjust the

display, sound and vehicle

settings as well as access settings for

specific modes or the help feature.

Clock

Note: You cannot manually set the date.

Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.

Note: If the battery has been disconnected,

your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal

to update the clock. Once your vehicle

acquires the signal, it may take a few

minutes for the update to display the correct

time.

E142607

1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.

358

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

2. Press + and - to adjust the time.

From this screen, you can also make other

adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour

mode, activate GPS time synchronization

and have the system automatically update

new time zones.

You can also turn the outside air

temperature display off and on. It appears

at the top center of the touchscreen, next

to the time and date.

The system automatically saves any

updates you make to the settings.

Display

You can adjust the touchscreen display

through the touchscreen or by pressing the

voice button on your steering wheel

controls and when prompted, say, "Display

settings".

E142607

To access and make

adjustments using the

touchscreen, press the Settings

icon > Display.

•Brightness allows you to make the

screen display brighter or dimmer.

•Mode allows you to set the screen to

a certain brightness or have the system

automatically change based on the

outside light level.

• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you

have the options of turning the

display's Auto Dim feature on or off

and changing the Auto Dim Manual

Offset feature.

•Edit Wallpaper

• You can have your touchscreen

display the default photo or upload

your own.

Uploading Photos for Your Home

Screen Wallpaper

Note: You cannot load photos directly from

your camera. You must access the photos

either from your USB mass storage device

or from an SD card.

Note: Photographs with extremely large

dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not

be compatible and appear as a blank

(black) image on the display.

Your system allows you to upload and view

up to 32 photos.

E142607

To access, press the Settings

icon > Display > Edit

Wallpaper, and then follow the

system prompts to upload your

photographs.

Only the photograph(s), which meets the

following conditions, display:

• Compatible file formats are as follows:

.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp

• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.

• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384

Sound

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Sound,

then select from the following:

Sound settings

Bass

Midrange

Treble

Set Balance and Fade

DSP*

359

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Sound settings

Occupancy Mode*

Speed Compensated Volume

* Your vehicle may not have this sound

setting.

Vehicle

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Vehicle, then select from the

following:

• Ambient Lighting

• Vehicle Health Report

• Rear View Camera

• Enable Valet Mode

• Charge Port Light Ring.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

When you turn this feature on, ambient

lighting illuminates footwells and

cupholders with a choice of colors. To

access and make adjustments:

E142607

1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >

Ambient Lighting.

2. Touch the desired color.

3. Use the scroll bar to increase or

decrease the intensity.

To turn the feature on or off, press the

power button.

Vehicle Health Report

Turn Automatic Reminders on and off

and set the mileage interval at which you

would like to receive the reports. Press the

? for more information on these selections.

When done making your selections, press

Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you

want your report.

You can find more information on Vehicle

Health Report in this chapter. See

Information (page 402).

Rear View Camera

This menu allows you to access settings

for your rear view camera.

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Vehicle > Rear View Camera,

then select from the following

settings:

• Rear Camera Delay

• Visual Park Aid Alert

• Guidelines.

You can find more information on the rear

view camera system in another chapter.

See Rear View Camera (page 177).

Enable Valet Mode

Note: If the system locks, and you need to

reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the system

unlocks.

Valet mode allows you to lock the system.

No information is accessible until the

system is unlocked with the correct PIN.

E142607

1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >

Enable Valet Mode.

2. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.

After you press Continue the system locks

until you enter the PIN again.

Charge Point Light Ring

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Vehicle > Charge Point Light

Ring, then select from the

following:

360

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Charge point light ring

Illuminates when plugging in, opening doors, pressing the

unlock button on your remote, and while charging.

Does not illuminate.Off

Cord Acknowledgement: Illuminates when plugging in.Limited

Charge Status: Illuminates when opening doors or

pressing the unlock button on your remote.

Note: Details on the charge port light ring

functions are in another chapter. See High

Voltage Battery (page 156).

Settings

Access and adjust system settings, voice

features, as well as phone, navigation and

wireless settings.

System

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > System, then select

from the following:

System

Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish

or French.

Language

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature

Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume

Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made

through the touchscreen.

Touch Screen Button Beep

Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices

made through the climate or audio system.

Touch Panel Button Beep

Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or

ABC format.

Keyboard Layout

Install any downloaded applications or view the current

software licenses.

Install Applications

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal

settings and personal data.

Master Reset

361

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Voice Control

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > Voice Control, then

select from the following:

Voice control

Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter-

action and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible

interaction and more tone prompts.

Interaction Mode

Have the system ask you short questions if it has not

clearly heard or understood your request.

Confirmation Prompts

Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the

system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice

commands. The system simply makes a best guess at

your request with these turned off.

Media Candidate Lists

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice

commands. The system simply makes a best guess at

your request with these turned off.

Phone Candidate Lists

This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume

Media Player

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > Media Player, then

select from the following:

362

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Media player

When this feature is on, the system automatically switches

to the media source upon initial connection. This allows

you to listen to music during the indexing process. When

this feature is off, the system does not automatically

switch to the inserted media source.

Autoplay

Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You

can also set a device as your favorite so that the system

automatically attempts to connect to that device at every

ignition cycle.

Bluetooth Devices

This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote

Database.

Gracenote Database Info

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies

metadata information for your music files. This overrides

information from your device. This feature defaults to off.

Gracenote Mgmt

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied

cover art for your music files. This overrides any art from

your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.

Cover Art Priority

Navigation

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > Navigation, then

select from the following:

Navigation

Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences

Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or

bottom to top.

Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.

Have the system display the shortest route, fastest route

or ecological route.

Route Preferences

Have the system avoid freeways.

Have the system avoid tollroads.

Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.

Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.

363

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Navigation

Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences

Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province

information.

Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.Traffic Preferences

Have the system display incident icons.

Have the system display areas where difficult driving

conditions may occur.

Have the system display areas with snow and ice on the

road may occur.

Have the system display any smog alerts.

Have the system display weather warnings.

Have the system display where there may be reduced

visibility.

Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce-

ments.

Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned

navigation routes.

Avoid Areas

Phone

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > Phone, then select

from the following:

Phone

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as

save it as a favorite.

Bluetooth Devices

Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring

inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text

message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring

inside your vehicle.

Do Not Disturb

Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information

(page 402).

911 Assist

364

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Phone

Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,

beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Phone Ringer

Select the type of notification for text messages - alert

tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

Text Message Notification

If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet

data connection. Select to make your connection profile

with the personal area network or to turn off your

connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings

or have the system always connect, never connect when

roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.

Internet Data Connection

Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,

re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your

phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Manage Phonebook

Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning

Wireless & Internet

Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that

creates a wireless network within your

vehicle, thereby allowing other devices

(such as personal computers or phones)

in your vehicle to speak to each other,

share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi

feature, everyone in your vehicle can also

gain access the internet if you have a USB

mobile broadband connection inside your

vehicle, your phone supports personal area

networking and if you park outside a

wireless hotspot.

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > Wireless &

Internet, then select from the

following:

365

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Wi-fi

Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on

and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for

connectivity purposes.

Wi-Fi Settings

Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ-

ously stored wireless network. You can categorize by

alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can

also choose to search for a network, connect to a network,

disconnect from a network, receive more information,

prioritize a network or delete a network.

Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access

point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This

forms the local area network within your vehicle for things,

such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing.

Press ? for more information.

Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view

and change settings for using SYNC as the internet

gateway.

Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view

recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.

Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB

mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You

must turn on your mobile broadband device on your

personal computer before connecting it to the system.)

This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area

for your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile

broadband settings may not display if the device is already

on.) You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone

Number, User Name and Password.

USB Mobile Broadband

Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving

you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect,

set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a

registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.

Bluetooth Settings

Choose your connection methods and change them as

needed. You can select to Change Order and have the

system either always attempt to connect using a USB

mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.

Prioritize Connection

Methods

366

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

E142626

The

Wi-Fi

CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of

the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Help

E142607

Press the Settings icon > Help,

then select from the following:

Help

View your vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is

equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped

with navigation, nothing displays.

Where Am I?

Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information

Your vehicle identification number (VIN)

Touchscreen system software version

Navigation system version

Map database version

Sirius satellite radio ESN

Gracenote Database Information and Library version

View the licenses for any software and applications

installed on your system.

Software Licenses

Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is

moving.

Driving Restrictions

Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Informa-

tion (page 402).

911 Assist

In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to

save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access

if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your

phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The

numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE

1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select appear

at the end of the 911 Assist call process.

View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List

367

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

To access Help using the voice commands,

press the voice button, then, after the tone,

say "Help". The system provides allowable

voice commands for the current mode.

ENTERTAINMENT

E161892

AM 1 and AM ASTA

FM 1, FM 2 and FM ASTB

SIRIUSC

CDD

USBE

Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereo

and A/V In

These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G

Radio memory presets and CD controls.H

Note: Some features may not be available

in your area. Contact an authorized dealer

for more information.

You can access these options using the

touchscreen or voice commands.

Browsing Device Content

When listening to audio on a device, you

can browse through other devices without

having to change sources. For example, if

you are currently listening to audio on an

SD card, you can browse all the artists that

are stored on your USB device.

368

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

E142599

Press the voice icon on the

steering wheel. When prompted,

you can say:

"BROWSE" within devices

"Browse"*

"Browse <league> games"**

"Browse <Sirius category> channels"**

"Browse SD card"

"Browse Sirius channel guide"**

"Browse USB"

"Help"

* If you only say, "Browse", you can then

say any commands in the following chart.

**This command is only usable if you have

an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite

radio.

"BROWSE"

"<League> Games"*

"<Sirius category> channels"*

"SD card"**

"Sirius Channel Guide"*

"USB"**

"Help"

* This command is only usable if you have

an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite

radio.

** For more commands in SD card or USB

mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"

section of this chapter.

Your voice system allows you to change

audio sources with a simple voice

command. For example, if you are listening

to music on a USB device, then want to

switch to a satellite radio channel, simply

press the voice button on the steering

wheel controls and say the name of the

SIRIUS station (such as, "the Highway").

The following voice commands are

available at the top level of the voice

session no matter which current audio

source you are listening to (such as a USB

device or SIRIUS satellite radio).

Note: This is only available when your

MyFord Touch system language is set to

North American English.

Sample commands

"<87.7-107.9"

"<530-1710>"

"<Channel name>"*

"AM <530-1710>"

"FM <87.7-107.9"

"Play [album] <name>"**

"Play [artist] <name>"**

"Play [genre] <name>"**

"Play [playlist] <name>"**

"Play [song] <name>"**

"Play <name>"

"Play <name (song or album)> by <artist

name>"

369

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Sample commands

"Sirius <0-223>"*

"Sports games"*

* This command is only usable if you have

an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite

radio.

** The commands that have [ ] around the

word means that the word is optional. For

example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this

is the same as the voice command, "Play

[artist] <name>".

AM/FM Radio

E142611

Touch the AM or FM tab to listen

to the radio.

To change between AM and FM presets,

just touch the AM or FM tab.

Memory Presets

Save a station by pressing and holding one

of the memory preset areas. There is a brief

mute while the radio saves the station.

Sound returns when finished.

HD Radio

Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The

light on the button illuminates when the

feature is on. HD Radio allows you to

receive radio broadcasts digitally, where

available, providing free, crystal-clear

sound. See HD Radio information later in

this chapter.

Scan

Touch this button to go to the next strong

AM or FM radio station. The light on the

button illuminates when the feature is on.

Options

Sound Settings

Touch this button to adjust settings for:

•Bass

• Midrange

• Treble

• Balance and Fade

• DSP (Digital Signal processing)

• Occupancy Mode

• Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these

sound settings.

Set PTY for Seek/Scan

This allows you to select a category of

music you would like to search for. You can

then choose to either seek or scan for the

stations playing that category.

RDS Text Display

This allows you to view the information

broadcast by FM stations.

AST

AST (Autostore) allows you to have the

system automatically store the six

strongest stations in your current location.

TAG Button

This feature is available when HD Radio is

on, and allows you to tag a song to

download later. When you select On, TAG

appears on-screen when HD Radio is

active. You can touch TAG to save the

information of the song that is playing.

When you plug in your portable music

player, the information transfers, if

supported by your device. When you are

connected to iTunes, the tags appear to

remind you of the songs you would like to

download. See HD Radio information later

in this chapter.

370

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Direct Tune

Touch this button to manually enter the

desired station number. Touch Enter when

you are done.

HD Radio™ Information (If Available)

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not

available in all markets.

HD Radio technology is the digital

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your

system has a special receiver that allows

it to receive digital broadcasts (where

available) in addition to the analog

broadcasts, it already receives. Digital

broadcasts provide a better sound quality

than analog broadcasts with free,

crystal-clear audio and no static or

distortion. For more information, and a

guide to available stations and

programming, please visit

www.hdradio.com.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a

station broadcasting HD Radio technology,

you may notice the following indicators on

your screen:

E142616

The HD Radio logo blinks when acquiring

a digital station and stays solid when

digital audio is playing. When this logo is

available, you may also see Title and Artist

fields on-screen.

The multicast indicator appears in FM

mode (only) if the current station is

broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.

The highlighted numbers signify available

digital channels where new or different

content is available. HD1 signifies the main

programming status and is available in

analog and digital broadcasts. Other

multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are

only available digitally.

TAG allows you to save a song to

download later when you are on an

acquired HD Radio station and the feature

is on. To turn the feature on and use it:

1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG

Button > On.

2. When you hear a song you like, touch

TAG .

3. The system automatically saves the

song's information and transfers it to

your portable music player (if

supported) when you connect it to the

system. The system automatically

transfers the tag to your player (if

already connected) and a pop-up

confirms the transfer.

4. When you access iTunes with your

portable music player, the tags appear

to you as a reminder. The system

allows you to tag up to approximately

100 songs. For a list of devices that

support tagging, see

www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

371

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you

can access the following functions:

•Scan allows you to hear a brief

sampling of all available stations. This

feature still works when HD Radio

reception is on, although it does not

scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may

see the HD logo appear if the station

has a digital broadcast.

•Memory presets allow you to save an

active channel as a memory preset.

Touch and hold a memory preset slot

until the sound returns. There is a brief

mute while the radio saves the station.

Sound returns when finished. When

switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory

preset, the sound mutes before the

digital audio plays, because the system

has to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you

cannot access the saved station if your

vehicle is outside the station’s reception

area.

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting

Potential reception issues

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on

the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due

to weak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to

the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available

again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible

HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays

muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal

again.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-

HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the

analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an

HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending

on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change

when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending

is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to

analog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report

any station issues found while listening to

a station broadcasting with HD Radio

technology. Independent entities own and

operate each station. These stations are

responsible for ensuring all audio streams

and data fields are accurate.

372

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Potential station issues

ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is a

broadcast issue.

This is poor time alignment

by the radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat

in audio.

Increase or decrease in

audio volume.

No action required. The

reception issue may clear up

as you continue to drive.

The radio is shifting between

analog and digital audio.

Sound fading or blending in

and out.

No action required. This is

normal behavior. Wait until

the audio is available.

The digital multicast is not

available until the HD Radio

broadcast is decoded. Once

decoded, the audio is avail-

able.

There is an audio mute

delay when selecting HD2 or

HD3, multicast preset or

Direct Tune.

No action required. The

station is not available in

your current location.

The previously stored

multicast preset or direct

tune is not available in your

current reception area.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3

multicast channel when

recalling a preset or from a

direct tune.

Fill out the station issue

form at website listed

below.*

Data service issue by the

radio broadcaster.

Text information does not

match currently playing

audio.

Fill out the station issue

form at website listed

below.*

Data service issue by the

radio broadcaster.

There is no text information

shown for currently selected

frequency.

No action required. This is

normal behavior.

Pressing Scan disables

HD2-HD7 channel search.

HD2-HD7 stations not found

when Scan is pressed.

* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and

foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and

HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks

of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor

Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not

responsible for the content sent using HD

Radio technology. Content may be

changed, added or deleted at any time at

the station owner's discretion.

Radio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to the radio,

press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the following

commands.

If you are not listening to the radio, press

the voice button and, after the tone, say

"Radio", then any of the following

commands.

373

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"RADIO"

"<87.9-107.9>"

"<87.9-107.9> HD"1

"<530-1710>"

"AM"

"AM <530-1710>"

"AM autoset"

"AM autoset preset <#>"

"AM preset <#>"

"Browse"2

"FM"

"FM <87.9-107.9>"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"1

"FM autoset"

"FM autoset preset <#>"

"FM preset <#>"

"FM 1"

"FM 1 preset <#>"

"FM 2"

"FM 2 preset <#>"

"HD <#>"1

"Preset <#>"

"Radio off"

"Radio on"

"Set PTY"

"RADIO"

"Tune"3

"Help"

1 If available.

2 If you have said "Browse", see the

"Browse" chart later in this section.

3 If you have said "Tune", see the following

"Tune" chart.

"TUNE"

"<530-1710>"

"<87.9-107.9>"

"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*

"AM"

"AM <530-1710>"

"AM autoset"

"AM autoset preset <#>"

"AM preset <#>"

"FM"

"FM <87.9-107.9>"

"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"*

"FM autoset"

"FM autoset preset <#>"

"FM preset <#>"

"FM 1"

"FM 1 preset <#>"

"FM 2"

"FM 2 preset <#>"

374

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"TUNE"

"HD <#>"*

"Preset <#>"

"Help"

* If available.

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)

E142611

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen, and then select the

SIRIUS tab.

Memory Presets

Save a channel by pressing and holding

one of the memory preset areas. There is

a brief mute while the radio saves the

channel. Sound returns when finished.

ALERT

Save the current song, artist, or team as a

favorite. The system alerts you when it

plays again on any channel.

Replay

Replay audio on the current channel. You

can replay approximately 45 minutes of

audio as long as you have remained tuned

to the current station. Changing stations

erases the previous audio.

While in replay mode:

• Press and release the seek buttons to

hear the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the seek buttons to

reverse or fast forward in the current

track.

• Press play or pause to play or pause

the audio.

• Press Replay to return to live audio if

you have been using the feature to

replay audio.

Scan

Touch this button to hear a brief sampling

of channels.

Options

Touch this button to view and adjust

various media settings.

Sound Settings

Touch this button to adjust settings for:

•Bass

• Midrange

• Treble

• Balance and Fade

• DSP (Digital Signal processing)

• Occupancy Mode

• Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these

sound settings.

Set Category for Seek/Scan

This allows you to select a category of

music you would like to search for. You can

then choose to either seek or scan for the

stations playing that category.

Parental Lockout

This allows you to lock and unlock

channels, change or reset your PIN or

unlock all channels. To use this feature,

you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.

Artist/Title/Team Alerts

This feature allows you to select Artists,

Titles and Teams that you would like the

system to alert you to when they are

playing on other channels. Press Edit Alerts

to delete or turn off alerts. You can also

set all alerts to on or off. When an alert

appears on the screen, you can choose to

375

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or

to Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a

sporting event, you can save your favorite

teams so that the system can alert you

when they are playing on a satellite radio

channel.

Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert

feature on all channels. Ford Motor

Company shall not be responsible for Alert

feature variation.

Electronic Serial Number (ESN)

SIRIUS requires this number when

communicating with you about your

account.

Direct Tune

Touch this button to manually enter the

desired satellite channel number. Touch

Enter when you are done.

Browse

Touch this button to view a list of all

available stations. Scroll to see more

categories. Touch the station you want to

listen to.

Touch Skip if you want to skip this

channel.

Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to

listen to this channel.

Touch Title or Artist to see song and

artists on other stations.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information

Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right

to change, rearrange, add or delete

programming including canceling, moving

or adding particular channels, and its prices,

at any time, with or without notice to you.

Ford Motor Company shall not be

responsible for any such programming

changes.

E142593

SIRIUS satellite radio is a

subscription-based satellite radio service

that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,

news, weather, traffic and entertainment

programming. Your factory-installed

SIRIUS satellite radio system includes

hardware and a limited subscription term

that begins on the date of sale or lease of

your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for

availability.

For more information on extended

subscription terms (a service fee is

required), the online media player and a

list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and

other features, please visit

www.siriusxm.com in the United States,

www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at

1-888-539-7474.

Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is

published under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)

You need your ESN to activate, modify or

track your satellite radio account. The ESN

is on the System Information Screen (SR

ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your

ESN, touch the bottom left corner of the

touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS > Options.

376

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting

Potential reception issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other

materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway

overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and

thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating

tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and

the audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the

interference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-

ence

Troubleshooting tips

ActionCauseRadio display

No action required. This

message should disappear

shortly.

Radio requires more than

two seconds to produce

audio for the selected

channel.

Acquiring...

If this message does not

clear shortly, or with an igni-

tion key cycle, your receiver

may have a fault. See an

authorized dealer for service.

There is an internal module

or system failure present.

Sat Fault/SIRIUS System

Failure.

Tune to another channel or

choose another preset.

The channel is no longer

available.

Invalid Channel.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to subscribe to

the channel, or tune to

another channel.

Your subscription does not

include this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel.

The signal is blocked. When

you move into an open area,

the signal should return.

The signal is lost from the

SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS

tower to your vehicle

antenna.

No Signal.

377

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Troubleshooting tips

ActionCauseRadio display

No action required. The

process may take up to

three minutes.

Update of channel

programming in progress.

Updating.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-

539-7474 to resolve

subscription issues.

Your satellite service is no

longer available.

Call SIRIUS

1-888-539-7474.

Use the channel guide to

turn off the Lock or Skip

function on that station.

All the channels in the

selected category are either

skipped or locked.

None found. Check Channel

Guide.

No action required.SIRIUS has updated the

channels available for your

vehicle.

Subscription Updated.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice

Commands

E142599

If you are listening to SIRIUS

satellite radio, press the voice

button on the steering wheel

controls. When prompted, say any of the

following commands.

If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite

radio, press the voice button and, after the

tone, say "SIRIUS", then any of the

following commands.

"SIRIUS"

"<Channel name>"

"Preset <#>"

"SAT"

"SAT preset <#>"

"SAT 1"

"SAT 1 Preset <#>"

"SAT 2"

"SIRIUS"

"SAT 2 preset <#>"

"SAT 3"

"SAT 3 preset <#>"

"Sirius <0-223>"

"Sirius off"

"Sirius on"

"Sports game"*

"Tune"**

"Help"

* If you have said "Sports game", see the

following "Sports game" chart.

** If you have said "Tune", see the following

"Tune" chart.

378

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"SPORTS GAME"

"Tune to the <college name> game"

"Tune to the <team city> game"

"Tune to the <team city> <team name>

game"

"Tune to the <team name> game"

"Help"

"TUNE"

"<Channel Name>"

"Preset <#>"

"SAT"

"SAT 1"

"SAT 1 preset <#>"

"SAT 2"

"SAT 2 preset <#>"

"SAT 3"

"SAT 3 preset <#>"

"Sirius <0-223>"

"Help"

E142611

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen, and then select the

CD tab.

You can also advance and reverse the

current track or current folder, if applicable.

Repeat

Touch this button to repeat the currently

playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn

the feature off if already on.

Shuffle

Touch this button to play the tracks or

entire albums in random order, or turn the

feature off if already on.

Scan

Touch this button to hear a brief sampling

of all available tracks.

More Info

Touch this button to see disc information.

Options

Sound Settings

Touch this button to adjust settings for:

•Bass

• Midrange

• Treble

• Balance and Fade

• DSP (Digital Signal processing)

• Occupancy Mode

• Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these

sound settings.

Compression

Touch this button to turn the compression

feature on and off.

Browse

Touch this button to look through all

available CD tracks.

CD Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a CD, press

the voice button on the steering

wheel controls. When prompted,

say any of the following commands.

If you are not listening to a CD, press the

voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",

then any of the following commands.

379

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"CD"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play next track"

"Play previous track"

"Play track <1-512>"

"Repeat"

"Repeat folder"*

"Repeat off"

"Repeat track"

"Shuffle"

"Shuffle CD"*

"Shuffle folder"*

"Shuffle off"

"Help"

*This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.

SD Card Slot and USB Port

SD Card

Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.

To remove the SD card, press the card in

and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to

pull the card to remove it as this could cause

damage.

Note: The navigation system also uses this

card slot. See Navigation (page 414).

E142619

The SD card slot is located either in the

center console or behind a small access

door in the instrument panel. To access

and play music from your device, press the

lower left corner of the touchscreen.

E142620

SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

USB Port

E142621

The USB ports are located either in the

center console or behind a small access

door in the instrument panel. To access

and play music from your device, press the

lower left corner of the touchscreen.

380

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

This feature allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives

or thumb drives, and charge devices if they

support this feature.

In order to playback video from your iPod

or iPhone, you must have a special

combination USB/RCA composite video

cable (which you can buy from Apple).

When you connect the cable to your iPod

or iPhone, plug the other end into both the

RCA jacks and the USB port.

Playing Music from Your Device

E142611

Insert your device and select the

SD Card or USB tab once the

system recognizes it. You can

then select from the following options:

Repeat

This feature replays the currently playing

song or album.

Shuffle

Touch this button to play music on the

selected album or folder in random order.

Similar Music

This feature allows you to choose music

similar to what is currently playing.

More Info

Touch this button to see disc information

such as current track, artist name, album

and genre.

Options

Touch this button to view and adjust

various media settings.

Sound Settings allows you to adjust

settings for:

•Bass

• Midrange

• Treble

• Balance and Fade

• DSP (Digital Signal processing)

• Occupancy Mode

• Speed Compensated Volume.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these

sound settings.

Media Player Settings allows you to

select more settings, which is under Media

Player. See Settings (page 358).

Device Information displays software

and firmware information about the

currently connected media device.

Update Media Index indexes your device

when you connect it for the first time and

each time the content changes (such as

adding or removing tracks) to make sure

you have the latest voice commands

available for all media on the device.

Browse

This feature allows you to view the

contents of the device. It also allows you

to search by categories, such as genre,

artist or album.

If you want to view song information such

as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and

Genre, touch the on-screen album art.

You can also touch What’s Playing to

hear how the system pronounces the

current band and song. This can be helpful

when using voice commands to make sure

the system correctly plays your request.

Playing Video from Your Device

To access and play video from your device,

your vehicle's transmission must be in

position P with the ignition in accessory

mode. See Starting and Stopping the

Engine (page 132).

381

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

SD Card and USB Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a USB

device or an SD card, press the

voice button on the steering

wheel controls. When prompted, say any

of the following commands.

If you are not listening to a USB device or

an SD card, press the voice button and,

after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card",

then any of the following commands.

"USB" or "SD CARD"

"Browse"*

"Next"

"Pause"

"Play"

"Play album <name>"

"Play all"

"Play artist <name>"

"Play audiobook <name>"

"Play author <name>"

"Play composer <name>"

"Play folder <name>"

"Play genre <name>"

"Play movie <name>"**

"Play music video <name>"**

"Play playlist <name>"

"Play podcast <name>"

"Play podcast episode <name>"

"Play similar music"

"Play song <name>"

"USB" or "SD CARD"

"Play TV show <name>"**

"Play TV show episode <name>"**

"Play video <name>"**

"Play video podcast <name>"**

"Play video podcast episode <name>"**

"Play video playlist <name>"**

"Previous"

"Repeat all"

"Repeat off"

"Repeat one"

"Shuffle"

"Shuffle album"

"Shuffle off"

"What's this?"

"Help"

* If you have said you would like to browse

your USB or SD card, the system prompts

you to specify what you would like to

browse. When prompted, see the following

"Browse" chart.

** These commands are only available in

USB mode and are device-dependent.

"BROWSE"

"Album <name>"

"All albums"

"All artists"

"All audiobooks"

382

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"BROWSE"

"All authors"

"All composers"

"All folders"

"All genres"

"All movies"*

"All music videos"*

"All playlists"

"All podcasts"

"All songs"

"All TV shows"*

"All video playlists"*

"All video podcasts"*

"All videos"*

"Artist <name>"

"Audiobook <name>"

"Author <name>"

"Composer <name>"

"Folder <name>"

"Genre <name>"

"Playlist <name>"

"Podcast <name>"

"TV show <name>"*

"Video <name>"*

"Video playlist <name>"*

"BROWSE"

"Video podcast <name>"*

"Help"

* This command is only available in USB

mode and is device-dependent.

Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any

digital media player, including iPod,

Zune™, plays from device players, and

most USB drives. Supported audio formats

include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.

It is also able to organize your indexed

media from your playing device by

metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are

descriptive software identifiers embedded

in the media files, provide information

about the file.

If your indexed media files contain no

information embedded in these metadata

tags, SYNC may classify the empty

metadata tags as Unknown.

In order to playback video from your iPod

or iPhone, you must have a special

combination USB/RCA composite video

cable (which you can buy from Apple).

When you connect the cable to your iPod

or iPhone, plug the other end into both the

RCA jacks and the USB port.

Bluetooth Audio

Your system allows you to stream audio

over your vehicle's speakers from your

connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular

phone.

E142611

To access, press the lower left

corner on the touchscreen, then

select the BT Stereo tab.

383

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a Bluetooth

audio device, press the voice

button on the steering wheel

control. When prompted, say "Next song",

"Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".

If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio

device, press the voice button and, after

the tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play"

or "Previous song".

A/V Inputs

WARNINGS

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any handheld device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

For safety reasons, do not connect

or adjust the settings on your

portable music player while your

vehicle is moving.

Store the portable music player in a

secure location, such as the center

console or the glove box, when your

vehicle is in motion. Hard objects may

become projectiles in a crash or sudden

stop, which may increase the risk of serious

injury. The audio extension cable must be

long enough to allow the portable music

player to be safely stored while your

vehicle is moving.

E142622

Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an

auxiliary audio/video source (such as a

gaming systems or a personal camcorder)

by connecting RCA cords (not included)

to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow,

red and white and are located either

behind a small access door on the

instrument panel or in your center console.

You can also use the A/V inputs as an

auxiliary input jack to play music from your

portable music player over your vehicle's

speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5

millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left

A/V input jacks (red and white).

Press the lower left corner of the

touchscreen, and then select A/V In.

To use the auxiliary input jack feature,

make sure that your portable music player

is designed for use with headphones and

that it is fully charged. You also need an

audio extension cable with stereo male

1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at one

end and a RCA jack at the other.

1. Switch off the vehicle, radio and

portable music player. Set the parking

brake and put the transmission in

position P.

2. Attach one end of the audio extension

cable to the headphone output of your

player and the other end into the

adapter in one of the two left A/V input

jacks (white or red) inside the center

console.

384

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

3. Press the lower left corner on the

touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM

station or a CD (if there is a CD already

loaded into the system).

4. Adjust the volume as desired.

5. Turn the portable music player on and

adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.

6. Press the lower left corner on the

touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.

(You should hear audio from your

portable music player although it may

be low.)

7. Adjust the sound on your portable

music player until it reaches the level

of the FM station or CD by switching

back and forth between the controls.

In order to playback video from your iPod

or iPhone, you must have a special

combination USB/RCA composite video

cable (which you can buy from Apple).

When you connect the cable to your iPod

or iPhone, plug the other end into both the

RCA jacks and the USB port.

Troubleshooting

• Do not connect the audio input jack to

a line level output. The jack only works

correctly with devices that have a

headphone output with a volume

control.

• Do not set the portable music player's

volume level higher than is necessary

to match the volume of the CD or FM

radio as this causes distortion and

reduces sound quality.

• If the music sounds distorted at lower

listening levels, turn the portable music

player volume down. If the problem

persists, replace or recharge the

batteries in the portable media player.

• Control the portable media player in

the same manner when used with

headphones, as the auxiliary input jack

does not provide control (such as Play

or Pause) over the attached portable

media player.

PHONE

E161968

385

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

PhoneA

Quick DialB

PhonebookC

HistoryD

MessagingE

SettingsF

Hands-free calling is one of the main

features of SYNC®. Once you pair your

phone, you can access many options using

the touchscreen or voice commands. While

the system supports a variety of features,

many are dependent on your cellular

phone’s functionality.

At a minimum, most cellular phones with

Bluetooth wireless technology support the

following functions:

• Answering an incoming call

• Ending a call

• Using privacy mode

• Dialing a number

• Redialing

• Call waiting notification

• Caller ID.

Other features, such as text messaging

using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook

download, are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone’s compatibility, see

your phone’s user manual and visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing Your Phone for the First

Time

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any handheld device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

The first thing you must do to use the

phone features of SYNC is to pair your

Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with

SYNC. This allows you to use your phone

in a hands-free manner.

Note: Put the transmission in position P.

Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.

1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left

corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC

appears on the screen, and instructs

you to begin the pairing process from

your device.

2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On

and that your cellular phone is in the

proper mode. See your phone’s manual

if necessary.

386

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN

appears on your device.

3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on

your device, it does not support Secure

Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN

displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the

next step.

4. When prompted on your phone’s

display, confirm that the PIN provided

by SYNC matches the PIN displayed

on your cellular phone.

5. The display indicates when the pairing

is successful.

SYNC may prompt you with more phone

options. For more information on your

phone's capability, see your phone's

manual and visit the website.

Pairing Subsequent Phones

Note: Put the transmission in position P.

Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.

1. Press the Phone corner of the

touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices

> Add Device.

2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On

and that your cellular phone is in the

proper mode. See your phone's manual

if necessary.

3. When prompted on your phone's

display, enter the six-digit PIN provided

by SYNC on the screen. The display

indicates when the pairing is

successful.

SYNC may prompt you with more phone

options. For more information on your

phone's capability, see your phone's

manual and visit the website.

Making Calls

E142599

Press the voice button on your

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say, "Call <name>"

or say "Dial", then the desired number.

E142632

To end the call or exit phone

mode, press and hold the phone

button.

Receiving Calls

During an incoming call, an audible tone

sounds. Call information appears in the

display if it is available.

Accept the call by pressing

Accept on the touchscreen or

by pressing this phone button on

your steering wheel controls.

E142632

Reject the call by pressing

Reject on the touchscreen or by

pressing and holding this phone

button on your steering wheel controls.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs

it as a missed call.

Phone Menu Options

Press the top left corner on your

touchscreen to select from the following

options:

Phone

Touch this button to access the on-screen

numerical pad to enter a number and place

a call. During an active call, you can also

choose to:

• Mute the call

• Put the call on hold

• Turn on the privacy feature

• Join two calls

• End the call.

Quick Dial

Set up favorite contacts from you

phonebook or history folder.

387

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Phonebook

Touch this button to access and call any

contacts in your previously downloaded

phone book. The system places the entries

in alphabetical categories summarized at

the top of the screen.

To turn on contact picture settings, if your

device supports this feature, press Phone

> Settings > Manage Phonebook >

Download photos from Phonebook >

On.

Certain smartphones may support

transferring street addresses when listed

with phone book contact information. If

your phone supports this feature, you can

select and use these addresses as

destinations and save them as favorites.

History

After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled

phone to SYNC, you can access any

previously dialed, received or missed calls.

You can also choose to save these to your

Favorites or to Quick Dial.

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

If your phone does not support downloading

call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps

track of calls made with the SYNC system.

Messaging

Send text messages using your

touchscreen. See Text messaging later

in this section.

Settings

Touch this button to access various phone

settings, such turning Bluetooth on and off,

managing your phonebook and more. See

Phone settings later in this section.

Text Messaging

Note: Downloading and sending text

messages using Bluetooth are

phone-dependent features.

Note: Certain features in text messaging

are speed-dependent and not available

when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over

3 mph (5 km/h).

Note: SYNC does not download read text

messages from your phone.

You can send and receive text messages

using Bluetooth, read them aloud and

translate text messaging acronyms, such

as LOL.

1. Touch the top left corner of the display

to access the Phone menu.

2. Select Messaging.

3. Choose from the following:

• Listen (speaker icon)

• Dial

• Send Text

• View

• Delete.

Composing a Text Message

Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.

It is unavailable when your vehicle is

traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Note: Downloading and sending text

messages using Bluetooth are

phone-dependent features.

1. Touch the top left corner of the display

to access the Phone menu.

2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.

3. Enter a phone number or choose from

your phonebook.

4. You can select from the following

options:

•Send, which sends the message as it

is.

•Edit Text, which allows you to

customize the pre-defined message or

create a message on your own.

388

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

You can then preview the message, verify

the recipient as well as update the

message list, and send it to a connected

device (such as a USB drive).

Text message options

I’ll call you back in a few minutes.

I just left, I’ll be there soon.

Can you give me a call?

I’m on my way.

I’m running a few minutes late.

I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.

I’m outside.

I’ll call you when I get there.

Yes

Thanks

Stuck in traffic.

Call me later.

LOL

Receiving a Text Message

Note: If you select View and your vehicle is

traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system

offers to read the message to you instead

of allowing you to view it while driving.

When a new message arrives, an audible

tone sounds and the screen displays a

pop-up with the caller name and ID, if

supported by your phone. You can press:

•View to view the text message.

•Listen for SYNC to read the message

to you.

•Dial to call the contact.

•Ignore to exit the screen.

Phone Settings

Press Phone > Settings.

Bluetooth Devices

Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add

or delete a device, as well as save it as a

favorite.

Bluetooth

Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.

389

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Do Not Disturb

Touch this tab if you want all calls to go

directly to your voice mail and not ring in

the vehicle. When this feature is on, text

message notifications do not ring inside

the cabin either.

911 Assist

Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.

See Information (page 402).

Phone Ringer

Select the ring tone you want to hear when

you receive a call. Choose from possible

system ring tones, your currently paired

phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech

or a silent notification.

Text Message Notification

Select a text message notification, if

supported by your phone. Choose from

possible system alert tones,

text-to-speech or silent.

Internet Data Connection

If your phone is compatible, use this screen

to adjust your internet data connection.

Select to make your connection profile

with the personal area network or to turn

off your connection. You can also choose

to adjust your settings or have the system

always connect, never connect when

roaming or query on connect. Press ? for

more information.

Manage Phonebook

Touch this button to access features such

as automatic phonebook download,

re-download your phonebook, add

contacts from your phone as well as delete

or upload your phonebook.

Roaming Warning

Touch this button to have the system alert

you when your phone is in roaming mode.

Phone Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the

following commands:

"PHONE"

"Join calls"*

"Call"

"Listen to text message <#>""Call <name>"

"Listen to text messages""Call <name> at home"

"Messages"**

"Call <name> at work"

"Mute call"*

"Call <name> on cell"

"Pair phone""Call <name> on other"

"Privacy on"*

"Call voicemail"

"Read text message""Dial"

390

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"PHONE"

"Reply to text messages""Do not disturb off"

"Turn ringer off""Do not disturb on"

"Turn ringer on""Forward text messages"

"Unmute call"*

"Go to hands free"*

"Help"

"Hold call off"*

"Hold on"*

* These commands are only available during an active call.

** If you say "Messages", see the following "Messages" chart for additional commands.

"MESSAGES"

"Call"

"Forward text messages"

"Listen to text message <#>"

"Listen to text messages"

"Reply to text messages"

"Help"

ELECTRIC VEHICLE

INFORMATION

E161716

Your system has special electric

vehicle screens, which display

power flow and charge settings.

To access these screens, press

the EV Info button.

391

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

E162199

SettingsA

PowerB

Settings (Energi Only)

This screen allows you to set up the

charging convenience features.

Note: You can also set up the charging

convenience features using MyFord Mobile

over the internet or smartphone application.

For more information on MyFord Mobile, and

to set up your MyFord Mobile account, visit

www.myfordmobile.com.

To improve the charging experience, your

vehicle has the following convenience

features:

•Value Charge: Your vehicle schedules

its charging time when the utility rates

are lowest. Contact your utility

company to see what rates are

available.

•Charge Now: Your vehicle starts

charging immediately after you

connect the charging plug to your

vehicle.

•My GO Time: Setting the My GO Time

allows you to control charging

schedules and cabin conditioning

settings so your vehicle is ready to drive

when you are. By setting a My GO Time,

your vehicle can use your value charge

settings to optimize charging and have

a complete charge before your next set

drive time. A calendar view allows you

to program two My GO Times per day

for each day of the week.

392

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Note: Remember, you must plug in your

vehicle for My GO Time to work.

•Cabin Conditioning: Get the most

miles out of every charge by

conditioning your vehicle while it is

plugged in. Set the cabin temperature

when you set your My GO Time so you

use energy from your home (or

charging station) instead of your

vehicle’s battery.

E161966

My GO Time summary displays the next My GO Time and cabin temperature

setting.

Estimated charge time limits displays the estimated minimum and maximum

times to fully charge the high-voltage battery and the battery’s current charge

as a percentage.

Charge profile and mode displays the current charging profile and charging

mode.

Charging status and actual times displays charging status with the charging

start time, end time, and duration.

My GO Time Summary

GO Time

This is the time and date of your next set

drive time. Your vehicle automatically

schedules charging and cabin conditioning

to finish by this time.

Temperature

This is the chosen cabin conditioning

setting for this My GO Time.

393

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Skip

This cancels the cabin conditioning for the

present My GO Time. Once you touch Skip,

the GO Time and Temperature grey out,

and the LED illuminates on the Skip button.

Touch the button again to turn on the

cabin conditioning. This feature allows you

to ignore the present GO Time without

having to delete the My GO Time or turning

off the entire schedule (see GO Time

Schedule later in this section). After the

present GO Time passes, the Skip feature

resets.

Edit

This accesses your My GO Time Schedule

(see GO Time Schedule later in this

section).

The system also alerts you to any conflicts

by highlighting areas of the screen in

yellow. If your battery cannot have a full

charge by the scheduled drive time, the

system highlights the current My GO Time

and Actual Charge End Time and a

message Charge at GO Time: under

100% appears. This is normal; the vehicle

is informing you of the conflicting situation.

This notification only displays when the

gearshift selector lever is in position P.

Note: Charging occurs as soon as you plug

the vehicle in. The system limits cabin

conditioning to 15 minutes before the My

GO Time.

To eliminate the conflict notification

immediately or to prevent a conflict in the

future, try the following:

• Change the present My GO Time to

occur later.

• Plug the vehicle into a 240V charging

station instead of 120V convenience

cord. Higher power charging yields

shorter charge times.

• Plug the vehicle in sooner.

Estimated Charge Time Limits

Battery

This shows you the battery's current

charge displayed as a percentage. A

reading of 100% means the battery has a

full charge. A reading of 0% indicates the

battery has no plug-in energy left.

To fully charge

240V is the estimated minimum charging

time from the current high-voltage battery

level to full charge (100%). This represents

the shortest amount of time you should

expect the high-voltage battery to

recharge under ideal conditions. Ideal

conditions include a 240V charging station

and a minimum 30A service and

high-voltage battery at a moderate

temperature.

Note: This charging time is only an

estimate. It is normal for your actual charge

duration to be longer.

Note: Some charging stations use lower

voltage (208V), which result in longer

charge times.

120V is the estimated maximum charging

time from the current high-voltage battery

level to full charge (100%). This represents

the longest amount of time you should

expect the high-voltage battery to

recharge under normal conditions. Normal

conditions include a 120V convenience

cord and 12A service.

Note: This charging time is only an

estimate. It is possible for your actual charge

duration to be longer. This occurs when the

AC line voltage is low and may indicate your

electrical source is not meeting certain

requirements. See Charging the High

Voltage Battery (page 157).

394

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Value Charge Profile and Mode

Value Charge Profile Name

This is the name of the presently detected

Value Charge Profile. The system detects

a customer defined value charge profile

when the vehicle is within approximately

300 feet (100 meters) of the GPS location

registered for the profile. If the vehicle is

close to more than one charge profile, it

chooses the closest. When the vehicle is

not at a defined profile, it uses the Default

Value charge profile. The system normally

displays Default Profile while you are

driving because the vehicle is typically

between defined value charge profiles.

Edit

Touch this button to access your Value

Charge profiles settings screen (see Value

Charge Profiles later in this section).

Charge Now

Touch this button if you want your vehicle

to immediately charge when plugged in at

this profile location. This button illuminates

if Charge Now is the current charge mode

for the currently detected charge profile.

Value Charge

Touch this button if you want to take

advantage of off-peak electricity rates. The

vehicle optimizes the charge schedule to

be complete by the next GO Time. This

button illuminates if Value Charge is the

current charge mode for the currently

detected charge profile.

Charging Status and Actual Times

This is the status of the charging system,

which includes the charging plug,

high-voltage battery and charger.

Next Charge

This means the vehicle is unplugged.

Estimated charge information is for the

present vehicle location.

Waiting to Charge

This means you plugged the vehicle in and

it is ready to charge. Typical of Value

Charge mode, the vehicle may not start

charging right away because it is set to

charge at times with lower utility costs.

Charging

This means the high-voltage battery is

charging.

Charged

This informs you that the high-voltage

battery is fully charged and not currently

scheduled for further charging.

Charge Fault

This alerts you that a fault is present and

is preventing the high-voltage battery from

charging. Inspect the charge plug

connection, charge cord and charging

station.

Start

This is the scheduled start time of charging.

•At Plug In: When the vehicle is in

Charge Now mode, and unplugged, the

message At Plug In appears, indicating

the vehicle immediately starts charging

once you plug it in. Once you plug it in,

the system shows the actual charge

start time.

•Scheduled Charge Start Time: When

the vehicle is in Value Charge mode,

the system displays the scheduled

charge start time (for example, 8:00

PM). Once charging starts, the system

continues to display the actual charge

start time.

395

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

End

This is the estimated end time of charging.

•Charge Now Duration: When the

vehicle is in Charge Now mode, and

unplugged, the system displays the

charging duration in hours. Once you

plug in the vehicle, the value shows the

estimated time to finish charging.

•Scheduled Charge End Time: When

the vehicle is in Value Charge mode,

the system displays the estimated

charge end time. It is normal for the

actual end time to change while

charging. The vehicle keeps charging

until the high-voltage battery is fully

charged.

GO Time Schedule

The highlighted button displays the current

schedule mode. Touch the Edit button

next to the My GO Time to see the GO

Time schedule.

This turns on the GO Time schedule.

Off

This turns off the GO Time schedule. This

also turns off the cabin conditioning

function. Use this mode when you store

your vehicle on-plug to prevent using

energy for cabin preconditioning.

Note: If you choose to perform Value

Charging with the schedule off, the vehicle

schedules charging to finish at the lowest

cost within 24 hours of plugging the vehicle

in.

GO Time events

This displays the GO Time day-of-week

and time. The blue highlighted GO Time is

the current GO Time the vehicle is using

for charge scheduling and cabin

conditioning. You can schedule two GO

Time events per day for each day of the

week.

•GO Time allows you to edit the GO

Time and cabin conditioning

temperature.

•--:-- indicates that you can add a GO

Time to this slot.

Note: If you set GO Time 2 to occur before

GO Time 1, a message pops up alerting you.

You need to go back to the previous screen

and change the times so GO Time 1 occurs

before GO Time 2.

GO Time and Cabin Conditioning

This screen allows you to enter or change

the GO Time and cabin conditioning

temperature.

Time (+ and -)

These change the hours and minutes of

your GO Time. The minutes change in

increments of five. You can also change

the settings for AM and PM by touching

those buttons.

Cabin Conditioning (+ and -)

These change the setting for your selected

cabin conditioning temperature for this GO

Time event. You can select from four

settings:

• 65°F (18.5°C)

• 72°F (22.0°C)

• 85°F (29.5°C)

• Off.

396

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Clear

Touching this button erases the GO Time

and cabin conditioning temperature.

Save

Touching this button stores the GO Time

and temperature settings.

Note: If you select a My GO Time, but

choose Off for the temperature setting, the

vehicle schedules charging to be complete

by your GO Time and does not condition the

cabin.

Note: Make sure you save your settings

before returning to the previous screen. If

you do not touch Save, your settings are not

stored in the system.

Value Charge Profiles

Touch the Edit button next to the profile

name to see the value charge profiles.

Default

This displays the charging mode and

off-peak times for your Default Value

Charge profile. The system displays

off-peak times for weekdays; the

remaining hours of the day are considered

peak time. The system displays similar

off-peak times for weekend days.

•Charge Now if you want your vehicle

to immediately charge when you plug

it in at this profile location.

•Value Charge if you want to take

advantage of off-peak electricity rates.

The vehicle optimizes the charge

schedule to be complete by the next

GO Time.

•Edit to access your Default Value

Charge Profile settings screen (see

Default Value Charge Profile later in

this section).

Customer Defined Value Charge Profiles

Once you create profile names, this section

displays the Value Charge Profile names

and current Charge Mode for specific

locations. You can set up and edit these

profiles using the MyFord Mobile internet

or smartphone application. You can

program up to nine unique charge profiles.

Default Value Charge Profile

Weekday and Weekend

Touch the Edit button to set the off-peak

charge times. Set the Weekday times and

Weekend time (by touching the Weekday

and Weekend buttons), then touch Save.

The system does not store your settings

until you make selections for both

Weekday and Weekend. If you touch the

back arrow button to return to the previous

screen without saving your settings, the

system does not store them and you need

to enter them again.

Start and Finish

These buttons display the times, which you

can modify, using the following:

•+ and - allow you to change the hours

of your start and finish times.

•AM and PM allow you to change the

time of your start and finish time. This

setting is viewable in 12-hour mode.

240V and 120V

These represent the voltage service the

default profile is using. The system uses

this selection to calculate estimated

charge times.

Clear

Touching this button erases the Default

Value Charge preferences.

397

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Save All

Touching this button stores your Default

Value Charge preferences

Note: Make sure you save your settings

before returning to the previous screen. If

you do not touch Save, your settings are not

stored in the system.

Power

M L J

E161967

Motor-to-wheel flow shows the direction of power flow between the wheels

and the electric motor.

Electric Motor represents the hybrid electric motor. The higher the motor

power is, the larger the circle around this node. Any time the vehicle is ready to

be driven, the motor node illuminates.

Battery-to-motor flow1 shows the direction of power flow between the

high-voltage battery and the electric motor. Flow toward the motor indicates

the battery is providing power to accelerate the vehicle (discharging the battery).

Flow toward the battery indicates the electric motor is providing power to the

battery (charging the battery).

Plug (Energi only) appears when you plug your vehicle into the wall. When

charging the high voltage battery from the wall, you can see flow from the plug

to the battery on the screen.

Other2 includes all power usage from the low voltage accessories such as the

climate control fan, headlights and heated seats. The higher the power usage

is from these accessories, the larger the circle around the node. This node

illuminates anytime the vehicle is on since there is always some low level power

in use.

398

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Climate2,3 includes the power usage from the high-voltage climate control

components such as the electric A/C compressor and the electric heater (Energi

only). The higher the power usage is from these components, the larger the

circle around this node.

High voltage battery power represents your high-voltage battery. A circle

illuminates around the node when the high-voltage battery is receiving power

from regenerative braking, engine charging or external charging (when you plug

it in). The higher the power going into the high-voltage battery, the larger the

circle around this node.

Fuel represents the fuel tank in the vehicle.H

Fuel-to-engine flow shows flow from the fuel tank to the engine when the

engine is on and using fuel (there are some cases where the engine is on, but

not using any fuel). When the engine is on, but not using fuel, the engine node

is active, but the fuel flow path is off. An example of this is when your foot is

off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle is traveling at a high speed.

Engine On due to provides you with the reason(s) the gasoline engine is on.

When the gasoline engine is off, this display does not appear. Engine On due

to reasons displayed by the system are in a chart following this list.

Motor-to-engine flow shows the direction of power flow between the engine

and the electric motor. The direction indicates if the engine is providing power

to the high-voltage electrical system, or if the high-voltage electrical system is

providing power to control or start the engine.

Engine power represents the gasoline engine. It illuminates only when the

gasoline engine is on. The higher the engine power is, the larger the circle around

this node.

Engine-to-wheels flow shows the direction of the power flow between the

engine and the wheels.

Drive power represents the power going to the wheels. The higher the wheel

power is, the larger the circle around this node. When the engine is off, drive

power is shown in blue. When the engine is on, drive power is shown in grey.

1The battery-to-motor flow includes

battery power the vehicle is using for

acceleration. It does not include energy the

vehicle is using for accessories (such as air

conditioning, headlights and radio). This

screen displays accessories and climate

usage separately.

2Accessories indicates electrical power

demands from your vehicle’s accessory

systems. Accessories use power but do not

contribute to making the vehicle move. The

power flow displays power usage from the

climate control system and other

accessories separately.

3The climate control system may

determine A/C is necessary even when you

turn it off. In this case, you may see some

climate power when the A/C is off.

399

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Engine On due to

The engine is on to warm-up. The vehicle

returns to electric mode when the engine

is warm. This reason may reappear during

a drive or after shutting the vehicle down

for a short period. This is normal operation.

Engine Cold (Hybrid only)

The engine is on because of the heater

setting. Reduce or turn off the heater

setting to return to electric mode.

Heater Setting

The engine is on because the vehicle speed

exceeds the level for electric mode opera-

tion. Reduce the speed to return to electric

mode.

High Speed

The engine is on because the speed control

is on or you are pressing the accelerator

pedal. Reduce pressure on the accelerator

pedal or turn the speed control off to return

to full electric mode.

Acceleration

The engine is on because the vehicle is in

neutral gear. Shift out of neutral gear to

return to electric mode.

Neutral Gear

The engine is on because the vehicle is in

low gear. Shift out of low gear to return to

electric mode.

Low Gear

The engine is on to charge the high-voltage

battery. The vehicle returns to electric mode

once the battery is charged.

Battery Charging

The engine is on to provide increased

powertrain braking when you turn on the

grade assist feature. Turn off the grade

assist feature to return to electric mode.

Grade Assist

400

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Engine On due to

The engine is on to maintain engine oil

quality. The vehicle returns to electric mode

when engine oil maintenance is complete.

See Engine Oil Check (page 237).

Oil Maintenance (Energi Only)

The engine is on due to high or low high-

voltage battery temperature. This is a

normal operating condition. The vehicle

returns to electric mode automatically

when possible.

Batt Temperature (Energi Only)

The engine is on to optimize vehicle opera-

tion. The vehicle returns to electric mode

when possible.

Normal Operation

Status

This indicates which mode is active within

the vehicle system.

Hybrid Drive

The electric motor and gasoline engine are

powering vehicle.

Charging HV Battery

The hybrid system is storing power in the

high-voltage battery.

Idle

The vehicle is either at rest, or sharing very

little power between the electric system

parts.

Idle with Charging

The high-voltage battery is receiving power

in order to recharge.

Electric Drive

The vehicle is driving in electric mode (the

power is coming from the electric motor).

The gasoline engine is off in this mode.

Charge Complete (Energi only)

The high-voltage battery charging from

the wall is complete.

401

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

INFORMATION

E161889

SYNC ServicesA

SIRIUS Travel LinkB

AlertsC

CalendarD

SYNC ApplicationsE

Under the Information menu, you can

access features such as:

• SYNC Services

• SIRIUS Travel Link

• Alerts

• Calendar

• SYNC Applications

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, press the

Information button to access

these features. If your vehicle is not

equipped with Navigation, press the corner

of the touchscreen with the green tab.

SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.

Only)

Note: SYNC Services requires activation

before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to

complimentary services. Standard phone

and message rates may apply. Subscription

may be required. You must also have the

active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled

cellular phone paired and connected to the

system in order to connect to, and use,

SYNC Services. See Phone (page 385).

402

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Note: This feature does not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure

your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID

before using SYNC Services.

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible

for the safe operation of the vehicle, and

therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe

to follow the suggested directions. Any

navigation features provided are only an aid.

Make your driving decisions based on your

observations of local conditions and existing

traffic regulations. Do not follow the route

suggestions if doing so would result in an

unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be

placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would

be directed into an area that you consider

unsafe. Maps used by this system may be

inaccurate because of errors, changes in

roads, traffic conditions or driving

conditions.

Note: When you connect, the service uses

GPS technology and advanced vehicle

sensors to collect your vehicle's current

location, travel direction and speed to help

provide you with the directions, traffic

reports, or business searches you request.

Further, to provide the services you request,

for continuous improvement, the service

may collect and record call details and voice

communications. For more information, see

SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want

Ford or its service providers to collect your

vehicle travel information or other

information identified in the Terms and

Conditions, do not subscribe or use the

service.

SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle

sensors, integrated GPS technology and

comprehensive map and traffic data, to

give you personalized traffic reports,

precise turn-by-turn directions, business

search, news, sports, weather and more.

For a complete list of services, or to learn

more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

Voice Commands

E142599

1. Press the voice button.

2. When prompted, say "Services". This

initiates an outgoing call to SYNC

Services using your paired and

connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular

phone.

3. Once you connect to the service, follow

the voice prompts to request the

desired service, such as "Traffic" or

"Directions". You can also say, "What

are my choices?" to receive a list of

available services from which to

choose.

4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services

main menu or for help, say, "Help".

Connecting to SYNC Services Using

the Touchscreen

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, press the

Information button.

If your vehicle is not equipped with

Navigation, press the green tab on your

touchscreen.

1. Select Connect to Services to initiate

an outgoing call to SYNC Services

using your phone.

2. Once connected, follow the voice

prompts to request your desired

Service, such as "Traffic" or

"Directions". You can also say, "What

are my choices?" to receive a list of

available services from which to

choose.

3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services

main menu or for help, say, "Help".

403

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions

1. When connected to SYNC Services,

say "Directions" or "Business search".

To find the closest business or type of

business to your current location, just

say "Business search" and then

"Search near me". If you need further

assistance in finding a location you can

say "Operator" at any time within a

Directions or Business search to speak

with a live operator. The system may

prompt you to speak with an operator

when it has difficulty matching your

voice request. The live operator can

assist you by searching for businesses

by name or by category, residential

addresses by street address or by

name or specific street intersections.

Operator Assist is a feature of your

SYNC Services subscription. For more

information on Operator Assist, visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.

2. Follow the voice prompts to select your

Destination. After the route download

is finished, the phone call automatically

ends.

If your vehicle is not equipped with

Navigation:

• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the

information display, in the status bar

of your touchscreen system and on the

SYNC Services screen. You also receive

driving instructions from audible

prompts.

• When on an active route, you can

select Route Summary or Route

Status using the touchscreen controls

or voice commands to view the Route

Summary Turn List or the Route

Status ETA. You can also turn voice

guidance on or off, cancel the route or

update the route.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks

if you want the route updated. Just say,

"Yes" when prompted and the system

delivers a new route to your vehicle.

If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,

SYNC Services downloads your requested

destination to the navigation system. The

navigation system then calculates the

route and provides driving instructions.

See Navigation (page 414).

Disconnecting from SYNC Services

1. Press and hold the hang-up phone

button on the steering wheel.

2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC

Services main menu.

404

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

SYNC Services quick tips

You can personalize your Services feature to provide

quicker access to your most used or favorite information.

You can save address points, such as work or home. You

can also save favorite information like sports teams, such

as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more

about personalization by logging onto

www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Personalizing

Press the voice button at any time (while connected to

SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio

clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.

Push to interrupt

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-

enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle

Identification Number). You can pair and connect your

phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and

Information and continue enjoying your personalized

services.

Portable

SYNC Services Voice Commands

E142599

When a route has been

downloaded (non-navigation

systems), press the voice button

on the steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the following

commands:

"SERVICES"

"Cancel route"

"Navigation voice off"

"Navigation voice on"

"Next turn"

"Route status"

"Route summary"

"SERVICES"

"Services"

"Update route"

"Help"

SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped)

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in

loss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using any

device that may take your focus off the

road. Your primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We recommend

against the use of any handheld device

while driving and encourage the use of

voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use of

electronic devices while driving.

405

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link,

your vehicle must be equipped with

navigation and your navigation SD card

must be in the SD card slot.

Note: A paid subscription is required to

access and use these features. Go to

www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more

information.

Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and

click on Coverage map and details for a

complete listing of all traffic areas covered

by SIRIUS Travel Link.

Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible

for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS

Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.

When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link,

it can help you locate the best gas prices,

find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,

view the current weather map, get

accurate ski conditions and see scores to

current sports games.

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, touch the i

(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is not

equipped with Navigation, touch the corner

of the touchscreen with the green tab.

Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby

Touch these buttons to identify traffic

incidents on your route, nearby your

vehicle’s current location or near any of

your favorite places, if programmed.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view fuel prices at

stations close to your vehicle’s location or

on an active navigation route.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view nearby movie

theaters and their show times, if available.

Weather

Touch this button to view the nearby

weather, current weather, or the five day

forecast for the chosen area. Select Map

to see the weather map, which can show

storms, radar information, charts and

winds. Select Area to select from a listing

of weather locations.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view scores and

schedules from a variety of sports. You can

also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier

access. The score automatically refreshes

when a game is in progress.

Ski Conditions

Touch this button to view ski conditions

for a specific area.

SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the

following commands:

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"5-day weather forecast"

"Fuel prices"

"Movie listings"

"Sports headlines"*

"Sports schedules"*

"Sports scores"*

"Traffic"

"Weather"

406

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"

"Weather map"

"Help"

* If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports

schedules" or "Sports scores", you can

then say any of the commands in the

following chart.

Sports-related commands

"Baseball"

"College basketball"

"College football"

"Golf"

"MLS"

"My teams"

"NBA"

"NFL"

"NHL"

"WNBA"

"Help"

Additional sports-related voice

commands

"Baseball headlines"

"Baseball schedule"

"Baseball scores"

"College basketball headlines"

"College basketball schedule"

"College basketball scores"

"College football headlines"

Additional sports-related voice

commands

"College football schedule"

"College football scores"

"Golf headlines"

"Golf leaderboard"

"Golf schedule"

"MLS headlines"

"MLS schedule"

"MLS scores"

"Motor sports headlines"

"Motor sports order"

"Motor sports schedule"

"My team headlines"

"My teams schedule"

"My teams scores"

"NBA headlines"

"NBA schedule"

"NBA scores"

"NFL headlines"

"NFL schedule"

"NFL scores"

"NHL headlines"

"NHL schedule"

"NHL scores"

"WNBA headlines"

407

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Additional sports-related voice

commands

"WNBA schedule"

"WNBA scores"

"Help"

Alerts

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, touch the i

(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is not

equipped with Navigation, touch the corner

of the touchscreen with the green tab.

Press Alerts, and then choose from any

of the following services:

•View the complete message.

•Delete the message.

•Delete All messages.

This screen displays any system messages

(such as an SD card fault).

Note: The system alerts you to any

messages by turning the information icon

yellow. After you read or delete the

messages, the icon returns to white.

Calendar

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, touch the i

(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is not

equipped with Navigation, touch the corner

of the touchscreen with the green tab.

Press Calendar. You can view the current

calendar by day, week or month.

911 Assist (If Equipped)

WARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on

before a crash, the system will not

dial for help, which could delay

response time, potentially increasing the

risk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an

emergency call if you can do it

yourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed response

time, which could increase the risk of

serious injury or death after a crash. If you

do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds

of the crash, the system or phone may be

damaged or non-functional.

Always place your phone in a secure

location in your vehicle so it does not

become a projectile or damaged in

a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious

injury to someone or damage the phone,

which could prevent 911 Assist from

working properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be

set on prior to the incident.

Note: Before setting this feature on, make

sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy

Notice later in this section for important

information.

Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,

that setting applies for all paired phones. If

911 Assist is turned off, either a voice

message plays or a display message (or

icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle

is started after a previously paired phone

connects.

Note: Every phone operates differently.

While SYNC 911 Assist works with most

cellular phones, some may have trouble

using this feature.

408

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee

airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if

equipped]) or activates the fuel pump

shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may

be able to contact emergency services by

dialing 911 through a paired and connected

Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn

more about the 911 Assist feature, visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com,

www.SYNCMyRide.ca or

www.syncmaroute.ca.

See Supplementary Restraints System

(page 33). Important information

regarding airbag deployment is in this

chapter.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 218).

Important information regarding the fuel

pump shut-off is in this chapter.

Setting 911 Assist On

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, touch the i

(Information) button to access

these features. If your vehicle is not

equipped with Navigation, touch the corner

of the touchscreen with the green tab.

Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.

E142607

You can also access 911 Assist

by:

• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings

> Phone > 911 Assist, or

• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911

Assist.

To make sure that 911 Assist works

properly:

• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident and

throughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set on

prior to the incident.

• You must pair and connect a

Bluetooth-enabled and compatible

phone to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have the ability to make and

maintain an outgoing call at the time

of the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone

must have adequate network coverage,

battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery power

and be located in the U.S., Canada or

in a territory in which 911 is the

emergency number.

In the Event of a Crash

Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate

the fuel pump shut-off (which would

trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to

contact emergency services if 911 Assist

triggers. If a connected phone sustains

damage or loses connection to SYNC,

SYNC searches for, and tries to connect

to, any available previously paired phone

and tries to make the call to 911.

Before making the call:

• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.

If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC

attempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similar

message: "SYNC will attempt to call

911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on

your screen or press and hold the

phone button on your steering wheel."

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC

makes a successful call, a pre-recorded

message plays for the 911 operator, and

then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able

to talk with the operator. Be prepared to

provide your name, phone number and

location immediately, because not all 911

systems are capable of receiving this

information electronically.

409

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

911 Assist May Not Work If

• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.

• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.

• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected to

the system.

911 Assist Privacy Notice

When you turn on 911 Assist, it may

disclose to emergency services that your

vehicle has been in a crash involving the

deployment of an airbag or activation of

the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or

updates to 911 Assist may also be capable

of electronically or verbally disclosing to

911 operators your vehicle location or other

details about your vehicle or crash to assist

911 operators to provide the most

appropriate emergency services. If you do

not want to disclose this information, do

not turn the feature on.

Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)

WARNING

Always follow scheduled

maintenance instructions, regularly

inspect your vehicle, and seek repair

for any damage or problem you suspect.

Vehicle Health Report supplements, but

cannot replace, normal maintenance and

vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report

only monitors certain systems

electronically monitored by your vehicle

and will not monitor or report the status

of any other system, (such as brake lining

wear). Failure to perform scheduled

maintenance and regularly inspect your

vehicle may result in vehicle damage and

serious injury.

Note: This feature is only available in the

United States.

Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature

requires activation prior to use. Visit

www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There

is no fee or subscription associated with

Vehicle Health Report, but you must register

to use this feature.

Note: This feature may not function

properly if you have enabled caller ID

blocking on your cellular phone. Before

running a report, review the Vehicle Health

Report Privacy Notice.

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for

your vehicle, you may not be able to create

a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle

odometer has reached 200 miles.

Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may

apply when making a report.

your report preferences at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,

you can request a Vehicle Health Report

(inside your vehicle). Return to your

account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view

your report. You can also choose for SYNC

to remind you automatically to run reports

at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone

airtime usage may apply when reporting.

The system allows you to check your

vehicle’s overall health in the form of a

diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health

Report contains valuable information, such

as:

• Vehicle diagnostic information

• Scheduled maintenance

• Open recalls and Field Service Actions

• Items noted during vehicle inspections

by your authorized dealer that still need

servicing.

Making a Report

E142608

If you want to run a report by

using the touchscreen, touch

Apps > Vehicle Health Report.

410

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

E142599

To run a report by voice

command, press the voice

button on the steering wheel

and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health

report".

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice

When you create a Vehicle Health Report,

Ford Motor Company may collect your

cellular phone number (to process your

report request) and diagnostic information

about your vehicle. Certain versions or

updates to Vehicle Health Report may also

collect more vehicle information. Ford may

use your vehicle information it collects for

any purpose. If you do not want to disclose

your cellular phone number or vehicle

information, do not run the feature or set

up your Vehicle Health Report profile at

www.SYNCMyRide.com. See

www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health

Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy

Statement) for more information.

CLIMATE

Press the lower right corner on the

touchscreen to access your climate control

features. Depending on your vehicle line

and option package, your climate screen

may look different from the screen shown

here.

E146187

Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot enter your

vehicle when you turn off the system.

Passenger settings: Touch DUAL to switch passenger side temperature

controls on and off. Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the

heated seat icon to control the heated seat.

Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated

in your vehicle.

411

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and

recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the button illuminates and

the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce

the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may also reduce

unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off

automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of

fogging.

MAX A/C: Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air. Touch again for

normal A/C operation. MAX A/C distributes air through instrument panel vents

and may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle. MAX A/C is more

economical and efficient than normal A/C mode.

A/C: Touch to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air conditioning when

starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three

minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and

efficiency.

AUTO: Touch to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired

temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts

fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to heat

or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.

Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated mirrors

(if equipped).

Manual airflow distribution controls:Floor and Defrost: Distributes air

through the windshield defroster vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear

seat floor vents, and provides outside air to reduce window fogging. Panel:

Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. Panel and Floor: Distributes

air through the instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat

floor vents. Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and

rear seat floor vents. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield

air vents and automatically switches the air conditioning on. Touch to clear the

windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again to return to the previous airflow

selection.

Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may have

the following features: Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the

heated seat icon to control the heated seat. Touch MyTemp to select your

previously pre-set temperature setpoint. Touch and hold MyTemp store a new

pre-set for temperature setpoint.

Climate Control Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button on the

steering wheel controls. When

prompted, say any of the

following commands:

Climate Control Commands

"Climate automatic"

"Climate my temperature"

"Climate off"

412

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Climate Control Commands

"Climate on"

"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5>

degrees"

"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"

"Help"

There are additional climate control

commands but in order to access them,

you have to say "Climate" first. When the

system is ready to listen, you may say any

of the following commands:

"CLIMATE"

"A/C off"

"A/C on"

"Automatic"

"Defrost off"

"Defrost on"

"Dual off"

"Fan decrease"

"Fan increase"

"Floor on"

"MAX A/C off"

"MAX A/C on"

"Maximum fan

"Minimum fan"

"My temp"

"Off"

"On"

"Panel floor on"

"CLIMATE"

"Panel on"

"Rear defrost on"

"Rear defrost off"

"Recirc off"

"Recirc on"

"Temperature"*

"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"

"Temperature <60-85> degrees"

"Temperature decrease"

"Temperature high"

"Temperature increase"

"Temperature low"

"Windshield floor on"

"Windshield off"

"Windshield panel floor on"

"Help"

* If you say "Temperature", you can then

say any of the commands in the following

chart.

"TEMPERATURE"

"<15.5-29.5> degrees"

"<60-85> degrees"

"High"

"Low"

"Help"

413

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

NAVIGATION

Note: The navigation SD card must be in

the SD card slot to operate the navigation

system. If you need a replacement SD card,

see an authorized dealer.

Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To

remove the SD card, just push the card in

and release it. Do not attempt to pull the

card out to remove it; this could cause

damage.

Your navigation system is comprised of

two main features, destination mode and

map mode.

To set a destination, press the green corner

of your touchscreen, then the Dest button

when it appears. See Setting a

destination later in this chapter.

To view the navigation map and your

vehicle's current location, touch the green

bar in the upper right hand corner of the

touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See

Map mode later in this chapter.

Setting a Destination

Press the green corner of your touchscreen,

then the Dest button when it appears.

Choose any of the following:

Destination

My Home

Favorites

Previous Destinations

Point of Interest

Emergency

Street Address

Intersection

Destination

City Center

Map

Edit Route Cancel Route

1. Enter the necessary information into

the highlighted text fields (in any

order). For address destination entry,

the Go! button appears once you enter

all the necessary information. Pressing

the Go! button makes the address

location appear on the map. If you

choose Previous Destination, the last

20 destinations you have selected

appear.

2. Select Set as Dest to make this your

destination. You can also choose to set

this as a waypoint (have the system

route to this point on the way to your

current destination) or save it as a

favorite. The system considers any

Avoid Areas selections in its route

calculation.

3. Choose from up to three different types

of routes, and then select Start Route.

• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads

possible.

• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance

possible.

• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient

route.

You can cancel the route or have the

system demo the route for you. Select

Route Prefs to set route preferences like

avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and

car trains as well as to use or not use

high-occupancy vehicle lanes.

(High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also

known as carpool or diamond lanes.

People who ride in buses, vanpools or

carpools use these lanes.)

414

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road

and you do not press the Start Route

button, the system defaults to the Fastest

Route option and begins guidance.

During route guidance, you can press the

talking bubble icon that appears in the

upper right navigation corner (green bar)

if you want the system to repeat route

guidance information. When the system

repeats the last guidance instruction, it

updates the distance to the next guidance

instruction, since it detects when the

vehicle is moving.

Point of Interest (POI) Categories

Main categories

Food/Drink & Dining

Travel & Transportation

Financial

Emergency

Community

Health & Medicine

Automotive

Shopping

Main categories

Entertainment & Arts

Recreation & Sports

Government

Domestic Services

Subcategories

Restaurant

Golf

Parking

Home & Garden

Personal Care Services

Auto Dealership

Govt Office

Public Transit

Education

To expand these listings, press the + in

front of the listing.

The system also allows you to sort

alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr

listings (if available).

415

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Range Rings and Charge Points (Energi Only)

E161378

Shaded rings appear on the map when you

are driving in EV Now mode. The inner ring

with no shading indicates a safe range you

can travel using plug-in power only. The

lightly shaded outer band reflects areas

you may or may not be able to reach while

in EV Now mode. If your destination is

within this band, your vehicle may operate

in Auto EV mode, running the engine as

needed. The darker shaded area, beyond

the rings, is not likely reachable using only

the vehicle's available plug-in energy.

The rings represent approximate ranges.

Actual route distances, road grades,

vehicle speed, accessory usage and other

conditions affect how far your vehicle can

travel in EV Now mode before recharging.

You can turn off the rings in the Settings

menu. Press the Settings icon >

Navigation > Map Preferences.

You can turn the charge point POI on and

off. Touch the map, use the buttons at the

bottom of the screen, and then select the

POI icon button. The icons only appear at

a map scale of 5 miles (8 kilometers) and

lower.

cityseekr

Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)

information is limited to approximately 154

cities (132 in the United States, 13 in Canada

and 9 in Mexico).

E142634

cityseekr, when available, is a service that

provides more information about certain

points of interest such as restaurants,

hotels and attractions.

When you have selected a point of interest,

the location and information appear, such

as address and phone number. If cityseekr

lists the point of interest, more information

is available, such as a brief description,

check-in and checkout times or restaurant

hours.

416

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Press More Information for a longer

review, a list of services and facilities, the

average room or meal price as well as the

website. This screen displays the point of

interest icon such as:

E143884

Hotel

E142636

Coffeehouse

E142637

Food & Drink

E142638

Nightlife

E142639

Attraction

E142640

This icon appears when your

selection exists in multiple

categories within the system.

When you are viewing more information

for hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the

hotel has certain services and facilities

using icons, such as:

• Restaurant

• Business center

• Handicap facilities

• Laundry

• Refrigerator

• 24 hour room service

• Fitness center

• Internet access

• Pool

• Wi-fi.

For restaurants, cityseekr can provide

information such as star rating, average

cost, review, handicap access, hours of

operation, and website address.

For hotels, cityseekr can provide

information such as star rating, price

category, review, check-in and checkout

times, hotel service icons and website

address.

Setting Your Navigation

Preferences

Select settings for the system to take into

account when planning your route.

E142607

Press the Settings icon >

Settings > Navigation.

Map Preferences

Breadcrumbs

Display your vehicle’s previously traveled

route with white dots. Turn this feature ON

or OFF.

Turn List Format

Have the system display your turn list Top

to Bottom or Bottom to Top.

Parking POI Notification

Set the automatic parking point of interest

notification. Turn this feature ON or OFF.

When parking point of interest notification

is on, the icons display on the map when

you get close to your destination. This may

not be very useful in dense areas, and may

clutter the map when other points of

interest display.

417

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Route Preferences

Preferred Route

Choose to have the system display the

Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route

first.

Always Use Preferred Route

Bypass route selection in destination

programming. The system only calculates

one route based on preferred route setting.

Eco Time Penalty

Select a low, medium or high cost for the

calculated Eco Route. The higher the

setting, the longer the time allotment is for

the route.

Avoid

These features allow you to choose to

have the system avoid freeways, toll roads,

ferries and car trains when planning your

route. Turn these features ON or OFF.

Use HOV Lanes

Have the system use high-occupancy

vehicle lanes, if available, when planning

your route.

Navigation Preferences

Guidance Prompts

Have the system use Voice & Tones or

Tone Only on your programmed route.

Auto - Fill State/Province

Have the system automatically fill in the

state and province based on the

information already entered into the

system. Turn this feature ON or OFF.

Traffic Preferences

Avoid Traffic Problems

Choose how you want the system to

handle traffic problems along your route.

•Automatic: Have the system reroute

you to avoid traffic incidents that

develop and impact the current route.

The system does not provide a traffic

alert notification.

•Manual: Have the system always

provide a traffic alert notification for

traffic incidents along the planned

route. You have a choice to accept or

ignore the notification before making

the route deviation.

Traffic Alert Notification

Have the system display traffic alert

notifications.

Other traffic alert features allows you to

turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the

map such as road work, incident, accidents

and closed roads. Scroll down to view all

the different types of alerts. Turn these

features ON or OFF.

Avoid Areas

Choose areas which you want the system

to avoid when calculating a route for you.

Press Add to program an entry. Once you

make a selection, the system tries to avoid

the area(s) if possible for all routes. To

delete a selection, choose the listing on

the screen. When the screen changes to

Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete

at the bottom right of the screen.

Map Mode

Press the green bar in the upper right area

of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map

mode shows advanced viewing comprised

of both 2D city maps as well as 3D

landmarks (when available).

418

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

2D city maps show detailed outlines of

buildings, visible land use and land

elements and detailed railway

infrastructure for the most essential cities

around the globe. These maps also contain

features, such as town blocks, building

footprints, and railways.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible

objects that are typically recognizable and

have a certain tourist value. The 3D

landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.

Coverage varies, and improves with

updated map releases.

E142641

Change the appearance of the map display

by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in

the upper left corner of the screen. It

toggles between three different map

modes: Heading up, North up, and 3D.

E142642

Heading up (2D map) always

shows the direction of forward

travel to be upward on the screen.

This view is available for map

scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The

system remembers this setting for larger

map scales, but shows the map in North

up only. If the scale returns below this level,

the system restores Heading up.

E142643

North up (2D map) always shows

the northern direction to be

upward on the screen.

E142644

3D map mode provides an

elevated perspective of the map.

This viewing angle can be adjusted

and the map can be rotated 180

degrees by touching the map twice, and

then dragging your finger along the shaded

bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

E146188

Re-center the map by pressing

this icon whenever you scroll the

map away from your vehicle’s

current location.

Auto Zoom

Press the green bar to access map mode,

then select the + or - zoom button to bring

up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the

touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto

Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the

bottom left corner of the screen in the map

scale. The map zoom level then

synchronizes with vehicle speed. The

slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther

in the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle

is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.

To turn the feature off, just press the + or

- button again.

In 3D mode, rotate the map view by

swiping your finger across the shaded bar

with the arrows.

Map Icons

E142646

Vehicle mark shows the current

location of your vehicle. It stays

in the center of the map display,

except when in scroll mode.

E142647

Scroll cursor allows you to scroll

the map; the fixed icon is in the

center of the screen. The map

position closest to the cursor is in

a window on the top center part of the

screen.

419

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

E142648

Address book entry default

icon(s) indicates the location on

the map of an address book entry.

This is the default symbol shown

after the entry has been stored to the

Address Book by any method other than

the map. You can select from any of the

22 icons available. You can use each icon

more than once.

E142649

Home indicates the location on

the map currently stored as the

home position. You can only save

one address from the Address

Book as your Home entry. You cannot

change this icon.

E142650

POI (Point Of Interest) icons

indicate locations of any point of

interest categories you choose to

display on the map. You can

choose to display three point of interest

categories on the map at one time.

E142651

Starting point indicates the

starting point of a planned route.

E142652

Waypoint indicates the location

of a waypoint on the map. The

number inside the circle is different

for each waypoint and represents

the position of the waypoint in the route

list.

E142653

Destination symbol indicates the

ending point of a planned route.

E142654

Next maneuver point indicates

the location of the next turn on the

planned route.

E142655

No GPS symbol indicates that

insufficient GPS satellite signals

are available for accurate map

positioning. This icon may display

under normal operation in an area with

poor GPS access.

Quick-touch Buttons

When in map mode, touch anywhere on

the map display to access the following

options:

Set as Dest

Touch this button to select a scrolled

location on the map as your destination.

You may scroll the map by pressing your

index finger on the map display. When you

reach the desired location, simply let go

and then touch Set as Dest.

Set as Waypoint

Touch this button to set the current

location as a waypoint.

Save to Favorites

Touch this button to save the current

location to your favorites.

POI Icons

Touch this button to select icons to display

on the map. You can select up to three

icons to display on the map at the same

time. Turn these ON or OFF.

Cancel Route

Touch this button to cancel the active

route.

View/Edit Route

Access these features when a route is

active:

• View Route

• Edit Destination/Waypoints

• Edit Turn List

• Detour

• Edit Route Preferences

• Edit Traffic Preferences

• Cancel Route.

420

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Navteq is the digital map provider for the

navigation application. If you find map data

errors, you may report them directly to

Navteq by going to

http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq

evaluates all reported map errors and

responds with the result of their

investigation by e-mail.

Navigation Map Updates

Annual navigation map updates are

available for purchase through your

dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in

Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going

to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to

specify the make and model of your vehicle

to determine if there is an update available.

Navigation Voice Commands

E142599

When in navigation mode, press

the voice button on the steering

wheel controls. After the tone,

say any of the following commands:

Navigation system voice commands

"Cancel next waypoint" 1

"Cancel route"1

"Destination"2

"Destination <nametag>"

"Destination <POI category>"

"Destination favorites"

"Destination home"

"Destination intersection"

"Destination nearest <POI category>"

"Destination nearest POI"

"Destination play nametags"

Navigation system voice commands

"Destination POI"

"Destination POI category"

"Destination previous destination"

"Destination street address"

"Detour"1

"Navigation"3

"Navigation voice volume decrease"

"Navigation voice volume increase"

"Repeat instruction"1

"Show 3D"

"Show heading up"

"Show map"

"Show north up"

"Show route"1

"Show turn list"1

"Voice guidance off"

"Voice guidance on"

"Where am I?"

"Zoom in"

421

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Navigation system voice commands

"Zoom out"

"Help"

1 These commands are only available when

a navigation route is active.

2 If you say "Destination", you can then say

any command in the following

"Destination" chart.

3 If you say "Navigation", you can then say

any command in the following

"Navigation" chart.

"DESTINATION"

"<nametag>"

"<POI category>"

"Favorites"

"Home"

"Intersection"

"Nearest <POI category>"

"Nearest POI"

"Play nametags"

"POI category"

"Previous destination"

"Street address"

"Help"

"NAVIGATION"

"Destination"*

"Zoom city"

"Zoom country"

"Zoom minimum"

"NAVIGATION"

"Zoom maximum"

"Zoom province"

"Zoom state"

"Zoom street"

"Zoom to <distance>"

"Help"

* If you say "Destination", you can then say

any command in the "Destination" chart.

One-shot Destination Street Address

When you say either "Navigation

destination street address" or "Destination

street address", the system asks you to say

the full address. The system displays an

example on-screen. You can then speak

the address naturally, such as "One two

three four Main Street, Anytown".

422

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT

SYNC® End User License

Agreement (EULA)

• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")

that includes software licensed by Ford

Motor Company and its affiliates

("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an

affiliate of Microsoft Corporation

("MS") . Those installed software

products of MS origin, as well as

associated media, printed materials,

and "online" or electronic

documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")

are protected by international

intellectual property laws and treaties.

The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not

• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with

and/or communicate with, or may be

later upgraded to interface with and/or

communicate with additional software

and/or systems provided by FORD

MOTOR COMPANY. The additional

software and systems of FORD

MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as

associated media, printed materials,

and "online" or electronic

documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")

are protected by international

intellectual property laws and treaties.

The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not

• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD

SOFTWARE may interface with and/or

communicate with, or may be later

upgraded to interface with and/or

communicate with additional software

and/or systems provided by third party

software and service suppliers. The

additional software and services of

third party origin, as well as associated

media, printed materials, and "online"

or electronic documentation ("THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by

international intellectual property laws

and treaties. The THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All

rights reserved.

• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD

SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively

and individually will be referred to as

"SOFTWARE".

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END

USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")

DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY

THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE

SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT

LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL

CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO

THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY

PREVIOUS CONSENT).

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This

EULA grants you the following license:

• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICE and as

otherwise interfacing with systems

and/or services provide by or through

FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third

party software and service providers.

423

Appendices

Description of Other Rights and

Limitations

•Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speech

recognition component(s), you should

understand that speech recognition is

an inherently statistical process and

that recognition errors are inherent in

the process. Neither FORD MOTOR

COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be

liable for any damages arising out of

errors in the speech recognition

process.

•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,

Decompilation and Disassembly:

You may not reverse engineer,

decompile, or disassemble nor permit

others to reverse engineer, decompile

or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except

and only to the extent that such activity

is expressly permitted by applicable

law notwithstanding this limitation.

•Limitations on Distributing,

Copying, Modifying and Creating

Derivative Works: You may not

distribute, copy, make modifications

to or create derivative works based on

the SOFTWARE, except and only to the

extent that such activity is expressly

permitted by applicable law

notwithstanding this limitation.

•Single EULA: The end user

documentation for the DEVICE and

related systems and services may

contain multiple EULAs, such as

multiple translations and/or multiple

media versions (e.g., in the user

documentation and in the software).

Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you

are licensed to use only one (1) copy of

the SOFTWARE.

•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may

permanently transfer your rights under

this EULA only as part of a sale or

transfer of the DEVICE, provided you

retain no copies, you transfer all of the

SOFTWARE (including all component

parts, the media and printed materials,

any upgrades, and, if applicable, the

Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the

recipient agrees to the terms of this

EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,

any transfer must include all prior

versions of the SOFTWARE.

•Termination: Without prejudice to any

other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY

or MS may terminate this EULA if you

fail to comply with the terms and

conditions of this EULA.

•Security Updates/Digital Rights

Management: Content owners use

the WMDRM technology included in

your DEVICE to protect their

intellectual property, included

copyrighted content. Portions of the

SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use

WMDRM software to access

WMDRM-protected content. If the

WMDRM software fails to protect the

content, content owners may ask

Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's

ability to use WMDRM to play or copy

protected content. This action does

not affect unprotected content. When

your DEVICE downloads licenses for

protected content, you agree that

Microsoft may include a revocation list

with the licenses. Content owners may

require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE

on your DEVICE to access their content.

If you decline an upgrade, you will not

be able to access content that requires

the upgrade.

424

Appendices

•Consent to Use of Data: You agree

that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and systems suppliers, their

affiliates and/or their designated agent

may collect and use technical

information gathered in any manner as

part of product support services related

to the SOFTWARE or related services.

MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and services suppliers, their

affiliates and/or their designated agent

may use this information solely to

improve their products or to provide

customized services or technologies to

you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and systems suppliers, their

affiliates and/or their designated agent

may disclose this information to others,

but not in a form that personally

identifies you.

•Internet-Based Services

Components: The SOFTWARE may

contain components that enable and

facilitate the use of certain

Internet-based services. You

acknowledge and agree that MS,

Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR

COMPANY, third party software and

service suppliers, their affiliates and/or

their designated agent may

automatically check the version of the

SOFTWARE and/or its components

that you are utilizing and may provide

upgrades or supplements to the

SOFTWARE that may be automatically

downloaded to your DEVICE.

•Additional Software/Services: The

SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR

COMPANY, third party software and

service suppliers, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, their affiliates and/or their

designated agent to provide or make

available to you SOFTWARE updates,

supplements, add-on components, or

Internet-based services components

of the SOFTWARE after the date you

obtain your initial copy of the

SOFTWARE ("Supplemental

Components").

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party

software and services suppliers provide or

make available to you Supplemental

Components and no other EULA terms are

provided along with the Supplemental

Components, then the terms of this EULA

shall apply.

If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates

and/or their designated agent make

available Supplemental Components, and

no other EULA terms are provided, then

the terms of this EULA shall apply, except

that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or

affiliate entity providing the Supplemental

Component(s) shall be the licensor of the

Supplemental Component(s).

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, their affiliates and/or their

designated agent reserve the right to

discontinue without liability any

Internet-based services provided to you or

made available to you through the use of

the SOFTWARE.

425

Appendices

•Links to Third Party Sites: The MS

SOFTWARE may provide you with the

ability to link to third party sites through

the use of the SOFTWARE. The third

party sites are not under the control of

MS, Microsoft Corporation, their

affiliates and/or their designated

agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft

Corporation nor their affiliates nor their

designated agent are responsible for

(i) the contents of any third party sites,

any links contained in third party sites,

or any changes or updates to third

party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any

other form of transmission received

from any third party sites. If the

SOFTWARE provides links to third

party sites, those links are provided to

you only as a convenience, and the

inclusion of any link does not imply an

endorsement of the third party site by

MS, Microsoft Corporation, their

affiliates and/or their designated

agent.

•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:

You recognize your obligation to drive

responsibly and keep attention on the

road. You will read and abide with the

DEVICE operating instructions

particularly as they pertain to safety

and assumes any risk associated with

the use of the DEVICE.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD

MOTOR COMPANY separate from the

DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD

ROM disk(s) or via web download or other

means, and is labeled "For Upgrade

Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes

Only" you may install one (1) copy of such

SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a

replacement copy for the existing

SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with

this EULA, including any additional EULA

terms accompanying the upgrade

SOFTWARE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

All title and intellectual property rights in

and to the SOFTWARE (including but not

limited to any images, photographs,

animations, video, audio, music, text and

"applets" incorporated into the

SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed

materials, and any copies of the

SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft

Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or

their affiliates or suppliers. The

SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may

not copy the printed materials

accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title

and intellectual property rights in and to

the content which may be accessed

through use of the SOFTWARE is the

property of the respective content owner

and may be protected by applicable

laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no

rights to use such content. All rights not

specifically granted under this EULA are

reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,

FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party

software and service providers, their

affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line

services which may be accessed through

the SOFTWARE may be governed by the

respective terms of use relating to such

services. If this SOFTWARE contains

documentation that is provided only in

electronic form, you may print one copy of

such electronic documentation.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is

subject to U.S. and European Union export

jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all

applicable international and national laws

that apply to the SOFTWARE, including

the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,

as well as end-user, end-use and

destination restrictions issued by U.S. and

other governments. For additional

information, see

http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

426

Appendices

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant

you any rights in connection with any

trademarks or service marks of FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft

Corporation, third party software or service

providers, their affiliates or suppliers.

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support

for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,

its parent corporation Microsoft

Corporation, or their affiliates or

subsidiaries. For product support, please

refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY

instructions provided in the documentation

for the DEVICE. Should you have any

questions concerning this EULA, or if you

desire to contact FORD MOTOR

COMPANY for any other reason, please

refer to the address provided in the

documentation for the DEVICE.

No Liability for Certain Damages:

EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD

MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,

MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND

THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO

LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS

LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY

REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL

PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,

MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR

THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY

AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO

HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.

$250.00).

• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER

THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY

BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW

VEHICLE.

Adobe

Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or

[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems

Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]

contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]

[Adobe® AIR®] software under license

from Adobe Systems Incorporated,

Macromedia Software LLC. All rights

reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are

trademarks of Adobe Systems

Incorporated.

End User Notice

Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for

Automotive Important Safety

Information

This system Ford SYNC™ contains

software that is licensed to Manufacturer

FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate

of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a

license agreement. Any removal,

reproduction, reverse engineering or other

unauthorized use of the software from this

system in violation of the license

agreement is strictly prohibited and may

subject you to legal action.

Read and follow instructions: Before

using your Windows Automotive- based

system, read and follow all instructions

and safety information provided in this end

user manual ("User's Guide"). Not

following precautions found in this User's

Guide can lead to an accident or other

serious consequences.

Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept

in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a

ready reference for you and other users

unfamiliar with the Windows

Automotive-based system. Please make

certain that before using the system for

the first time, all persons have access to

the User's Guide and read its instructions

and safety information carefully.

427

Appendices

WARNING

Operating certain parts of this

system while driving can distract

your attention away from the road,

and possibly cause an accident or other

serious consequences. Do not change

system settings or enter data non-verbally

(using your hands) while driving. Stop the

vehicle in a safe and legal manner before

attempting these operations. This is

important since while setting up or

changing some functions you might be

required to distract your attention away

from the road and remove your hands from

the wheel.

General Operation

Voice Command Control: Functions

within the Windows Automotive-based

system may be accomplished using only

voice commands. Using voice commands

while driving allows you to operate the

system without removing your hands from

the wheel.

Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not

access any function requiring a prolonged

view of the screen while you are driving.

Pull over in a safe and legal manner before

attempting to access a function of the

system requiring prolonged attention. Even

occasional short scans to the screen may

be hazardous if your attention has been

diverted away from your driving task at a

critical time.

Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume

excessively. Keep the volume at a level

where you can still hear outside traffic and

emergency signals while driving. Driving

while unable to hear these sounds could

cause an accident.

Use of Speech Recognition Functions:

Speech recognition software is inherently

a statistical process which is subject to

errors. It is your responsibility to monitor

any speech recognition functions included

in the system and address any errors.

Navigation Features: Any navigation

features included in the system are

intended to provide turn by turn

instructions to get you to a desired

destination. Please make certain all

persons using this system carefully read

and follow instructions and safety

information fully.

Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

features may require manual (non-verbal)

setup. Attempting to perform such set-up

or insert data while driving can seriously

distract your attention and could cause an

accident or other serious consequences.

Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner

before attempting these operations.

Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any

navigation features are provided only as

an aid. Make your driving decisions based

on your observations of local conditions

and existing traffic regulations. Any such

feature is not a substitute for your personal

judgment. Any route suggestions made by

this system should never replace any local

traffic regulations or your personal

judgment or knowledge of safe driving

practices.

Route Safety: Do not follow the route

suggestions if doing so would result in an

unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be

placed in an unsafe situation, or if you

would be directed into an area that you

consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately

responsible for the safe operation of the

vehicle and therefore, must evaluate

whether it is safe to follow the suggested

directions.

428

Appendices

Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used

by this system may be inaccurate because

of changes in roads, traffic controls or

driving conditions. Always use good

judgment and common sense when

following the suggested routes.

Emergency Services: Do not rely on any

navigation features included in the system

to route you to emergency services. Ask

local authorities or an emergency services

operator for these locations. Not all

emergency services such as police, fire

stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to

be contained in the map database for such

navigation features.

TeleNav Software End User License

Agreement

Please read these terms and conditions

carefully before you use the TeleNav

Software. Your use of the TeleNav

Software indicates that you accept these

terms and conditions. If you do not accept

these terms and conditions, do not break

the seal of the package, launch, or

otherwise use the TeleNav Software.

TeleNav may revise this Agreement and

the privacy policy at any time, with or

without notice to you. You agree to visit

http://www.telenav.com from time to time

to review the then current version of this

Agreement and of the privacy policy.

1. Safe and Lawful Use

You acknowledge that devoting attention

to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk

of injury or death to you and others in

situations that otherwise require your

undivided attention, and you therefore

agree to comply with the following when

using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe

all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;

(b) use your own personal judgment while

driving. If you feel that a route suggested

by the TeleNav Software instructs you to

perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,

places you in an unsafe situation, or directs

you into an area that you consider to be

unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)

do not input destinations, or otherwise

manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless

your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)

do not use the TeleNav Software for any

illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,

hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any

manner inconsistent with this Agreement;

(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices

and cables necessary for use of the

TeleNav Software in a secure manner in

your vehicle so that they will not interfere

with your driving and will not prevent the

operation of any safety device (such as an

airbag).

You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav

harmless against all claims resulting from

any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate

use of the TeleNav Software in any moving

vehicle, including as a result of your failure

to comply with the directions above.

2. Account Information

You agree: (a) when registering the

TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with

true, accurate, current, and complete

information about yourself, and (b) to

inform TeleNav promptly of any changes

to such information, and to keep it true,

accurate, current and complete.

3. Software License

Subject to your compliance with the terms

of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants

to you a personal, non-exclusive,

non-transferable license (except as

expressly permitted below in connection

with your permanent transfer of the

TeleNav Software license), without the

right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav

Software (in object code form only) in

order to access and use the TeleNav

Software. This license shall terminate upon

429

Appendices

any termination or expiration of this

Agreement. You agree that you will use the

TeleNav Software only for your personal

business or leisure purposes, and not to

provide commercial navigation services to

other parties.

3.1 License Limitations

You agree not to do any of the following:

(a) reverse engineer, decompile,

disassemble, translate, modify, alter or

otherwise change the TeleNav Software

or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive

the source code, audio library or structure

of the TeleNav Software without the prior

express written consent of TeleNav; (c)

remove from the TeleNav Software, or

alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers'

trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or

markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or

otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software

to others, except as part of your permanent

transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e)

use the TeleNav Software in any manner

that (i) infringes the intellectual property

or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or

privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)

violates any law, statute, ordinance or

regulation, including but not limited to laws

and regulations related to spamming,

privacy, consumer and child protection,

obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,

threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,

defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or

otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent

out, or otherwise permit unauthorized

access by third parties to the TeleNav

Software without advanced written

permission of TeleNav.

4. Disclaimers

To the fullest extent permissible pursuant

to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav,

its licensors and suppliers, or agents or

employees of any of the foregoing, be

liable for any decision made or action

taken by you or anyone else in reliance on

the information provided by the TeleNav

Software. TeleNav also does not warrant

the accuracy of the map or other data used

for the TeleNav Software. Such data may

not always reflect reality due to, among

other things, road closures, construction,

weather, new roads and other changing

conditions. You are responsible for the

entire risk arising out of your use of the

TeleNav Software. For example but

without limitation, you agree not to rely on

the TeleNav Software for critical

navigation in areas where the well-being

or survival of you or others is dependent

on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps

or functionality of the TeleNav Software

are not intended to support such high risk

applications, especially in more remote

geographical areas.

TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND

EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN

CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV

SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL

WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM

COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR

TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY

RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV

SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not

permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,

so this limitation may not apply to you.

430

Appendices

5. Limitation of Liability

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER

APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO

CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR

ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE

LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY

FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR

EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN

EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE

THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,

LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,

LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING

OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES

THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES

REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT

OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR

OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF

TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S

SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE

AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR

THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME

STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION

OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS

OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO

YOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing Law

You agree that any dispute, claim or

controversy arising out of or relating to this

Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall

be settled by independent arbitration

involving a neutral arbitrator and

administered by the American Arbitration

Association in the County of Santa Clara,

California. The arbitrator shall apply the

Commercial Arbitration Rules of the

American Arbitration Association, and the

judgment upon the award rendered by the

arbitrator may be entered by any court

having jurisdiction. Note that there is no

judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding

and the decision of the arbitrator shall be

binding upon both parties. You expressly

agree to waive your right to a jury trial.

This Agreement and performance

hereunder will be governed by and

construed in accordance with the laws of

the State of California, without giving

effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To

the extent judicial action is necessary in

connection with the binding arbitration,

both TeleNav and you agree to submit to

the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of

the County of Santa Clara, California. The

United Nations Convention on Contracts

for the International Sale of Goods shall

not apply.

7. Assignment

You may not resell, assign, or transfer this

Agreement or any of your rights or

obligations, except in totality, in connection

with your permanent transfer of the

TeleNav Software, and expressly

conditioned upon the new user of the

TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound

by the terms and conditions of this

Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or

transfer that is not expressly permitted

under this paragraph will result in

immediate termination of this Agreement,

without liability to TeleNav, in which case

you and all other parties shall immediately

cease all use of the TeleNav Software.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav

may assign this Agreement to any other

party at any time without notice, provided

the assignee remains bound by this

Agreement.

431

Appendices

8. Miscellaneous

8.1

This Agreement constitutes the entire

agreement between TeleNav and you with

respect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2

Except for the limited licenses expressly

granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains

all right, title and interest in and to the

TeleNav Software, including without

limitation all related intellectual property

rights. No licenses or other rights which are

not expressly granted in this Agreement

are intended to, or shall be, granted or

conferred by implication, statute,

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and

TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors

hereby reserve all of their respective rights

other than the licenses explicitly granted

in this Agreement

8.3

By using the TeleNav Software, you

consent to receive from TeleNav all

communications, including notices,

agreements, legally required disclosures

or other information in connection with the

TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")

electronically. TeleNav may provide such

Notices by posting them on TeleNav's

Website or by downloading such Notices

to your wireless device. If you desire to

withdraw your consent to receive Notices

electronically, you must discontinue your

use of the TeleNav Software.

8.4

TeleNav's or your failure to require

performance of any provision shall not

affect that party's right to require

performance at any time thereafter, nor

shall a waiver of any breach or default of

this Agreement constitute a waiver of any

subsequent breach or default or a waiver

of the provision itself.

8.5

If any provision herein is held

unenforceable, then such provision will be

modified to reflect the intention of the

parties, and the remaining provisions of

this Agreement will remain in full force and

effect

8.6

The headings in this Agreement are for

convenience of reference only, will not be

deemed to be a part of this Agreement,

and will not be referred to in connection

with the construction or interpretation of

this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,

the words "include" and "including" and

variations thereof, will not be deemed to

be terms of limitation, but rather will be

deemed to be followed by the words

"without limitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions

The TeleNav Software utilizes map and

other data licensed to TeleNav by third

party vendors for the benefit of you and

other end users. This Agreement includes

end-user terms applicable to these

companies (included at the end of this

Agreement), and thus your use of the

TeleNav Software is also subject to such

terms. You agree to comply with the

following additional terms and conditions,

which are applicable to TeleNav's third

party vendor licensors:

NavTeq End User License Agreement

END USER TERMS

The content provided ("Data") is licensed,

not sold. By opening this package, or

installing, copying, or otherwise using the

Data, you agree to be bound by the terms

of this agreement. If you do not agree to

the terms of this agreement, you are not

permitted to install, copy, use, resell or

transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the

terms of this agreement, and have not

432

Appendices

installed, copied, or used the Data, you

must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ

North America, LLC ("NT") within thirty

(30) days of purchase for a refund of your

purchase price. To contact NT, please visit

www.navteq.com.

The Data is provided for your personal,

internal use only and may not be resold. It

is protected by copyright, and is subject to

the following terms (this "End User License

Agreement") and conditions which are

agreed to by you, on the one hand, and

NAVTEQ North America, LLC ("NT") and

its licensors (including their licensors and

suppliers) on the other hand.

The Data for areas of Canada includes

information taken with permission from

Corporation, GeoBase®.

NT holds a nonexclusive license from the

United States Postal Service ® to publish

and sell ZIP+4 ® information.

Prices are not established, controlled or

approved by the United States Postal

Service ® The following trademarks and

registrations are owned by the USPS:

United States Postal Service, USPS, and

ZIP+4.

The Data for Mexico includes certain Data

from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y

Geografía.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

License Limitations on Use: You agree

that your license to use this Data is limited

to and conditioned on use for solely

personal, noncommercial purposes, and

not for service bureau, timesharing or other

similar purposes. Except as otherwise set

forth herein, you agree not to otherwise

reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,

disassemble or reverse engineer any

portion of this Data, and may not transfer

or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,

except to the extent permitted by

mandatory laws.

License Limitations on Transfer: Your

limited license does not allow transfer or

resale of the Data, except on the condition

that you may transfer the Data and all

accompanying materials on a permanent

basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the

Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms

of this End User License Agreement; and

form as you purchased it by physically

transferring the original media (e.g., the

CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all

original packaging, all Manuals and other

documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc

sets may only be transferred or sold as a

complete set as provided to you and not

as a subset thereof.

Additional License Limitations: Except

where you have been specifically licensed

to do so by NT in a separate written

agreement, and without limiting the

preceding paragraph, your license is

conditioned on use of the Data as

prescribed in this agreement, and you may

not (a) use this Data with any products,

systems, or applications installed or

otherwise connected to or in

communication with vehicles capable of

vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,

real time route guidance, fleet

management or similar applications; or (b)

with, or in communication with, including

without limitation, cellular phones,

palmtop and handheld computers, pagers,

and personal digital assistants or PDAs.

433

Appendices

WARNING

This Data may contain inaccurate or

incomplete information due to the

passage of time, changing

circumstances, sources used and the

nature of collecting comprehensive

geographic Data, any of which may lead

to incorrect results.

No Warranty: This Data is provided to you

"as is" , and you agree to use it at your own

risk. NT and its licensors (and their

licensors and suppliers) make no

guarantees, representations or warranties

of any kind, express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not limited

to, content, quality, accuracy,

completeness, effectiveness, reliability,

fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,

use or results to be obtained from this

Data, or that the Data or server will be

uninterrupted or error free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR

LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM

ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,

Territories and Countries do not allow

certain warranty exclusions, so to that

extent the above exclusion may not apply

to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR

LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT

BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY

CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,

IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE

CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR

ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR

DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH

MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR

POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY

LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS

OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING

OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS

DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS

OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR

BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NT OR

ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Some States, Territories and Countries do

not allow certain liability exclusions or

damages limitations, so to that extent the

above may not apply to you.

Export Control: You agree not to export

from anywhere any part of the Data or any

direct product thereof except in

compliance with, and with all licenses and

approvals required under, applicable

export laws, rules and regulations,

including but not limited to the laws, rules

and regulations administered by the Office

of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.

Department of Commerce and the Bureau

of Industry and Security of the U.S.

Department of Commerce. To the extent

that any such export laws, rules or

regulations prohibit NT from complying

with any of its obligations hereunder to

deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall

be excused and shall not constitute a

breach of this Agreement.

Entire Agreement: These terms and

conditions constitute the entire agreement

between NT (and its licensors, including

their licensors and suppliers) and you

pertaining to the subject matter hereof,

and supersedes in their entirety any and

all written or oral agreements previously

existing between us with respect to such

subject matter.

434

Appendices

Severability: You and NT agree that if any

portion of this agreement is found illegal

or unenforceable, that portion shall be

severed and the remainder of the

Agreement shall be given full force and

effect.

Governing Law: The above terms and

conditions shall be governed by the laws

of the State of Illinois, without giving effect

to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)

the United Nations Convention for

Contracts for the International Sale of

Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You

agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction

of the State of Illinois for any and all

disputes, claims and actions arising from

or in connection with the Data provided to

you hereunder.

Government End Users: If the Data is

being acquired by or on behalf of the

United States government or any other

entity seeking or applying rights similar to

those customarily claimed by the United

States government, this Data is a

"commercial term" as that term is defined

at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR") 2.101, is licensed in

accordance with this End User License

Agreement, and each copy of Data

delivered or otherwise furnished shall be

marked and embedded as appropriate

with the following "Notice of Use", and be

treated in accordance with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR

(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

NAME:

NAVTEQ

CONTRACTOR

(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL

60606.

This Data is a commercial item as defined

in FAR 2.101

and is subject to the End User License

Agreement under

which this Data was provided.

If the Contracting Officer, federal

government agency, or any federal official

refuses to use the legend provided herein,

the Contracting Officer, federal

government agency, or any federal official

must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking

additional or alternative rights in the Data.

2013 JiWire.

Gracenote® Copyright

CD and music-related data from

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright

service may practice one or more of the

following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,

#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,

#6,330,593 and other patents issued or

pending. Some services supplied under

license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.

Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered

trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote

logo and logotype, and the "Powered by

Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of

Gracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement

(EULA)

This device contains software from

Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street

Emeryville, California 94608

("Gracenote").

435

Appendices

The software from Gracenote (the

"Gracenote Software") enables this device

to do disc and music file identification and

obtain music-related information, including

name, artist, track, and title information

("Gracenote Data") from online servers

("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote

Data only by means of the intended End

User functions of this device.

This device may contain content belonging

to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the

restrictions set forth herein with respect to

Gracenote Data shall also apply to such

content and such content providers shall

be entitled to all of the benefits and

protections set forth herein that are

available to Gracenote.

You agree that you will use the content

from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers for your own

personal, non-commercial use only. You

agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Content,

Gracenote Software or any Gracenote

Data (except in a Tag associated with a

music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE

NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE

CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive licenses

to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your licenses

terminate, you agree to cease any and all

use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,

respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,

including all ownership rights. Under no

circumstances will either Gracenote

become liable for any payment to you for

any information that you provide, including

any copyrighted material or music file

information. You agree that Gracenote

may enforce its respective rights,

collectively or separately, under this

agreement against you, directly in each

company's own name.

Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track

queries for statistical purposes. The

purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow Gracenote to count

queries without knowing anything about

who you are. For more information, see the

web page at www.gracenote.com for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy.

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM

OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE

GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED

TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE

MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY

GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE

GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE

CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY

AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT

TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT

FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE

SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF

GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA

CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT

GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO

WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER

GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE

OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE

UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT

OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY

ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES

THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO

PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE

TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES

AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL

436

Appendices

WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER

GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS

THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE

OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY

GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS

OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON

WHATSOEVER.

FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2

IC: 1422A-SYNCG2

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressively approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate the

equipment. The term "IC" before the radio

certification number only signifies that

Industry Canada technical specifications

were met.

The antenna used for this transmitter must

not be co-located or operating in

conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

437

Appendices

General Maintenance Information

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?

Carefully following the maintenance

schedule helps protect against major repair

expenses resulting from neglect or

inadequate maintenance and may help to

increase the value of your vehicle when

you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for

completed maintenance with your vehicle.

We have established regular maintenance

intervals for your vehicle based upon

rigorous testing. It is important that you

have your vehicle serviced at the proper

times. These intervals serve two purposes;

one is to maintain the reliability of your

vehicle and the second is to keep your cost

of owning your vehicle down.

It is your responsibility to have all

scheduled maintenance performed and to

make sure that the materials used meet

the specifications identified in this owner's

manual. See Capacities and

Specifications (page ?).

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance

invalidates warranty coverage on parts

affected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your

Dealership?

Factory-Trained Technicians

Service technicians participate in extensive

factory-sponsored certification training to

help them become experts on the

operation of your vehicle. Ask your

dealership about the training and

certification their technicians have

received.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts

Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and

Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured

replacement parts. These parts meet or

exceed our specifications. Parts installed

at your dealership carry a nationwide 12

month or 12000 mile (20000 kilometers)

parts and labor limited warranty.

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they

may not meet our specifications and

depending on the part, it could affect

emissions compliance.

Convenience

Many dealerships have extended evening

and Saturday hours to make your service

visit more convenient and they offer one

stop shopping. They can perform any

services that are required on your vehicle,

from general maintenance to collision

repairs.

Note: Not all dealers have extended hours

or body shops. Please contact your dealer

for details.

Protecting Your Investment

Maintenance is an investment that pays

dividends in the form of improved

reliability, durability and resale value. To

maintain the proper performance of your

vehicle and its emission control systems,

make sure you have scheduled

maintenance performed at the designated

intervals.

Fusion Full Hybrid

Your vehicle is equipped with an

information display, which indicates the

proper oil change interval. This interval

may be up to one year or 10000 miles

(16000 kilometers).

438

Scheduled Maintenance

When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL

CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the

information display, it is time for an oil

change. Make sure you perform the oil

change within two weeks or 500 miles

(800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL

CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED

message appearing. Make sure you reset

the oil monitoring system after each oil

change. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).

If your information display resets

prematurely, becomes inoperative or the

vehicle battery becomes discharged or

disconnected, the oil monitoring system

resets to 100% oil life. You should change

your engine oil one year or 10000 miles

(16000 kilometers) from the previous oil

change. Never exceed one year or 10000

miles (16000 kilometers) between oil

change intervals.

Fusion Energi Plug-in Hybrid

Your vehicle is equipped with the

Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® system, which

displays a message in the information

display at the proper oil change interval.

This interval may be up to two years or

20000 miles (32000 kilometers).

When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL

CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the

information display, it is time for an oil

change. Make sure you perform the oil

change within two weeks or 500 miles

(800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL

CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED

message appearing. Make sure you reset

the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® after each

oil change. See Engine Oil Check (page

237).

If your information display resets

prematurely or becomes inoperative, you

should perform the oil change interval at

six months or 5000 miles (8000

kilometers) from your last oil change.

Never exceed two years or 20000 miles

(32000 kilometers) between oil change

intervals.

All Vehicles

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built

with multiple, complex, performance

systems. Every manufacturer develops

these systems using different

specifications and performance features.

That is why it is important to rely upon your

dealership to properly diagnose and repair

your vehicle.

Ford Motor Company has recommended

maintenance intervals for various parts

and component systems based upon

engineering testing. Ford Motor Company

relies upon this testing to determine the

most appropriate mileage for replacement

of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at

the lowest overall cost to you and

recommends against maintenance

schedules that deviate from the scheduled

maintenance information.

We strongly recommend the use of only

genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or

Ford-authorized re-manufactured

replacement parts engineered for your

vehicle.

Additives and Chemicals

This owner's manual and the Ford

Workshop Manual list the recommended

additives and chemicals for your vehicle.

We do not recommend using chemicals or

additives not approved by us as part of

your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please

consult your warranty information.

439

Scheduled Maintenance

Oils, Fluids and Flushing

In many cases, fluid discoloration is a

normal operating characteristic and, by

itself, does not necessarily indicate a

concern or that the fluid needs to be

changed. However, a qualified expert, such

as the factory-trained technicians at your

dealership, should inspect discolored fluids

that also show signs of overheating or

foreign material contamination

immediately.

Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and

fluids at the specified intervals or in

conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a

viable way to change fluid for many vehicle

sub-systems during scheduled

maintenance. It is critical that systems are

flushed only with new fluid that is the same

as that required to fill and operate the

system or using a Ford-approved flushing

chemical.

Owner Checks and Services

Make sure you perform the following basic

maintenance checks and inspections every

month or at six month intervals.

Check every month

Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.

Windshield washer fluid level.

Check every six months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.

Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.

Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.

Parking brake for proper operation.

Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.

Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

440

Scheduled Maintenance

Check Every 12 Months (Fusion Energi

Only)

Inspect the engine oil filter for signs of

damage such as rust, paint blistering,

scratches or dents. If any of these

conditions are present, replace the filter.

Refer to the Fusion Energi section under

Normal Scheduled Maintenance and

Log for more information.

Multi-point Inspection

In order to keep your vehicle running right,

it is important to have the systems on your

vehicle checked regularly. This can help

identify potential issues and prevent major

problems. We recommend having the

following multi-point inspection performed

at every scheduled maintenance interval

to help make sure your vehicle keeps

running great.

Multi-point Inspection

Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesEngine air filter

Suspension components for leaks or

damage

Exhaust system

Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation

Tires for wear and proper pressure**

Fluid levels*; fill if necessary

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks

Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots

* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration

Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.

Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point

vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive

way to perform a thorough inspection of

your vehicle. Your checklist gives you

immediate feedback on the overall

condition of your vehicle.

Normal Scheduled Maintenance

441

Scheduled Maintenance

Fusion Full Hybrid

Normal Scheduled Maintenance1, 2

Change engine oil and filter.3

Every 12 months or 10000

miles (16000 km). The oil

monitoring system displays

a message in the informa-

tion display.

Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.

Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer

for requirements.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings,

hoses and parking brake.

Inspect cabin air filter.

Inspect engine cooling system and motor/electronics

cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect half-shaft boots.

Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and tie-

rod ends.

Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal

noise, wear, looseness or drag.

1 Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.

2 Perform multi-point inspection (recommended).

3 Reset the oil monitoring system after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil

Check (page 237).

Other Maintenance Items*

Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000

km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000

km)

Change engine coolant and motor/electronics coolant.**

At 100000 miles (160000

km)

442

Scheduled Maintenance

Other Maintenance Items*

Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles

(160000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 150000 miles

(240000 km)

* Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last

engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.

** Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three

years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).

Fusion Energi Plug-in Hybrid

At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display.1, 2

Change engine oil and filter.3

Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.

Inspect cabin air filter.

Inspect engine cooling system and motor/electronics cooling system strength and

hoses.

Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect half-shaft boots.

Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and tie-rod ends.

Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.

1 Do not exceed two years or 20000 miles (32000 kilometers) between service intervals.

2 Perform multi-point inspection (recommended).

3 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system after engine oil and filter changes. See

Engine Oil Check (page 237).

443

Scheduled Maintenance

Other Maintenance Items 1

Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.

Every 10000 miles (16000

km) Inspect engine oil filter for corrosion. 2

Perform multi-point inspection (recommended).

Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000

km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000

km)

Change engine coolant and motor/electronics coolant. 3

At 100000 miles (160000

km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles

(160000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 150000 miles

(240000 km)

1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last

engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.

2 Inspect the engine oil filter for corrosion every one year or 10000 miles (16000

kilometers). If corrosion is present, change the filter then top-off the engine oil, if required.

Do not reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.

3 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three

years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).

444

Scheduled Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

445

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

446

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

447

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

448

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

Special Operating Conditions

If you operate your vehicle primarily in any

of the following conditions, you need to

perform extra maintenance as indicated.

If you operate your vehicle occasionally

under any of these conditions, it is not

necessary to perform the extra

maintenance. For specific

recommendations, see your dealership

service advisor or technician.

Perform the services shown in the

following tables when specified or within

3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL

CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing

in the information display.

•Example 1: The OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED message comes on at 28751

miles (46270 kilometers). Perform the

30000 mile (48000 kilometer)

automatic transmission fluid

replacement.

•Example 2: The OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED message has not come on,

but the odometer reads 30000 miles

(48000 kilometers) (for example, the

Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® was reset

at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers]).

Perform the engine air filter

replacement.

449

Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use

(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)

Fusion full hybrid: Change engine oil and filter every 12

months or 10000 miles (16000 km). The oil monitoring

system displays a message in the information display.

Perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Mainten-

ance chart.

As required

Fusion Energi plug-in hybrid: Change engine oil and

filter as indicated by information display and perform

services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance

chart.*

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service

as required Replace engine air filter.

Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000

km)

*Fusion Energi only: Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter

changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).

Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service

as required Replace engine air filter.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal

noise, wear, looseness or drag.

Every 5000 miles (8000

km)

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread

depth.

Change engine oil and filter.*

Every 5000 miles (8000

km) or six months

Perform multi-point inspection.

*Fusion Energi only: Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter

changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).

450

Scheduled Maintenance

Special Operating Condition Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

451

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

452

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

Exceptions

There are some exceptions your Normal

Scheduled Maintenance:

California fuel filter replacement: If you

California, the California Air Resources

Board has determined that the failure to

perform this maintenance item does not

nullify the emission warranty or limit recall

liability before the completion of your

vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company,

however, urges you to have all

recommended maintenance services

performed at the specified intervals and

to record all vehicle service.

Hot climate oil change intervals:

Vehicles operating in the Middle East,

North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or

locations with similar climates using an

American Petroleum Institute (API)

Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification

mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal

oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000

kilometers).

If the available API SM or SN oils are not

available, then the oil change interval is

3000 miles (4800 kilometers).

Engine air filter and cabin air filter

replacement: The life of the engine air

filter and cabin air filter is dependent on

exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.

Vehicles operated in these conditions

require frequent inspection and

replacement of the engine air filter and

cabin air filter.

Engine Coolant and

Motor/Electronics Coolant Change

Record

Initial change: Six years or 100000 miles

(160000 kilometers) (whichever comes

first).

After initial change: Every three years or

50000 miles (80000 kilometers).

453

Scheduled Maintenance

Engine Coolant and Motor/Electronics Coolant Change Log

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

454

Scheduled Maintenance

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):

Signature:

Dealer stamp

455

Scheduled Maintenance

456

About This Manual...........................................7

Protecting the Environment................................7

Accessories....................................................292

Exterior style........................................................292

Interior style.........................................................292

Lifestyle.................................................................292

Peace of mind.....................................................292

Active Park Assist..........................................174

Automatic Steering into Parking

Space..................................................................175

Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........176

Troubleshooting the System..........................176

Using Active Park Assist...................................174

Adjusting the Headlamps........................246

Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................247

Vertical Aim Adjustment................................246

Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................62

Airbag Disposal................................................41

Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................61

Arming the Alarm..................................................61

Disarming the Alarm............................................61

Appendices....................................................423

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83

Headlamps On Warning Chime......................83

Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................83

Keyless Warning Alert.........................................83

Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................83

Audio Control...................................................62

MEDIA.......................................................................62

Seek, Next or Previous........................................62

Audio System................................................297

General Information..........................................297

Audio unit - Vehicles With:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC/Satellite

Radio.............................................................298

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium

AM/FM/CD.................................................300

Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony

AM/FM/CD..................................................302

Menu Structure..................................................303

Autolamps........................................................67

Automatic Climate Control......................109

Automatic High Beam Control.................69

Activating the System........................................69

Manually Overriding the System....................70

Automatic Transmission............................162

Automatic Transmission..................................162

Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................163

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow..................................................................164

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check.............................................................242

Autowipers.......................................................65

Auxiliary Input Jack.....................................308

Auxiliary Power Points................................129

110 Volt AC Power Point...................................129

12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................129

Locations...............................................................129

Blind Spot Monitor.......................................192

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®)

with Cross Traffic Alert................................192

Booster Seats...................................................16

Types of Booster Seats.......................................16

Brake Fluid Check........................................242

Brakes...............................................................166

General Information..........................................166

Breaking-In....................................................209

Bulb Specification Chart............................251

Cabin Air Filter.................................................115

California Proposition 65..............................11

Capacities and Specifications...............286

Technical Specifications................................290

Center Console...............................................131

Changing a Bulb...........................................248

Lamp Assembly Condensation....................248

Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb..................250

Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs...................249

Replacing the License Plate Lamp

Bulb.....................................................................251

Replacing the Tail, Brake, High-Mount

Brake Lamp, and Turn Signal Lamp

Bulbs.................................................................250

Changing a Fuse...........................................224

Fuses.......................................................................224

Changing the 12V Battery.........................243

Changing the Engine Air Filter.................245

..................................................................................245

457

Index

Changing the Wiper Blades.....................245

Charging the High Voltage Battery.........157

CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY

(ENERGI VEHICLES).....................................157

Checking MyKey System Status..............50

Checking the Wiper Blades.....................244

Child Restraint and Safety Belt

Maintenance..................................................31

Child Safety.......................................................13

General Information.............................................13

Child Safety Locks..........................................23

Left-Hand Side......................................................24

Right-Hand Side...................................................24

Child Seat Positioning...................................14

Cleaning Leather Seats..............................257

Cleaning Products.......................................253

Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................257

Cleaning the Engine....................................255

Cleaning the Exterior..................................253

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts.....................254

Exterior Chrome..................................................253

Underbody...........................................................254

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens........................256

Cleaning the Interior...................................255

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades...........................................................255

Clearing All MyKeys.......................................49

Climate..............................................................411

Climate Control Voice Commands..............412

Climate Control............................................109

Collision, Damage or Fire Event..............222

Guidance for Ford Motor Company Electric

and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles Equipped

With High Voltage Batteries......................222

Collision Warning System..........................197

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................197

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......40

Creating a MyKey...........................................49

Programming/Changing Optional

Settings...............................................................49

Cruise Control..................................................63

Principle of Operation........................................181

Type 1........................................................................63

Type 2.......................................................................63

Customer Assistance..................................212

Data Recording..................................................9

Event Data Recording...........................................9

Service Data Recording........................................9

Daytime Running Lamps............................68

Direction Indicators.......................................70

Driver Alert......................................................188

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................188

USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................188

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................34

Children and Airbags...........................................35

Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment........................................................35

Driving Aids.....................................................188

Driving Hints..................................................209

Driving Through Water..............................209

Economical Driving.....................................209

Electric Parking Brake..................................167

Applying the electric parking brake..............167

Applying the electric parking brake when

the vehicle is moving....................................168

Battery With No Charge...................................169

Releasing the electric parking brake...........168

Electric Vehicle Information.....................391

Power.....................................................................398

Settings (Energi Only).....................................392

Emission Control System..........................153

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................154

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) Testing...................................................154

End User License Agreement..................423

SYNC® End User License Agreement

(EULA)..............................................................423

Engine Block Heater....................................136

Using the Engine Block Heater.......................137

458

Index

Engine Coolant Check...............................238

Adding Coolant...................................................239

Adding Engine Coolant...................................240

Adding Inverter System Controller

Coolant.............................................................240

Checking the Engine Coolant........................238

Checking the Inverter System Controller

Coolant.............................................................239

Engine Coolant and Inverter System

Controller Coolant........................................238

Recycled Engine Coolant...............................240

Severe Climates..................................................241

What You Should Know About Fail-Safe

Cooling...............................................................241

Engine Oil Check...........................................237

Adding Engine Oil...............................................237

Oil Maintenance Mode....................................238

Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring

System...............................................................237

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Hybrid............237

Engine Specifications................................286

Entertainment..............................................368

A/V Inputs............................................................384

AM/FM Radio......................................................370

Bluetooth Audio.................................................383

Browsing Device Content...............................368

CD............................................................................379

SD Card Slot and USB Port...........................380

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)........................................................375

Supported Media Players, Formats and

Metadata Information................................383

Export Unique Options..................................12

Exterior Mirrors.................................................73

Auto-Dimming Feature......................................73

Blind Spot Monitor...............................................74

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors................................73

Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................73

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...........................74

Memory Mirrors.....................................................73

Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................73

Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................74

Fastening the Safety Belts..........................26

Restraint of Pregnant Women........................26

Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................28

Safety Belt Locking Modes................................27

Floor Mats.......................................................210

Ford Credit..........................................................11

(U.S. Only).................................................................11

Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP).......294

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............296

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).........................294

Front Fog Lamps............................................70

Front Passenger Sensing System............36

Fuel and Refueling.......................................144

Fuel Consumption........................................152

Calculating Fuel Economy...............................152

Filling the Tank.....................................................152

Fuel Filter........................................................242

Fuel Quality.....................................................145

Choosing the Right Fuel...................................145

Fuel Freshness Mode (Energi Vehicles

Only)...................................................................145

Octane Recommendations............................145

Fuel Shutoff....................................................219

Fuses................................................................224

Fuse Specification Chart...........................224

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........231

Power Distribution Box....................................224

Gauges................................................................77

Common Displays.................................................77

Left Information Display.....................................77

General Information on Radio

Frequencies...................................................42

Intelligent Access.................................................42

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada..........................................................215

Getting the Services You Need................212

Away From Home...............................................212

Global Opening and Closing......................73

Closing the Windows..........................................73

Opening the Windows........................................73

459

Index

Hazard Warning Flashers..........................219

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................68

Head Restraints..............................................117

Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................118

Tilting Head Restraints .....................................118

Heated Seats..................................................123

Heated Windows and Mirrors...................115

Heated Exterior Mirror........................................115

Heated Rear Window.........................................115

High Voltage Battery Cut-Off

Switch............................................................160

High Voltage Battery...................................156

General Information..........................................156

Hill Start Assist..............................................164

Using Hill Start Assist.......................................164

Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate...........................................................114

Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................115

General Hints.........................................................114

Heating the Interior Quickly.............................114

Recommended Settings for Cooling ...........115

Recommended Settings for Heating...........114

Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather..............................................................115

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes.............................................................167

Hybrid Electric Vehicle................................138

Hybrid Vehicle Operation (Fusion Hybrid

and Fusion Energi)........................................139

Plug-in Power Mode and Hybrid Mode

(Fusion Energi Only).....................................138

Ignition Switch...............................................132

In California (U.S. Only)..............................213

Information Display Control.......................63

Cluster Display Control Features...................64

Information Displays....................................84

General Information...........................................84

Information....................................................402

911 Assist..............................................................408

Alerts.....................................................................408

Calendar...............................................................408

SIRIUS Travel Link.............................................405

SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.

Only).................................................................402

Vehicle Health Report......................................410

Information Messages.................................96

Active Park..............................................................97

Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................97

AdvanceTrac™......................................................97

Airbag.......................................................................98

Alarm........................................................................98

Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................98

Battery and Charging System (12

volt)......................................................................99

Battery and Charging System (High

Voltage)..............................................................99

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic

Alert System...................................................100

Collision Warning System...............................100

Doors and Locks..................................................101

Driver Alert.............................................................101

Fuel...........................................................................101

Hill Start Assist....................................................102

Keys and Intelligent Access............................102

Lane Keeping System.......................................103

Maintenance........................................................103

MyKey.....................................................................104

Park Aid..................................................................105

Park Brake.............................................................105

Power Steering....................................................106

Remote Start.......................................................106

Starting System ..................................................107

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................107

Traction Control...................................................107

Transmission........................................................108

Installing Child Seats.....................................18

Child Seats...............................................................18

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................18

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH).............................................21

Using Tether Straps.............................................22

Instrument Cluster.........................................77

Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................68

Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps.....................68

Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps..............68

460

Index

Interior Lamps.................................................70

Front Interior Lamp..............................................70

Rear Interior Lamp.................................................71

Interior Luggage Compartment

Release...........................................................58

Interior Mirror....................................................74

Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................75

Introduction.........................................................7

Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................219

Connecting the Jumper Cables....................220

Jump Starting.......................................................221

Preparing Your Vehicle......................................219

Removing the Jumper Cables........................221

Keyless Entry....................................................55

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY

KEYPAD...............................................................55

Keyless Starting.............................................132

Ignition Modes.....................................................133

Keys and Remote Controls.........................42

Knee Airbag......................................................35

Lane Keeping System.................................189

Switching the System On and Off...............189

Lighting Control...............................................67

Headlamp Flasher................................................67

High Beams............................................................67

Lighting...............................................................67

Load Carrying...............................................200

Load Limit......................................................200

Vehicle Loading - with and without a

Trailer................................................................200

Locking and Unlocking.................................52

Activating Intelligent Access ...........................53

Autolock Feature .................................................54

Auto Relock............................................................54

Battery Saver.........................................................55

Illuminated Entry..................................................54

Illuminated Exit.....................................................55

Luggage Compartment.....................................55

Power Door Locks................................................52

Remote Control.....................................................52

Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead

Transmitter........................................................53

Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys

................................................................................53

Locks...................................................................52

Maintenance..................................................234

General Information.........................................234

Manual Seats..................................................119

Media Hub.....................................................309

Memory Function.........................................120

Easy Entry and Exit Function...........................121

Linking a Pre-Set Position to your Remote

Control or Intelligent Access Key..............121

Saving a Pre-Set Position.................................121

Mobile Communications Equipment.......12

Moonroof...........................................................75

Bounce-Back..........................................................76

Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............76

Venting the Moonroof.........................................76

Motorcraft Parts...........................................287

MyFord Touch™...........................................348

General Information.........................................348

MyKey Troubleshooting...............................50

MyKey™............................................................48

Principle of Operation........................................48

461

Index

Navigation.......................................................414

cityseekr.................................................................416

Map Mode.............................................................418

Navigation Map Updates.................................421

Navigation Voice Commands........................421

Point of Interest (POI) Categories...............415

Quick-touch Buttons.......................................420

Setting a Destination........................................414

Setting Your Navigation Preferences...........417

Opening and Closing the Hood..............234

Ordering Additional Owner's

Literature.......................................................216

Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........216

Overhead Console.........................................131

Parking Aid.......................................................172

Front Sensing System.......................................173

Rear Sensing System.........................................172

Parking Aids.....................................................172

Passive Anti-Theft System.........................59

SecuriLock®...........................................................59

Perchlorate.........................................................11

Personal Safety System™..........................32

How Does the Personal Safety System

Work?...................................................................32

Phone...............................................................385

Making Calls.........................................................387

Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................387

Pairing Your Phone for the First

Time..................................................................386

Phone Menu Options.......................................387

Phone Settings...................................................389

Phone Voice Commands...............................390

Receiving Calls....................................................387

Text Messaging..................................................388

Power Seats....................................................119

Power Lumbar.....................................................120

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................242

Power Windows..............................................72

Accessory Delay....................................................72

Bounce-Back..........................................................72

One-Touch Down.................................................72

One-Touch Up.......................................................72

Window Lock..........................................................72

Rear Seat Armrest........................................124

Rear Seats........................................................122

Rear View Camera........................................177

Using the Rear View Camera System.........178

Refueling..........................................................145

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System

(Non-Energi Vehicles).................................146

Easy Fuel™ Capless System (Energi

Vehicles Only).................................................147

Remote Control..............................................42

Car Finder................................................................46

Integrated Keyhead Transmitters ..................42

Intelligent Access Key.........................................43

Remote Start ........................................................46

Replacing the Battery.........................................44

Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................46

Using the Key Blade............................................43

Remote Start..................................................116

Automatic Settings.............................................116

Heated and Cooled Devices............................116

Last Settings.........................................................116

Removing a Headlamp..............................247

Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............254

Replacement Parts

Recommendation.........................................11

Collision Repairs.....................................................11

Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs...................................................................11

Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control.............................................................47

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada

Only)................................................................217

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Only)...............................................................216

462

Index

Roadside Assistance...................................218

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting Roadside

Assistance........................................................218

Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using Roadside

Assistance........................................................218

Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting Roadside

Assistance........................................................218

Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using Roadside

Assistance........................................................218

Roadside Emergencies...............................218

Running Out of Fuel....................................149

Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container

(Energi Vehicles Only)..................................151

Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container

(Except Energi Vehicles).............................149

Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................28

Safety Belt Minder.........................................29

Belt-Minder®.........................................................29

Safety Belts......................................................25

Principle of Operation.........................................25

Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime..............................................................29

Conditions of operation.....................................29

Safety Precautions......................................144

Satellite Radio..............................................305

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number

(ESN)................................................................306

Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............306

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.................306

Troubleshooting.................................................307

Scheduled Maintenance..........................438

Engine Coolant and Motor/Electronics

Coolant Change Record.............................453

Exceptions............................................................453

General Maintenance Information.............438

Normal Scheduled Maintenance.................441

Special Operating Conditions......................449

Seats...................................................................117

Security..............................................................59

Settings...........................................................358

Clock.......................................................................358

Display...................................................................359

Settings..................................................................361

Sound.....................................................................359

Vehicle...................................................................360

Side Airbags.....................................................38

Side Curtain Airbags.....................................39

Sitting in the Correct Position....................117

Special Notices................................................12

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12

Special Instructions..............................................12

Stability Control..............................................171

Principle of Operation........................................171

Starting a Gasoline Engine........................133

Automatic Shutdown.......................................134

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................136

Important Ventilating Information...............136

Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is

Moving................................................................135

Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is

Stationary.........................................................135

Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................133

Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................133

Starting and Stopping the Engine..........132

General Information...........................................132

Steering............................................................196

Electric Power Steering....................................196

Steering Wheel...............................................62

Storage Compartments..............................131

Sun Visors..........................................................75

Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................75

Supplementary Restraints System.........33

Principle of Operation.........................................33

Symbols Glossary.............................................7

SYNC™ Applications and Services.......327

911 Assist................................................................327

SYNC AppLink.....................................................333

SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &

Information (TDI).........................................330

Vehicle Health Report......................................329

SYNC™............................................................310

General Information..........................................310

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................342

463

Index

Temporary Mobility Kit..............................260

First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing

Compound and Air.......................................262

General Information.........................................260

Second Stage: Checking Tire

Pressure............................................................263

Tips for Use of the Kit.......................................261

What to do after the Tire has been

Sealed...............................................................264

What to do when a Tire Is Punctured.........261

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only)........................214

Tire Care..........................................................266

Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................267

Information About Uniform Tire Quality

Grading.............................................................266

Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall...........................................................268

Temperature A B C............................................266

Traction AA A B C..............................................266

Treadwear............................................................266

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........280

Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System........................................281

Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System .......................................281

Towing a Trailer.............................................207

Towing the Vehicle on Four

Wheels..........................................................207

Emergency Towing............................................207

Recreational Towing.........................................207

Towing..............................................................207

Traction Control............................................170

Principle of Operation.......................................170

Transmission Code Designation............289

Transmission..................................................162

Transporting the Vehicle...........................207

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L

Hybrid............................................................235

Unique Driving Characteristics................138

Universal Garage Door Opener................125

HomeLink Wireless Control System............125

USB Port.........................................................309

Using Adaptive Cruise Control................182

Blocked Sensor...................................................186

Changing the Set Speed..................................185

Detection Issues.................................................185

Disengaging the System..................................184

ECO Cruise Control.............................................187

Following a Vehicle............................................183

Hilly Condition Usage........................................185

Low Speed Automatic Cancellation...........185

Overriding the System......................................184

Resuming the Set Speed.................................185

Setting a Speed...................................................182

Setting the Gap Distance................................183

Switching the System Off...............................185

Switching the System On................................182

Switching to Normal Cruise Control............187

System Not Available.......................................186

Using Cruise Control.....................................181

ECO Cruise Control............................................182

Switching Cruise Control Off..........................181

Switching Cruise Control On...........................181

Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems..........................................................50

Using Snow Chains.....................................284

Using Stability Control.................................171

AdvanceTrac® ......................................................171

Using SYNC™ With Your Media

Player............................................................334

Accessing Your Play Menu.............................338

Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the

USB Port...........................................................334

Media Menu Features......................................336

Media Voice Commands.................................334

System Settings................................................340

What's Playing?.................................................334

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............314

Accessing Features through the Phone

Menu...................................................................319

Accessing Your Phone Settings....................322

Making Calls..........................................................317

Pairing a Phone for the First Time................315

Pairing Subsequent Phones...........................315

Phone Options during an Active Call..........318

Phone Voice Commands.................................315

Receiving Calls.....................................................318

System Settings.................................................324

Text Messaging...................................................320

464

Index

Using Traction Control................................170

System Indicator Lights and

Messages..........................................................170

Using Voice Recognition.............................312

Initiating a Voice Session.................................312

System Interaction and Feedback...............313

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only).........................214

Vehicle Care...................................................253

General Information.........................................253

Vehicle Certification Label.......................288

Vehicle Identification Number...............288

Vehicle Storage............................................258

Battery...................................................................258

Body........................................................................258

Brakes....................................................................259

Cooling system...................................................258

Engine....................................................................258

Fuel system..........................................................258

General..................................................................258

Miscellaneous.....................................................259

Removing Vehicle From Storage.................259

Tires........................................................................259

Ventilated Seats............................................123

Heated and ventilated seat air filter

replacement (if equipped).........................123

Voice Control...................................................63

Warning Lamps and Indicators................80

Adaptive Cruise Control....................................80

Anti-Lock Braking System................................80

Battery.....................................................................80

Blind Spot Monitor..............................................80

Brake System........................................................80

Cruise Control.......................................................80

Direction Indicator................................................81

Door Ajar...................................................................81

Electric Park Brake................................................81

Engine/Motor Coolant Temperature.............81

Engine Oil.................................................................81

EV Later....................................................................81

EV Now.....................................................................81

Fasten Safety Belt................................................81

Front Airbag.............................................................81

Front Fog Lamps...................................................81

Grade Assist............................................................81

Heads Up Display..................................................81

High Beam..............................................................82

Hood Ajar................................................................82

Lane Keeping Aid.................................................82

Low Fuel Level.......................................................82

Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................82

Parking Lamps......................................................82

Powertrain Fault...................................................82

Ready to Drive.......................................................82

Service Engine Soon...........................................82

Stability Control....................................................83

Stability Control Off............................................83

Stop Safely.............................................................83

Trunk Ajar................................................................83

Vehicle Plugged in................................................83

Washer Fluid Check....................................243

Waxing.............................................................254

Wheels and Tires.........................................260

Technical Specifications.................................285

Windows and Mirrors....................................72

Windshield Washers.....................................66

Windshield Wipers........................................65

Intermittent Wipe................................................65

Speed Dependent Wipers................................65

Wipers and Washers.....................................65

465

Index

466

Ford 2013 Fusion Hybrid Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation